diff --git a/contrib/bind9/CHANGES b/contrib/bind9/CHANGES
index 1673ae0c476..941b946db36 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/CHANGES
+++ b/contrib/bind9/CHANGES
@@ -1,4 +1,261 @@
+ --- 9.3.2 released ---
+
+ --- 9.3.2rc1 released ---
+
+1936. [bug] The validator could leak memory. [RT #15544]
+
+1932. [bug] hpux: LDFLAGS was getting corrupted. [RT #15530]
+
+ --- 9.3.2b2 released ---
+
+1930. [port] HPUX: ia64 support. [RT #15473]
+
+1929. [port] FreeBSD: extend use of PTHREAD_SCOPE_SYSTEM.
+
+1926. [bug] The Windows installer did not check for empty
+ passwords. BINDinstall was being installed in
+ the wrong place. [RT #15483]
+
+1925. [port] All outer level AC_TRY_RUNs need cross compiling
+ defaults. [RT #15469]
+
+1924. [port] libbind: hpux ia64 support. [RT #15473]
+
+1923. [bug] ns_client_detach() called too early. [RT #15499]
+
+ --- 9.3.2b1 released ---
+
+1917. [doc] funcsynopsisinfo wasn't being treated as verbatim
+ when generating man pages. [RT #15385]
+
+1915. [bug] dig +ndots was broken. [RT #15215]
+
+1914. [protocol] DS is required to accept mnemonic algorithms
+ (RFC 4034). Still emit numeric algorithms for
+ compatability with RFC 3658. [RT #15354]
+
+1911. [bug] Update windows socket code. [RT #14965]
+
+1910. [bug] dig's +sigchase code overhauled. [RT #14933]
+
+1909. [bug] The DLV code has been re-worked to make no longer
+ query order sensitive. [RT #14933]
+
+1905. [bug] Strings returned from cfg_obj_asstring() should be
+ treated as read-only. [RT #15256]
+
+1901. [cleanup] Don't add DNSKEY records to the additional section.
+
+1900. [bug] ixfr-from-differences failed to ensure that the
+ serial number increased. [RT #15036]
+
+1896. [bug] Extend ISC_SOCKADDR_FORMATSIZE and
+ ISC_NETADDR_FORMATSIZE to allow for scope details.
+
+1894. [bug] Recursive clients soft quota support wasn't working
+ as expected. [RT #15103]
+
+1893. [bug] A escaped character is, potentially, converted to
+ the output character set too early. [RT #14666]
+
+1892. [port] Use uintptr_t if available. [RT #14606]
+
+1889. [port] sunos: non blocking i/o support. [RT #14951]
+
+1887. [bug] The cache could delete expired records too fast for
+ clients with a virtual time in the past. [RT #14991]
+
+1886. [bug] fctx_create() could return success even though it
+ failed. [RT #14993]
+
+1884. [cleanup] dighost.c: move external declarations into .
+
+1883. [bug] dnssec-signzone, dnssec-keygen: handle negative debug
+ levels. [RT #14962]
+
+1881. [func] Add a system test for named-checkconf. [RT #14931]
+
+1877. [bug] Fix unreasonably low quantum on call to
+ dns_rbt_destroy2(). Remove unnecessay unhash_node()
+ call. [RT #14919]
+
+1875. [bug] process_dhtkey() was using the wrong memory context
+ to free some memory. [RT #14890]
+
+1874. [port] sunos: portability fixes. [RT #14814]
+
+1873. [port] win32: isc__errno2result() now reports its caller.
+ [RT #13753]
+
+1872. [port] win32: Handle ERROR_NETNAME_DELETED. [RT #13753]
+
+1867. [bug] It was possible to trigger a INSIST in
+ dlv_validatezonekey(). [RT #14846]
+
+1866. [bug] resolv.conf parse errors were being ignored by
+ dig/host/nslookup. [RT #14841]
+
+1865. [bug] Silently ignore nameservers in /etc/resolv.conf with
+ bad addresses. [RT #14841]
+
+1864. [bug] Don't try the alternative transfer source if you
+ got a answer / transfer with the main source
+ address. [RT #14802]
+
+1863. [bug] rrset-order "fixed" error messages not complete.
+
+1861. [bug] dig could trigger a INSIST on certain malformed
+ responses. [RT #14801]
+
+1860. [port] solaris 2.8: hack_shutup_pthreadmutexinit was
+ incorrectly set. [RT #14775]
+
+1858. [bug] The flush-zones-on-shutdown option wasn't being
+ parsed. [RT #14686]
+
+1857. [bug] named could trigger a INSIST() if reconfigured /
+ reloaded too fast. [RT #14673]
+
+1856. [doc] Switch Docbook toolchain from DSSSL to XSL.
+ [RT #11398]
+
+1855. [bug] ixfr-from-differences was failing to detect changes
+ of ttl due to dns_diff_subtract() was ignoring the ttl
+ of records. [RT #14616]
+
+1854. [bug] lwres also needs to know the print format for
+ (long long). [RT #13754]
+
+1853. [bug] Rework how DLV interacts with proveunsecure().
+ [RT #13605]
+
+1852. [cleanup] Remove last vestiges of dnssec-signkey and
+ dnssec-makekeyset (removed from Makefile years ago).
+
+1850. [bug] Memory leak in lwres_getipnodebyaddr(). [RT #14591]
+
+1849. [doc] All forms of the man pages (docbook, man, html) should
+ have consistant copyright dates.
+
+1848. [bug] Improve SMF integration. [RT #13238]
+
+1847. [bug] isc_ondestroy_init() is called too late in
+ dns_rbtdb_create()/dns_rbtdb64_create().
+ [RT #13661]
+
+1846. [contrib] query-loc-0.3.0 from Stephane Bortzmeyer
+ .
+
+1845. [bug] Improve error reporting to distingish between
+ accept()/fcntl() and socket()/fcntl() errors.
+ [RT #13745]
+
+1844. [bug] inet_pton() accepted more that 4 hexadecimal digits
+ for each 16 bit piece of the IPv6 address. The text
+ representation of a IPv6 address has been tighted
+ to disallow this (draft-ietf-ipv6-addr-arch-v4-02.txt).
+ [RT #5662]
+
+1843. [cleanup] CINCLUDES takes precedence over CFLAGS. This helps
+ when CFLAGS contains "-I /usr/local/include"
+ resulting in old header files being used.
+
+1842. [port] cmsg_len() could produce incorrect results on
+ some platform. [RT #13744]
+
+1841. [bug] "dig +nssearch" now makes a recursive query to
+ find the list of nameservers to query. [RT #13694]
+
+1839. [bug] was not being installed.
+
+1838. [cleanup] Don't allow Linux capabilities to be inherited.
+ [RT #13707]
+
+1837. [bug] Compile time option ISC_FACILITY was not effective
+ for 'named -u '. [RT #13714]
+
+1836. [cleanup] Silence compiler warnings in hash_test.c.
+
+1835. [bug] Update dnssec-signzone's usage message. [RT #13657]
+
+1834. [bug] Bad memset in rdata_test.c. [RT #13658]
+
+1833. [bug] Race condition in isc_mutex_lock_profile(). [RT #13660]
+
+1832. [bug] named fails to return BADKEY on unknown TSIG algorithm.
+ [RT #13620]
+
+1831. [doc] Update named-checkzone documentation. [RT#13604]
+
+1830. [bug] adb lame cache has sence of test reversed. [RT #13600]
+
+1829. [bug] win32: "pid-file none;" broken. [RT #13563]
+
+1828. [bug] isc_rwlock_init() failed to properly cleanup if it
+ encountered a error. [RT #13549]
+
+1827. [bug] host: update usage message for '-a'. [RT #37116]
+
+1826. [bug] Missing DESTROYLOCK() in isc_mem_createx() on out
+ of memory error. [RT #13537]
+
+1825. [bug] Missing UNLOCK() on out of memory error from in
+ rbtdb.c:subtractrdataset(). [RT #13519]
+
+1824. [bug] Memory leak on dns_zone_setdbtype() failure.
+ [RT #13510]
+
+1823. [bug] Wrong macro used to check for point to point interface.
+ [RT#13418]
+
+1822. [bug] check-names test for RT was reversed. [RT #13382]
+
+1821. [doc] acls definitions are no longer required to be
+ in named.conf prior to reference. They can be
+ defined after being referenced.
+
+1820. [bug] Gracefully handle acl loops. [RT #13659]
+
+1819. [bug] The validator needed to check both the algorithm and
+ digest types of the DS to determine if it could be
+ used to introduce a secure zone. [RT #13593]
+
+1816. [port] UnixWare: failed to compile lib/isc/unix/net.c.
+ [RT #13597]
+
+1815. [bug] nsupdate triggered a REQUIRE if the server was set
+ without also setting the zone and it encountered
+ a CNAME and was using TSIG. [RT #13086]
+
+1810. [bug] configure, lib/bind/configure make different default
+ decisions about whether to do a threaded build.
+ [RT #13212]
+
+1809. [bug] "make distclean" failed for libbind if the platform
+ is not supported.
+
+1807. [bug] When forwarding (forward only) set the active domain
+ from the forward zone name. [RT #13526]
+
+1804. [bug] Ensure that if we are queried for glue that it fits
+ in the additional section or TC is set to tell the
+ client to retry using TCP. [RT #10114]
+
+1803. [bug] dnssec-signzone sometimes failed to remove old
+ RRSIGs. [RT #13483]
+
+1802. [bug] Handle connection resets better. [RT #11280]
+
+1799. [bug] 'rndc flushname' failed to flush negative cache
+ entries. [RT #13438]
+
+1795. [bug] "rndc dumpdb" was not fully documented. Minor
+ formating issues with "rndc dumpdb -all". [RT #13396]
+
+1791. [bug] 'host -t a' still printed out AAAA and MX records.
+ [RT #13230]
+
--- 9.3.1 released ---
1818. [bug] 'named-checkconf -z' triggered an INSIST. [RT #13599]
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/FAQ b/contrib/bind9/FAQ
index f6ed41e422c..9b806cbde53 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/FAQ
+++ b/contrib/bind9/FAQ
@@ -1,470 +1,525 @@
-
-
-
Frequently Asked Questions about BIND 9
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Q: Why doesn't -u work on Linux 2.2.x when I build with --enable-threads?
A: Linux threads do not fully implement the Posix threads (pthreads) standard.
-In particular, setuid() operates only on the current thread, not the full
-process. Because of this limitation, BIND 9 cannot use setuid() on Linux as it
-can on all other supported platforms. setuid() cannot be called before
-creating threads, since the server does not start listening on reserved ports
-until after threads have started.
+ In particular, setuid() operates only on the current thread, not the full
+ process. Because of this limitation, BIND 9 cannot use setuid() on Linux as
+ it can on all other supported platforms. setuid() cannot be called before
+ creating threads, since the server does not start listening on reserved
+ ports until after threads have started.
- In the 2.2.18 or 2.3.99-pre3 and newer kernels, the ability to preserve
-capabilities across a setuid() call is present. This allows BIND 9 to call
-setuid() early, while retaining the ability to bind reserved ports. This is
-a Linux-specific hack.
+ In the 2.2.18 or 2.3.99-pre3 and newer kernels, the ability to preserve
+ capabilities across a setuid() call is present. This allows BIND 9 to call
+ setuid() early, while retaining the ability to bind reserved ports. This is
+ a Linux-specific hack.
- On a 2.2 kernel, BIND 9 does drop many root privileges, so it should be less
-of a security risk than a root process that has not dropped privileges.
+ On a 2.2 kernel, BIND 9 does drop many root privileges, so it should be less
+ of a security risk than a root process that has not dropped privileges.
- If Linux threads ever work correctly, this restriction will go away.
+ If Linux threads ever work correctly, this restriction will go away.
- Configuring BIND9 with the --disable-threads option (the default) causes a
-non-threaded version to be built, which will allow -u to be used.
+ Configuring BIND9 with the --disable-threads option (the default) causes a
+ non-threaded version to be built, which will allow -u to be used.
+Q: Why does named log the warning message "no TTL specified - using SOA MINTTL
+ instead"?
-Q: Why does named log the warning message "no TTL specified - using SOA
-MINTTL instead"?
-
-A: Your zone file is illegal according to RFC1035. It must either
-have a line like
+A: Your zone file is illegal according to RFC1035. It must either have a line
+ like:
$TTL 86400
-at the beginning, or the first record in it must have a TTL field,
-like the "84600" in this example:
+ at the beginning, or the first record in it must have a TTL field, like the
+ "84600" in this example:
example.com. 86400 IN SOA ns hostmaster ( 1 3600 1800 1814400 3600 )
Q: Why do I see 5 (or more) copies of named on Linux?
-A: Linux threads each show up as a process under ps. The approximate
-number of threads running is n+4, where n is the number of CPUs. Note that
-the amount of memory used is not cumulative; if each process is using 10M of
-memory, only a total of 10M is used.
+A: Linux threads each show up as a process under ps. The approximate number of
+ threads running is n+4, where n is the number of CPUs. Note that the amount
+ of memory used is not cumulative; if each process is using 10M of memory,
+ only a total of 10M is used.
+Q: Why does BIND 9 log "permission denied" errors accessing its configuration
+ files or zones on my Linux system even though it is running as root?
-Q: Why does BIND 9 log "permission denied" errors accessing its
-configuration files or zones on my Linux system even though it is running
-as root?
-
-A: On Linux, BIND 9 drops most of its root privileges on startup.
-This including the privilege to open files owned by other users.
-Therefore, if the server is running as root, the configuration files
-and zone files should also be owned by root.
-
+A: On Linux, BIND 9 drops most of its root privileges on startup. This
+ including the privilege to open files owned by other users. Therefore, if
+ the server is running as root, the configuration files and zone files should
+ also be owned by root.
Q: Why do I get errors like "dns_zone_load: zone foo/IN: loading master file
-bar: ran out of space"
-
-A: This is often caused by TXT records with missing close quotes. Check that
-all TXT records containing quoted strings have both open and close quotes.
+ bar: ran out of space"?
+A: This is often caused by TXT records with missing close quotes. Check that
+ all TXT records containing quoted strings have both open and close quotes.
Q: How do I produce a usable core file from a multithreaded named on Linux?
-A: If the Linux kernel is 2.4.7 or newer, multithreaded core dumps
-are usable (that is, the correct thread is dumped). Otherwise, if using
-a 2.2 kernel, apply the kernel patch found in contrib/linux/coredump-patch
-and rebuild the kernel. This patch will cause multithreaded programs to dump
-the correct thread.
-
+A: If the Linux kernel is 2.4.7 or newer, multithreaded core dumps are usable
+ (that is, the correct thread is dumped). Otherwise, if using a 2.2 kernel,
+ apply the kernel patch found in contrib/linux/coredump-patch and rebuild the
+ kernel. This patch will cause multithreaded programs to dump the correct
+ thread.
Q: How do I restrict people from looking up the server version?
-A: Put a "version" option containing something other than the real
-version in the "options" section of named.conf. Note doing this will
-not prevent attacks and may impede people trying to diagnose problems
-with your server. Also it is possible to "fingerprint" nameservers to
-determine their version.
+A: Put a "version" option containing something other than the real version in
+ the "options" section of named.conf. Note doing this will not prevent
+ attacks and may impede people trying to diagnose problems with your server.
+ Also it is possible to "fingerprint" nameservers to determine their version.
+Q: How do I restrict only remote users from looking up the server version?
-Q: How do I restrict only remote users from looking up the server
-version?
-
-A: The following view statement will intercept lookups as the internal
-view that holds the version information will be matched last. The
-caveats of the previous answer still apply, of course.
-
- view "chaos" chaos {
- match-clients { ; };
- allow-query { none; };
- zone "." {
- type hint;
- file "/dev/null"; // or any empty file
- };
- };
+A: The following view statement will intercept lookups as the internal view
+ that holds the version information will be matched last. The caveats of the
+ previous answer still apply, of course.
+ view "chaos" chaos {
+ match-clients { ; };
+ allow-query { none; };
+ zone "." {
+ type hint;
+ file "/dev/null"; // or any empty file
+ };
+ };
Q: What do "no source of entropy found" or "could not open entropy source foo"
-mean?
+ mean?
A: The server requires a source of entropy to perform certain operations,
-mostly DNSSEC related. These messages indicate that you have no source
-of entropy. On systems with /dev/random or an equivalent, it is used by
-default. A source of entropy can also be defined using the random-device
-option in named.conf.
+ mostly DNSSEC related. These messages indicate that you have no source of
+ entropy. On systems with /dev/random or an equivalent, it is used by
+ default. A source of entropy can also be defined using the random-device
+ option in named.conf.
+Q: I installed BIND 9 and restarted named, but it's still BIND 8. Why?
-Q: I installed BIND 9 and restarted named, but it's still BIND 8. Why?
+A: BIND 9 is installed under /usr/local by default. BIND 8 is often installed
+ under /usr. Check that the correct named is running.
-A: BIND 9 is installed under /usr/local by default. BIND 8 is often
-installed under /usr. Check that the correct named is running.
+Q: I'm trying to use TSIG to authenticate dynamic updates or zone transfers.
+ I'm sure I have the keys set up correctly, but the server is rejecting the
+ TSIG. Why?
+A: This may be a clock skew problem. Check that the the clocks on the client
+ and server are properly synchronised (e.g., using ntp).
-Q: I'm trying to use TSIG to authenticate dynamic updates or zone
-transfers. I'm sure I have the keys set up correctly, but the server
-is rejecting the TSIG. Why?
+Q: I'm trying to compile BIND 9, and "make" is failing due to files not being
+ found. Why?
-A: This may be a clock skew problem. Check that the the clocks on
-the client and server are properly synchronized (e.g., using ntp).
+A: Using a parallel or distributed "make" to build BIND 9 is not supported, and
+ doesn't work. If you are using one of these, use normal make or gmake
+ instead.
+Q: I have a BIND 9 master and a BIND 8.2.3 slave, and the master is logging
+ error messages like "notify to 10.0.0.1#53 failed: unexpected end of input".
+ What's wrong?
-Q: I'm trying to compile BIND 9, and "make" is failing due to files not
-being found. Why?
+A: This error message is caused by a known bug in BIND 8.2.3 and is fixed in
+ BIND 8.2.4. It can be safely ignored - the notify has been acted on by the
+ slave despite the error message.
-A: Using a parallel or distributed "make" to build BIND 9 is not
-supported, and doesn't work. If you are using one of these, use
-normal make or gmake instead.
+Q: I keep getting log messages like the following. Why?
+ Dec 4 23:47:59 client 10.0.0.1#1355: updating zone 'example.com/IN': update
+ failed: 'RRset exists (value dependent)' prerequisite not satisfied
+ (NXRRSET)
-Q: I have a BIND 9 master and a BIND 8.2.3 slave, and the master is
-logging error messages like "notify to 10.0.0.1#53 failed: unexpected
-end of input". What's wrong?
+A: DNS updates allow the update request to test to see if certain conditions
+ are met prior to proceeding with the update. The message above is saying
+ that conditions were not met and the update is not proceeding. See doc/rfc/
+ rfc2136.txt for more details on prerequisites.
-A: This error message is caused by a known bug in BIND 8.2.3 and is fixed
-in BIND 8.2.4. It can be safely ignored - the notify has been acted on by
-the slave despite the error message.
-
-
-Q: I keep getting log messages like the following. Why?
-
- Dec 4 23:47:59 client 10.0.0.1#1355: updating zone 'example.com/IN':
- update failed: 'RRset exists (value dependent)' prerequisite not
- satisfied (NXRRSET)
-
-A: DNS updates allow the update request to test to see if certain
-conditions are met prior to proceeding with the update. The message
-above is saying that conditions were not met and the update is not
-proceeding. See doc/rfc/rfc2136.txt for more details on prerequisites.
-
-
-Q: I keep getting log messages like the following. Why?
+Q: I keep getting log messages like the following. Why?
Jun 21 12:00:00.000 client 10.0.0.1#1234: update denied
-A: Someone is trying to update your DNS data using the RFC2136 Dynamic
-Update protocol. Windows 2000 machines have a habit of sending dynamic
-update requests to DNS servers without being specifically configured to
-do so. If the update requests are coming from a Windows 2000 machine,
-see
-for information about how to turn them off.
+A: Someone is trying to update your DNS data using the RFC2136 Dynamic Update
+ protocol. Windows 2000 machines have a habit of sending dynamic update
+ requests to DNS servers without being specifically configured to do so. If
+ the update requests are coming from a Windows 2000 machine, see http://
+ support.microsoft.com/support/kb/articles/q246/8/04.asp for information
+ about how to turn them off.
-
-Q: I see a log message like the following. Why?
+Q: I see a log message like the following. Why?
couldn't open pid file '/var/run/named.pid': Permission denied
-A: You are most likely running named as a non-root user, and that user
-does not have permission to write in /var/run. The common ways of
-fixing this are to create a /var/run/named directory owned by the named
-user and set pid-file to "/var/run/named/named.pid", or set
-pid-file to "named.pid", which will put the file in the directory
-specified by the directory option (which, in this case, must be writable
-by the named user).
+A: You are most likely running named as a non-root user, and that user does not
+ have permission to write in /var/run. The common ways of fixing this are to
+ create a /var/run/named directory owned by the named user and set pid-file
+ to "/var/run/named/named.pid", or set pid-file to "named.pid", which will
+ put the file in the directory specified by the directory option (which, in
+ this case, must be writable by the named user).
+Q: When I do a "dig . ns", many of the A records for the root servers are
+ missing. Why?
-Q: When I do a "dig . ns", many of the A records for the root
-servers are missing. Why?
+A: This is normal and harmless. It is a somewhat confusing side effect of the
+ way BIND 9 does RFC2181 trust ranking and of the efforts BIND 9 makes to
+ avoid promoting glue into answers.
-A: This is normal and harmless. It is a somewhat confusing side effect
-of the way BIND 9 does RFC2181 trust ranking and of the efforts BIND 9
-makes to avoid promoting glue into answers.
+ When BIND 9 first starts up and primes its cache, it receives the root
+ server addresses as additional data in an authoritative response from a root
+ server, and these records are eligible for inclusion as additional data in
+ responses. Subsequently it receives a subset of the root server addresses as
+ additional data in a non-authoritative (referral) response from a root
+ server. This causes the addresses to now be considered non-authoritative
+ (glue) data, which is not eligible for inclusion in responses.
-When BIND 9 first starts up and primes its cache, it receives the root
-server addresses as additional data in an authoritative response from
-a root server, and these records are eligible for inclusion as
-additional data in responses. Subsequently it receives a subset of
-the root server addresses as additional data in a non-authoritative
-(referral) response from a root server. This causes the addresses to
-now be considered non-authoritative (glue) data, which is not eligible
-for inclusion in responses.
+ The server does have a complete set of root server addresses cached at all
+ times, it just may not include all of them as additional data, depending on
+ whether they were last received as answers or as glue. You can always look
+ up the addresses with explicit queries like "dig a.root-servers.net A".
-The server does have a complete set of root server addresses cached
-at all times, it just may not include all of them as additional data,
-depending on whether they were last received as answers or as glue.
-You can always look up the addresses with explicit queries like
-"dig a.root-servers.net A".
-
-
-Q: Zone transfers from my BIND 9 master to my Windows 2000 slave
-fail. Why?
-
-A: This may be caused by a bug in the Windows 2000 DNS server where
-DNS messages larger than 16K are not handled properly. This can be
-worked around by setting the option "transfer-format one-answer;".
-Also check whether your zone contains domain names with embedded
-spaces or other special characters, like "John\032Doe\213s\032Computer",
-since such names have been known to cause Windows 2000 slaves to
-incorrectly reject the zone.
+Q: Zone transfers from my BIND 9 master to my Windows 2000 slave fail. Why?
+A: This may be caused by a bug in the Windows 2000 DNS server where DNS
+ messages larger than 16K are not handled properly. This can be worked around
+ by setting the option "transfer-format one-answer;". Also check whether your
+ zone contains domain names with embedded spaces or other special characters,
+ like "John\032Doe\213s\032Computer", since such names have been known to
+ cause Windows 2000 slaves to incorrectly reject the zone.
Q: Why don't my zones reload when I do an "rndc reload" or SIGHUP?
-A: A zone can be updated either by editing zone files and reloading
-the server or by dynamic update, but not both. If you have enabled
-dynamic update for a zone using the "allow-update" option, you are not
-supposed to edit the zone file by hand, and the server will not
-attempt to reload it.
+A: A zone can be updated either by editing zone files and reloading the server
+ or by dynamic update, but not both. If you have enabled dynamic update for a
+ zone using the "allow-update" option, you are not supposed to edit the zone
+ file by hand, and the server will not attempt to reload it.
+Q: I can query the nameserver from the nameserver but not from other machines.
+ Why?
-Q: I can query the nameserver from the nameserver but not from other
-machines. Why?
+A: This is usually the result of the firewall configuration stopping the
+ queries and / or the replies.
-A: This is usually the result of the firewall configuration stopping
-the queries and / or the replies.
+Q: How can I make a server a slave for both an internal and an external view at
+ the same time? When I tried, both views on the slave were transferred from
+ the same view on the master.
+A: You will need to give the master and slave multiple IP addresses and use
+ those to make sure you reach the correct view on the other machine.
-Q: How can I make a server a slave for both an internal and
-an external view at the same time? When I tried, both views
-on the slave were transferred from the same view on the master.
+ Master: 10.0.1.1 (internal), 10.0.1.2 (external, IP alias)
+ internal:
+ match-clients { !10.0.1.2; !10.0.1.4; 10.0.1/24; };
+ notify-source 10.0.1.1;
+ transfer-source 10.0.1.1;
+ query-source address 10.0.1.1;
+ external:
+ match-clients { any; };
+ recursion no; // don't offer recursion to the world
+ notify-source 10.0.1.2;
+ transfer-source 10.0.1.2;
+ query-source address 10.0.1.2;
-A: You will need to give the master and slave multiple IP addresses and
-use those to make sure you reach the correct view on the other machine.
+ Slave: 10.0.1.3 (internal), 10.0.1.4 (external, IP alias)
+ internal:
+ match-clients { !10.0.1.2; !10.0.1.4; 10.0.1/24; };
+ notify-source 10.0.1.3;
+ transfer-source 10.0.1.3;
+ query-source address 10.0.1.3;
+ external:
+ match-clients { any; };
+ recursion no; // don't offer recursion to the world
+ notify-source 10.0.1.4;
+ transfer-source 10.0.1.4;
+ query-source address 10.0.1.4;
- e.g.
- Master: 10.0.1.1 (internal), 10.0.1.2 (external, IP alias)
- internal:
- match-clients { !10.0.1.2; !10.0.1.4; 10.0.1/24; };
- notify-source 10.0.1.1;
- transfer-source 10.0.1.1;
- query-source address 10.0.1.1;
- external:
- match-clients { any; };
- recursion no; // don't offer recursion to the world
- notify-source 10.0.1.2;
- transfer-source 10.0.1.2;
- query-source address 10.0.1.2;
+ You put the external address on the alias so that all the other dns clients
+ on these boxes see the internal view by default.
- Slave: 10.0.1.3 (internal), 10.0.1.4 (external, IP alias)
- internal:
- match-clients { !10.0.1.2; !10.0.1.4; 10.0.1/24; };
- notify-source 10.0.1.3;
- transfer-source 10.0.1.3;
- query-source address 10.0.1.3;
- external:
- match-clients { any; };
- recursion no; // don't offer recursion to the world
- notify-source 10.0.1.4;
- transfer-source 10.0.1.4;
- query-source address 10.0.1.4;
+A: BIND 9.3 and later: Use TSIG to select the appropriate view.
- You put the external address on the alias so that all the other
- dns clients on these boxes see the internal view by default.
+ Master 10.0.1.1:
+ key "external" {
+ algorithm hmac-md5;
+ secret "xxxxxxxx";
+ };
+ view "internal" {
+ match-clients { !key external; 10.0.1/24; };
+ ...
+ };
+ view "external" {
+ match-clients { key external; any; };
+ server 10.0.0.2 { keys external; };
+ recursion no;
+ ...
+ };
-A: (BIND 9.3 and later) Use TSIG to select the appropriate view.
+ Slave 10.0.1.2:
+ key "external" {
+ algorithm hmac-md5;
+ secret "xxxxxxxx";
+ };
+ view "internal" {
+ match-clients { !key external; 10.0.1/24; };
+ ...
+ };
+ view "external" {
+ match-clients { key external; any; };
+ server 10.0.0.1 { keys external; };
+ recursion no;
+ ...
+ };
- Master 10.0.1.1:
- key "external" {
- algorithm hmac-md5;
- secret "xxxxxxxx";
- };
- view "internal" {
- match-clients { !key external; 10.0.1/24; };
- ...
- };
- view "external" {
- match-clients { key external; any; };
- server 10.0.0.2 { keys external; };
- recursion no;
- ...
- };
+Q: I have FreeBSD 4.x and "rndc-confgen -a" just sits there.
- Slave 10.0.1.2:
- key "external" {
- algorithm hmac-md5;
- secret "xxxxxxxx";
- };
- view "internal" {
- match-clients { !key external; 10.0.1/24; };
- };
- view "external" {
- match-clients { key external; any; };
- server 10.0.0.1 { keys external; };
- recursion no;
- ...
- };
+A: /dev/random is not configured. Use rndcontrol(8) to tell the kernel to use
+ certain interrupts as a source of random events. You can make this permanent
+ by setting rand_irqs in /etc/rc.conf.
+ /etc/rc.conf
+ rand_irqs="3 14 15"
-Q: I have Freebsd 4.x and "rndc-confgen -a" just sits there.
-
-A: /dev/random is not configured. Use rndcontrol(8) to tell the kernel
-to use certain interrupts as a source of random events. You can make this
-permanent by setting rand_irqs in /etc/rc.conf.
-
-e.g.
- /etc/rc.conf
- rand_irqs="3 14 15"
-
-See also http://people.freebsd.org/~dougb/randomness.html
-
+ See also http://people.freebsd.org/~dougb/randomness.html
Q: Why is named listening on UDP port other than 53?
-A: Named uses a system selected port to make queries of other nameservers.
-This behaviour can be overridden by using query-source to lock down the
-port and/or address. See also notify-source and transfer-source.
+A: Named uses a system selected port to make queries of other nameservers. This
+ behaviour can be overridden by using query-source to lock down the port and/
+ or address. See also notify-source and transfer-source.
+Q: I get error messages like "multiple RRs of singleton type" and "CNAME and
+ other data" when transferring a zone. What does this mean?
-Q: I get error messages like "multiple RRs of singleton type" and
-"CNAME and other data" when transferring a zone. What does this mean?
+A: These indicate a malformed master zone. You can identify the exact records
+ involved by transferring the zone using dig then running named-checkzone on
+ it.
-A: These indicate a malformed master zone. You can identify the
-exact records involved by transferring the zone using dig then
-running named-checkzone on it.
+ dig axfr example.com @master-server > tmp
+ named-checkzone example.com tmp
- e.g.
- dig axfr example.com @master-server > tmp
- named-checkzone example.com tmp
+ A CNAME record cannot exist with the same name as another record except for
+ the DNSSEC records which prove its existance (NSEC).
+ RFC 1034, Section 3.6.2: "If a CNAME RR is present at a node, no other data
+ should be present; this ensures that the data for a canonical name and its
+ aliases cannot be different. This rule also insures that a cached CNAME can
+ be used without checking with an authoritative server for other RR types."
-Q: I get error messages like "named.conf:99: unexpected end of input" where
-99 is the last line of named.conf.
+Q: I get error messages like "named.conf:99: unexpected end of input" where 99
+ is the last line of named.conf.
-A: Some text editors (notepad and wordpad) fail to put a line termination
-indication (e.g. CR/LF) on the last line of a text file. This can be fixed
-by "adding" a blank line to the end of the file. Named expects to see EOF
-immediately after EOL and treats text files where this is not met as truncated.
+A: Some text editors (notepad and wordpad) fail to put a line title indication
+ (e.g. CR/LF) on the last line of a text file. This can be fixed by "adding"
+ a blank line to the end of the file. Named expects to see EOF immediately
+ after EOL and treats text files where this is not met as truncated.
-
-Q: I get warning messages like "zone example.com/IN: refresh: failure trying master
-1.2.3.4#53: timed out".
+Q: I get warning messages like "zone example.com/IN: refresh: failure trying
+ master 1.2.3.4#53: timed out".
A: Check that you can make UDP queries from the slave to the master
- dig +norec example.com soa @1.2.3.4
+ dig +norec example.com soa @1.2.3.4
-A: You could be generating queries faster than the slave can cope with. Lower
-the serial query rate.
+ You could be generating queries faster than the slave can cope with. Lower
+ the serial query rate.
- serial-query-rate 5; // default 20
+ serial-query-rate 5; // default 20
Q: How do I share a dynamic zone between multiple views?
-A: You choose one view to be master and the second a slave and transfer
-the zone between views.
+A: You choose one view to be master and the second a slave and transfer the
+ zone between views.
- Master 10.0.1.1:
- key "external" {
- algorithm hmac-md5;
- secret "xxxxxxxx";
- };
+ Master 10.0.1.1:
+ key "external" {
+ algorithm hmac-md5;
+ secret "xxxxxxxx";
+ };
- key "mykey" {
- algorithm hmac-md5;
- secret "yyyyyyyy";
- };
+ key "mykey" {
+ algorithm hmac-md5;
+ secret "yyyyyyyy";
+ };
- view "internal" {
- match-clients { !external; 10.0.1/24; };
- server 10.0.1.1 {
- /* Deliver notify messages to external view. */
- keys { external; };
- };
- zone "example.com" {
- type master;
- file "internal/example.db";
- allow-update { key mykey; };
- notify-also { 10.0.1.1; };
- };
- };
+ view "internal" {
+ match-clients { !external; 10.0.1/24; };
+ server 10.0.1.1 {
+ /* Deliver notify messages to external view. */
+ keys { external; };
+ };
+ zone "example.com" {
+ type master;
+ file "internal/example.db";
+ allow-update { key mykey; };
+ notify-also { 10.0.1.1; };
+ };
+ };
- view "external" {
- match-clients { external; any; };
- zone "example.com" {
- type slave;
- file "external/example.db";
- masters { 10.0.1.1; };
- transfer-source { 10.0.1.1; };
- // allow-update-forwarding { any; };
- // allow-notify { ... };
- };
- };
+ view "external" {
+ match-clients { external; any; };
+ zone "example.com" {
+ type slave;
+ file "external/example.db";
+ masters { 10.0.1.1; };
+ transfer-source { 10.0.1.1; };
+ // allow-update-forwarding { any; };
+ // allow-notify { ... };
+ };
+ };
Q: I get a error message like "zone wireless.ietf56.ietf.org/IN: loading master
-file primaries/wireless.ietf56.ietf.org: no owner".
-
-A: This error is produced when a line in the master file contains leading
-white space (tab/space) but the is no current record owner name to inherit
-the name from. Usually this is the result of putting white space before
-a comment. Forgeting the "@" for the SOA record or indenting the master
-file.
+ file primaries/wireless.ietf56.ietf.org: no owner".
+A: This error is produced when a line in the master file contains leading white
+ space (tab/space) but the is no current record owner name to inherit the
+ name from. Usually this is the result of putting white space before a
+ comment. Forgeting the "@" for the SOA record or indenting the master file.
Q: Why are my logs in GMT (UTC).
A: You are running chrooted (-t) and have not supplied local timzone
-information in the chroot area.
+ information in the chroot area.
- FreeBSD: /etc/localtime
- Solaris: /etc/TIMEZONE and /usr/share/lib/zoneinfo
- OSF: /etc/zoneinfo/localtime
+ FreeBSD: /etc/localtime
+ Solaris: /etc/TIMEZONE and /usr/share/lib/zoneinfo
+ OSF: /etc/zoneinfo/localtime
- See also tzset(3) and zic(8).
+ See also tzset(3) and zic(8).
+Q: I get the error message "named: capset failed: Operation not permitted" when
+ starting named.
-Q: I get the error message "named: capset failed: Operation not permitted"
-when starting named.
+A: The capability module, part of "Linux Security Modules/LSM", has not been
+ loaded into the kernel. See insmod(8).
-A: The capset module has not been loaded into the kernel. See insmod(8).
-
-
-Q: I get "rndc: connect failed: connection refused" when I try to run
- rndc.
+Q: I get "rndc: connect failed: connection refused" when I try to run rndc.
A: This is usually a configuration error.
- First ensure that named is running and no errors are being
- reported at startup (/var/log/messages or equivalent). Running
- "named -g " from a terminal can help at this
- point.
+ First ensure that named is running and no errors are being reported at
+ startup (/var/log/messages or equivalent). Running "named -g " from a title can help at this point.
- Secondly ensure that named is configured to use rndc either by
- "rndc-confgen -a", rndc-confgen or manually. The Administators
- Reference manual has details on how to do this.
+ Secondly ensure that named is configured to use rndc either by "rndc-confgen
+ -a", rndc-confgen or manually. The Administrators Reference manual has
+ details on how to do this.
- Old versions of rndc-confgen used localhost rather than 127.0.0.1
- in /etc/rndc.conf for the default server. Update /etc/rndc.conf
- if necessary so that the default server listed in /etc/rndc.conf
- matches the addresses used in named.conf. "localhost" has two
- address (127.0.0.1 and ::1).
-
- If you use "rndc-confgen -a" and named is running with -t or -u
- ensure that /etc/rndc.conf has the correct ownership and that
- a copy is in the chroot area. You can do this by re-running
- "rndc-confgen -a" with appropriate -t and -u arguements.
+ Old versions of rndc-confgen used localhost rather than 127.0.0.1 in /etc/
+ rndc.conf for the default server. Update /etc/rndc.conf if necessary so that
+ the default server listed in /etc/rndc.conf matches the addresses used in
+ named.conf. "localhost" has two address (127.0.0.1 and ::1).
+ If you use "rndc-confgen -a" and named is running with -t or -u ensure that
+ /etc/rndc.conf has the correct ownership and that a copy is in the chroot
+ area. You can do this by re-running "rndc-confgen -a" with appropriate -t
+ and -u arguments.
Q: I don't get RRSIG's returned when I use "dig +dnssec".
A: You need to ensure DNSSEC is enabled (dnssec-enable yes;).
-
Q: I get "Error 1067" when starting named under Windows.
-A: This is the service manager saying that named exited. You need to
- examine the Application log in the EventViewer to find out why.
+A: This is the service manager saying that named exited. You need to examine
+ the Application log in the EventViewer to find out why.
- Common causes are that you failed to create "named.conf" (usually
- "C:\windows\dns\etc\named.conf") or failed to specify the directory
- in named.conf.
+ Common causes are that you failed to create "named.conf" (usually "C:\
+ windows\dns\etc\named.conf") or failed to specify the directory in
+ named.conf.
- options {
- Directory "C:\windows\dns\etc";
- };
+ options {
+ Directory "C:\windows\dns\etc";
+ };
+Q: I get "transfer of 'example.net/IN' from 192.168.4.12#53: failed while
+ receiving responses: permission denied" error messages.
+
+A: These indicate a filesystem permission error preventing named creating /
+ renaming the temporary file. These will usually also have other associated
+ error messages like
+
+ "dumping master file: sl/tmp-XXXX5il3sQ: open: permission denied"
+
+ Named needs write permission on the directory containing the file. Named
+ writes the new cache file to a temporary file then renames it to the name
+ specified in named.conf to ensure that the contents are always complete.
+ This is to prevent named loading a partial zone in the event of power
+ failure or similar interrupting the write of the master file.
+
+ Note file names are relative to the directory specified in options and any
+ chroot directory ([/][]).
+
+ If named is invoked as "named -t /chroot/DNS" with the following named.conf
+ then "/chroot/DNS/var/named/sl" needs to be writable by the user named is
+ running as.
+
+ options {
+ directory "/var/named";
+ };
+
+ zone "example.net" {
+ type slave;
+ file "sl/example.net";
+ masters { 192.168.4.12; };
+ };
+
+Q: How do I intergrate BIND 9 and Solaris SMF
+
+A: Sun has a blog entry describing how to do this.
+
+ http://blogs.sun.com/roller/page/anay/Weblog?catname=%2FSolaris
+
+Q: Can a NS record refer to a CNAME.
+
+A: No. The rules for glue (copies of the *address* records in the parent zones)
+ and additional section processing do not allow it to work.
+
+ You would have to add both the CNAME and address records (A/AAAA) as glue to
+ the parent zone and have CNAMEs be followed when doing additional section
+ processing to make it work. No namesever implementation supports either of
+ these requirements.
+
+Q: What does "RFC 1918 response from Internet for 0.0.0.10.IN-ADDR.ARPA" mean?
+
+A: If the IN-ADDR.ARPA name covered refers to a internal address space you are
+ using then you have failed to follow RFC 1918 usage rules and are leaking
+ queries to the Internet. You should establish your own zones for these
+ addresses to prevent you quering the Internet's name servers for these
+ addresses. Please see http://as112.net/ for details of the problems you are
+ causing and the counter measures that have had to be deployed.
+
+ If you are not using these private addresses then a client has queried for
+ them. You can just ignore the messages, get the offending client to stop
+ sending you these messages as they are most probably leaking them or setup
+ your own zones empty zones to serve answers to these queries.
+
+ zone "10.IN-ADDR.ARPA" {
+ type master;
+ file "empty";
+ };
+
+ zone "16.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA" {
+ type master;
+ file "empty";
+ };
+
+ ...
+
+ zone "31.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA" {
+ type master;
+ file "empty";
+ };
+
+ zone "168.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA" {
+ type master;
+ file "empty";
+ };
+
+ empty:
+ @ 10800 IN SOA . . (
+ 1 3600 1200 604800 10800 )
+ @ 10800 IN NS .
+
+ Note
+
+ Future versions of named are likely to do this automatically.
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/FAQ.xml b/contrib/bind9/FAQ.xml
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..963cd0a8c40
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/bind9/FAQ.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,1007 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Frequently Asked Questions about BIND 9
+
+
+
+
+ Why doesn't -u work on Linux 2.2.x when I build with
+ --enable-threads?
+
+
+
+
+ Linux threads do not fully implement the Posix threads
+ (pthreads) standard. In particular, setuid() operates only
+ on the current thread, not the full process. Because of
+ this limitation, BIND 9 cannot use setuid() on Linux as it
+ can on all other supported platforms. setuid() cannot be
+ called before creating threads, since the server does not
+ start listening on reserved ports until after threads have
+ started.
+
+
+ In the 2.2.18 or 2.3.99-pre3 and newer kernels, the ability
+ to preserve capabilities across a setuid() call is present.
+ This allows BIND 9 to call setuid() early, while retaining
+ the ability to bind reserved ports. This is a Linux-specific
+ hack.
+
+
+ On a 2.2 kernel, BIND 9 does drop many root privileges, so
+ it should be less of a security risk than a root process
+ that has not dropped privileges.
+
+
+ If Linux threads ever work correctly, this restriction will
+ go away.
+
+
+ Configuring BIND9 with the --disable-threads option (the
+ default) causes a non-threaded version to be built, which
+ will allow -u to be used.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Why does named log the warning message no TTL specified -
+ using SOA MINTTL instead?
+
+
+
+
+ Your zone file is illegal according to RFC1035. It must either
+ have a line like:
+
+
+
+$TTL 86400
+
+
+ at the beginning, or the first record in it must have a TTL field,
+ like the "84600" in this example:
+
+
+
+example.com. 86400 IN SOA ns hostmaster ( 1 3600 1800 1814400 3600 )
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Why do I see 5 (or more) copies of named on Linux?
+
+
+
+
+ Linux threads each show up as a process under ps. The
+ approximate number of threads running is n+4, where n is
+ the number of CPUs. Note that the amount of memory used
+ is not cumulative; if each process is using 10M of memory,
+ only a total of 10M is used.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Why does BIND 9 log permission denied errors accessing
+ its configuration files or zones on my Linux system even
+ though it is running as root?
+
+
+
+
+ On Linux, BIND 9 drops most of its root privileges on
+ startup. This including the privilege to open files owned
+ by other users. Therefore, if the server is running as
+ root, the configuration files and zone files should also
+ be owned by root.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Why do I get errors like dns_zone_load: zone foo/IN: loading
+ master file bar: ran out of space?
+
+
+
+
+ This is often caused by TXT records with missing close
+ quotes. Check that all TXT records containing quoted strings
+ have both open and close quotes.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ How do I produce a usable core file from a multithreaded
+ named on Linux?
+
+
+
+
+ If the Linux kernel is 2.4.7 or newer, multithreaded core
+ dumps are usable (that is, the correct thread is dumped).
+ Otherwise, if using a 2.2 kernel, apply the kernel patch
+ found in contrib/linux/coredump-patch and rebuild the kernel.
+ This patch will cause multithreaded programs to dump the
+ correct thread.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ How do I restrict people from looking up the server version?
+
+
+
+
+ Put a "version" option containing something other than the
+ real version in the "options" section of named.conf. Note
+ doing this will not prevent attacks and may impede people
+ trying to diagnose problems with your server. Also it is
+ possible to "fingerprint" nameservers to determine their
+ version.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ How do I restrict only remote users from looking up the
+ server version?
+
+
+
+
+ The following view statement will intercept lookups as the
+ internal view that holds the version information will be
+ matched last. The caveats of the previous answer still
+ apply, of course.
+
+
+
+view "chaos" chaos {
+ match-clients { <those to be refused>; };
+ allow-query { none; };
+ zone "." {
+ type hint;
+ file "/dev/null"; // or any empty file
+ };
+};
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ What do no source of entropy found or could not
+ open entropy source foo mean?
+
+
+
+
+ The server requires a source of entropy to perform certain
+ operations, mostly DNSSEC related. These messages indicate
+ that you have no source of entropy. On systems with
+ /dev/random or an equivalent, it is used by default. A
+ source of entropy can also be defined using the random-device
+ option in named.conf.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ I installed BIND 9 and restarted named, but it's still BIND 8. Why?
+
+
+
+
+ BIND 9 is installed under /usr/local by default. BIND 8
+ is often installed under /usr. Check that the correct named
+ is running.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ I'm trying to use TSIG to authenticate dynamic updates or
+ zone transfers. I'm sure I have the keys set up correctly,
+ but the server is rejecting the TSIG. Why?
+
+
+
+
+ This may be a clock skew problem. Check that the the clocks
+ on the client and server are properly synchronised (e.g.,
+ using ntp).
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ I'm trying to compile BIND 9, and "make" is failing due to
+ files not being found. Why?
+
+
+
+
+ Using a parallel or distributed "make" to build BIND 9 is
+ not supported, and doesn't work. If you are using one of
+ these, use normal make or gmake instead.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ I have a BIND 9 master and a BIND 8.2.3 slave, and the
+ master is logging error messages like notify to 10.0.0.1#53
+ failed: unexpected end of input. What's wrong?
+
+
+
+
+ This error message is caused by a known bug in BIND 8.2.3
+ and is fixed in BIND 8.2.4. It can be safely ignored - the
+ notify has been acted on by the slave despite the error
+ message.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ I keep getting log messages like the following. Why?
+
+
+ Dec 4 23:47:59 client 10.0.0.1#1355: updating zone
+ 'example.com/IN': update failed: 'RRset exists (value
+ dependent)' prerequisite not satisfied (NXRRSET)
+
+
+
+
+ DNS updates allow the update request to test to see if
+ certain conditions are met prior to proceeding with the
+ update. The message above is saying that conditions were
+ not met and the update is not proceeding. See doc/rfc/rfc2136.txt
+ for more details on prerequisites.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ I keep getting log messages like the following. Why?
+
+
+ Jun 21 12:00:00.000 client 10.0.0.1#1234: update denied
+
+
+
+
+ Someone is trying to update your DNS data using the RFC2136
+ Dynamic Update protocol. Windows 2000 machines have a habit
+ of sending dynamic update requests to DNS servers without
+ being specifically configured to do so. If the update
+ requests are coming from a Windows 2000 machine, see
+
+ http://support.microsoft.com/support/kb/articles/q246/8/04.asp
+
+ for information about how to turn them off.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ I see a log message like the following. Why?
+
+
+ couldn't open pid file '/var/run/named.pid': Permission denied
+
+
+
+
+ You are most likely running named as a non-root user, and
+ that user does not have permission to write in /var/run.
+ The common ways of fixing this are to create a /var/run/named
+ directory owned by the named user and set pid-file to
+ "/var/run/named/named.pid", or set pid-file to "named.pid",
+ which will put the file in the directory specified by the
+ directory option (which, in this case, must be writable by
+ the named user).
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ When I do a "dig . ns", many of the A records for the root
+ servers are missing. Why?
+
+
+
+
+ This is normal and harmless. It is a somewhat confusing
+ side effect of the way BIND 9 does RFC2181 trust ranking
+ and of the efforts BIND 9 makes to avoid promoting glue
+ into answers.
+
+
+ When BIND 9 first starts up and primes its cache, it receives
+ the root server addresses as additional data in an authoritative
+ response from a root server, and these records are eligible
+ for inclusion as additional data in responses. Subsequently
+ it receives a subset of the root server addresses as
+ additional data in a non-authoritative (referral) response
+ from a root server. This causes the addresses to now be
+ considered non-authoritative (glue) data, which is not
+ eligible for inclusion in responses.
+
+
+ The server does have a complete set of root server addresses
+ cached at all times, it just may not include all of them
+ as additional data, depending on whether they were last
+ received as answers or as glue. You can always look up the
+ addresses with explicit queries like "dig a.root-servers.net A".
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Zone transfers from my BIND 9 master to my Windows 2000
+ slave fail. Why?
+
+
+
+
+ This may be caused by a bug in the Windows 2000 DNS server
+ where DNS messages larger than 16K are not handled properly.
+ This can be worked around by setting the option "transfer-format
+ one-answer;". Also check whether your zone contains domain
+ names with embedded spaces or other special characters,
+ like "John\032Doe\213s\032Computer", since such names have
+ been known to cause Windows 2000 slaves to incorrectly
+ reject the zone.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Why don't my zones reload when I do an "rndc reload" or SIGHUP?
+
+
+
+
+ A zone can be updated either by editing zone files and
+ reloading the server or by dynamic update, but not both.
+ If you have enabled dynamic update for a zone using the
+ "allow-update" option, you are not supposed to edit the
+ zone file by hand, and the server will not attempt to reload
+ it.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ I can query the nameserver from the nameserver but not from other
+ machines. Why?
+
+
+
+
+ This is usually the result of the firewall configuration stopping
+ the queries and / or the replies.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ How can I make a server a slave for both an internal and
+ an external view at the same time? When I tried, both views
+ on the slave were transferred from the same view on the master.
+
+
+
+
+ You will need to give the master and slave multiple IP
+ addresses and use those to make sure you reach the correct
+ view on the other machine.
+
+
+
+Master: 10.0.1.1 (internal), 10.0.1.2 (external, IP alias)
+ internal:
+ match-clients { !10.0.1.2; !10.0.1.4; 10.0.1/24; };
+ notify-source 10.0.1.1;
+ transfer-source 10.0.1.1;
+ query-source address 10.0.1.1;
+ external:
+ match-clients { any; };
+ recursion no; // don't offer recursion to the world
+ notify-source 10.0.1.2;
+ transfer-source 10.0.1.2;
+ query-source address 10.0.1.2;
+
+Slave: 10.0.1.3 (internal), 10.0.1.4 (external, IP alias)
+ internal:
+ match-clients { !10.0.1.2; !10.0.1.4; 10.0.1/24; };
+ notify-source 10.0.1.3;
+ transfer-source 10.0.1.3;
+ query-source address 10.0.1.3;
+ external:
+ match-clients { any; };
+ recursion no; // don't offer recursion to the world
+ notify-source 10.0.1.4;
+ transfer-source 10.0.1.4;
+ query-source address 10.0.1.4;
+
+
+ You put the external address on the alias so that all the other
+ dns clients on these boxes see the internal view by default.
+
+
+
+
+ BIND 9.3 and later: Use TSIG to select the appropriate view.
+
+
+
+Master 10.0.1.1:
+ key "external" {
+ algorithm hmac-md5;
+ secret "xxxxxxxx";
+ };
+ view "internal" {
+ match-clients { !key external; 10.0.1/24; };
+ ...
+ };
+ view "external" {
+ match-clients { key external; any; };
+ server 10.0.0.2 { keys external; };
+ recursion no;
+ ...
+ };
+
+Slave 10.0.1.2:
+ key "external" {
+ algorithm hmac-md5;
+ secret "xxxxxxxx";
+ };
+ view "internal" {
+ match-clients { !key external; 10.0.1/24; };
+ ...
+ };
+ view "external" {
+ match-clients { key external; any; };
+ server 10.0.0.1 { keys external; };
+ recursion no;
+ ...
+ };
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ I have FreeBSD 4.x and "rndc-confgen -a" just sits there.
+
+
+
+
+ /dev/random is not configured. Use rndcontrol(8) to tell
+ the kernel to use certain interrupts as a source of random
+ events. You can make this permanent by setting rand_irqs
+ in /etc/rc.conf.
+
+
+
+/etc/rc.conf
+rand_irqs="3 14 15"
+
+
+ See also
+
+ http://people.freebsd.org/~dougb/randomness.html
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Why is named listening on UDP port other than 53?
+
+
+
+
+ Named uses a system selected port to make queries of other
+ nameservers. This behaviour can be overridden by using
+ query-source to lock down the port and/or address. See
+ also notify-source and transfer-source.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ I get error messages like multiple RRs of singleton type
+ and CNAME and other data when transferring a zone. What
+ does this mean?
+
+
+
+
+ These indicate a malformed master zone. You can identify
+ the exact records involved by transferring the zone using
+ dig then running named-checkzone on it.
+
+
+
+dig axfr example.com @master-server > tmp
+named-checkzone example.com tmp
+
+
+ A CNAME record cannot exist with the same name as another record
+ except for the DNSSEC records which prove its existance (NSEC).
+
+
+ RFC 1034, Section 3.6.2: If a CNAME RR is present at a node,
+ no other data should be present; this ensures that the data for a
+ canonical name and its aliases cannot be different. This rule also
+ insures that a cached CNAME can be used without checking with an
+ authoritative server for other RR types.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ I get error messages like named.conf:99: unexpected end
+ of input where 99 is the last line of named.conf.
+
+
+
+
+ Some text editors (notepad and wordpad) fail to put a line
+ title indication (e.g. CR/LF) on the last line of a
+ text file. This can be fixed by "adding" a blank line to
+ the end of the file. Named expects to see EOF immediately
+ after EOL and treats text files where this is not met as
+ truncated.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ I get warning messages like zone example.com/IN: refresh:
+ failure trying master 1.2.3.4#53: timed out.
+
+
+
+
+ Check that you can make UDP queries from the slave to the master
+
+
+
+dig +norec example.com soa @1.2.3.4
+
+
+ You could be generating queries faster than the slave can
+ cope with. Lower the serial query rate.
+
+
+
+serial-query-rate 5; // default 20
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ How do I share a dynamic zone between multiple views?
+
+
+
+
+ You choose one view to be master and the second a slave and
+ transfer the zone between views.
+
+
+
+Master 10.0.1.1:
+ key "external" {
+ algorithm hmac-md5;
+ secret "xxxxxxxx";
+ };
+
+ key "mykey" {
+ algorithm hmac-md5;
+ secret "yyyyyyyy";
+ };
+
+ view "internal" {
+ match-clients { !external; 10.0.1/24; };
+ server 10.0.1.1 {
+ /* Deliver notify messages to external view. */
+ keys { external; };
+ };
+ zone "example.com" {
+ type master;
+ file "internal/example.db";
+ allow-update { key mykey; };
+ notify-also { 10.0.1.1; };
+ };
+ };
+
+ view "external" {
+ match-clients { external; any; };
+ zone "example.com" {
+ type slave;
+ file "external/example.db";
+ masters { 10.0.1.1; };
+ transfer-source { 10.0.1.1; };
+ // allow-update-forwarding { any; };
+ // allow-notify { ... };
+ };
+ };
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ I get a error message like zone wireless.ietf56.ietf.org/IN:
+ loading master file primaries/wireless.ietf56.ietf.org: no
+ owner.
+
+
+
+
+ This error is produced when a line in the master file
+ contains leading white space (tab/space) but the is no
+ current record owner name to inherit the name from. Usually
+ this is the result of putting white space before a comment.
+ Forgeting the "@" for the SOA record or indenting the master
+ file.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Why are my logs in GMT (UTC).
+
+
+
+
+ You are running chrooted (-t) and have not supplied local timzone
+ information in the chroot area.
+
+
+ FreeBSD: /etc/localtime
+ Solaris: /etc/TIMEZONE and /usr/share/lib/zoneinfo
+ OSF: /etc/zoneinfo/localtime
+
+
+ See also tzset(3) and zic(8).
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ I get the error message named: capset failed: Operation
+ not permitted when starting named.
+
+
+
+
+ The capability module, part of "Linux Security Modules/LSM",
+ has not been loaded into the kernel. See insmod(8).
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ I get rndc: connect failed: connection refused when
+ I try to run rndc.
+
+
+
+
+ This is usually a configuration error.
+
+
+ First ensure that named is running and no errors are being
+ reported at startup (/var/log/messages or equivalent).
+ Running "named -g <usual arguments>" from a title
+ can help at this point.
+
+
+ Secondly ensure that named is configured to use rndc either
+ by "rndc-confgen -a", rndc-confgen or manually. The
+ Administrators Reference manual has details on how to do
+ this.
+
+
+ Old versions of rndc-confgen used localhost rather than
+ 127.0.0.1 in /etc/rndc.conf for the default server. Update
+ /etc/rndc.conf if necessary so that the default server
+ listed in /etc/rndc.conf matches the addresses used in
+ named.conf. "localhost" has two address (127.0.0.1 and
+ ::1).
+
+
+ If you use "rndc-confgen -a" and named is running with -t or -u
+ ensure that /etc/rndc.conf has the correct ownership and that
+ a copy is in the chroot area. You can do this by re-running
+ "rndc-confgen -a" with appropriate -t and -u arguments.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ I don't get RRSIG's returned when I use "dig +dnssec".
+
+
+
+
+ You need to ensure DNSSEC is enabled (dnssec-enable yes;).
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ I get Error 1067 when starting named under Windows.
+
+
+
+
+ This is the service manager saying that named exited. You
+ need to examine the Application log in the EventViewer to
+ find out why.
+
+
+ Common causes are that you failed to create "named.conf"
+ (usually "C:\windows\dns\etc\named.conf") or failed to
+ specify the directory in named.conf.
+
+
+
+options {
+ Directory "C:\windows\dns\etc";
+};
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ I get transfer of 'example.net/IN' from 192.168.4.12#53:
+ failed while receiving responses: permission denied error
+ messages.
+
+
+
+
+ These indicate a filesystem permission error preventing
+ named creating / renaming the temporary file. These will
+ usually also have other associated error messages like
+
+
+
+"dumping master file: sl/tmp-XXXX5il3sQ: open: permission denied"
+
+
+ Named needs write permission on the directory containing
+ the file. Named writes the new cache file to a temporary
+ file then renames it to the name specified in named.conf
+ to ensure that the contents are always complete. This is
+ to prevent named loading a partial zone in the event of
+ power failure or similar interrupting the write of the
+ master file.
+
+
+ Note file names are relative to the directory specified in
+ options and any chroot directory ([<chroot
+ dir>/][<options dir>]).
+
+
+
+ If named is invoked as "named -t /chroot/DNS" with
+ the following named.conf then "/chroot/DNS/var/named/sl"
+ needs to be writable by the user named is running as.
+
+
+options {
+ directory "/var/named";
+};
+
+zone "example.net" {
+ type slave;
+ file "sl/example.net";
+ masters { 192.168.4.12; };
+};
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ How do I intergrate BIND 9 and Solaris SMF
+
+
+
+
+ Sun has a blog entry describing how to do this.
+
+
+
+ http://blogs.sun.com/roller/page/anay/Weblog?catname=%2FSolaris
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Can a NS record refer to a CNAME.
+
+
+
+
+ No. The rules for glue (copies of the *address* records
+ in the parent zones) and additional section processing do
+ not allow it to work.
+
+
+ You would have to add both the CNAME and address records
+ (A/AAAA) as glue to the parent zone and have CNAMEs be
+ followed when doing additional section processing to make
+ it work. No namesever implementation supports either of
+ these requirements.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ What does RFC 1918 response from Internet for
+ 0.0.0.10.IN-ADDR.ARPA mean?
+
+
+
+
+ If the IN-ADDR.ARPA name covered refers to a internal address
+ space you are using then you have failed to follow RFC 1918
+ usage rules and are leaking queries to the Internet. You
+ should establish your own zones for these addresses to prevent
+ you quering the Internet's name servers for these addresses.
+ Please see http://as112.net/
+ for details of the problems you are causing and the counter
+ measures that have had to be deployed.
+
+
+ If you are not using these private addresses then a client
+ has queried for them. You can just ignore the messages,
+ get the offending client to stop sending you these messages
+ as they are most probably leaking them or setup your own zones
+ empty zones to serve answers to these queries.
+
+
+
+zone "10.IN-ADDR.ARPA" {
+ type master;
+ file "empty";
+};
+
+zone "16.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA" {
+ type master;
+ file "empty";
+};
+
+...
+
+zone "31.172.IN-ADDR.ARPA" {
+ type master;
+ file "empty";
+};
+
+zone "168.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA" {
+ type master;
+ file "empty";
+};
+
+empty:
+@ 10800 IN SOA <name-of-server>. <contact-email>. (
+ 1 3600 1200 604800 10800 )
+@ 10800 IN NS <name-of-server>.
+
+
+ Future versions of named are likely to do this automatically.
+
+
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/README b/contrib/bind9/README
index 8e3d01df5bb..574b07d7324 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/README
+++ b/contrib/bind9/README
@@ -43,6 +43,26 @@ BIND 9
Nominum, Inc.
+BIND 9.3.2
+
+ BIND 9.3.2 is a maintenance release, containing fixes for
+ a number of bugs in 9.3.1.
+
+ libbind: corresponds to that from BIND 8.4.7-REL.
+
+ Known Issues:
+
+ The following INSIST can be triggered with DNSSEC enabled.
+
+resolver.c:762: INSIST(result != 0 || dns_rdataset_isassociated(event->rdataset) || fctx->type == ((dns_rdatatype_t)dns_rdatatype_any) || fctx->type == ((dns_rdatatype_t)dns_rdatatype_rrsig)) failed
+
+ We are still trying to isolate the cause. If you have core
+ dump please send a bug report to bind9-bugs@isc.org with
+ the location of the core, named executable and OS details.
+
+ Note: contrib/nanny contains a perl script to restart named
+ in the event of a INSIST/REQUIRE/ENSURE failure.
+
BIND 9.3.1
BIND 9.3.1 is a maintenance release, containing fixes for
@@ -210,7 +230,7 @@ Building
UnixWare 7.1.1
HP-UX 10.20
BSD/OS 4.2
- Mac OS X 10.1
+ Mac OS X 10.1, 10.3.8
To build, just
@@ -300,9 +320,11 @@ Building
Building with gcc is not supported, unless gcc is the vendor's usual
compiler (e.g. the various BSD systems, Linux).
+ Known compiler issues:
* gcc-3.2.1 and gcc-3.1.1 is known to cause problems with solaris-x86.
* gcc prior to gcc-3.2.3 ultrasparc generates incorrect code at -02.
* gcc-3.3.5 powerpc generates incorrect code at -02.
+ * Irix, MipsPRO 7.4.1m is known to cause problems.
A limited test suite can be run with "make test". Many of
the tests require you to configure a set of virtual IP addresses
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/check/named-checkconf.8 b/contrib/bind9/bin/check/named-checkconf.8
index 25dbdd86ff1..68b745aed29 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/check/named-checkconf.8
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/check/named-checkconf.8
@@ -1,59 +1,70 @@
-.\" Copyright (C) 2004 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
-.\" Copyright (C) 2000-2002 Internet Software Consortium.
-.\"
+.\" Copyright (C) 2004, 2005 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+.\" Copyright (C) 2000-2002 Internet Software Consortium.
+.\"
.\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
.\" purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
.\" copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
-.\"
+.\"
.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ISC DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH
.\" REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
-.\" AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL ISC BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT,
+.\" AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL ISC BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT,
.\" INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
.\" LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE
.\" OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
.\" PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
.\"
-.\" $Id: named-checkconf.8,v 1.11.12.4 2004/06/03 05:35:41 marka Exp $
+.\" $Id: named-checkconf.8,v 1.11.12.7 2005/10/13 02:33:41 marka Exp $
.\"
-.TH "NAMED-CHECKCONF" "8" "June 14, 2000" "BIND9" ""
-.SH NAME
-named-checkconf \- named configuration file syntax checking tool
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-\fBnamed-checkconf\fR [ \fB-v\fR ] [ \fB-j\fR ] [ \fB-t \fIdirectory\fB\fR ] \fBfilename\fR [ \fB-z\fR ]
+.hy 0
+.ad l
+.\" ** You probably do not want to edit this file directly **
+.\" It was generated using the DocBook XSL Stylesheets (version 1.69.1).
+.\" Instead of manually editing it, you probably should edit the DocBook XML
+.\" source for it and then use the DocBook XSL Stylesheets to regenerate it.
+.TH "NAMED\-CHECKCONF" "8" "June 14, 2000" "BIND9" "BIND9"
+.\" disable hyphenation
+.nh
+.\" disable justification (adjust text to left margin only)
+.ad l
+.SH "NAME"
+named\-checkconf \- named configuration file syntax checking tool
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.HP 16
+\fBnamed\-checkconf\fR [\fB\-v\fR] [\fB\-j\fR] [\fB\-t\ \fR\fB\fIdirectory\fR\fR] {filename} [\fB\-z\fR]
.SH "DESCRIPTION"
.PP
-\fBnamed-checkconf\fR checks the syntax, but not
-the semantics, of a named configuration file.
+\fBnamed\-checkconf\fR
+checks the syntax, but not the semantics, of a named configuration file.
.SH "OPTIONS"
.TP
-\fB-t \fIdirectory\fB\fR
-chroot to \fIdirectory\fR so that include
-directives in the configuration file are processed as if
-run by a similarly chrooted named.
+\-t \fIdirectory\fR
+chroot to
+\fIdirectory\fR
+so that include directives in the configuration file are processed as if run by a similarly chrooted named.
.TP
-\fB-v\fR
-Print the version of the \fBnamed-checkconf\fR
+\-v
+Print the version of the
+\fBnamed\-checkconf\fR
program and exit.
.TP
-\fB-z\fR
+\-z
Perform a check load the master zonefiles found in
\fInamed.conf\fR.
.TP
-\fB-j\fR
+\-j
When loading a zonefile read the journal if it exists.
.TP
-\fBfilename\fR
-The name of the configuration file to be checked. If not
-specified, it defaults to \fI/etc/named.conf\fR.
+filename
+The name of the configuration file to be checked. If not specified, it defaults to
+\fI/etc/named.conf\fR.
.SH "RETURN VALUES"
.PP
-\fBnamed-checkconf\fR returns an exit status of 1 if
-errors were detected and 0 otherwise.
+\fBnamed\-checkconf\fR
+returns an exit status of 1 if errors were detected and 0 otherwise.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.PP
\fBnamed\fR(8),
-\fIBIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual\fR.
+BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual.
.SH "AUTHOR"
.PP
Internet Systems Consortium
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/check/named-checkconf.docbook b/contrib/bind9/bin/check/named-checkconf.docbook
index d1336cfa537..c2529f642fe 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/check/named-checkconf.docbook
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/check/named-checkconf.docbook
@@ -1,7 +1,9 @@
-
+]>
-
+
@@ -29,6 +31,20 @@
BIND9
+
+
+ 2004
+ 2005
+ Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+
+
+ 2000
+ 2001
+ 2002
+ Internet Software Consortium.
+
+
+
named-checkconfnamed configuration file syntax checking tool
@@ -116,6 +132,7 @@
named-checkconf returns an exit status of 1 if
errors were detected and 0 otherwise.
+
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/check/named-checkconf.html b/contrib/bind9/bin/check/named-checkconf.html
index 8d5f38e99c5..14b8ff89cb1 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/check/named-checkconf.html
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/check/named-checkconf.html
@@ -1,216 +1,92 @@
-
-
-
-
-named-checkconf
named-checkconf
Name
named-checkconf -- named configuration file syntax checking tool
+
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/check/named-checkzone.8 b/contrib/bind9/bin/check/named-checkzone.8
index efa600c8e08..33402d5fe8d 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/check/named-checkzone.8
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/check/named-checkzone.8
@@ -1,94 +1,111 @@
-.\" Copyright (C) 2004 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
-.\" Copyright (C) 2000-2002 Internet Software Consortium.
-.\"
+.\" Copyright (C) 2004, 2005 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+.\" Copyright (C) 2000-2002 Internet Software Consortium.
+.\"
.\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
.\" purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
.\" copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
-.\"
+.\"
.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ISC DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH
.\" REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
-.\" AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL ISC BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT,
+.\" AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL ISC BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT,
.\" INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
.\" LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE
.\" OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
.\" PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
.\"
-.\" $Id: named-checkzone.8,v 1.11.2.1.8.4 2004/06/03 05:35:42 marka Exp $
+.\" $Id: named-checkzone.8,v 1.11.2.1.8.8 2005/10/13 02:33:41 marka Exp $
.\"
-.TH "NAMED-CHECKZONE" "8" "June 13, 2000" "BIND9" ""
-.SH NAME
-named-checkzone \- zone file validity checking tool
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-\fBnamed-checkzone\fR [ \fB-d\fR ] [ \fB-j\fR ] [ \fB-q\fR ] [ \fB-v\fR ] [ \fB-c \fIclass\fB\fR ] [ \fB-k \fImode\fB\fR ] [ \fB-n \fImode\fB\fR ] [ \fB-o \fIfilename\fB\fR ] [ \fB-t \fIdirectory\fB\fR ] [ \fB-w \fIdirectory\fB\fR ] [ \fB-D\fR ] \fBzonename\fR \fBfilename\fR
+.hy 0
+.ad l
+.\" ** You probably do not want to edit this file directly **
+.\" It was generated using the DocBook XSL Stylesheets (version 1.69.1).
+.\" Instead of manually editing it, you probably should edit the DocBook XML
+.\" source for it and then use the DocBook XSL Stylesheets to regenerate it.
+.TH "NAMED\-CHECKZONE" "8" "June 13, 2000" "BIND9" "BIND9"
+.\" disable hyphenation
+.nh
+.\" disable justification (adjust text to left margin only)
+.ad l
+.SH "NAME"
+named\-checkzone \- zone file validity checking tool
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.HP 16
+\fBnamed\-checkzone\fR [\fB\-d\fR] [\fB\-j\fR] [\fB\-q\fR] [\fB\-v\fR] [\fB\-c\ \fR\fB\fIclass\fR\fR] [\fB\-k\ \fR\fB\fImode\fR\fR] [\fB\-n\ \fR\fB\fImode\fR\fR] [\fB\-o\ \fR\fB\fIfilename\fR\fR] [\fB\-t\ \fR\fB\fIdirectory\fR\fR] [\fB\-w\ \fR\fB\fIdirectory\fR\fR] [\fB\-D\fR] {zonename} {filename}
.SH "DESCRIPTION"
.PP
-\fBnamed-checkzone\fR checks the syntax and integrity of
-a zone file. It performs the same checks as \fBnamed\fR
+\fBnamed\-checkzone\fR
+checks the syntax and integrity of a zone file. It performs the same checks as
+\fBnamed\fR
does when loading a zone. This makes
-\fBnamed-checkzone\fR useful for checking zone
-files before configuring them into a name server.
+\fBnamed\-checkzone\fR
+useful for checking zone files before configuring them into a name server.
.SH "OPTIONS"
.TP
-\fB-d\fR
+\-d
Enable debugging.
.TP
-\fB-q\fR
-Quiet mode - exit code only.
+\-q
+Quiet mode \- exit code only.
.TP
-\fB-v\fR
-Print the version of the \fBnamed-checkzone\fR
+\-v
+Print the version of the
+\fBnamed\-checkzone\fR
program and exit.
.TP
-\fB-j\fR
+\-j
When loading the zone file read the journal if it exists.
.TP
-\fB-c \fIclass\fB\fR
+\-c \fIclass\fR
Specify the class of the zone. If not specified "IN" is assumed.
.TP
-\fB-k \fImode\fB\fR
-Perform \fB"check-name"\fR checks with the specified failure mode.
-Possible modes are \fB"fail"\fR,
-\fB"warn"\fR (default) and
+\-k \fImode\fR
+Perform
+\fB"check\-name"\fR
+checks with the specified failure mode. Possible modes are
+\fB"fail"\fR,
+\fB"warn"\fR
+(default) and
\fB"ignore"\fR.
.TP
-\fB-n \fImode\fB\fR
-Specify whether NS records should be checked to see if they
-are addresses. Possible modes are \fB"fail"\fR,
-\fB"warn"\fR (default) and
+\-n \fImode\fR
+Specify whether NS records should be checked to see if they are addresses. Possible modes are
+\fB"fail"\fR,
+\fB"warn"\fR
+(default) and
\fB"ignore"\fR.
.TP
-\fB-o \fIfilename\fB\fR
-Write zone output to \fIdirectory\fR.
+\-o \fIfilename\fR
+Write zone output to
+\fIfilename\fR.
.TP
-\fB-t \fIdirectory\fB\fR
-chroot to \fIdirectory\fR so that include
-directives in the configuration file are processed as if
-run by a similarly chrooted named.
+\-t \fIdirectory\fR
+chroot to
+\fIdirectory\fR
+so that include directives in the configuration file are processed as if run by a similarly chrooted named.
.TP
-\fB-w \fIdirectory\fB\fR
-chdir to \fIdirectory\fR so that relative
-filenames in master file $INCLUDE directives work. This
-is similar to the directory clause in
+\-w \fIdirectory\fR
+chdir to
+\fIdirectory\fR
+so that relative filenames in master file $INCLUDE directives work. This is similar to the directory clause in
\fInamed.conf\fR.
.TP
-\fB-D\fR
+\-D
Dump zone file in canonical format.
.TP
-\fBzonename\fR
+zonename
The domain name of the zone being checked.
.TP
-\fBfilename\fR
+filename
The name of the zone file.
.SH "RETURN VALUES"
.PP
-\fBnamed-checkzone\fR returns an exit status of 1 if
-errors were detected and 0 otherwise.
+\fBnamed\-checkzone\fR
+returns an exit status of 1 if errors were detected and 0 otherwise.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.PP
\fBnamed\fR(8),
-\fIRFC 1035\fR,
-\fIBIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual\fR.
+RFC 1035,
+BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual.
.SH "AUTHOR"
.PP
Internet Systems Consortium
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/check/named-checkzone.docbook b/contrib/bind9/bin/check/named-checkzone.docbook
index 68b0baeeba4..ce0d78bdbdf 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/check/named-checkzone.docbook
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/check/named-checkzone.docbook
@@ -1,7 +1,9 @@
-
+]>
-
+
@@ -29,6 +31,20 @@
BIND9
+
+
+ 2004
+ 2005
+ Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+
+
+ 2000
+ 2001
+ 2002
+ Internet Software Consortium.
+
+
+
named-checkzonezone file validity checking tool
@@ -103,6 +119,7 @@
When loading the zone file read the journal if it exists.
+
-c class
@@ -141,7 +158,7 @@
-o filename
- Write zone output to directory.
+ Write zone output to filename.
@@ -205,6 +222,7 @@
named-checkzone returns an exit status of 1 if
errors were detected and 0 otherwise.
+
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/check/named-checkzone.html b/contrib/bind9/bin/check/named-checkzone.html
index dd14c1f8fd7..cf544c94728 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/check/named-checkzone.html
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/check/named-checkzone.html
@@ -1,367 +1,135 @@
-
-
-
-
-named-checkzone
named-checkzone
Name
named-checkzone -- zone file validity checking tool
+ named-checkzone checks the syntax and integrity of
+ a zone file. It performs the same checks as named
does when loading a zone. This makes
- named-checkzone useful for checking zone
+ named-checkzone useful for checking zone
files before configuring them into a name server.
-
OPTIONS
-d
Enable debugging.
-
-q
Quiet mode - exit code only.
-
-v
Print the version of the named-checkzone
+
+
+
+
OPTIONS
+
+
-d
+
+ Enable debugging.
+
+
-q
+
+ Quiet mode - exit code only.
+
+
-v
+
+ Print the version of the named-checkzone
program and exit.
-
-j
When loading the zone file read the journal if it exists.
-
-c class
Specify the class of the zone. If not specified "IN" is assumed.
-
-k mode
Perform "check-name" checks with the specified failure mode.
- Possible modes are "fail",
- "warn" (default) and
- "ignore".
-
-n mode
Specify whether NS records should be checked to see if they
- are addresses. Possible modes are "fail",
- "warn" (default) and
- "ignore".
-
-o filename
Write zone output to directory.
-
-t directory
chroot to directory so that include
+
+
-j
+
+ When loading the zone file read the journal if it exists.
+
+
-c class
+
+ Specify the class of the zone. If not specified "IN" is assumed.
+
+
-k mode
+
+ Perform "check-name" checks with the specified failure mode.
+ Possible modes are "fail",
+ "warn" (default) and
+ "ignore".
+
+
-n mode
+
+ Specify whether NS records should be checked to see if they
+ are addresses. Possible modes are "fail",
+ "warn" (default) and
+ "ignore".
+
+
-o filename
+
+ Write zone output to filename.
+
+
-t directory
+
+ chroot to directory so that include
directives in the configuration file are processed as if
run by a similarly chrooted named.
-
-w directory
chdir to directory so that relative
+
+
-w directory
+
+ chdir to directory so that relative
filenames in master file $INCLUDE directives work. This
is similar to the directory clause in
- named.conf.
-
-D
Dump zone file in canonical format.
-
zonename
The domain name of the zone being checked.
-
filename
The name of the zone file.
-
RETURN VALUES
named-checkzone returns an exit status of 1 if
+ named.conf.
+
+
-D
+
+ Dump zone file in canonical format.
+
+
zonename
+
+ The domain name of the zone being checked.
+
+
filename
+
+ The name of the zone file.
+
+
+
+
+
RETURN VALUES
+
+ named-checkzone returns an exit status of 1 if
errors were detected and 0 otherwise.
-
+
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/dig/dig.1 b/contrib/bind9/bin/dig/dig.1
index f14d9216873..7031217dd2b 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/dig/dig.1
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/dig/dig.1
@@ -1,216 +1,244 @@
-.\" Copyright (C) 2004 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
-.\" Copyright (C) 2000-2003 Internet Software Consortium.
-.\"
+.\" Copyright (C) 2004, 2005 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+.\" Copyright (C) 2000-2003 Internet Software Consortium.
+.\"
.\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
.\" purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
.\" copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
-.\"
+.\"
.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ISC DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH
.\" REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
-.\" AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL ISC BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT,
+.\" AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL ISC BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT,
.\" INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
.\" LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE
.\" OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
.\" PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
.\"
-.\" $Id: dig.1,v 1.14.2.4.2.6 2004/06/23 09:11:01 marka Exp $
+.\" $Id: dig.1,v 1.14.2.4.2.10 2005/10/13 02:33:42 marka Exp $
.\"
-.TH "DIG" "1" "Jun 30, 2000" "BIND9" ""
-.SH NAME
+.hy 0
+.ad l
+.\" ** You probably do not want to edit this file directly **
+.\" It was generated using the DocBook XSL Stylesheets (version 1.69.1).
+.\" Instead of manually editing it, you probably should edit the DocBook XML
+.\" source for it and then use the DocBook XSL Stylesheets to regenerate it.
+.TH "DIG" "1" "Jun 30, 2000" "BIND9" "BIND9"
+.\" disable hyphenation
+.nh
+.\" disable justification (adjust text to left margin only)
+.ad l
+.SH "NAME"
dig \- DNS lookup utility
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-\fBdig\fR [ \fB@server\fR ] [ \fB-b \fIaddress\fB\fR ] [ \fB-c \fIclass\fB\fR ] [ \fB-f \fIfilename\fB\fR ] [ \fB-k \fIfilename\fB\fR ] [ \fB-p \fIport#\fB\fR ] [ \fB-t \fItype\fB\fR ] [ \fB-x \fIaddr\fB\fR ] [ \fB-y \fIname:key\fB\fR ] [ \fB-4\fR ] [ \fB-6\fR ] [ \fBname\fR ] [ \fBtype\fR ] [ \fBclass\fR ] [ \fBqueryopt\fR\fI...\fR ]
-.sp
-\fBdig\fR [ \fB-h\fR ]
-.sp
-\fBdig\fR [ \fBglobal-queryopt\fR\fI...\fR ] [ \fBquery\fR\fI...\fR ]
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.HP 4
+\fBdig\fR [@server] [\fB\-b\ \fR\fB\fIaddress\fR\fR] [\fB\-c\ \fR\fB\fIclass\fR\fR] [\fB\-f\ \fR\fB\fIfilename\fR\fR] [\fB\-k\ \fR\fB\fIfilename\fR\fR] [\fB\-p\ \fR\fB\fIport#\fR\fR] [\fB\-t\ \fR\fB\fItype\fR\fR] [\fB\-x\ \fR\fB\fIaddr\fR\fR] [\fB\-y\ \fR\fB\fIname:key\fR\fR] [\fB\-4\fR] [\fB\-6\fR] [name] [type] [class] [queryopt...]
+.HP 4
+\fBdig\fR [\fB\-h\fR]
+.HP 4
+\fBdig\fR [global\-queryopt...] [query...]
.SH "DESCRIPTION"
.PP
-\fBdig\fR (domain information groper) is a flexible tool
-for interrogating DNS name servers. It performs DNS lookups and
-displays the answers that are returned from the name server(s) that
-were queried. Most DNS administrators use \fBdig\fR to
-troubleshoot DNS problems because of its flexibility, ease of use and
-clarity of output. Other lookup tools tend to have less functionality
-than \fBdig\fR.
+\fBdig\fR
+(domain information groper) is a flexible tool for interrogating DNS name servers. It performs DNS lookups and displays the answers that are returned from the name server(s) that were queried. Most DNS administrators use
+\fBdig\fR
+to troubleshoot DNS problems because of its flexibility, ease of use and clarity of output. Other lookup tools tend to have less functionality than
+\fBdig\fR.
.PP
-Although \fBdig\fR is normally used with command-line
-arguments, it also has a batch mode of operation for reading lookup
-requests from a file. A brief summary of its command-line arguments
-and options is printed when the \fB-h\fR option is given.
-Unlike earlier versions, the BIND9 implementation of
-\fBdig\fR allows multiple lookups to be issued from the
-command line.
+Although
+\fBdig\fR
+is normally used with command\-line arguments, it also has a batch mode of operation for reading lookup requests from a file. A brief summary of its command\-line arguments and options is printed when the
+\fB\-h\fR
+option is given. Unlike earlier versions, the BIND9 implementation of
+\fBdig\fR
+allows multiple lookups to be issued from the command line.
.PP
Unless it is told to query a specific name server,
-\fBdig\fR will try each of the servers listed in
+\fBdig\fR
+will try each of the servers listed in
\fI/etc/resolv.conf\fR.
.PP
-When no command line arguments or options are given, will perform an
-NS query for "." (the root).
+When no command line arguments or options are given, will perform an NS query for "." (the root).
.PP
-It is possible to set per-user defaults for \fBdig\fR via
-\fI${HOME}/.digrc\fR. This file is read and any options in it
-are applied before the command line arguments.
+It is possible to set per\-user defaults for
+\fBdig\fR
+via
+\fI${HOME}/.digrc\fR. This file is read and any options in it are applied before the command line arguments.
.SH "SIMPLE USAGE"
.PP
-A typical invocation of \fBdig\fR looks like:
+A typical invocation of
+\fBdig\fR
+looks like:
.sp
.nf
dig @server name type
-.sp
.fi
+.sp
where:
.TP
\fBserver\fR
-is the name or IP address of the name server to query. This can be an IPv4
-address in dotted-decimal notation or an IPv6
-address in colon-delimited notation. When the supplied
-\fIserver\fR argument is a hostname,
-\fBdig\fR resolves that name before querying that name
-server. If no \fIserver\fR argument is provided,
-\fBdig\fR consults \fI/etc/resolv.conf\fR
-and queries the name servers listed there. The reply from the name
-server that responds is displayed.
+is the name or IP address of the name server to query. This can be an IPv4 address in dotted\-decimal notation or an IPv6 address in colon\-delimited notation. When the supplied
+\fIserver\fR
+argument is a hostname,
+\fBdig\fR
+resolves that name before querying that name server. If no
+\fIserver\fR
+argument is provided,
+\fBdig\fR
+consults
+\fI/etc/resolv.conf\fR
+and queries the name servers listed there. The reply from the name server that responds is displayed.
.TP
\fBname\fR
is the name of the resource record that is to be looked up.
.TP
\fBtype\fR
-indicates what type of query is required \(em
-ANY, A, MX, SIG, etc.
-\fItype\fR can be any valid query type. If no
-\fItype\fR argument is supplied,
-\fBdig\fR will perform a lookup for an A record.
+indicates what type of query is required \(em ANY, A, MX, SIG, etc.
+\fItype\fR
+can be any valid query type. If no
+\fItype\fR
+argument is supplied,
+\fBdig\fR
+will perform a lookup for an A record.
.SH "OPTIONS"
.PP
-The \fB-b\fR option sets the source IP address of the query
-to \fIaddress\fR. This must be a valid address on
-one of the host's network interfaces or "0.0.0.0" or "::". An optional port
-may be specified by appending "#"
+The
+\fB\-b\fR
+option sets the source IP address of the query to
+\fIaddress\fR. This must be a valid address on one of the host's network interfaces or "0.0.0.0" or "::". An optional port may be specified by appending "#"
.PP
The default query class (IN for internet) is overridden by the
-\fB-c\fR option. \fIclass\fR is any valid
-class, such as HS for Hesiod records or CH for CHAOSNET records.
+\fB\-c\fR
+option.
+\fIclass\fR
+is any valid class, such as HS for Hesiod records or CH for CHAOSNET records.
.PP
-The \fB-f\fR option makes \fBdig \fR operate
-in batch mode by reading a list of lookup requests to process from the
-file \fIfilename\fR. The file contains a number of
-queries, one per line. Each entry in the file should be organised in
-the same way they would be presented as queries to
-\fBdig\fR using the command-line interface.
+The
+\fB\-f\fR
+option makes
+\fBdig \fR
+operate in batch mode by reading a list of lookup requests to process from the file
+\fIfilename\fR. The file contains a number of queries, one per line. Each entry in the file should be organised in the same way they would be presented as queries to
+\fBdig\fR
+using the command\-line interface.
.PP
-If a non-standard port number is to be queried, the
-\fB-p\fR option is used. \fIport#\fR is
-the port number that \fBdig\fR will send its queries
-instead of the standard DNS port number 53. This option would be used
-to test a name server that has been configured to listen for queries
-on a non-standard port number.
+If a non\-standard port number is to be queried, the
+\fB\-p\fR
+option is used.
+\fIport#\fR
+is the port number that
+\fBdig\fR
+will send its queries instead of the standard DNS port number 53. This option would be used to test a name server that has been configured to listen for queries on a non\-standard port number.
.PP
-The \fB-4\fR option forces \fBdig\fR to only
-use IPv4 query transport. The \fB-6\fR option forces
-\fBdig\fR to only use IPv6 query transport.
+The
+\fB\-4\fR
+option forces
+\fBdig\fR
+to only use IPv4 query transport. The
+\fB\-6\fR
+option forces
+\fBdig\fR
+to only use IPv6 query transport.
.PP
-The \fB-t\fR option sets the query type to
-\fItype\fR. It can be any valid query type which is
-supported in BIND9. The default query type "A", unless the
-\fB-x\fR option is supplied to indicate a reverse lookup.
-A zone transfer can be requested by specifying a type of AXFR. When
-an incremental zone transfer (IXFR) is required,
-\fItype\fR is set to ixfr=N.
-The incremental zone transfer will contain the changes made to the zone
-since the serial number in the zone's SOA record was
+The
+\fB\-t\fR
+option sets the query type to
+\fItype\fR. It can be any valid query type which is supported in BIND9. The default query type "A", unless the
+\fB\-x\fR
+option is supplied to indicate a reverse lookup. A zone transfer can be requested by specifying a type of AXFR. When an incremental zone transfer (IXFR) is required,
+\fItype\fR
+is set to
+ixfr=N. The incremental zone transfer will contain the changes made to the zone since the serial number in the zone's SOA record was
\fIN\fR.
.PP
-Reverse lookups - mapping addresses to names - are simplified by the
-\fB-x\fR option. \fIaddr\fR is an IPv4
-address in dotted-decimal notation, or a colon-delimited IPv6 address.
-When this option is used, there is no need to provide the
-\fIname\fR, \fIclass\fR and
-\fItype\fR arguments. \fBdig\fR
+Reverse lookups \- mapping addresses to names \- are simplified by the
+\fB\-x\fR
+option.
+\fIaddr\fR
+is an IPv4 address in dotted\-decimal notation, or a colon\-delimited IPv6 address. When this option is used, there is no need to provide the
+\fIname\fR,
+\fIclass\fR
+and
+\fItype\fR
+arguments.
+\fBdig\fR
automatically performs a lookup for a name like
-11.12.13.10.in-addr.arpa and sets the query type and
-class to PTR and IN respectively. By default, IPv6 addresses are
-looked up using nibble format under the IP6.ARPA domain.
-To use the older RFC1886 method using the IP6.INT domain
-specify the \fB-i\fR option. Bit string labels (RFC2874)
-are now experimental and are not attempted.
+11.12.13.10.in\-addr.arpa
+and sets the query type and class to PTR and IN respectively. By default, IPv6 addresses are looked up using nibble format under the IP6.ARPA domain. To use the older RFC1886 method using the IP6.INT domain specify the
+\fB\-i\fR
+option. Bit string labels (RFC2874) are now experimental and are not attempted.
.PP
-To sign the DNS queries sent by \fBdig\fR and their
-responses using transaction signatures (TSIG), specify a TSIG key file
-using the \fB-k\fR option. You can also specify the TSIG
-key itself on the command line using the \fB-y\fR option;
-\fIname\fR is the name of the TSIG key and
-\fIkey\fR is the actual key. The key is a base-64
-encoded string, typically generated by \fBdnssec-keygen\fR(8).
-Caution should be taken when using the \fB-y\fR option on
-multi-user systems as the key can be visible in the output from
-\fBps\fR(1) or in the shell's history file. When
-using TSIG authentication with \fBdig\fR, the name
-server that is queried needs to know the key and algorithm that is
-being used. In BIND, this is done by providing appropriate
-\fBkey\fR and \fBserver\fR statements in
+To sign the DNS queries sent by
+\fBdig\fR
+and their responses using transaction signatures (TSIG), specify a TSIG key file using the
+\fB\-k\fR
+option. You can also specify the TSIG key itself on the command line using the
+\fB\-y\fR
+option;
+\fIname\fR
+is the name of the TSIG key and
+\fIkey\fR
+is the actual key. The key is a base\-64 encoded string, typically generated by
+\fBdnssec\-keygen\fR(8). Caution should be taken when using the
+\fB\-y\fR
+option on multi\-user systems as the key can be visible in the output from
+\fBps\fR(1 )
+or in the shell's history file. When using TSIG authentication with
+\fBdig\fR, the name server that is queried needs to know the key and algorithm that is being used. In BIND, this is done by providing appropriate
+\fBkey\fR
+and
+\fBserver\fR
+statements in
\fInamed.conf\fR.
.SH "QUERY OPTIONS"
.PP
-\fBdig\fR provides a number of query options which affect
-the way in which lookups are made and the results displayed. Some of
-these set or reset flag bits in the query header, some determine which
-sections of the answer get printed, and others determine the timeout
-and retry strategies.
+\fBdig\fR
+provides a number of query options which affect the way in which lookups are made and the results displayed. Some of these set or reset flag bits in the query header, some determine which sections of the answer get printed, and others determine the timeout and retry strategies.
.PP
-Each query option is identified by a keyword preceded by a plus sign
-(+). Some keywords set or reset an option. These may be preceded
-by the string no to negate the meaning of that keyword. Other
-keywords assign values to options like the timeout interval. They
-have the form \fB+keyword=value\fR.
-The query options are:
+Each query option is identified by a keyword preceded by a plus sign (+). Some keywords set or reset an option. These may be preceded by the string
+no
+to negate the meaning of that keyword. Other keywords assign values to options like the timeout interval. They have the form
+\fB+keyword=value\fR. The query options are:
.TP
\fB+[no]tcp\fR
-Use [do not use] TCP when querying name servers. The default
-behaviour is to use UDP unless an AXFR or IXFR query is requested, in
-which case a TCP connection is used.
+Use [do not use] TCP when querying name servers. The default behaviour is to use UDP unless an AXFR or IXFR query is requested, in which case a TCP connection is used.
.TP
\fB+[no]vc\fR
-Use [do not use] TCP when querying name servers. This alternate
-syntax to \fI+[no]tcp\fR is provided for backwards
-compatibility. The "vc" stands for "virtual circuit".
+Use [do not use] TCP when querying name servers. This alternate syntax to
+\fI+[no]tcp\fR
+is provided for backwards compatibility. The "vc" stands for "virtual circuit".
.TP
\fB+[no]ignore\fR
-Ignore truncation in UDP responses instead of retrying with TCP. By
-default, TCP retries are performed.
+Ignore truncation in UDP responses instead of retrying with TCP. By default, TCP retries are performed.
.TP
\fB+domain=somename\fR
Set the search list to contain the single domain
\fIsomename\fR, as if specified in a
-\fBdomain\fR directive in
-\fI/etc/resolv.conf\fR, and enable search list
-processing as if the \fI+search\fR option were given.
+\fBdomain\fR
+directive in
+\fI/etc/resolv.conf\fR, and enable search list processing as if the
+\fI+search\fR
+option were given.
.TP
\fB+[no]search\fR
-Use [do not use] the search list defined by the searchlist or domain
-directive in \fIresolv.conf\fR (if any).
-The search list is not used by default.
+Use [do not use] the search list defined by the searchlist or domain directive in
+\fIresolv.conf\fR
+(if any). The search list is not used by default.
.TP
\fB+[no]defname\fR
-Deprecated, treated as a synonym for \fI+[no]search\fR
+Deprecated, treated as a synonym for
+\fI+[no]search\fR
.TP
\fB+[no]aaonly\fR
Sets the "aa" flag in the query.
.TP
\fB+[no]aaflag\fR
-A synonym for \fI+[no]aaonly\fR.
+A synonym for
+\fI+[no]aaonly\fR.
.TP
\fB+[no]adflag\fR
-Set [do not set] the AD (authentic data) bit in the query. The AD bit
-currently has a standard meaning only in responses, not in queries,
-but the ability to set the bit in the query is provided for
-completeness.
+Set [do not set] the AD (authentic data) bit in the query. The AD bit currently has a standard meaning only in responses, not in queries, but the ability to set the bit in the query is provided for completeness.
.TP
\fB+[no]cdflag\fR
-Set [do not set] the CD (checking disabled) bit in the query. This
-requests the server to not perform DNSSEC validation of responses.
+Set [do not set] the CD (checking disabled) bit in the query. This requests the server to not perform DNSSEC validation of responses.
.TP
\fB+[no]cl\fR
Display [do not display] the CLASS when printing the record.
@@ -219,170 +247,164 @@ Display [do not display] the CLASS when printing the record.
Display [do not display] the TTL when printing the record.
.TP
\fB+[no]recurse\fR
-Toggle the setting of the RD (recursion desired) bit in the query.
-This bit is set by default, which means \fBdig\fR
-normally sends recursive queries. Recursion is automatically disabled
-when the \fI+nssearch\fR or
-\fI+trace\fR query options are used.
+Toggle the setting of the RD (recursion desired) bit in the query. This bit is set by default, which means
+\fBdig\fR
+normally sends recursive queries. Recursion is automatically disabled when the
+\fI+nssearch\fR
+or
+\fI+trace\fR
+query options are used.
.TP
\fB+[no]nssearch\fR
-When this option is set, \fBdig\fR attempts to find the
-authoritative name servers for the zone containing the name being
-looked up and display the SOA record that each name server has for the
-zone.
+When this option is set,
+\fBdig\fR
+attempts to find the authoritative name servers for the zone containing the name being looked up and display the SOA record that each name server has for the zone.
.TP
\fB+[no]trace\fR
-Toggle tracing of the delegation path from the root name servers for
-the name being looked up. Tracing is disabled by default. When
-tracing is enabled, \fBdig\fR makes iterative queries to
-resolve the name being looked up. It will follow referrals from the
-root servers, showing the answer from each server that was used to
-resolve the lookup.
+Toggle tracing of the delegation path from the root name servers for the name being looked up. Tracing is disabled by default. When tracing is enabled,
+\fBdig\fR
+makes iterative queries to resolve the name being looked up. It will follow referrals from the root servers, showing the answer from each server that was used to resolve the lookup.
.TP
\fB+[no]cmd\fR
-toggles the printing of the initial comment in the output identifying
-the version of \fBdig\fR and the query options that have
-been applied. This comment is printed by default.
+toggles the printing of the initial comment in the output identifying the version of
+\fBdig\fR
+and the query options that have been applied. This comment is printed by default.
.TP
\fB+[no]short\fR
-Provide a terse answer. The default is to print the answer in a
-verbose form.
+Provide a terse answer. The default is to print the answer in a verbose form.
.TP
\fB+[no]identify\fR
-Show [or do not show] the IP address and port number that supplied the
-answer when the \fI+short\fR option is enabled. If
-short form answers are requested, the default is not to show the
-source address and port number of the server that provided the answer.
+Show [or do not show] the IP address and port number that supplied the answer when the
+\fI+short\fR
+option is enabled. If short form answers are requested, the default is not to show the source address and port number of the server that provided the answer.
.TP
\fB+[no]comments\fR
-Toggle the display of comment lines in the output. The default is to
-print comments.
+Toggle the display of comment lines in the output. The default is to print comments.
.TP
\fB+[no]stats\fR
-This query option toggles the printing of statistics: when the query
-was made, the size of the reply and so on. The default behaviour is
-to print the query statistics.
+This query option toggles the printing of statistics: when the query was made, the size of the reply and so on. The default behaviour is to print the query statistics.
.TP
\fB+[no]qr\fR
-Print [do not print] the query as it is sent.
-By default, the query is not printed.
+Print [do not print] the query as it is sent. By default, the query is not printed.
.TP
\fB+[no]question\fR
-Print [do not print] the question section of a query when an answer is
-returned. The default is to print the question section as a comment.
+Print [do not print] the question section of a query when an answer is returned. The default is to print the question section as a comment.
.TP
\fB+[no]answer\fR
-Display [do not display] the answer section of a reply. The default
-is to display it.
+Display [do not display] the answer section of a reply. The default is to display it.
.TP
\fB+[no]authority\fR
-Display [do not display] the authority section of a reply. The
-default is to display it.
+Display [do not display] the authority section of a reply. The default is to display it.
.TP
\fB+[no]additional\fR
-Display [do not display] the additional section of a reply.
-The default is to display it.
+Display [do not display] the additional section of a reply. The default is to display it.
.TP
\fB+[no]all\fR
Set or clear all display flags.
.TP
\fB+time=T\fR
Sets the timeout for a query to
-\fIT\fR seconds. The default time out is 5 seconds.
-An attempt to set \fIT\fR to less than 1 will result
-in a query timeout of 1 second being applied.
+\fIT\fR
+seconds. The default time out is 5 seconds. An attempt to set
+\fIT\fR
+to less than 1 will result in a query timeout of 1 second being applied.
.TP
\fB+tries=T\fR
Sets the number of times to try UDP queries to server to
-\fIT\fR instead of the default, 3. If
-\fIT\fR is less than or equal to zero, the number of
-tries is silently rounded up to 1.
+\fIT\fR
+instead of the default, 3. If
+\fIT\fR
+is less than or equal to zero, the number of tries is silently rounded up to 1.
.TP
\fB+retry=T\fR
Sets the number of times to retry UDP queries to server to
-\fIT\fR instead of the default, 2. Unlike
-\fI+tries\fR, this does not include the initial
-query.
+\fIT\fR
+instead of the default, 2. Unlike
+\fI+tries\fR, this does not include the initial query.
.TP
\fB+ndots=D\fR
Set the number of dots that have to appear in
-\fIname\fR to \fID\fR for it to be
-considered absolute. The default value is that defined using the
-ndots statement in \fI/etc/resolv.conf\fR, or 1 if no
-ndots statement is present. Names with fewer dots are interpreted as
-relative names and will be searched for in the domains listed in the
-\fBsearch\fR or \fBdomain\fR directive in
+\fIname\fR
+to
+\fID\fR
+for it to be considered absolute. The default value is that defined using the ndots statement in
+\fI/etc/resolv.conf\fR, or 1 if no ndots statement is present. Names with fewer dots are interpreted as relative names and will be searched for in the domains listed in the
+\fBsearch\fR
+or
+\fBdomain\fR
+directive in
\fI/etc/resolv.conf\fR.
.TP
\fB+bufsize=B\fR
Set the UDP message buffer size advertised using EDNS0 to
-\fIB\fR bytes. The maximum and minimum sizes of this
-buffer are 65535 and 0 respectively. Values outside this range are
-rounded up or down appropriately.
+\fIB\fR
+bytes. The maximum and minimum sizes of this buffer are 65535 and 0 respectively. Values outside this range are rounded up or down appropriately.
.TP
\fB+[no]multiline\fR
-Print records like the SOA records in a verbose multi-line
-format with human-readable comments. The default is to print
-each record on a single line, to facilitate machine parsing
-of the \fBdig\fR output.
+Print records like the SOA records in a verbose multi\-line format with human\-readable comments. The default is to print each record on a single line, to facilitate machine parsing of the
+\fBdig\fR
+output.
.TP
\fB+[no]fail\fR
-Do not try the next server if you receive a SERVFAIL. The default is
-to not try the next server which is the reverse of normal stub resolver
-behaviour.
+Do not try the next server if you receive a SERVFAIL. The default is to not try the next server which is the reverse of normal stub resolver behaviour.
.TP
\fB+[no]besteffort\fR
-Attempt to display the contents of messages which are malformed.
-The default is to not display malformed answers.
+Attempt to display the contents of messages which are malformed. The default is to not display malformed answers.
.TP
\fB+[no]dnssec\fR
-Requests DNSSEC records be sent by setting the DNSSEC OK bit (DO)
-in the OPT record in the additional section of the query.
+Requests DNSSEC records be sent by setting the DNSSEC OK bit (DO) in the OPT record in the additional section of the query.
.TP
\fB+[no]sigchase\fR
-Chase DNSSEC signature chains. Requires dig be compiled with
--DDIG_SIGCHASE.
+Chase DNSSEC signature chains. Requires dig be compiled with \-DDIG_SIGCHASE.
.TP
-\fB+trusted-key=####\fR
-Specify a trusted key to be used with \fB+sigchase\fR.
-Requires dig be compiled with -DDIG_SIGCHASE.
+\fB+trusted\-key=####\fR
+Specifies a file containing trusted keys to be used with
+\fB+sigchase\fR. Each DNSKEY record must be on its own line.
+.sp
+If not specified
+\fBdig\fR
+will look for
+\fI/etc/trusted\-key.key\fR
+then
+\fItrusted\-key.key\fR
+in the current directory.
+.sp
+Requires dig be compiled with \-DDIG_SIGCHASE.
.TP
\fB+[no]topdown\fR
-When chasing DNSSEC signature chains perform a top down validation.
-Requires dig be compiled with -DDIG_SIGCHASE.
+When chasing DNSSEC signature chains perform a top down validation. Requires dig be compiled with \-DDIG_SIGCHASE.
.SH "MULTIPLE QUERIES"
.PP
-The BIND 9 implementation of \fBdig \fR supports
-specifying multiple queries on the command line (in addition to
-supporting the \fB-f\fR batch file option). Each of those
-queries can be supplied with its own set of flags, options and query
-options.
+The BIND 9 implementation of
+\fBdig \fR
+supports specifying multiple queries on the command line (in addition to supporting the
+\fB\-f\fR
+batch file option). Each of those queries can be supplied with its own set of flags, options and query options.
.PP
-In this case, each \fIquery\fR argument represent an
-individual query in the command-line syntax described above. Each
-consists of any of the standard options and flags, the name to be
-looked up, an optional query type and class and any query options that
-should be applied to that query.
+In this case, each
+\fIquery\fR
+argument represent an individual query in the command\-line syntax described above. Each consists of any of the standard options and flags, the name to be looked up, an optional query type and class and any query options that should be applied to that query.
.PP
-A global set of query options, which should be applied to all queries,
-can also be supplied. These global query options must precede the
-first tuple of name, class, type, options, flags, and query options
-supplied on the command line. Any global query options (except
-the \fB+[no]cmd\fR option) can be
-overridden by a query-specific set of query options. For example:
+A global set of query options, which should be applied to all queries, can also be supplied. These global query options must precede the first tuple of name, class, type, options, flags, and query options supplied on the command line. Any global query options (except the
+\fB+[no]cmd\fR
+option) can be overridden by a query\-specific set of query options. For example:
.sp
.nf
-dig +qr www.isc.org any -x 127.0.0.1 isc.org ns +noqr
-.sp
+dig +qr www.isc.org any \-x 127.0.0.1 isc.org ns +noqr
.fi
-shows how \fBdig\fR could be used from the command line
-to make three lookups: an ANY query for www.isc.org, a
-reverse lookup of 127.0.0.1 and a query for the NS records of
-isc.org.
-A global query option of \fI+qr\fR is applied, so
-that \fBdig\fR shows the initial query it made for each
-lookup. The final query has a local query option of
-\fI+noqr\fR which means that \fBdig\fR
+.sp
+shows how
+\fBdig\fR
+could be used from the command line to make three lookups: an ANY query for
+www.isc.org, a reverse lookup of 127.0.0.1 and a query for the NS records of
+isc.org. A global query option of
+\fI+qr\fR
+is applied, so that
+\fBdig\fR
+shows the initial query it made for each lookup. The final query has a local query option of
+\fI+noqr\fR
+which means that
+\fBdig\fR
will not print the initial query when it looks up the NS records for
isc.org.
.SH "FILES"
@@ -394,8 +416,8 @@ isc.org.
.PP
\fBhost\fR(1),
\fBnamed\fR(8),
-\fBdnssec-keygen\fR(8),
-\fIRFC1035\fR.
-.SH "BUGS"
+\fBdnssec\-keygen\fR(8),
+RFC1035.
+.SH "BUGS "
.PP
-There are probably too many query options.
+There are probably too many query options.
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/dig/dig.c b/contrib/bind9/bin/dig/dig.c
index 08f5b5b5280..52df6608685 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/dig/dig.c
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/dig/dig.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
/*
- * Copyright (C) 2004 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+ * Copyright (C) 2004, 2005 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
* Copyright (C) 2000-2003 Internet Software Consortium.
*
* Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
* PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
*/
-/* $Id: dig.c,v 1.157.2.13.2.25 2004/09/16 02:14:14 marka Exp $ */
+/* $Id: dig.c,v 1.157.2.13.2.29 2005/10/14 01:38:40 marka Exp $ */
#include
#include
@@ -45,10 +45,6 @@
#include
-extern ISC_LIST(dig_lookup_t) lookup_list;
-extern dig_serverlist_t server_list;
-extern ISC_LIST(dig_searchlist_t) search_list;
-
#define ADD_STRING(b, s) { \
if (strlen(s) >= isc_buffer_availablelength(b)) \
return (ISC_R_NOSPACE); \
@@ -58,31 +54,8 @@ extern ISC_LIST(dig_searchlist_t) search_list;
#define DIG_MAX_ADDRESSES 20
-extern isc_boolean_t have_ipv4, have_ipv6, specified_source,
- usesearch, qr;
-extern in_port_t port;
-extern unsigned int timeout;
-extern isc_mem_t *mctx;
-extern dns_messageid_t id;
-extern int sendcount;
-extern int ndots;
-extern int lookup_counter;
-extern int exitcode;
-extern isc_sockaddr_t bind_address;
-extern char keynametext[MXNAME];
-extern char keyfile[MXNAME];
-extern char keysecret[MXNAME];
-#ifdef DIG_SIGCHASE
-extern char trustedkey[MXNAME];
-#endif
-extern dns_tsigkey_t *key;
-extern isc_boolean_t validated;
-extern isc_taskmgr_t *taskmgr;
-extern isc_task_t *global_task;
-extern isc_boolean_t free_now;
dig_lookup_t *default_lookup = NULL;
-extern isc_boolean_t debugging, memdebugging;
static char *batchname = NULL;
static FILE *batchfp = NULL;
static char *argv0;
@@ -133,8 +106,6 @@ static const char *rcodetext[] = {
"BADVERS"
};
-extern char *progname;
-
static void
print_usage(FILE *fp) {
fputs(
@@ -593,6 +564,7 @@ buftoosmall:
}
}
}
+
if (headers && query->lookup->comments && !short_form)
printf("\n");
@@ -818,7 +790,7 @@ plus_option(char *option, isc_boolean_t is_batchfile,
break;
case 'l': /* cl */
FULLCHECK("cl");
- noclass = !state;
+ noclass = ISC_TF(!state);
break;
case 'm': /* cmd */
FULLCHECK("cmd");
@@ -892,7 +864,7 @@ plus_option(char *option, isc_boolean_t is_batchfile,
lookup->ns_search_only = state;
if (state) {
lookup->trace_root = ISC_TRUE;
- lookup->recurse = ISC_FALSE;
+ lookup->recurse = ISC_TRUE;
lookup->identify = ISC_TRUE;
lookup->stats = ISC_FALSE;
lookup->comments = ISC_FALSE;
@@ -1054,7 +1026,7 @@ plus_option(char *option, isc_boolean_t is_batchfile,
break;
case 't': /* ttlid */
FULLCHECK("ttlid");
- nottl = !state;
+ nottl = ISC_TF(!state);
break;
default:
goto invalid_option;
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/dig/dig.docbook b/contrib/bind9/bin/dig/dig.docbook
index d22ae87064d..87c98ae7b1f 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/dig/dig.docbook
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/dig/dig.docbook
@@ -1,6 +1,8 @@
-
+]>
-
+
@@ -30,6 +32,21 @@
BIND9
+
+
+ 2004
+ 2005
+ Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+
+
+ 2000
+ 2001
+ 2002
+ 2003
+ Internet Software Consortium.
+
+
+
digDNS lookup utility
@@ -38,7 +55,7 @@
dig
-@server
+@server
@@ -49,10 +66,10 @@
-name
-type
-class
-queryopt
+name
+type
+class
+queryopt
@@ -62,8 +79,8 @@
dig
-global-queryopt
-query
+global-queryopt
+query
@@ -513,11 +530,24 @@ Chase DNSSEC signature chains. Requires dig be compiled with
-DDIG_SIGCHASE.
-
-
-Specify a trusted key to be used with .
-Requires dig be compiled with -DDIG_SIGCHASE.
-
+
+
+
+
+ Specifies a file containing trusted keys to be used with
+ . Each DNSKEY record must be
+ on its own line.
+
+
+ If not specified dig will look for
+ /etc/trusted-key.key then
+ trusted-key.key in the current directory.
+
+
+ Requires dig be compiled with -DDIG_SIGCHASE.
+
+
+
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/dig/dig.html b/contrib/bind9/bin/dig/dig.html
index e9e1fd4dc77..3425fb3d21b 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/dig/dig.html
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/dig/dig.html
@@ -1,1174 +1,514 @@
-
-
-
-
-dig
+dig (domain information groper) is a flexible tool
for interrogating DNS name servers. It performs DNS lookups and
displays the answers that are returned from the name server(s) that
-were queried. Most DNS administrators use dig to
+were queried. Most DNS administrators use dig to
troubleshoot DNS problems because of its flexibility, ease of use and
clarity of output. Other lookup tools tend to have less functionality
-than dig.
Although dig is normally used with command-line
+than dig.
+
+
+Although dig is normally used with command-line
arguments, it also has a batch mode of operation for reading lookup
requests from a file. A brief summary of its command-line arguments
-and options is printed when the -h option is given.
+and options is printed when the -h option is given.
Unlike earlier versions, the BIND9 implementation of
-dig allows multiple lookups to be issued from the
-command line.
Unless it is told to query a specific name server,
-dig will try each of the servers listed in
-/etc/resolv.conf.
When no command line arguments or options are given, will perform an
-NS query for "." (the root).
It is possible to set per-user defaults for dig via
-${HOME}/.digrc. This file is read and any options in it
-are applied before the command line arguments.
SIMPLE USAGE
A typical invocation of dig looks like:
-
dig @server name type
where:
+dig allows multiple lookups to be issued from the
+command line.
+
+
+Unless it is told to query a specific name server,
+dig will try each of the servers listed in
+/etc/resolv.conf.
+
+
+When no command line arguments or options are given, will perform an
+NS query for "." (the root).
+
+
+It is possible to set per-user defaults for dig via
+${HOME}/.digrc. This file is read and any options in it
+are applied before the command line arguments.
+
+
+
+
SIMPLE USAGE
+
+A typical invocation of dig looks like:
+
+
dig @server name type
+
where:
-
server
is the name or IP address of the name server to query. This can be an IPv4
+
+
+
server
+
+is the name or IP address of the name server to query. This can be an IPv4
address in dotted-decimal notation or an IPv6
address in colon-delimited notation. When the supplied
-server argument is a hostname,
-dig resolves that name before querying that name
-server. If no server argument is provided,
-dig consults /etc/resolv.conf
+server argument is a hostname,
+dig resolves that name before querying that name
+server. If no server argument is provided,
+dig consults /etc/resolv.conf
and queries the name servers listed there. The reply from the name
-server that responds is displayed.
name
is the name of the resource record that is to be looked up.
type
indicates what type of query is required —
+server that responds is displayed.
+
+
name
+
+is the name of the resource record that is to be looked up.
+
+
type
+
+indicates what type of query is required —
ANY, A, MX, SIG, etc.
-type can be any valid query type. If no
-type argument is supplied,
-dig will perform a lookup for an A record.
OPTIONS
The -b option sets the source IP address of the query
-to address. This must be a valid address on
+type can be any valid query type. If no
+type argument is supplied,
+dig will perform a lookup for an A record.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
OPTIONS
+
+The -b option sets the source IP address of the query
+to address. This must be a valid address on
one of the host's network interfaces or "0.0.0.0" or "::". An optional port
-may be specified by appending "#<port>"
The default query class (IN for internet) is overridden by the
--c option. class is any valid
-class, such as HS for Hesiod records or CH for CHAOSNET records.
The -f option makes dig operate
+may be specified by appending "#<port>"
+
+
+The default query class (IN for internet) is overridden by the
+-c option. class is any valid
+class, such as HS for Hesiod records or CH for CHAOSNET records.
+
+
+The -f option makes dig operate
in batch mode by reading a list of lookup requests to process from the
-file filename. The file contains a number of
+file filename. The file contains a number of
queries, one per line. Each entry in the file should be organised in
the same way they would be presented as queries to
-dig using the command-line interface.
If a non-standard port number is to be queried, the
--p option is used. port# is
-the port number that dig will send its queries
+dig using the command-line interface.
+
+
+If a non-standard port number is to be queried, the
+-p option is used. port# is
+the port number that dig will send its queries
instead of the standard DNS port number 53. This option would be used
to test a name server that has been configured to listen for queries
-on a non-standard port number.
The -4 option forces dig to only
-use IPv4 query transport. The -6 option forces
-dig to only use IPv6 query transport.
The -t option sets the query type to
-type. It can be any valid query type which is
+on a non-standard port number.
+
+
+The -4 option forces dig to only
+use IPv4 query transport. The -6 option forces
+dig to only use IPv6 query transport.
+
+
+The -t option sets the query type to
+type. It can be any valid query type which is
supported in BIND9. The default query type "A", unless the
--x option is supplied to indicate a reverse lookup.
+-x option is supplied to indicate a reverse lookup.
A zone transfer can be requested by specifying a type of AXFR. When
an incremental zone transfer (IXFR) is required,
-type is set to ixfr=N.
+type is set to ixfr=N.
The incremental zone transfer will contain the changes made to the zone
since the serial number in the zone's SOA record was
-N.
Reverse lookups - mapping addresses to names - are simplified by the
--x option. addr is an IPv4
+N.
+
+
+Reverse lookups - mapping addresses to names - are simplified by the
+-x option. addr is an IPv4
address in dotted-decimal notation, or a colon-delimited IPv6 address.
When this option is used, there is no need to provide the
-name, class and
-type arguments. dig
+name, class and
+type arguments. dig
automatically performs a lookup for a name like
-11.12.13.10.in-addr.arpa and sets the query type and
+11.12.13.10.in-addr.arpa and sets the query type and
class to PTR and IN respectively. By default, IPv6 addresses are
looked up using nibble format under the IP6.ARPA domain.
To use the older RFC1886 method using the IP6.INT domain
-specify the -i option. Bit string labels (RFC2874)
-are now experimental and are not attempted.
To sign the DNS queries sent by dig and their
+specify the -i option. Bit string labels (RFC2874)
+are now experimental and are not attempted.
+
+
+To sign the DNS queries sent by dig and their
responses using transaction signatures (TSIG), specify a TSIG key file
-using the -k option. You can also specify the TSIG
-key itself on the command line using the -y option;
-name is the name of the TSIG key and
-key is the actual key. The key is a base-64
-encoded string, typically generated by dnssec-keygen(8).
+using the -k option. You can also specify the TSIG
+key itself on the command line using the -y option;
+name is the name of the TSIG key and
+key is the actual key. The key is a base-64
+encoded string, typically generated by dnssec-keygen(8).
-Caution should be taken when using the -y option on
+Caution should be taken when using the -y option on
multi-user systems as the key can be visible in the output from
-ps(1) or in the shell's history file. When
-using TSIG authentication with dig, the name
+ps(1
+) or in the shell's history file. When
+using TSIG authentication with dig, the name
server that is queried needs to know the key and algorithm that is
being used. In BIND, this is done by providing appropriate
-key and server statements in
-named.conf.
QUERY OPTIONS
dig provides a number of query options which affect
+key and server statements in
+named.conf.
+
+
+
+
QUERY OPTIONS
+
+dig provides a number of query options which affect
the way in which lookups are made and the results displayed. Some of
these set or reset flag bits in the query header, some determine which
sections of the answer get printed, and others determine the timeout
-and retry strategies.
Each query option is identified by a keyword preceded by a plus sign
-(+). Some keywords set or reset an option. These may be preceded
-by the string no to negate the meaning of that keyword. Other
+and retry strategies.
+
+
+Each query option is identified by a keyword preceded by a plus sign
+(+). Some keywords set or reset an option. These may be preceded
+by the string no to negate the meaning of that keyword. Other
keywords assign values to options like the timeout interval. They
-have the form +keyword=value.
+have the form +keyword=value.
The query options are:
-
+[no]tcp
Use [do not use] TCP when querying name servers. The default
+
+
+
+[no]tcp
+
+Use [do not use] TCP when querying name servers. The default
behaviour is to use UDP unless an AXFR or IXFR query is requested, in
-which case a TCP connection is used.
+[no]vc
Use [do not use] TCP when querying name servers. This alternate
-syntax to +[no]tcp is provided for backwards
-compatibility. The "vc" stands for "virtual circuit".
+[no]ignore
Ignore truncation in UDP responses instead of retrying with TCP. By
-default, TCP retries are performed.
+domain=somename
Set the search list to contain the single domain
-somename, as if specified in a
-domain directive in
-/etc/resolv.conf, and enable search list
-processing as if the +search option were given.
+[no]search
Use [do not use] the search list defined by the searchlist or domain
-directive in resolv.conf (if any).
-The search list is not used by default.
+[no]defname
Deprecated, treated as a synonym for +[no]search
+[no]aaonly
Sets the "aa" flag in the query.
+[no]aaflag
A synonym for +[no]aaonly.
+[no]adflag
Set [do not set] the AD (authentic data) bit in the query. The AD bit
+which case a TCP connection is used.
+
+
+[no]vc
+
+Use [do not use] TCP when querying name servers. This alternate
+syntax to +[no]tcp is provided for backwards
+compatibility. The "vc" stands for "virtual circuit".
+
+
+[no]ignore
+
+Ignore truncation in UDP responses instead of retrying with TCP. By
+default, TCP retries are performed.
+
+
+domain=somename
+
+Set the search list to contain the single domain
+somename, as if specified in a
+domain directive in
+/etc/resolv.conf, and enable search list
+processing as if the +search option were given.
+
+
+[no]search
+
+Use [do not use] the search list defined by the searchlist or domain
+directive in resolv.conf (if any).
+The search list is not used by default.
+
+
+[no]defname
+
+Deprecated, treated as a synonym for +[no]search
+
+
+[no]aaonly
+
+Sets the "aa" flag in the query.
+
+
+[no]aaflag
+
+A synonym for +[no]aaonly.
+
+
+[no]adflag
+
+Set [do not set] the AD (authentic data) bit in the query. The AD bit
currently has a standard meaning only in responses, not in queries,
but the ability to set the bit in the query is provided for
-completeness.
+[no]cdflag
Set [do not set] the CD (checking disabled) bit in the query. This
-requests the server to not perform DNSSEC validation of responses.
+[no]cl
Display [do not display] the CLASS when printing the record.
+[no]ttlid
Display [do not display] the TTL when printing the record.
+[no]recurse
Toggle the setting of the RD (recursion desired) bit in the query.
-This bit is set by default, which means dig
+completeness.
+
+
+[no]cdflag
+
+Set [do not set] the CD (checking disabled) bit in the query. This
+requests the server to not perform DNSSEC validation of responses.
+
+
+[no]cl
+
+Display [do not display] the CLASS when printing the record.
+
+
+[no]ttlid
+
+Display [do not display] the TTL when printing the record.
+
+
+[no]recurse
+
+Toggle the setting of the RD (recursion desired) bit in the query.
+This bit is set by default, which means dig
normally sends recursive queries. Recursion is automatically disabled
-when the +nssearch or
-+trace query options are used.
+[no]nssearch
When this option is set, dig attempts to find the
+when the +nssearch or
++trace query options are used.
+
+
+[no]nssearch
+
+When this option is set, dig attempts to find the
authoritative name servers for the zone containing the name being
looked up and display the SOA record that each name server has for the
-zone.
+[no]trace
Toggle tracing of the delegation path from the root name servers for
+zone.
+
+
+[no]trace
+
+Toggle tracing of the delegation path from the root name servers for
the name being looked up. Tracing is disabled by default. When
-tracing is enabled, dig makes iterative queries to
+tracing is enabled, dig makes iterative queries to
resolve the name being looked up. It will follow referrals from the
root servers, showing the answer from each server that was used to
-resolve the lookup.
+[no]cmd
toggles the printing of the initial comment in the output identifying
-the version of dig and the query options that have
-been applied. This comment is printed by default.
+[no]short
Provide a terse answer. The default is to print the answer in a
-verbose form.
+[no]identify
Show [or do not show] the IP address and port number that supplied the
-answer when the +short option is enabled. If
+resolve the lookup.
+
+
+[no]cmd
+
+toggles the printing of the initial comment in the output identifying
+the version of dig and the query options that have
+been applied. This comment is printed by default.
+
+
+[no]short
+
+Provide a terse answer. The default is to print the answer in a
+verbose form.
+
+
+[no]identify
+
+Show [or do not show] the IP address and port number that supplied the
+answer when the +short option is enabled. If
short form answers are requested, the default is not to show the
-source address and port number of the server that provided the answer.
+[no]comments
Toggle the display of comment lines in the output. The default is to
-print comments.
+[no]stats
This query option toggles the printing of statistics: when the query
+source address and port number of the server that provided the answer.
+
+
+[no]comments
+
+Toggle the display of comment lines in the output. The default is to
+print comments.
+
+
+[no]stats
+
+This query option toggles the printing of statistics: when the query
was made, the size of the reply and so on. The default behaviour is
-to print the query statistics.
+[no]qr
Print [do not print] the query as it is sent.
-By default, the query is not printed.
+[no]question
Print [do not print] the question section of a query when an answer is
-returned. The default is to print the question section as a comment.
+[no]answer
Display [do not display] the answer section of a reply. The default
-is to display it.
+[no]authority
Display [do not display] the authority section of a reply. The
-default is to display it.
+[no]additional
Display [do not display] the additional section of a reply.
-The default is to display it.
+[no]all
Set or clear all display flags.
+time=T
Sets the timeout for a query to
-T seconds. The default time out is 5 seconds.
-An attempt to set T to less than 1 will result
-in a query timeout of 1 second being applied.
+tries=T
Sets the number of times to try UDP queries to server to
-T instead of the default, 3. If
-T is less than or equal to zero, the number of
-tries is silently rounded up to 1.
+retry=T
Sets the number of times to retry UDP queries to server to
-T instead of the default, 2. Unlike
-+tries, this does not include the initial
-query.
+ndots=D
Set the number of dots that have to appear in
-name to D for it to be
+to print the query statistics.
+
+
+[no]qr
+
+Print [do not print] the query as it is sent.
+By default, the query is not printed.
+
+
+[no]question
+
+Print [do not print] the question section of a query when an answer is
+returned. The default is to print the question section as a comment.
+
+
+[no]answer
+
+Display [do not display] the answer section of a reply. The default
+is to display it.
+
+
+[no]authority
+
+Display [do not display] the authority section of a reply. The
+default is to display it.
+
+
+[no]additional
+
+Display [do not display] the additional section of a reply.
+The default is to display it.
+
+
+[no]all
+
+Set or clear all display flags.
+
+
+time=T
+
+
+Sets the timeout for a query to
+T seconds. The default time out is 5 seconds.
+An attempt to set T to less than 1 will result
+in a query timeout of 1 second being applied.
+
+
+tries=T
+
+Sets the number of times to try UDP queries to server to
+T instead of the default, 3. If
+T is less than or equal to zero, the number of
+tries is silently rounded up to 1.
+
+
+retry=T
+
+Sets the number of times to retry UDP queries to server to
+T instead of the default, 2. Unlike
++tries, this does not include the initial
+query.
+
+
+ndots=D
+
+Set the number of dots that have to appear in
+name to D for it to be
considered absolute. The default value is that defined using the
-ndots statement in /etc/resolv.conf, or 1 if no
+ndots statement in /etc/resolv.conf, or 1 if no
ndots statement is present. Names with fewer dots are interpreted as
relative names and will be searched for in the domains listed in the
-search or domain directive in
-/etc/resolv.conf.
+bufsize=B
Set the UDP message buffer size advertised using EDNS0 to
-B bytes. The maximum and minimum sizes of this
+search or domain directive in
+/etc/resolv.conf.
+
+
+bufsize=B
+
+Set the UDP message buffer size advertised using EDNS0 to
+B bytes. The maximum and minimum sizes of this
buffer are 65535 and 0 respectively. Values outside this range are
-rounded up or down appropriately.
+[no]multiline
Print records like the SOA records in a verbose multi-line
+rounded up or down appropriately.
+
+
+[no]multiline
+
+Print records like the SOA records in a verbose multi-line
format with human-readable comments. The default is to print
each record on a single line, to facilitate machine parsing
-of the dig output.
+[no]fail
Do not try the next server if you receive a SERVFAIL. The default is
+of the dig output.
+
+
+[no]fail
+
+Do not try the next server if you receive a SERVFAIL. The default is
to not try the next server which is the reverse of normal stub resolver
-behaviour.
+[no]besteffort
Attempt to display the contents of messages which are malformed.
-The default is to not display malformed answers.
+[no]dnssec
Requests DNSSEC records be sent by setting the DNSSEC OK bit (DO)
-in the OPT record in the additional section of the query.
+[no]sigchase
Chase DNSSEC signature chains. Requires dig be compiled with
--DDIG_SIGCHASE.
+trusted-key=####
Specify a trusted key to be used with +sigchase.
-Requires dig be compiled with -DDIG_SIGCHASE.
+[no]topdown
When chasing DNSSEC signature chains perform a top down validation.
-Requires dig be compiled with -DDIG_SIGCHASE.
MULTIPLE QUERIES
The BIND 9 implementation of dig supports
+behaviour.
+
+
+[no]besteffort
+
+Attempt to display the contents of messages which are malformed.
+The default is to not display malformed answers.
+
+
+[no]dnssec
+
+Requests DNSSEC records be sent by setting the DNSSEC OK bit (DO)
+in the OPT record in the additional section of the query.
+
+
+[no]sigchase
+
+Chase DNSSEC signature chains. Requires dig be compiled with
+-DDIG_SIGCHASE.
+
+
+trusted-key=####
+
+
+ Specifies a file containing trusted keys to be used with
+ +sigchase. Each DNSKEY record must be
+ on its own line.
+
+
+ If not specified dig will look for
+ /etc/trusted-key.key then
+ trusted-key.key in the current directory.
+
+
+ Requires dig be compiled with -DDIG_SIGCHASE.
+
+
+
+[no]topdown
+
+When chasing DNSSEC signature chains perform a top down validation.
+Requires dig be compiled with -DDIG_SIGCHASE.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
MULTIPLE QUERIES
+
+The BIND 9 implementation of dig supports
specifying multiple queries on the command line (in addition to
-supporting the -f batch file option). Each of those
+supporting the -f batch file option). Each of those
queries can be supplied with its own set of flags, options and query
-options.
In this case, each query argument represent an
+options.
+
+
+In this case, each query argument represent an
individual query in the command-line syntax described above. Each
consists of any of the standard options and flags, the name to be
looked up, an optional query type and class and any query options that
-should be applied to that query.
A global set of query options, which should be applied to all queries,
+should be applied to that query.
+
+
+A global set of query options, which should be applied to all queries,
can also be supplied. These global query options must precede the
first tuple of name, class, type, options, flags, and query options
supplied on the command line. Any global query options (except
-the +[no]cmd option) can be
+the +[no]cmd option) can be
overridden by a query-specific set of query options. For example:
-
dig +qr www.isc.org any -x 127.0.0.1 isc.org ns +noqr
-shows how dig could be used from the command line
-to make three lookups: an ANY query for www.isc.org, a
+
+
+dig +qr www.isc.org any -x 127.0.0.1 isc.org ns +noqr
+
+
+shows how dig could be used from the command line
+to make three lookups: an ANY query for www.isc.org, a
reverse lookup of 127.0.0.1 and a query for the NS records of
-isc.org.
+isc.org.
-A global query option of +qr is applied, so
-that dig shows the initial query it made for each
+A global query option of +qr is applied, so
+that dig shows the initial query it made for each
lookup. The final query has a local query option of
-+noqr which means that dig
++noqr which means that dig
will not print the initial query when it looks up the NS records for
-isc.org.
+host
is a simple utility for performing DNS lookups.
It is normally used to convert names to IP addresses and vice versa.
When no arguments or options are given,
-host
-prints a short summary of its command line arguments and options.
name is the domain name that is to be looked
+host
+prints a short summary of its command line arguments and options.
+
+
+name is the domain name that is to be looked
up. It can also be a dotted-decimal IPv4 address or a colon-delimited
-IPv6 address, in which case host will by default
+IPv6 address, in which case host will by default
perform a reverse lookup for that address.
-server is an optional argument which is either
-the name or IP address of the name server that host
+server is an optional argument which is either
+the name or IP address of the name server that host
should query instead of the server or servers listed in
-/etc/resolv.conf.
The -a (all) option is equivalent to setting the
--v option and asking host to make
-a query of type ANY.
When the -C option is used, host
+/etc/resolv.conf.
+
+
+The -a (all) option is equivalent to setting the
+-v option and asking host to make
+a query of type ANY.
+
+
+When the -C option is used, host
will attempt to display the SOA records for zone
-name from all the listed authoritative name
+name from all the listed authoritative name
servers for that zone. The list of name servers is defined by the NS
-records that are found for the zone.
The -c option instructs to make a DNS query of class
-class. This can be used to lookup Hesiod or
-Chaosnet class resource records. The default class is IN (Internet).
Verbose output is generated by host when the
--d or -v option is used. The two
+records that are found for the zone.
+
+
+The -c option instructs to make a DNS query of class
+class. This can be used to lookup Hesiod or
+Chaosnet class resource records. The default class is IN (Internet).
+
+
+Verbose output is generated by host when the
+-d or -v option is used. The two
options are equivalent. They have been provided for backwards
-compatibility. In previous versions, the -d option
-switched on debugging traces and -v enabled verbose
-output.
List mode is selected by the -l option. This makes
-host perform a zone transfer for zone
-name. Transfer the zone printing out the NS, PTR
-and address records (A/AAAA). If combined with -a
-all records will be printed.
The -i
+compatibility. In previous versions, the -d option
+switched on debugging traces and -v enabled verbose
+output.
+
+
+List mode is selected by the -l option. This makes
+host perform a zone transfer for zone
+name. Transfer the zone printing out the NS, PTR
+and address records (A/AAAA). If combined with -a
+all records will be printed.
+
+
+The -i
option specifies that reverse lookups of IPv6 addresses should
use the IP6.INT domain as defined in RFC1886.
-The default is to use IP6.ARPA.
The -N option sets the number of dots that have to be
-in name for it to be considered absolute. The
+The default is to use IP6.ARPA.
+
+
+The -N option sets the number of dots that have to be
+in name for it to be considered absolute. The
default value is that defined using the ndots statement in
-/etc/resolv.conf, or 1 if no ndots statement is
+/etc/resolv.conf, or 1 if no ndots statement is
present. Names with fewer dots are interpreted as relative names and
-will be searched for in the domains listed in the search
-or domain directive in
-/etc/resolv.conf.
The number of UDP retries for a lookup can be changed with the
--R option. number indicates
-how many times host will repeat a query that does
+will be searched for in the domains listed in the search
+or domain directive in
+/etc/resolv.conf.
+
+
+The number of UDP retries for a lookup can be changed with the
+-R option. number indicates
+how many times host will repeat a query that does
not get answered. The default number of retries is 1. If
-number is negative or zero, the number of
-retries will default to 1.
Non-recursive queries can be made via the -r option.
-Setting this option clears the RD — recursion
-desired — bit in the query which host makes.
+number is negative or zero, the number of
+retries will default to 1.
+
+
+Non-recursive queries can be made via the -r option.
+Setting this option clears the RD — recursion
+desired — bit in the query which host makes.
This should mean that the name server receiving the query will not
-attempt to resolve name. The
--r option enables host to mimic
+attempt to resolve name. The
+-r option enables host to mimic
the behaviour of a name server by making non-recursive queries and
expecting to receive answers to those queries that are usually
-referrals to other name servers.
By default host uses UDP when making queries. The
--T option makes it use a TCP connection when querying
+referrals to other name servers.
+
+
+By default host uses UDP when making queries. The
+-T option makes it use a TCP connection when querying
the name server. TCP will be automatically selected for queries that
-require it, such as zone transfer (AXFR) requests.
The -4 option forces host to only
-use IPv4 query transport. The -6 option forces
-host to only use IPv6 query transport.
The -t option is used to select the query type.
-type can be any recognised query type: CNAME,
+require it, such as zone transfer (AXFR) requests.
+
+
+The -4 option forces host to only
+use IPv4 query transport. The -6 option forces
+host to only use IPv6 query transport.
+
+
+The -t option is used to select the query type.
+type can be any recognised query type: CNAME,
NS, SOA, SIG, KEY, AXFR, etc. When no query type is specified,
-host automatically selects an appropriate query
+host automatically selects an appropriate query
type. By default it looks for A records, but if the
--C option was given, queries will be made for SOA
-records, and if name is a dotted-decimal IPv4
-address or colon-delimited IPv6 address, host will
+-C option was given, queries will be made for SOA
+records, and if name is a dotted-decimal IPv4
+address or colon-delimited IPv6 address, host will
query for PTR records. If a query type of IXFR is chosen the starting
serial number can be specified by appending an equal followed by the
-starting serial number (e.g. -t IXFR=12345678).
The time to wait for a reply can be controlled through the
--W and -w options. The
--W option makes host wait for
-wait seconds. If wait
+starting serial number (e.g. -t IXFR=12345678).
+
+
+The time to wait for a reply can be controlled through the
+-W and -w options. The
+-W option makes host wait for
+wait seconds. If wait
is less than one, the wait interval is set to one second. When the
--w option is used, host will
+-w option is used, host will
effectively wait forever for a reply. The time to wait for a response
will be set to the number of seconds given by the hardware's maximum
-value for an integer quantity.
FILES
/etc/resolv.conf
SEE ALSO
dig(1),
-named(8).
+value for an integer quantity.
+
+
+
+
FILES
+
+/etc/resolv.conf
+
+
+
+
SEE ALSO
+
+dig(1),
+named(8).
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/dig/include/dig/dig.h b/contrib/bind9/bin/dig/include/dig/dig.h
index 4e88b15336e..431d109cf08 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/dig/include/dig/dig.h
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/dig/include/dig/dig.h
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
/*
- * Copyright (C) 2004 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+ * Copyright (C) 2004, 2005 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
* Copyright (C) 2000-2003 Internet Software Consortium.
*
* Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
* PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
*/
-/* $Id: dig.h,v 1.71.2.6.2.7 2004/09/06 01:33:06 marka Exp $ */
+/* $Id: dig.h,v 1.71.2.6.2.11 2005/07/04 03:29:45 marka Exp $ */
#ifndef DIG_H
#define DIG_H
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@
#include
#include
-#define MXSERV 6
+#define MXSERV 20
#define MXNAME (DNS_NAME_MAXTEXT+1)
#define MXRD 32
#define BUFSIZE 512
@@ -66,14 +66,6 @@
* in a tight loop of constant lookups. It's value is arbitrary.
*/
-#define ROOTNS 1
-/*
- * Set the number of root servers to ask for information when running in
- * trace mode.
- * XXXMWS -- trace mode is currently semi-broken, and this number *MUST*
- * be 1.
- */
-
/*
* Defaults for the sigchase suboptions. Consolidated here because
* these control the layout of dig_lookup_t (among other things).
@@ -224,6 +216,46 @@ struct dig_message {
ISC_LINK(dig_message_t) link;
};
#endif
+
+typedef ISC_LIST(dig_searchlist_t) dig_searchlistlist_t;
+typedef ISC_LIST(dig_lookup_t) dig_lookuplist_t;
+
+/*
+ * Externals from dighost.c
+ */
+
+extern dig_lookuplist_t lookup_list;
+extern dig_serverlist_t server_list;
+extern dig_searchlistlist_t search_list;
+
+extern isc_boolean_t have_ipv4, have_ipv6, specified_source,
+ usesearch, qr;
+extern in_port_t port;
+extern unsigned int timeout;
+extern isc_mem_t *mctx;
+extern dns_messageid_t id;
+extern int sendcount;
+extern int ndots;
+extern int lookup_counter;
+extern int exitcode;
+extern isc_sockaddr_t bind_address;
+extern char keynametext[MXNAME];
+extern char keyfile[MXNAME];
+extern char keysecret[MXNAME];
+#ifdef DIG_SIGCHASE
+extern char trustedkey[MXNAME];
+#endif
+extern dns_tsigkey_t *key;
+extern isc_boolean_t validated;
+extern isc_taskmgr_t *taskmgr;
+extern isc_task_t *global_task;
+extern isc_boolean_t free_now;
+extern isc_boolean_t debugging, memdebugging;
+
+extern char *progname;
+extern int tries;
+extern int fatalexit;
+
/*
* Routines in dighost.c.
*/
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/dig/nslookup.1 b/contrib/bind9/bin/dig/nslookup.1
index 71aa8a131e4..3de04ca4f91 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/dig/nslookup.1
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/dig/nslookup.1
@@ -1,76 +1,72 @@
-.\" Copyright (C) 2004 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
-.\"
+.\" Copyright (C) 2004, 2005 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+.\"
.\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
.\" purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
.\" copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
-.\"
+.\"
.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ISC DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH
.\" REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
-.\" AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL ISC BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT,
+.\" AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL ISC BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT,
.\" INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
.\" LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE
.\" OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
.\" PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
.\"
-.\" $Id: nslookup.1,v 1.1.6.2 2004/08/20 02:29:39 marka Exp $
+.\" $Id: nslookup.1,v 1.1.6.5 2005/10/13 02:33:43 marka Exp $
.\"
-.TH "NSLOOKUP" "1" "Jun 30, 2000" "BIND9" ""
-.SH NAME
+.hy 0
+.ad l
+.\" ** You probably do not want to edit this file directly **
+.\" It was generated using the DocBook XSL Stylesheets (version 1.69.1).
+.\" Instead of manually editing it, you probably should edit the DocBook XML
+.\" source for it and then use the DocBook XSL Stylesheets to regenerate it.
+.TH "NSLOOKUP" "1" "Jun 30, 2000" "BIND9" "BIND9"
+.\" disable hyphenation
+.nh
+.\" disable justification (adjust text to left margin only)
+.ad l
+.SH "NAME"
nslookup \- query Internet name servers interactively
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-\fBnslookup\fR [ \fB-option\fR ] [ \fBname | -\fR ] [ \fBserver\fR ]
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.HP 9
+\fBnslookup\fR [\fB\-option\fR] [name\ |\ \-] [server]
.SH "DESCRIPTION"
.PP
\fBNslookup\fR
-is a program to query Internet domain name servers. \fBNslookup\fR
-has two modes: interactive and non-interactive. Interactive mode allows
-the user to query name servers for information about various hosts and
-domains or to print a list of hosts in a domain. Non-interactive mode is
-used to print just the name and requested information for a host or
-domain.
+is a program to query Internet domain name servers.
+\fBNslookup\fR
+has two modes: interactive and non\-interactive. Interactive mode allows the user to query name servers for information about various hosts and domains or to print a list of hosts in a domain. Non\-interactive mode is used to print just the name and requested information for a host or domain.
.SH "ARGUMENTS"
.PP
Interactive mode is entered in the following cases:
-.IP 1.
+.TP 3
+1.
when no arguments are given (the default name server will be used)
-.IP 2.
-when the first argument is a hyphen (-) and the second argument is
-the host name or Internet address of a name server.
+.TP
+2.
+when the first argument is a hyphen (\-) and the second argument is the host name or Internet address of a name server.
.PP
-Non-interactive mode is used when the name or Internet address of the
-host to be looked up is given as the first argument. The optional second
-argument specifies the host name or address of a name server.
+Non\-interactive mode is used when the name or Internet address of the host to be looked up is given as the first argument. The optional second argument specifies the host name or address of a name server.
.PP
-Options can also be specified on the command line if they precede the
-arguments and are prefixed with a hyphen. For example, to
-change the default query type to host information, and the initial timeout to 10 seconds, type:
-.PP
-.sp
-.nf
-nslookup -query=hinfo -timeout=10
-.sp
-.fi
+Options can also be specified on the command line if they precede the arguments and are prefixed with a hyphen. For example, to change the default query type to host information, and the initial timeout to 10 seconds, type:
+.IP .sp .nf nslookup \-query=hinfo \-timeout=10 .fi
.SH "INTERACTIVE COMMANDS"
.TP
-\fBhost [server]\fR
-Look up information for host using the current default server or
-using server, if specified. If host is an Internet address and
-the query type is A or PTR, the name of the host is returned.
-If host is a name and does not have a trailing period, the
-search list is used to qualify the name.
-
-To look up a host not in the current domain, append a period to
-the name.
+host [server]
+Look up information for host using the current default server or using server, if specified. If host is an Internet address and the query type is A or PTR, the name of the host is returned. If host is a name and does not have a trailing period, the search list is used to qualify the name.
+.sp
+To look up a host not in the current domain, append a period to the name.
.TP
-\fBserver \fIdomain\fB\fR
+\fBserver\fR \fIdomain\fR
.TP
-\fBlserver \fIdomain\fB\fR
-Change the default server to \fIdomain\fR; lserver uses the initial
-server to look up information about \fIdomain\fR, while server uses
-the current default server. If an authoritative answer can't be
-found, the names of servers that might have the answer are
-returned.
+\fBlserver\fR \fIdomain\fR
+Change the default server to
+\fIdomain\fR;
+\fBlserver\fR
+uses the initial server to look up information about
+\fIdomain\fR, while
+\fBserver\fR
+uses the current default server. If an authoritative answer can't be found, the names of servers that might have the answer are returned.
.TP
\fBroot\fR
not implemented
@@ -93,17 +89,15 @@ not implemented
\fBexit\fR
Exits the program.
.TP
-\fBset \fIkeyword[=value]\fB\fR
-This command is used to change state information that affects
-the lookups. Valid keywords are:
+\fBset\fR \fIkeyword\fR\fI[=value]\fR
+This command is used to change state information that affects the lookups. Valid keywords are:
.RS
.TP
\fBall\fR
-Prints the current values of the frequently used
-options to \fBset\fR. Information about the current default
-server and host is also printed.
+Prints the current values of the frequently used options to
+\fBset\fR. Information about the current default server and host is also printed.
.TP
-\fBclass=\fIvalue\fB\fR
+\fBclass=\fR\fIvalue\fR
Change the query class to one of:
.RS
.TP
@@ -119,66 +113,61 @@ the Hesiod class
\fBANY\fR
wildcard
.RE
-.PP
+.IP
The class specifies the protocol group of the information.
-
+.sp
(Default = IN; abbreviation = cl)
.TP
-\fB\fI[no]\fBdebug\fR
-Turn debugging mode on. A lot more information is
-printed about the packet sent to the server and the
-resulting answer.
-
-(Default = nodebug; abbreviation = [no]deb)
+\fB\fI[no]\fR\fR\fBdebug\fR
+Turn debugging mode on. A lot more information is printed about the packet sent to the server and the resulting answer.
+.sp
+(Default = nodebug; abbreviation =
+[no]deb)
.TP
-\fB\fI[no]\fBd2\fR
-Turn debugging mode on. A lot more information is
-printed about the packet sent to the server and the
-resulting answer.
-
+\fB\fI[no]\fR\fR\fBd2\fR
+Turn debugging mode on. A lot more information is printed about the packet sent to the server and the resulting answer.
+.sp
(Default = nod2)
.TP
-\fBdomain=\fIname\fB\fR
-Sets the search list to \fIname\fR.
+\fBdomain=\fR\fIname\fR
+Sets the search list to
+\fIname\fR.
.TP
-\fB\fI[no]\fBsearch\fR
-If the lookup request contains at least one period but
-doesn't end with a trailing period, append the domain
-names in the domain search list to the request until an
-answer is received.
-
+\fB\fI[no]\fR\fR\fBsearch\fR
+If the lookup request contains at least one period but doesn't end with a trailing period, append the domain names in the domain search list to the request until an answer is received.
+.sp
(Default = search)
.TP
-\fBport=\fIvalue\fB\fR
-Change the default TCP/UDP name server port to \fIvalue\fR.
-
+\fBport=\fR\fIvalue\fR
+Change the default TCP/UDP name server port to
+\fIvalue\fR.
+.sp
(Default = 53; abbreviation = po)
.TP
-\fBquerytype=\fIvalue\fB\fR
+\fBquerytype=\fR\fIvalue\fR
.TP
-\fBtype=\fIvalue\fB\fR
+\fBtype=\fR\fIvalue\fR
Change the top of the information query.
-
+.sp
(Default = A; abbreviations = q, ty)
.TP
-\fB\fI[no]\fBrecurse\fR
-Tell the name server to query other servers if it does not have the
-information.
-
+\fB\fI[no]\fR\fR\fBrecurse\fR
+Tell the name server to query other servers if it does not have the information.
+.sp
(Default = recurse; abbreviation = [no]rec)
.TP
-\fBretry=\fInumber\fB\fR
+\fBretry=\fR\fInumber\fR
Set the number of retries to number.
.TP
-\fBtimeout=\fInumber\fB\fR
-Change the initial timeout interval for waiting for a
-reply to number seconds.
+\fBtimeout=\fR\fInumber\fR
+Change the initial timeout interval for waiting for a reply to number seconds.
.TP
-\fB\fI[no]\fBvc\fR
+\fB\fI[no]\fR\fR\fBvc\fR
Always use a virtual circuit when sending requests to the server.
-
+.sp
(Default = novc)
.RE
+.IP
.SH "FILES"
.PP
\fI/etc/resolv.conf\fR
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/dig/nslookup.c b/contrib/bind9/bin/dig/nslookup.c
index b26c605142e..ab9ed68764c 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/dig/nslookup.c
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/dig/nslookup.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
/*
- * Copyright (C) 2004 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+ * Copyright (C) 2004, 2005 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
* Copyright (C) 2000-2003 Internet Software Consortium.
*
* Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
* PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
*/
-/* $Id: nslookup.c,v 1.90.2.4.2.8 2004/09/06 01:33:05 marka Exp $ */
+/* $Id: nslookup.c,v 1.90.2.4.2.10 2005/07/12 05:47:42 marka Exp $ */
#include
@@ -44,19 +44,6 @@
#include
-extern ISC_LIST(dig_lookup_t) lookup_list;
-extern dig_serverlist_t server_list;
-extern ISC_LIST(dig_searchlist_t) search_list;
-
-extern isc_boolean_t usesearch, debugging;
-extern in_port_t port;
-extern unsigned int timeout;
-extern isc_mem_t *mctx;
-extern int tries;
-extern int lookup_counter;
-extern isc_task_t *global_task;
-extern char *progname;
-
static isc_boolean_t short_form = ISC_TRUE,
tcpmode = ISC_FALSE,
identify = ISC_FALSE, stats = ISC_TRUE,
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/dig/nslookup.docbook b/contrib/bind9/bin/dig/nslookup.docbook
index 134e5b32ec4..189fabe8507 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/dig/nslookup.docbook
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/dig/nslookup.docbook
@@ -1,6 +1,8 @@
-
+]>
-
+
-
-
-
-
-nslookup
nslookup
Name
nslookup -- query Internet name servers interactively
Synopsis
nslookup [-option] [name | -] [server]
DESCRIPTION
Nslookup
-is a program to query Internet domain name servers. Nslookup
+
+
+
+
+nslookup
+
+
+
+
+
+
Name
+
nslookup — query Internet name servers interactively
+
+
+
Synopsis
+
nslookup [-option] [name | -] [server]
+
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
+Nslookup
+is a program to query Internet domain name servers. Nslookup
has two modes: interactive and non-interactive. Interactive mode allows
the user to query name servers for information about various hosts and
domains or to print a list of hosts in a domain. Non-interactive mode is
used to print just the name and requested information for a host or
-domain.
ARGUMENTS
Interactive mode is entered in the following cases:
-
when no arguments are given (the default name server will be used)
when the first argument is a hyphen (-) and the second argument is
-the host name or Internet address of a name server.
Non-interactive mode is used when the name or Internet address of the
+domain.
+
+
+
+
ARGUMENTS
+
+Interactive mode is entered in the following cases:
+
+
+
+when no arguments are given (the default name server will be used)
+
+
+when the first argument is a hyphen (-) and the second argument is
+the host name or Internet address of a name server.
+
+
+
+
+
+Non-interactive mode is used when the name or Internet address of the
host to be looked up is given as the first argument. The optional second
-argument specifies the host name or address of a name server.
Options can also be specified on the command line if they precede the
+argument specifies the host name or address of a name server.
+
+
+Options can also be specified on the command line if they precede the
arguments and are prefixed with a hyphen. For example, to
change the default query type to host information, and the initial timeout to 10 seconds, type:
-
nslookup -query=hinfo -timeout=10
INTERACTIVE COMMANDS
host [server]
Look up information for host using the current default server or
+
+
+nslookup -query=hinfo -timeout=10
+
+
+
+
+
+
INTERACTIVE COMMANDS
+
+
host [server]
+
+
+Look up information for host using the current default server or
using server, if specified. If host is an Internet address and
the query type is A or PTR, the name of the host is returned.
If host is a name and does not have a trailing period, the
-search list is used to qualify the name.
To look up a host not in the current domain, append a period to
-the name.
serverdomain
lserverdomain
Change the default server to domain; lserver uses the initial
-server to look up information about domain, while server uses
+search list is used to qualify the name.
+
+
+To look up a host not in the current domain, append a period to
+the name.
+
+
+
serverdomain
+
+
lserverdomain
+
+Change the default server to domain; lserver uses the initial
+server to look up information about domain, while server uses
the current default server. If an authoritative answer can't be
found, the names of servers that might have the answer are
-returned.
root
not implemented
finger
not implemented
ls
not implemented
view
not implemented
help
not implemented
?
not implemented
exit
Exits the program.
setkeyword[=value]
This command is used to change state information that affects
+returned.
+
+
root
+
not implemented
+
finger
+
not implemented
+
ls
+
not implemented
+
view
+
not implemented
+
help
+
not implemented
+
?
+
not implemented
+
exit
+
Exits the program.
+
setkeyword[=value]
+
+
This command is used to change state information that affects
the lookups. Valid keywords are:
-
all
Prints the current values of the frequently used
- options to set. Information about the current default
+
+
+
all
+
Prints the current values of the frequently used
+ options to set. Information about the current default
server and host is also printed.
-
class=value
Change the query class to one of:
-
IN
the Internet class
CH
the Chaos class
HS
the Hesiod class
ANY
wildcard
+
+
class=value
+
+
+ Change the query class to one of:
+
+
+
IN
+
the Internet class
+
CH
+
the Chaos class
+
HS
+
the Hesiod class
+
ANY
+
wildcard
+
+
The class specifies the protocol group of the information.
-
(Default = IN; abbreviation = cl)
-
[no]debug
Turn debugging mode on. A lot more information is
+
+
+ (Default = IN; abbreviation = cl)
+
+
+
[no]debug
+
+
+ Turn debugging mode on. A lot more information is
printed about the packet sent to the server and the
resulting answer.
-
(Default = nodebug; abbreviation = [no]deb)
-
[no]d2
Turn debugging mode on. A lot more information is
+
+
+ (Default = nodebug; abbreviation = [no]deb)
+
+
+
[no]d2
+
+
+ Turn debugging mode on. A lot more information is
printed about the packet sent to the server and the
resulting answer.
-
(Default = nod2)
-
domain=name
Sets the search list to name.
-
[no]search
If the lookup request contains at least one period but
+
+
+ (Default = nod2)
+
+
+
domain=name
+
+ Sets the search list to name.
+
+
[no]search
+
+
+ If the lookup request contains at least one period but
doesn't end with a trailing period, append the domain
names in the domain search list to the request until an
answer is received.
-
(Default = search)
-
port=value
Change the default TCP/UDP name server port to value.
-
(Default = 53; abbreviation = po)
-
querytype=value
type=value
Change the top of the information query.
-
(Default = A; abbreviations = q, ty)
-
[no]recurse
Tell the name server to query other servers if it does not have the
+
+
+ (Default = search)
+
+
+
port=value
+
+
+ Change the default TCP/UDP name server port to value.
+
+
+ (Default = 53; abbreviation = po)
+
+
+
querytype=value
+
+
type=value
+
+
+ Change the top of the information query.
+
+
+ (Default = A; abbreviations = q, ty)
+
+
+
[no]recurse
+
+
+ Tell the name server to query other servers if it does not have the
information.
-
(Default = recurse; abbreviation = [no]rec)
-
retry=number
Set the number of retries to number.
-
timeout=number
Change the initial timeout interval for waiting for a
+
+
+ (Default = recurse; abbreviation = [no]rec)
+
+
+
retry=number
+
+ Set the number of retries to number.
+
+
timeout=number
+
+ Change the initial timeout interval for waiting for a
reply to number seconds.
-
[no]vc
Always use a virtual circuit when sending requests to the server.
-
(Default = novc)
-
FILES
/etc/resolv.conf
SEE ALSO
dig(1),
-host(1),
-named(8).
Author
Andrew Cherenson
+
+
[no]vc
+
+
+ Always use a virtual circuit when sending requests to the server.
+
+
+ (Default = novc)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
FILES
+
+/etc/resolv.conf
+
+
+
+
SEE ALSO
+
+dig(1),
+host(1),
+named(8).
+
+
+
+
Author
+
+Andrew Cherenson
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/dnssec/Makefile.in b/contrib/bind9/bin/dnssec/Makefile.in
index 993c54e4067..b9b7bea37c2 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/dnssec/Makefile.in
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/dnssec/Makefile.in
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-# Copyright (C) 2004 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+# Copyright (C) 2004, 2005 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
# Copyright (C) 2000-2002 Internet Software Consortium.
#
# Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
# OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
# PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
-# $Id: Makefile.in,v 1.19.12.9 2004/07/20 07:01:48 marka Exp $
+# $Id: Makefile.in,v 1.19.12.12 2005/05/02 00:25:54 marka Exp $
srcdir = @srcdir@
VPATH = @srcdir@
@@ -58,7 +58,8 @@ dnssec-keygen@EXEEXT@: dnssec-keygen.@O@ ${OBJS} ${DEPLIBS}
dnssec-keygen.@O@ ${OBJS} ${LIBS}
dnssec-signzone.@O@: dnssec-signzone.c
- ${LIBTOOL_MODE_COMPILE} ${PURIFY} ${CC} ${ALL_CFLAGS} -c $<
+ ${LIBTOOL_MODE_COMPILE} ${CC} ${ALL_CFLAGS} -DVERSION=\"${VERSION}\" \
+ -c ${srcdir}/dnssec-signzone.c
dnssec-signzone@EXEEXT@: dnssec-signzone.@O@ ${OBJS} ${DEPLIBS}
${LIBTOOL_MODE_LINK} ${PURIFY} ${CC} ${CFLAGS} ${LDFLAGS} -o $@ \
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/dnssec/dnssec-keygen.8 b/contrib/bind9/bin/dnssec/dnssec-keygen.8
index 235c26ea32f..0f8f003de42 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/dnssec/dnssec-keygen.8
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/dnssec/dnssec-keygen.8
@@ -1,174 +1,164 @@
-.\" Copyright (C) 2004 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
-.\" Copyright (C) 2000-2003 Internet Software Consortium.
-.\"
+.\" Copyright (C) 2004, 2005 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+.\" Copyright (C) 2000-2003 Internet Software Consortium.
+.\"
.\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
.\" purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
.\" copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
-.\"
+.\"
.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ISC DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH
.\" REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
-.\" AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL ISC BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT,
+.\" AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL ISC BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT,
.\" INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
.\" LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE
.\" OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
.\" PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
.\"
-.\" $Id: dnssec-keygen.8,v 1.19.12.5 2004/06/11 02:32:45 marka Exp $
+.\" $Id: dnssec-keygen.8,v 1.19.12.9 2005/10/13 02:33:45 marka Exp $
.\"
-.TH "DNSSEC-KEYGEN" "8" "June 30, 2000" "BIND9" ""
-.SH NAME
-dnssec-keygen \- DNSSEC key generation tool
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-\fBdnssec-keygen\fR \fB-a \fIalgorithm\fB\fR \fB-b \fIkeysize\fB\fR \fB-n \fInametype\fB\fR [ \fB-c \fIclass\fB\fR ] [ \fB-e\fR ] [ \fB-f \fIflag\fB\fR ] [ \fB-g \fIgenerator\fB\fR ] [ \fB-h\fR ] [ \fB-k\fR ] [ \fB-p \fIprotocol\fB\fR ] [ \fB-r \fIrandomdev\fB\fR ] [ \fB-s \fIstrength\fB\fR ] [ \fB-t \fItype\fB\fR ] [ \fB-v \fIlevel\fB\fR ] \fBname\fR
+.hy 0
+.ad l
+.\" ** You probably do not want to edit this file directly **
+.\" It was generated using the DocBook XSL Stylesheets (version 1.69.1).
+.\" Instead of manually editing it, you probably should edit the DocBook XML
+.\" source for it and then use the DocBook XSL Stylesheets to regenerate it.
+.TH "DNSSEC\-KEYGEN" "8" "June 30, 2000" "BIND9" "BIND9"
+.\" disable hyphenation
+.nh
+.\" disable justification (adjust text to left margin only)
+.ad l
+.SH "NAME"
+dnssec\-keygen \- DNSSEC key generation tool
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.HP 14
+\fBdnssec\-keygen\fR {\-a\ \fIalgorithm\fR} {\-b\ \fIkeysize\fR} {\-n\ \fInametype\fR} [\fB\-c\ \fR\fB\fIclass\fR\fR] [\fB\-e\fR] [\fB\-f\ \fR\fB\fIflag\fR\fR] [\fB\-g\ \fR\fB\fIgenerator\fR\fR] [\fB\-h\fR] [\fB\-k\fR] [\fB\-p\ \fR\fB\fIprotocol\fR\fR] [\fB\-r\ \fR\fB\fIrandomdev\fR\fR] [\fB\-s\ \fR\fB\fIstrength\fR\fR] [\fB\-t\ \fR\fB\fItype\fR\fR] [\fB\-v\ \fR\fB\fIlevel\fR\fR] {name}
.SH "DESCRIPTION"
.PP
-\fBdnssec-keygen\fR generates keys for DNSSEC
-(Secure DNS), as defined in RFC 2535 and RFC . It can also generate
-keys for use with TSIG (Transaction Signatures), as
-defined in RFC 2845.
+\fBdnssec\-keygen\fR
+generates keys for DNSSEC (Secure DNS), as defined in RFC 2535 and RFC . It can also generate keys for use with TSIG (Transaction Signatures), as defined in RFC 2845.
.SH "OPTIONS"
.TP
-\fB-a \fIalgorithm\fB\fR
+\-a \fIalgorithm\fR
Selects the cryptographic algorithm. The value of
-\fBalgorithm\fR must be one of RSAMD5 (RSA) or RSASHA1,
-DSA, DH (Diffie Hellman), or HMAC-MD5. These values
-are case insensitive.
-
-Note 1: that for DNSSEC, RSASHA1 is a mandatory to implement algorithm,
-and DSA is recommended. For TSIG, HMAC-MD5 is mandatory.
-
-Note 2: HMAC-MD5 and DH automatically set the -k flag.
+\fBalgorithm\fR
+must be one of RSAMD5 (RSA) or RSASHA1, DSA, DH (Diffie Hellman), or HMAC\-MD5. These values are case insensitive.
+.sp
+Note 1: that for DNSSEC, RSASHA1 is a mandatory to implement algorithm, and DSA is recommended. For TSIG, HMAC\-MD5 is mandatory.
+.sp
+Note 2: HMAC\-MD5 and DH automatically set the \-k flag.
.TP
-\fB-b \fIkeysize\fB\fR
-Specifies the number of bits in the key. The choice of key
-size depends on the algorithm used. RSAMD5 / RSASHA1 keys must be between
-512 and 2048 bits. Diffie Hellman keys must be between
-128 and 4096 bits. DSA keys must be between 512 and 1024
-bits and an exact multiple of 64. HMAC-MD5 keys must be
-between 1 and 512 bits.
+\-b \fIkeysize\fR
+Specifies the number of bits in the key. The choice of key size depends on the algorithm used. RSAMD5 / RSASHA1 keys must be between 512 and 2048 bits. Diffie Hellman keys must be between 128 and 4096 bits. DSA keys must be between 512 and 1024 bits and an exact multiple of 64. HMAC\-MD5 keys must be between 1 and 512 bits.
.TP
-\fB-n \fInametype\fB\fR
+\-n \fInametype\fR
Specifies the owner type of the key. The value of
-\fBnametype\fR must either be ZONE (for a DNSSEC
-zone key (KEY/DNSKEY)), HOST or ENTITY (for a key associated with a host (KEY)),
-USER (for a key associated with a user(KEY)) or OTHER (DNSKEY). These values are
-case insensitive.
+\fBnametype\fR
+must either be ZONE (for a DNSSEC zone key (KEY/DNSKEY)), HOST or ENTITY (for a key associated with a host (KEY)), USER (for a key associated with a user(KEY)) or OTHER (DNSKEY). These values are case insensitive.
.TP
-\fB-c \fIclass\fB\fR
-Indicates that the DNS record containing the key should have
-the specified class. If not specified, class IN is used.
+\-c \fIclass\fR
+Indicates that the DNS record containing the key should have the specified class. If not specified, class IN is used.
.TP
-\fB-e\fR
+\-e
If generating an RSAMD5/RSASHA1 key, use a large exponent.
.TP
-\fB-f \fIflag\fB\fR
-Set the specified flag in the flag field of the KEY/DNSKEY record.
-The only recognized flag is KSK (Key Signing Key) DNSKEY.
+\-f \fIflag\fR
+Set the specified flag in the flag field of the KEY/DNSKEY record. The only recognized flag is KSK (Key Signing Key) DNSKEY.
.TP
-\fB-g \fIgenerator\fB\fR
-If generating a Diffie Hellman key, use this generator.
-Allowed values are 2 and 5. If no generator
-is specified, a known prime from RFC 2539 will be used
-if possible; otherwise the default is 2.
+\-g \fIgenerator\fR
+If generating a Diffie Hellman key, use this generator. Allowed values are 2 and 5. If no generator is specified, a known prime from RFC 2539 will be used if possible; otherwise the default is 2.
.TP
-\fB-h\fR
+\-h
Prints a short summary of the options and arguments to
-\fBdnssec-keygen\fR.
+\fBdnssec\-keygen\fR.
.TP
-\fB-k\fR
+\-k
Generate KEY records rather than DNSKEY records.
.TP
-\fB-p \fIprotocol\fB\fR
-Sets the protocol value for the generated key. The protocol
-is a number between 0 and 255. The default is 3 (DNSSEC).
-Other possible values for this argument are listed in
-RFC 2535 and its successors.
+\-p \fIprotocol\fR
+Sets the protocol value for the generated key. The protocol is a number between 0 and 255. The default is 3 (DNSSEC). Other possible values for this argument are listed in RFC 2535 and its successors.
.TP
-\fB-r \fIrandomdev\fB\fR
-Specifies the source of randomness. If the operating
-system does not provide a \fI/dev/random\fR
-or equivalent device, the default source of randomness
-is keyboard input. \fIrandomdev\fR specifies
-the name of a character device or file containing random
-data to be used instead of the default. The special value
-\fIkeyboard\fR indicates that keyboard
-input should be used.
+\-r \fIrandomdev\fR
+Specifies the source of randomness. If the operating system does not provide a
+\fI/dev/random\fR
+or equivalent device, the default source of randomness is keyboard input.
+\fIrandomdev\fR
+specifies the name of a character device or file containing random data to be used instead of the default. The special value
+\fIkeyboard\fR
+indicates that keyboard input should be used.
.TP
-\fB-s \fIstrength\fB\fR
-Specifies the strength value of the key. The strength is
-a number between 0 and 15, and currently has no defined
-purpose in DNSSEC.
+\-s \fIstrength\fR
+Specifies the strength value of the key. The strength is a number between 0 and 15, and currently has no defined purpose in DNSSEC.
.TP
-\fB-t \fItype\fB\fR
-Indicates the use of the key. \fBtype\fR must be
-one of AUTHCONF, NOAUTHCONF, NOAUTH, or NOCONF. The default
-is AUTHCONF. AUTH refers to the ability to authenticate
-data, and CONF the ability to encrypt data.
+\-t \fItype\fR
+Indicates the use of the key.
+\fBtype\fR
+must be one of AUTHCONF, NOAUTHCONF, NOAUTH, or NOCONF. The default is AUTHCONF. AUTH refers to the ability to authenticate data, and CONF the ability to encrypt data.
.TP
-\fB-v \fIlevel\fB\fR
+\-v \fIlevel\fR
Sets the debugging level.
.SH "GENERATED KEYS"
.PP
-When \fBdnssec-keygen\fR completes successfully,
-it prints a string of the form \fIKnnnn.+aaa+iiiii\fR
-to the standard output. This is an identification string for
-the key it has generated. These strings can be used as arguments
-to \fBdnssec-makekeyset\fR.
-.TP 0.2i
+When
+\fBdnssec\-keygen\fR
+completes successfully, it prints a string of the form
+\fIKnnnn.+aaa+iiiii\fR
+to the standard output. This is an identification string for the key it has generated.
+.TP 3
\(bu
-\fInnnn\fR is the key name.
-.TP 0.2i
+\fInnnn\fR
+is the key name.
+.TP
\(bu
-\fIaaa\fR is the numeric representation of the
-algorithm.
-.TP 0.2i
+\fIaaa\fR
+is the numeric representation of the algorithm.
+.TP
\(bu
-\fIiiiii\fR is the key identifier (or footprint).
+\fIiiiii\fR
+is the key identifier (or footprint).
.PP
-\fBdnssec-keygen\fR creates two file, with names based
-on the printed string. \fIKnnnn.+aaa+iiiii.key\fR
+\fBdnssec\-keygen\fR
+creates two file, with names based on the printed string.
+\fIKnnnn.+aaa+iiiii.key\fR
contains the public key, and
-\fIKnnnn.+aaa+iiiii.private\fR contains the private
-key.
+\fIKnnnn.+aaa+iiiii.private\fR
+contains the private key.
.PP
+The
+\fI.key\fR
+file contains a DNS KEY record that can be inserted into a zone file (directly or with a $INCLUDE statement).
.PP
-The \fI.key\fR file contains a DNS KEY record that
-can be inserted into a zone file (directly or with a $INCLUDE
-statement).
-.PP
-.PP
-The \fI.private\fR file contains algorithm specific
-fields. For obvious security reasons, this file does not have
-general read permission.
-.PP
-.PP
-Both \fI.key\fR and \fI.private\fR
-files are generated for symmetric encryption algorithm such as
-HMAC-MD5, even though the public and private key are equivalent.
+The
+\fI.private\fR
+file contains algorithm specific fields. For obvious security reasons, this file does not have general read permission.
.PP
+Both
+\fI.key\fR
+and
+\fI.private\fR
+files are generated for symmetric encryption algorithm such as HMAC\-MD5, even though the public and private key are equivalent.
.SH "EXAMPLE"
.PP
-To generate a 768-bit DSA key for the domain
-\fBexample.com\fR, the following command would be
-issued:
+To generate a 768\-bit DSA key for the domain
+\fBexample.com\fR, the following command would be issued:
.PP
-\fBdnssec-keygen -a DSA -b 768 -n ZONE example.com\fR
+\fBdnssec\-keygen \-a DSA \-b 768 \-n ZONE example.com\fR
.PP
The command would print a string of the form:
.PP
\fBKexample.com.+003+26160\fR
.PP
-In this example, \fBdnssec-keygen\fR creates
-the files \fIKexample.com.+003+26160.key\fR and
+In this example,
+\fBdnssec\-keygen\fR
+creates the files
+\fIKexample.com.+003+26160.key\fR
+and
\fIKexample.com.+003+26160.private\fR
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.PP
-\fBdnssec-signzone\fR(8),
-\fIBIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual\fR,
-\fIRFC 2535\fR,
-\fIRFC 2845\fR,
-\fIRFC 2539\fR.
+\fBdnssec\-signzone\fR(8),
+BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual,
+RFC 2535,
+RFC 2845,
+RFC 2539.
.SH "AUTHOR"
.PP
Internet Systems Consortium
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/dnssec/dnssec-keygen.docbook b/contrib/bind9/bin/dnssec/dnssec-keygen.docbook
index a2034d9e804..e1eee228ee6 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/dnssec/dnssec-keygen.docbook
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/dnssec/dnssec-keygen.docbook
@@ -1,7 +1,9 @@
-
+]>
-
+
@@ -29,6 +31,21 @@
BIND9
+
+
+ 2004
+ 2005
+ Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+
+
+ 2000
+ 2001
+ 2002
+ 2003
+ Internet Software Consortium.
+
+
+
dnssec-keygenDNSSEC key generation tool
@@ -244,8 +261,7 @@
When dnssec-keygen completes successfully,
it prints a string of the form Knnnn.+aaa+iiiii
to the standard output. This is an identification string for
- the key it has generated. These strings can be used as arguments
- to dnssec-makekeyset.
+ the key it has generated.
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/dnssec/dnssec-keygen.html b/contrib/bind9/bin/dnssec/dnssec-keygen.html
index 734c914ba61..00271faadf4 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/dnssec/dnssec-keygen.html
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/dnssec/dnssec-keygen.html
@@ -1,544 +1,228 @@
-
-
-
-
-dnssec-keygen
+ dnssec-keygen generates keys for DNSSEC
(Secure DNS), as defined in RFC 2535 and RFC <TBA\>. It can also generate
keys for use with TSIG (Transaction Signatures), as
defined in RFC 2845.
-
OPTIONS
-a algorithm
Selects the cryptographic algorithm. The value of
- algorithm must be one of RSAMD5 (RSA) or RSASHA1,
+
+
+
+
OPTIONS
+
+
-a algorithm
+
+
+ Selects the cryptographic algorithm. The value of
+ algorithm must be one of RSAMD5 (RSA) or RSASHA1,
DSA, DH (Diffie Hellman), or HMAC-MD5. These values
are case insensitive.
-
Note 1: that for DNSSEC, RSASHA1 is a mandatory to implement algorithm,
+
+
+ Note 1: that for DNSSEC, RSASHA1 is a mandatory to implement algorithm,
and DSA is recommended. For TSIG, HMAC-MD5 is mandatory.
-
Note 2: HMAC-MD5 and DH automatically set the -k flag.
-
-b keysize
Specifies the number of bits in the key. The choice of key
+
+
+ Note 2: HMAC-MD5 and DH automatically set the -k flag.
+
+
+
-b keysize
+
+ Specifies the number of bits in the key. The choice of key
size depends on the algorithm used. RSAMD5 / RSASHA1 keys must be between
512 and 2048 bits. Diffie Hellman keys must be between
128 and 4096 bits. DSA keys must be between 512 and 1024
bits and an exact multiple of 64. HMAC-MD5 keys must be
between 1 and 512 bits.
-
-n nametype
Specifies the owner type of the key. The value of
- nametype must either be ZONE (for a DNSSEC
+
+
-n nametype
+
+ Specifies the owner type of the key. The value of
+ nametype must either be ZONE (for a DNSSEC
zone key (KEY/DNSKEY)), HOST or ENTITY (for a key associated with a host (KEY)),
USER (for a key associated with a user(KEY)) or OTHER (DNSKEY). These values are
case insensitive.
-
-c class
Indicates that the DNS record containing the key should have
+
+
-c class
+
+ Indicates that the DNS record containing the key should have
the specified class. If not specified, class IN is used.
-
-e
If generating an RSAMD5/RSASHA1 key, use a large exponent.
-
-f flag
Set the specified flag in the flag field of the KEY/DNSKEY record.
+
+
-e
+
+ If generating an RSAMD5/RSASHA1 key, use a large exponent.
+
+
-f flag
+
+ Set the specified flag in the flag field of the KEY/DNSKEY record.
The only recognized flag is KSK (Key Signing Key) DNSKEY.
-
-g generator
If generating a Diffie Hellman key, use this generator.
+
+
-g generator
+
+ If generating a Diffie Hellman key, use this generator.
Allowed values are 2 and 5. If no generator
is specified, a known prime from RFC 2539 will be used
if possible; otherwise the default is 2.
-
-h
Prints a short summary of the options and arguments to
- dnssec-keygen.
-
-k
Generate KEY records rather than DNSKEY records.
-
-p protocol
Sets the protocol value for the generated key. The protocol
+
+
-h
+
+ Prints a short summary of the options and arguments to
+ dnssec-keygen.
+
+
-k
+
+ Generate KEY records rather than DNSKEY records.
+
+
-p protocol
+
+ Sets the protocol value for the generated key. The protocol
is a number between 0 and 255. The default is 3 (DNSSEC).
Other possible values for this argument are listed in
RFC 2535 and its successors.
-
-r randomdev
Specifies the source of randomness. If the operating
- system does not provide a /dev/random
+
+
-r randomdev
+
+ Specifies the source of randomness. If the operating
+ system does not provide a /dev/random
or equivalent device, the default source of randomness
- is keyboard input. randomdev specifies
+ is keyboard input. randomdev specifies
the name of a character device or file containing random
data to be used instead of the default. The special value
- keyboard indicates that keyboard
+ keyboard indicates that keyboard
input should be used.
-
-s strength
Specifies the strength value of the key. The strength is
+
+
-s strength
+
+ Specifies the strength value of the key. The strength is
a number between 0 and 15, and currently has no defined
purpose in DNSSEC.
-
-t type
Indicates the use of the key. type must be
+
+
-t type
+
+ Indicates the use of the key. type must be
one of AUTHCONF, NOAUTHCONF, NOAUTH, or NOCONF. The default
is AUTHCONF. AUTH refers to the ability to authenticate
data, and CONF the ability to encrypt data.
-
-v level
Sets the debugging level.
-
GENERATED KEYS
When dnssec-keygen completes successfully,
- it prints a string of the form Knnnn.+aaa+iiiii
+
+
-v level
+
+ Sets the debugging level.
+
+
+
+
+
GENERATED KEYS
+
+ When dnssec-keygen completes successfully,
+ it prints a string of the form Knnnn.+aaa+iiiii
to the standard output. This is an identification string for
- the key it has generated. These strings can be used as arguments
- to dnssec-makekeyset.
-
nnnn is the key name.
-
aaa is the numeric representation of the
+ the key it has generated.
+
+
+
+ nnnn is the key name.
+
+
+ aaa is the numeric representation of the
algorithm.
-
iiiii is the key identifier (or footprint).
-
dnssec-keygen creates two file, with names based
- on the printed string. Knnnn.+aaa+iiiii.key
+
+
+ iiiii is the key identifier (or footprint).
+
+
+
+ dnssec-keygen creates two file, with names based
+ on the printed string. Knnnn.+aaa+iiiii.key
contains the public key, and
- Knnnn.+aaa+iiiii.private contains the private
+ Knnnn.+aaa+iiiii.private contains the private
key.
-
The .key file contains a DNS KEY record that
+
+
+ The .key file contains a DNS KEY record that
can be inserted into a zone file (directly or with a $INCLUDE
statement).
-
The .private file contains algorithm specific
+
+
+ The .private file contains algorithm specific
fields. For obvious security reasons, this file does not have
general read permission.
-
Both .key and .private
+
+
+ Both .key and .private
files are generated for symmetric encryption algorithm such as
HMAC-MD5, even though the public and private key are equivalent.
-
EXAMPLE
To generate a 768-bit DSA key for the domain
- example.com, the following command would be
+
+
+
+
EXAMPLE
+
+ To generate a 768-bit DSA key for the domain
+ example.com, the following command would be
issued:
-
dnssec-keygen -a DSA -b 768 -n ZONE example.com
-
The command would print a string of the form:
-
Kexample.com.+003+26160
-
In this example, dnssec-keygen creates
- the files Kexample.com.+003+26160.key and
- Kexample.com.+003+26160.private
-
+
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/dnssec/dnssec-signzone.8 b/contrib/bind9/bin/dnssec/dnssec-signzone.8
index a1795b8001a..63ffadba644 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/dnssec/dnssec-signzone.8
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/dnssec/dnssec-signzone.8
@@ -1,167 +1,157 @@
-.\" Copyright (C) 2004 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
-.\" Copyright (C) 2000-2003 Internet Software Consortium.
-.\"
+.\" Copyright (C) 2004, 2005 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+.\" Copyright (C) 2000-2003 Internet Software Consortium.
+.\"
.\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
.\" purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
.\" copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
-.\"
+.\"
.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ISC DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH
.\" REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
-.\" AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL ISC BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT,
+.\" AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL ISC BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT,
.\" INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
.\" LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE
.\" OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
.\" PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
.\"
-.\" $Id: dnssec-signzone.8,v 1.23.2.1.4.6 2004/06/11 02:32:46 marka Exp $
+.\" $Id: dnssec-signzone.8,v 1.23.2.1.4.10 2005/10/13 02:33:45 marka Exp $
.\"
-.TH "DNSSEC-SIGNZONE" "8" "June 30, 2000" "BIND9" ""
-.SH NAME
-dnssec-signzone \- DNSSEC zone signing tool
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-\fBdnssec-signzone\fR [ \fB-a\fR ] [ \fB-c \fIclass\fB\fR ] [ \fB-d \fIdirectory\fB\fR ] [ \fB-e \fIend-time\fB\fR ] [ \fB-f \fIoutput-file\fB\fR ] [ \fB-g\fR ] [ \fB-h\fR ] [ \fB-k \fIkey\fB\fR ] [ \fB-l \fIdomain\fB\fR ] [ \fB-i \fIinterval\fB\fR ] [ \fB-n \fInthreads\fB\fR ] [ \fB-o \fIorigin\fB\fR ] [ \fB-p\fR ] [ \fB-r \fIrandomdev\fB\fR ] [ \fB-s \fIstart-time\fB\fR ] [ \fB-t\fR ] [ \fB-v \fIlevel\fB\fR ] [ \fB-z\fR ] \fBzonefile\fR [ \fBkey\fR\fI...\fR ]
+.hy 0
+.ad l
+.\" ** You probably do not want to edit this file directly **
+.\" It was generated using the DocBook XSL Stylesheets (version 1.69.1).
+.\" Instead of manually editing it, you probably should edit the DocBook XML
+.\" source for it and then use the DocBook XSL Stylesheets to regenerate it.
+.TH "DNSSEC\-SIGNZONE" "8" "June 30, 2000" "BIND9" "BIND9"
+.\" disable hyphenation
+.nh
+.\" disable justification (adjust text to left margin only)
+.ad l
+.SH "NAME"
+dnssec\-signzone \- DNSSEC zone signing tool
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.HP 16
+\fBdnssec\-signzone\fR [\fB\-a\fR] [\fB\-c\ \fR\fB\fIclass\fR\fR] [\fB\-d\ \fR\fB\fIdirectory\fR\fR] [\fB\-e\ \fR\fB\fIend\-time\fR\fR] [\fB\-f\ \fR\fB\fIoutput\-file\fR\fR] [\fB\-g\fR] [\fB\-h\fR] [\fB\-k\ \fR\fB\fIkey\fR\fR] [\fB\-l\ \fR\fB\fIdomain\fR\fR] [\fB\-i\ \fR\fB\fIinterval\fR\fR] [\fB\-n\ \fR\fB\fInthreads\fR\fR] [\fB\-o\ \fR\fB\fIorigin\fR\fR] [\fB\-p\fR] [\fB\-r\ \fR\fB\fIrandomdev\fR\fR] [\fB\-s\ \fR\fB\fIstart\-time\fR\fR] [\fB\-t\fR] [\fB\-v\ \fR\fB\fIlevel\fR\fR] [\fB\-z\fR] {zonefile} [key...]
.SH "DESCRIPTION"
.PP
-\fBdnssec-signzone\fR signs a zone. It generates
-NSEC and RRSIG records and produces a signed version of the
-zone. The security status of delegations from the signed zone
-(that is, whether the child zones are secure or not) is
-determined by the presence or absence of a
-\fIkeyset\fR file for each child zone.
+\fBdnssec\-signzone\fR
+signs a zone. It generates NSEC and RRSIG records and produces a signed version of the zone. The security status of delegations from the signed zone (that is, whether the child zones are secure or not) is determined by the presence or absence of a
+\fIkeyset\fR
+file for each child zone.
.SH "OPTIONS"
.TP
-\fB-a\fR
+\-a
Verify all generated signatures.
.TP
-\fB-c \fIclass\fB\fR
+\-c \fIclass\fR
Specifies the DNS class of the zone.
.TP
-\fB-k \fIkey\fB\fR
-Treat specified key as a key signing key ignoring any
-key flags. This option may be specified multiple times.
+\-k \fIkey\fR
+Treat specified key as a key signing key ignoring any key flags. This option may be specified multiple times.
.TP
-\fB-l \fIdomain\fB\fR
-Generate a DLV set in addition to the key (DNSKEY) and DS sets.
-The domain is appended to the name of the records.
+\-l \fIdomain\fR
+Generate a DLV set in addition to the key (DNSKEY) and DS sets. The domain is appended to the name of the records.
.TP
-\fB-d \fIdirectory\fB\fR
-Look for \fIkeyset\fR files in
-\fBdirectory\fR as the directory
+\-d \fIdirectory\fR
+Look for
+\fIkeyset\fR
+files in
+\fBdirectory\fR
+as the directory
.TP
-\fB-g\fR
-Generate DS records for child zones from keyset files.
-Existing DS records will be removed.
+\-g
+Generate DS records for child zones from keyset files. Existing DS records will be removed.
.TP
-\fB-s \fIstart-time\fB\fR
-Specify the date and time when the generated RRSIG records
-become valid. This can be either an absolute or relative
-time. An absolute start time is indicated by a number
-in YYYYMMDDHHMMSS notation; 20000530144500 denotes
-14:45:00 UTC on May 30th, 2000. A relative start time is
-indicated by +N, which is N seconds from the current time.
-If no \fBstart-time\fR is specified, the current
-time minus 1 hour (to allow for clock skew) is used.
+\-s \fIstart\-time\fR
+Specify the date and time when the generated RRSIG records become valid. This can be either an absolute or relative time. An absolute start time is indicated by a number in YYYYMMDDHHMMSS notation; 20000530144500 denotes 14:45:00 UTC on May 30th, 2000. A relative start time is indicated by +N, which is N seconds from the current time. If no
+\fBstart\-time\fR
+is specified, the current time minus 1 hour (to allow for clock skew) is used.
.TP
-\fB-e \fIend-time\fB\fR
-Specify the date and time when the generated RRSIG records
-expire. As with \fBstart-time\fR, an absolute
-time is indicated in YYYYMMDDHHMMSS notation. A time relative
-to the start time is indicated with +N, which is N seconds from
-the start time. A time relative to the current time is
-indicated with now+N. If no \fBend-time\fR is
-specified, 30 days from the start time is used as a default.
+\-e \fIend\-time\fR
+Specify the date and time when the generated RRSIG records expire. As with
+\fBstart\-time\fR, an absolute time is indicated in YYYYMMDDHHMMSS notation. A time relative to the start time is indicated with +N, which is N seconds from the start time. A time relative to the current time is indicated with now+N. If no
+\fBend\-time\fR
+is specified, 30 days from the start time is used as a default.
.TP
-\fB-f \fIoutput-file\fB\fR
-The name of the output file containing the signed zone. The
-default is to append \fI.signed\fR to the
-input file.
+\-f \fIoutput\-file\fR
+The name of the output file containing the signed zone. The default is to append
+\fI.signed\fR
+to the input file.
.TP
-\fB-h\fR
+\-h
Prints a short summary of the options and arguments to
-\fBdnssec-signzone\fR.
+\fBdnssec\-signzone\fR.
.TP
-\fB-i \fIinterval\fB\fR
-When a previously signed zone is passed as input, records
-may be resigned. The \fBinterval\fR option
-specifies the cycle interval as an offset from the current
-time (in seconds). If a RRSIG record expires after the
-cycle interval, it is retained. Otherwise, it is considered
-to be expiring soon, and it will be replaced.
-
-The default cycle interval is one quarter of the difference
-between the signature end and start times. So if neither
-\fBend-time\fR or \fBstart-time\fR
-are specified, \fBdnssec-signzone\fR generates
-signatures that are valid for 30 days, with a cycle
-interval of 7.5 days. Therefore, if any existing RRSIG records
-are due to expire in less than 7.5 days, they would be
-replaced.
+\-i \fIinterval\fR
+When a previously signed zone is passed as input, records may be resigned. The
+\fBinterval\fR
+option specifies the cycle interval as an offset from the current time (in seconds). If a RRSIG record expires after the cycle interval, it is retained. Otherwise, it is considered to be expiring soon, and it will be replaced.
+.sp
+The default cycle interval is one quarter of the difference between the signature end and start times. So if neither
+\fBend\-time\fR
+or
+\fBstart\-time\fR
+are specified,
+\fBdnssec\-signzone\fR
+generates signatures that are valid for 30 days, with a cycle interval of 7.5 days. Therefore, if any existing RRSIG records are due to expire in less than 7.5 days, they would be replaced.
.TP
-\fB-n \fIncpus\fB\fR
-Specifies the number of threads to use. By default, one
-thread is started for each detected CPU.
+\-n \fIncpus\fR
+Specifies the number of threads to use. By default, one thread is started for each detected CPU.
.TP
-\fB-o \fIorigin\fB\fR
-The zone origin. If not specified, the name of the zone file
-is assumed to be the origin.
+\-o \fIorigin\fR
+The zone origin. If not specified, the name of the zone file is assumed to be the origin.
.TP
-\fB-p\fR
-Use pseudo-random data when signing the zone. This is faster,
-but less secure, than using real random data. This option
-may be useful when signing large zones or when the entropy
-source is limited.
+\-p
+Use pseudo\-random data when signing the zone. This is faster, but less secure, than using real random data. This option may be useful when signing large zones or when the entropy source is limited.
.TP
-\fB-r \fIrandomdev\fB\fR
-Specifies the source of randomness. If the operating
-system does not provide a \fI/dev/random\fR
-or equivalent device, the default source of randomness
-is keyboard input. \fIrandomdev\fR specifies
-the name of a character device or file containing random
-data to be used instead of the default. The special value
-\fIkeyboard\fR indicates that keyboard
-input should be used.
+\-r \fIrandomdev\fR
+Specifies the source of randomness. If the operating system does not provide a
+\fI/dev/random\fR
+or equivalent device, the default source of randomness is keyboard input.
+\fIrandomdev\fR
+specifies the name of a character device or file containing random data to be used instead of the default. The special value
+\fIkeyboard\fR
+indicates that keyboard input should be used.
.TP
-\fB-t\fR
+\-t
Print statistics at completion.
.TP
-\fB-v \fIlevel\fB\fR
+\-v \fIlevel\fR
Sets the debugging level.
.TP
-\fB-z\fR
+\-z
Ignore KSK flag on key when determining what to sign.
.TP
-\fBzonefile\fR
+zonefile
The file containing the zone to be signed.
-Sets the debugging level.
.TP
-\fBkey\fR
-The keys used to sign the zone. If no keys are specified, the
-default all zone keys that have private key files in the
-current directory.
+key
+The keys used to sign the zone. If no keys are specified, the default all zone keys that have private key files in the current directory.
.SH "EXAMPLE"
.PP
-The following command signs the \fBexample.com\fR
-zone with the DSA key generated in the \fBdnssec-keygen\fR
+The following command signs the
+\fBexample.com\fR
+zone with the DSA key generated in the
+\fBdnssec\-keygen\fR
man page. The zone's keys must be in the zone. If there are
-\fIkeyset\fR files associated with child zones,
-they must be in the current directory.
-\fBexample.com\fR, the following command would be
-issued:
+\fIkeyset\fR
+files associated with child zones, they must be in the current directory.
+\fBexample.com\fR, the following command would be issued:
.PP
-\fBdnssec-signzone -o example.com db.example.com Kexample.com.+003+26160\fR
+\fBdnssec\-signzone \-o example.com db.example.com Kexample.com.+003+26160\fR
.PP
The command would print a string of the form:
.PP
-In this example, \fBdnssec-signzone\fR creates
-the file \fIdb.example.com.signed\fR. This file
-should be referenced in a zone statement in a
-\fInamed.conf\fR file.
+In this example,
+\fBdnssec\-signzone\fR
+creates the file
+\fIdb.example.com.signed\fR. This file should be referenced in a zone statement in a
+\fInamed.conf\fR
+file.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.PP
-\fBdnssec-keygen\fR(8),
-\fIBIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual\fR,
-\fIRFC 2535\fR.
+\fBdnssec\-keygen\fR(8),
+BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual,
+RFC 2535.
.SH "AUTHOR"
.PP
Internet Systems Consortium
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/dnssec/dnssec-signzone.c b/contrib/bind9/bin/dnssec/dnssec-signzone.c
index c2c33f8c812..93caf497e26 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/dnssec/dnssec-signzone.c
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/dnssec/dnssec-signzone.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
/*
- * Portions Copyright (C) 2004 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+ * Portions Copyright (C) 2004, 2005 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
* Portions Copyright (C) 1999-2003 Internet Software Consortium.
* Portions Copyright (C) 1995-2000 by Network Associates, Inc.
*
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@
* IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
*/
-/* $Id: dnssec-signzone.c,v 1.139.2.2.4.17 2004/10/25 01:36:06 marka Exp $ */
+/* $Id: dnssec-signzone.c,v 1.139.2.2.4.21 2005/10/14 01:38:41 marka Exp $ */
#include
@@ -787,7 +787,6 @@ signname(dns_dbnode_t *node, dns_name_t *name) {
dns_rdatasetiter_t *rdsiter;
isc_boolean_t isdelegation = ISC_FALSE;
isc_boolean_t hasds = ISC_FALSE;
- isc_boolean_t atorigin;
isc_boolean_t changed = ISC_FALSE;
dns_diff_t del, add;
char namestr[DNS_NAME_FORMATSIZE];
@@ -795,8 +794,6 @@ signname(dns_dbnode_t *node, dns_name_t *name) {
dns_name_format(name, namestr, sizeof(namestr));
- atorigin = dns_name_equal(name, gorigin);
-
/*
* Determine if this is a delegation point.
*/
@@ -931,13 +928,16 @@ signname(dns_dbnode_t *node, dns_name_t *name) {
static inline isc_boolean_t
active_node(dns_dbnode_t *node) {
- dns_rdatasetiter_t *rdsiter;
+ dns_rdatasetiter_t *rdsiter = NULL;
+ dns_rdatasetiter_t *rdsiter2 = NULL;
isc_boolean_t active = ISC_FALSE;
isc_result_t result;
dns_rdataset_t rdataset;
+ dns_rdatatype_t type;
+ dns_rdatatype_t covers;
+ isc_boolean_t found;
dns_rdataset_init(&rdataset);
- rdsiter = NULL;
result = dns_db_allrdatasets(gdb, node, gversion, 0, &rdsiter);
check_result(result, "dns_db_allrdatasets()");
result = dns_rdatasetiter_first(rdsiter);
@@ -958,36 +958,63 @@ active_node(dns_dbnode_t *node) {
if (!active) {
/*
- * Make sure there is no NSEC / RRSIG records for
- * this node.
+ * The node is empty of everything but NSEC / RRSIG records.
*/
- result = dns_db_deleterdataset(gdb, node, gversion,
- dns_rdatatype_nsec, 0);
- if (result == DNS_R_UNCHANGED)
- result = ISC_R_SUCCESS;
- check_result(result, "dns_db_deleterdataset(nsec)");
-
- result = dns_rdatasetiter_first(rdsiter);
for (result = dns_rdatasetiter_first(rdsiter);
result == ISC_R_SUCCESS;
result = dns_rdatasetiter_next(rdsiter)) {
dns_rdatasetiter_current(rdsiter, &rdataset);
- if (rdataset.type == dns_rdatatype_rrsig) {
- dns_rdatatype_t type = rdataset.type;
- dns_rdatatype_t covers = rdataset.covers;
- result = dns_db_deleterdataset(gdb, node,
- gversion, type,
- covers);
- if (result == DNS_R_UNCHANGED)
- result = ISC_R_SUCCESS;
- check_result(result,
- "dns_db_deleterdataset(rrsig)");
- }
+ result = dns_db_deleterdataset(gdb, node, gversion,
+ rdataset.type,
+ rdataset.covers);
+ check_result(result, "dns_db_deleterdataset()");
dns_rdataset_disassociate(&rdataset);
}
if (result != ISC_R_NOMORE)
fatal("rdataset iteration failed: %s",
isc_result_totext(result));
+ } else {
+ /*
+ * Delete RRSIGs for types that no longer exist.
+ */
+ result = dns_db_allrdatasets(gdb, node, gversion, 0, &rdsiter2);
+ check_result(result, "dns_db_allrdatasets()");
+ for (result = dns_rdatasetiter_first(rdsiter);
+ result == ISC_R_SUCCESS;
+ result = dns_rdatasetiter_next(rdsiter)) {
+ dns_rdatasetiter_current(rdsiter, &rdataset);
+ type = rdataset.type;
+ covers = rdataset.covers;
+ dns_rdataset_disassociate(&rdataset);
+ if (type != dns_rdatatype_rrsig)
+ continue;
+ found = ISC_FALSE;
+ for (result = dns_rdatasetiter_first(rdsiter2);
+ !found && result == ISC_R_SUCCESS;
+ result = dns_rdatasetiter_next(rdsiter2)) {
+ dns_rdatasetiter_current(rdsiter2, &rdataset);
+ if (rdataset.type == covers)
+ found = ISC_TRUE;
+ dns_rdataset_disassociate(&rdataset);
+ }
+ if (!found) {
+ if (result != ISC_R_NOMORE)
+ fatal("rdataset iteration failed: %s",
+ isc_result_totext(result));
+ result = dns_db_deleterdataset(gdb, node,
+ gversion, type,
+ covers);
+ check_result(result,
+ "dns_db_deleterdataset(rrsig)");
+ } else if (result != ISC_R_NOMORE &&
+ result != ISC_R_SUCCESS)
+ fatal("rdataset iteration failed: %s",
+ isc_result_totext(result));
+ }
+ if (result != ISC_R_NOMORE)
+ fatal("rdataset iteration failed: %s",
+ isc_result_totext(result));
+ dns_rdatasetiter_destroy(&rdsiter2);
}
dns_rdatasetiter_destroy(&rdsiter);
@@ -1423,7 +1450,6 @@ warnifallksk(dns_db_t *db) {
dns_dbnode_t *node = NULL;
dns_rdataset_t rdataset;
dns_rdata_t rdata = DNS_RDATA_INIT;
- dst_key_t *pubkey;
isc_result_t result;
dns_rdata_key_t key;
isc_boolean_t have_non_ksk = ISC_FALSE;
@@ -1444,7 +1470,6 @@ warnifallksk(dns_db_t *db) {
result = dns_rdataset_first(&rdataset);
check_result(result, "dns_rdataset_first");
while (result == ISC_R_SUCCESS) {
- pubkey = NULL;
dns_rdata_reset(&rdata);
dns_rdataset_current(&rdataset, &rdata);
result = dns_rdata_tostruct(&rdata, &key, NULL);
@@ -1615,9 +1640,9 @@ usage(void) {
fprintf(stderr, "\t\tdirectory to find keyset files (.)\n");
fprintf(stderr, "\t-g:\t");
fprintf(stderr, "generate DS records from keyset files\n");
- fprintf(stderr, "\t-s YYYYMMDDHHMMSS|+offset:\n");
+ fprintf(stderr, "\t-s [YYYYMMDDHHMMSS|+offset]:\n");
fprintf(stderr, "\t\tRRSIG start time - absolute|offset (now - 1 hour)\n");
- fprintf(stderr, "\t-e YYYYMMDDHHMMSS|+offset|\"now\"+offset]:\n");
+ fprintf(stderr, "\t-e [YYYYMMDDHHMMSS|+offset|\"now\"+offset]:\n");
fprintf(stderr, "\t\tRRSIG end time - absolute|from start|from now "
"(now + 30 days)\n");
fprintf(stderr, "\t-i interval:\n");
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/dnssec/dnssec-signzone.docbook b/contrib/bind9/bin/dnssec/dnssec-signzone.docbook
index 2b85102a0b5..35f35cc7339 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/dnssec/dnssec-signzone.docbook
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/dnssec/dnssec-signzone.docbook
@@ -1,7 +1,9 @@
-
+]>
-
+
@@ -29,6 +31,21 @@
BIND9
+
+
+ 2004
+ 2005
+ Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+
+
+ 2000
+ 2001
+ 2002
+ 2003
+ Internet Software Consortium.
+
+
+
dnssec-signzoneDNSSEC zone signing tool
@@ -290,7 +307,6 @@
The file containing the zone to be signed.
- Sets the debugging level.
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/dnssec/dnssec-signzone.html b/contrib/bind9/bin/dnssec/dnssec-signzone.html
index 221099fbdbe..5cc8c0747cc 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/dnssec/dnssec-signzone.html
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/dnssec/dnssec-signzone.html
@@ -1,553 +1,220 @@
-
-
-
-
-dnssec-signzone
+ dnssec-signzone signs a zone. It generates
NSEC and RRSIG records and produces a signed version of the
zone. The security status of delegations from the signed zone
(that is, whether the child zones are secure or not) is
determined by the presence or absence of a
- keyset file for each child zone.
-
OPTIONS
-a
Verify all generated signatures.
-
-c class
Specifies the DNS class of the zone.
-
-k key
Treat specified key as a key signing key ignoring any
+ keyset file for each child zone.
+
+
+
+
OPTIONS
+
+
-a
+
+ Verify all generated signatures.
+
+
-c class
+
+ Specifies the DNS class of the zone.
+
+
-k key
+
+ Treat specified key as a key signing key ignoring any
key flags. This option may be specified multiple times.
-
-l domain
Generate a DLV set in addition to the key (DNSKEY) and DS sets.
+
+
-l domain
+
+ Generate a DLV set in addition to the key (DNSKEY) and DS sets.
The domain is appended to the name of the records.
-
-d directory
Look for keyset files in
- directory as the directory
-
-g
Generate DS records for child zones from keyset files.
+
+
-d directory
+
+ Look for keyset files in
+ directory as the directory
+
+
-g
+
+ Generate DS records for child zones from keyset files.
Existing DS records will be removed.
-
-s start-time
Specify the date and time when the generated RRSIG records
+
+
-s start-time
+
+ Specify the date and time when the generated RRSIG records
become valid. This can be either an absolute or relative
time. An absolute start time is indicated by a number
in YYYYMMDDHHMMSS notation; 20000530144500 denotes
14:45:00 UTC on May 30th, 2000. A relative start time is
indicated by +N, which is N seconds from the current time.
- If no start-time is specified, the current
+ If no start-time is specified, the current
time minus 1 hour (to allow for clock skew) is used.
-
-e end-time
Specify the date and time when the generated RRSIG records
- expire. As with start-time, an absolute
+
+
-e end-time
+
+ Specify the date and time when the generated RRSIG records
+ expire. As with start-time, an absolute
time is indicated in YYYYMMDDHHMMSS notation. A time relative
to the start time is indicated with +N, which is N seconds from
the start time. A time relative to the current time is
- indicated with now+N. If no end-time is
+ indicated with now+N. If no end-time is
specified, 30 days from the start time is used as a default.
-
-f output-file
The name of the output file containing the signed zone. The
- default is to append .signed to the
+
+
-f output-file
+
+ The name of the output file containing the signed zone. The
+ default is to append .signed to the
input file.
-
-h
Prints a short summary of the options and arguments to
- dnssec-signzone.
-
-i interval
When a previously signed zone is passed as input, records
- may be resigned. The interval option
+
+
-h
+
+ Prints a short summary of the options and arguments to
+ dnssec-signzone.
+
+
-i interval
+
+
+ When a previously signed zone is passed as input, records
+ may be resigned. The interval option
specifies the cycle interval as an offset from the current
time (in seconds). If a RRSIG record expires after the
cycle interval, it is retained. Otherwise, it is considered
to be expiring soon, and it will be replaced.
-
The default cycle interval is one quarter of the difference
+
+
+ The default cycle interval is one quarter of the difference
between the signature end and start times. So if neither
- end-time or start-time
- are specified, dnssec-signzone generates
+ end-time or start-time
+ are specified, dnssec-signzone generates
signatures that are valid for 30 days, with a cycle
interval of 7.5 days. Therefore, if any existing RRSIG records
are due to expire in less than 7.5 days, they would be
replaced.
-
-n ncpus
Specifies the number of threads to use. By default, one
+
+
+
-n ncpus
+
+ Specifies the number of threads to use. By default, one
thread is started for each detected CPU.
-
-o origin
The zone origin. If not specified, the name of the zone file
+
+
-o origin
+
+ The zone origin. If not specified, the name of the zone file
is assumed to be the origin.
-
-p
Use pseudo-random data when signing the zone. This is faster,
+
+
-p
+
+ Use pseudo-random data when signing the zone. This is faster,
but less secure, than using real random data. This option
may be useful when signing large zones or when the entropy
source is limited.
-
-r randomdev
Specifies the source of randomness. If the operating
- system does not provide a /dev/random
+
+
-r randomdev
+
+ Specifies the source of randomness. If the operating
+ system does not provide a /dev/random
or equivalent device, the default source of randomness
- is keyboard input. randomdev specifies
+ is keyboard input. randomdev specifies
the name of a character device or file containing random
data to be used instead of the default. The special value
- keyboard indicates that keyboard
+ keyboard indicates that keyboard
input should be used.
-
-t
Print statistics at completion.
-
-v level
Sets the debugging level.
-
-z
Ignore KSK flag on key when determining what to sign.
-
zonefile
The file containing the zone to be signed.
+
+
-t
+
+ Print statistics at completion.
+
+
-v level
+
Sets the debugging level.
-
key
The keys used to sign the zone. If no keys are specified, the
+
+
-z
+
+ Ignore KSK flag on key when determining what to sign.
+
+
zonefile
+
+ The file containing the zone to be signed.
+
+
key
+
+ The keys used to sign the zone. If no keys are specified, the
default all zone keys that have private key files in the
current directory.
-
EXAMPLE
The following command signs the example.com
- zone with the DSA key generated in the dnssec-keygen
+
+
+
+
+
EXAMPLE
+
+ The following command signs the example.com
+ zone with the DSA key generated in the dnssec-keygen
man page. The zone's keys must be in the zone. If there are
- keyset files associated with child zones,
+ keyset files associated with child zones,
they must be in the current directory.
- example.com, the following command would be
+ example.com, the following command would be
issued:
-
+ In this example, dnssec-signzone creates
+ the file db.example.com.signed. This file
should be referenced in a zone statement in a
- named.conf file.
-
+
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/dnssec/dnssectool.c b/contrib/bind9/bin/dnssec/dnssectool.c
index 1b84de8f48a..83ba76d9128 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/dnssec/dnssectool.c
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/dnssec/dnssectool.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
/*
- * Copyright (C) 2004 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+ * Copyright (C) 2004, 2005 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
* Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2003 Internet Software Consortium.
*
* Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
* PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
*/
-/* $Id: dnssectool.c,v 1.31.2.3.2.4 2004/03/08 02:07:38 marka Exp $ */
+/* $Id: dnssectool.c,v 1.31.2.3.2.6 2005/07/02 02:42:43 marka Exp $ */
#include
@@ -145,6 +145,8 @@ setup_logging(int verbose, isc_mem_t *mctx, isc_log_t **logp) {
isc_log_t *log = NULL;
int level;
+ if (verbose < 0)
+ verbose = 0;
switch (verbose) {
case 0:
/*
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/named/aclconf.c b/contrib/bind9/bin/named/aclconf.c
index ef36c5681f4..8b6d0c767d4 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/named/aclconf.c
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/named/aclconf.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
/*
- * Copyright (C) 2004 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+ * Copyright (C) 2004, 2005 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
* Copyright (C) 1999-2002 Internet Software Consortium.
*
* Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
* PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
*/
-/* $Id: aclconf.c,v 1.27.12.3 2004/03/08 04:04:18 marka Exp $ */
+/* $Id: aclconf.c,v 1.27.12.5 2005/03/17 03:58:25 marka Exp $ */
#include
@@ -31,6 +31,8 @@
#include
+#define LOOP_MAGIC ISC_MAGIC('L','O','O','P')
+
void
ns_aclconfctx_init(ns_aclconfctx_t *ctx) {
ISC_LIST_INIT(ctx->named_acl_cache);
@@ -81,6 +83,7 @@ convert_named_acl(cfg_obj_t *nameobj, cfg_obj_t *cctx,
isc_result_t result;
cfg_obj_t *cacl = NULL;
dns_acl_t *dacl;
+ dns_acl_t loop;
char *aclname = cfg_obj_asstring(nameobj);
/* Look for an already-converted version. */
@@ -89,6 +92,11 @@ convert_named_acl(cfg_obj_t *nameobj, cfg_obj_t *cctx,
dacl = ISC_LIST_NEXT(dacl, nextincache))
{
if (strcasecmp(aclname, dacl->name) == 0) {
+ if (ISC_MAGIC_VALID(dacl, LOOP_MAGIC)) {
+ cfg_obj_log(nameobj, dns_lctx, ISC_LOG_ERROR,
+ "acl loop detected: %s", aclname);
+ return (ISC_R_FAILURE);
+ }
dns_acl_attach(dacl, target);
return (ISC_R_SUCCESS);
}
@@ -100,7 +108,18 @@ convert_named_acl(cfg_obj_t *nameobj, cfg_obj_t *cctx,
"undefined ACL '%s'", aclname);
return (result);
}
+ /*
+ * Add a loop detection element.
+ */
+ memset(&loop, 0, sizeof(loop));
+ ISC_LINK_INIT(&loop, nextincache);
+ loop.name = aclname;
+ loop.magic = LOOP_MAGIC;
+ ISC_LIST_APPEND(ctx->named_acl_cache, &loop, nextincache);
result = ns_acl_fromconfig(cacl, cctx, ctx, mctx, &dacl);
+ ISC_LIST_UNLINK(ctx->named_acl_cache, &loop, nextincache);
+ loop.magic = 0;
+ loop.name = NULL;
if (result != ISC_R_SUCCESS)
return (result);
dacl->name = isc_mem_strdup(dacl->mctx, aclname);
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/named/client.c b/contrib/bind9/bin/named/client.c
index 259f8d9dc29..baecc2345cb 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/named/client.c
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/named/client.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
/*
- * Copyright (C) 2004 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+ * Copyright (C) 2004, 2005 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
* Copyright (C) 1999-2003 Internet Software Consortium.
*
* Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
* PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
*/
-/* $Id: client.c,v 1.176.2.13.4.23 2004/09/26 22:37:43 marka Exp $ */
+/* $Id: client.c,v 1.176.2.13.4.26 2005/07/27 02:53:14 marka Exp $ */
#include
@@ -177,23 +177,29 @@ static void client_request(isc_task_t *task, isc_event_t *event);
static void ns_client_dumpmessage(ns_client_t *client, const char *reason);
void
-ns_client_recursing(ns_client_t *client, isc_boolean_t killoldest) {
+ns_client_recursing(ns_client_t *client) {
+ REQUIRE(NS_CLIENT_VALID(client));
+
+ LOCK(&client->manager->lock);
+ ISC_LIST_UNLINK(*client->list, client, link);
+ ISC_LIST_APPEND(client->manager->recursing, client, link);
+ client->list = &client->manager->recursing;
+ UNLOCK(&client->manager->lock);
+}
+
+void
+ns_client_killoldestquery(ns_client_t *client) {
ns_client_t *oldest;
REQUIRE(NS_CLIENT_VALID(client));
LOCK(&client->manager->lock);
- if (killoldest) {
- oldest = ISC_LIST_HEAD(client->manager->recursing);
- if (oldest != NULL) {
- ns_query_cancel(oldest);
- ISC_LIST_UNLINK(*oldest->list, oldest, link);
- ISC_LIST_APPEND(client->manager->active, oldest, link);
- oldest->list = &client->manager->active;
- }
+ oldest = ISC_LIST_HEAD(client->manager->recursing);
+ if (oldest != NULL) {
+ ns_query_cancel(oldest);
+ ISC_LIST_UNLINK(*oldest->list, oldest, link);
+ ISC_LIST_APPEND(client->manager->active, oldest, link);
+ oldest->list = &client->manager->active;
}
- ISC_LIST_UNLINK(*client->list, client, link);
- ISC_LIST_APPEND(client->manager->recursing, client, link);
- client->list = &client->manager->recursing;
UNLOCK(&client->manager->lock);
}
@@ -1603,8 +1609,7 @@ client_timeout(isc_task_t *task, isc_event_t *event) {
}
static isc_result_t
-client_create(ns_clientmgr_t *manager, ns_client_t **clientp)
-{
+client_create(ns_clientmgr_t *manager, ns_client_t **clientp) {
ns_client_t *client;
isc_result_t result;
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/named/control.c b/contrib/bind9/bin/named/control.c
index b6ff6fe2cbc..c9d17abe027 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/named/control.c
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/named/control.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
/*
- * Copyright (C) 2004 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+ * Copyright (C) 2004, 2005 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
* Copyright (C) 2001-2003 Internet Software Consortium.
*
* Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
* PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
*/
-/* $Id: control.c,v 1.7.2.2.2.11 2004/09/03 03:43:31 marka Exp $ */
+/* $Id: control.c,v 1.7.2.2.2.14 2005/04/29 01:04:47 marka Exp $ */
#include
@@ -37,6 +37,9 @@
#include
#include
#include
+#ifdef HAVE_LIBSCF
+#include
+#endif
static isc_boolean_t
command_compare(const char *text, const char *command) {
@@ -58,6 +61,9 @@ ns_control_docommand(isccc_sexpr_t *message, isc_buffer_t *text) {
isccc_sexpr_t *data;
char *command;
isc_result_t result;
+#ifdef HAVE_LIBSCF
+ ns_smf_want_disable = 0;
+#endif
data = isccc_alist_lookup(message, "_data");
if (data == NULL) {
@@ -92,11 +98,41 @@ ns_control_docommand(isccc_sexpr_t *message, isc_buffer_t *text) {
} else if (command_compare(command, NS_COMMAND_RETRANSFER)) {
result = ns_server_retransfercommand(ns_g_server, command);
} else if (command_compare(command, NS_COMMAND_HALT)) {
+#ifdef HAVE_LIBSCF
+ /*
+ * If we are managed by smf(5), AND in chroot, then
+ * we cannot connect to the smf repository, so just
+ * return with an appropriate message back to rndc.
+ */
+ if (ns_smf_got_instance == 1 && ns_smf_chroot == 1) {
+ result = ns_smf_add_message(text);
+ return (result);
+ }
+ /*
+ * If we are managed by smf(5) but not in chroot,
+ * try to disable ourselves the smf way.
+ */
+ if (ns_smf_got_instance == 1 && ns_smf_chroot == 0)
+ ns_smf_want_disable = 1;
+ /*
+ * If ns_smf_got_instance = 0, ns_smf_chroot
+ * is not relevant and we fall through to
+ * isc_app_shutdown below.
+ */
+#endif
ns_server_flushonshutdown(ns_g_server, ISC_FALSE);
ns_os_shutdownmsg(command, text);
isc_app_shutdown();
result = ISC_R_SUCCESS;
} else if (command_compare(command, NS_COMMAND_STOP)) {
+#ifdef HAVE_LIBSCF
+ if (ns_smf_got_instance == 1 && ns_smf_chroot == 1) {
+ result = ns_smf_add_message(text);
+ return (result);
+ }
+ if (ns_smf_got_instance == 1 && ns_smf_chroot == 0)
+ ns_smf_want_disable = 1;
+#endif
ns_server_flushonshutdown(ns_g_server, ISC_TRUE);
ns_os_shutdownmsg(command, text);
isc_app_shutdown();
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/named/include/named/client.h b/contrib/bind9/bin/named/include/named/client.h
index 97951a41683..7097a3bb05b 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/named/include/named/client.h
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/named/include/named/client.h
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
/*
- * Copyright (C) 2004 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+ * Copyright (C) 2004, 2005 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
* Copyright (C) 1999-2003 Internet Software Consortium.
*
* Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
* PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
*/
-/* $Id: client.h,v 1.60.2.2.10.8 2004/07/23 02:56:52 marka Exp $ */
+/* $Id: client.h,v 1.60.2.2.10.10 2005/07/29 00:13:08 marka Exp $ */
#ifndef NAMED_CLIENT_H
#define NAMED_CLIENT_H 1
@@ -322,12 +322,18 @@ ns_client_aclmsg(const char *msg, dns_name_t *name, dns_rdatatype_t type,
DNS_RDATACLASS_FORMATSIZE + sizeof(x) + sizeof("'/'"))
void
-ns_client_recursing(ns_client_t *client, isc_boolean_t killoldest);
-/*
+ns_client_recursing(ns_client_t *client);
+/*%
* Add client to end of recursing list. If 'killoldest' is true
* kill the oldest recursive client (list head).
*/
+void
+ns_client_killoldestquery(ns_client_t *client);
+/*%
+ * Kill the oldest recursive query (recursing list head).
+ */
+
void
ns_client_dumprecursing(FILE *f, ns_clientmgr_t *manager);
/*
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/named/include/named/ns_smf_globals.h b/contrib/bind9/bin/named/include/named/ns_smf_globals.h
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..49aa31dc5c0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/named/include/named/ns_smf_globals.h
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (C) 2005 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+ *
+ * Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
+ * purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
+ * copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
+ *
+ * THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ISC DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH
+ * REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
+ * AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL ISC BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT,
+ * INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
+ * LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE
+ * OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
+ * PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+/* $Id: ns_smf_globals.h,v 1.2.4.4 2005/05/13 01:22:33 marka Exp $ */
+
+#ifndef NS_SMF_GLOBALS_H
+#define NS_SMF_GLOBALS_H 1
+
+#include
+
+#undef EXTERN
+#undef INIT
+#ifdef NS_MAIN
+#define EXTERN
+#define INIT(v) = (v)
+#else
+#define EXTERN extern
+#define INIT(v)
+#endif
+
+EXTERN unsigned int ns_smf_got_instance INIT(0);
+EXTERN unsigned int ns_smf_chroot INIT(0);
+EXTERN unsigned int ns_smf_want_disable INIT(0);
+
+isc_result_t ns_smf_add_message(isc_buffer_t *text);
+isc_result_t ns_smf_get_instance(char **name, int debug, isc_mem_t *mctx);
+
+#undef EXTERN
+#undef INIT
+
+#endif /* NS_SMF_GLOBALS_H */
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/named/log.c b/contrib/bind9/bin/named/log.c
index 31af4bdd13c..9032af795d4 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/named/log.c
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/named/log.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
/*
- * Copyright (C) 2004 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+ * Copyright (C) 2004, 2005 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
* Copyright (C) 1999-2002 Internet Software Consortium.
*
* Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
* PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
*/
-/* $Id: log.c,v 1.33.2.1.10.4 2004/03/08 09:04:14 marka Exp $ */
+/* $Id: log.c,v 1.33.2.1.10.6 2005/05/24 23:58:17 marka Exp $ */
#include
@@ -154,6 +154,9 @@ ns_log_setdefaultchannels(isc_logconfig_t *lcfg) {
isc_result_t
ns_log_setsafechannels(isc_logconfig_t *lcfg) {
isc_result_t result;
+#if ISC_FACILITY != LOG_DAEMON
+ isc_logdestination_t destination;
+#endif
if (! ns_g_logstderr) {
result = isc_log_createchannel(lcfg, "default_debug",
@@ -172,6 +175,15 @@ ns_log_setsafechannels(isc_logconfig_t *lcfg) {
isc_log_setdebuglevel(ns_g_lctx, ns_g_debuglevel);
}
+#if ISC_FACILITY != LOG_DAEMON
+ destination.facility = ISC_FACILITY;
+ result = isc_log_createchannel(lcfg, "default_syslog",
+ ISC_LOG_TOSYSLOG, ISC_LOG_INFO,
+ &destination, 0);
+ if (result != ISC_R_SUCCESS)
+ goto cleanup;
+#endif
+
result = ISC_R_SUCCESS;
cleanup:
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/named/lwresd.8 b/contrib/bind9/bin/named/lwresd.8
index bbc177d0ff6..58f24b06237 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/named/lwresd.8
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/named/lwresd.8
@@ -1,135 +1,135 @@
-.\" Copyright (C) 2004 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
-.\" Copyright (C) 2000, 2001 Internet Software Consortium.
-.\"
+.\" Copyright (C) 2004, 2005 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+.\" Copyright (C) 2000, 2001 Internet Software Consortium.
+.\"
.\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
.\" purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
.\" copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
-.\"
+.\"
.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ISC DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH
.\" REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
-.\" AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL ISC BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT,
+.\" AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL ISC BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT,
.\" INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
.\" LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE
.\" OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
.\" PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
.\"
-.\" $Id: lwresd.8,v 1.13.208.2 2004/06/03 05:35:47 marka Exp $
+.\" $Id: lwresd.8,v 1.13.208.5 2005/10/13 02:33:47 marka Exp $
.\"
-.TH "LWRESD" "8" "June 30, 2000" "BIND9" ""
-.SH NAME
+.hy 0
+.ad l
+.\" ** You probably do not want to edit this file directly **
+.\" It was generated using the DocBook XSL Stylesheets (version 1.69.1).
+.\" Instead of manually editing it, you probably should edit the DocBook XML
+.\" source for it and then use the DocBook XSL Stylesheets to regenerate it.
+.TH "LWRESD" "8" "June 30, 2000" "BIND9" "BIND9"
+.\" disable hyphenation
+.nh
+.\" disable justification (adjust text to left margin only)
+.ad l
+.SH "NAME"
lwresd \- lightweight resolver daemon
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-\fBlwresd\fR [ \fB-C \fIconfig-file\fB\fR ] [ \fB-d \fIdebug-level\fB\fR ] [ \fB-f\fR ] [ \fB-g\fR ] [ \fB-i \fIpid-file\fB\fR ] [ \fB-n \fI#cpus\fB\fR ] [ \fB-P \fIport\fB\fR ] [ \fB-p \fIport\fB\fR ] [ \fB-s\fR ] [ \fB-t \fIdirectory\fB\fR ] [ \fB-u \fIuser\fB\fR ] [ \fB-v\fR ]
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.HP 7
+\fBlwresd\fR [\fB\-C\ \fR\fB\fIconfig\-file\fR\fR] [\fB\-d\ \fR\fB\fIdebug\-level\fR\fR] [\fB\-f\fR] [\fB\-g\fR] [\fB\-i\ \fR\fB\fIpid\-file\fR\fR] [\fB\-n\ \fR\fB\fI#cpus\fR\fR] [\fB\-P\ \fR\fB\fIport\fR\fR] [\fB\-p\ \fR\fB\fIport\fR\fR] [\fB\-s\fR] [\fB\-t\ \fR\fB\fIdirectory\fR\fR] [\fB\-u\ \fR\fB\fIuser\fR\fR] [\fB\-v\fR]
.SH "DESCRIPTION"
.PP
-\fBlwresd\fR is the daemon providing name lookup
-services to clients that use the BIND 9 lightweight resolver
-library. It is essentially a stripped-down, caching-only name
-server that answers queries using the BIND 9 lightweight
-resolver protocol rather than the DNS protocol.
+\fBlwresd\fR
+is the daemon providing name lookup services to clients that use the BIND 9 lightweight resolver library. It is essentially a stripped\-down, caching\-only name server that answers queries using the BIND 9 lightweight resolver protocol rather than the DNS protocol.
.PP
-\fBlwresd\fR listens for resolver queries on a
-UDP port on the IPv4 loopback interface, 127.0.0.1. This
-means that \fBlwresd\fR can only be used by
-processes running on the local machine. By default UDP port
-number 921 is used for lightweight resolver requests and
-responses.
+\fBlwresd\fR
+listens for resolver queries on a UDP port on the IPv4 loopback interface, 127.0.0.1. This means that
+\fBlwresd\fR
+can only be used by processes running on the local machine. By default UDP port number 921 is used for lightweight resolver requests and responses.
.PP
-Incoming lightweight resolver requests are decoded by the
-server which then resolves them using the DNS protocol. When
-the DNS lookup completes, \fBlwresd\fR encodes
-the answers in the lightweight resolver format and returns
-them to the client that made the request.
+Incoming lightweight resolver requests are decoded by the server which then resolves them using the DNS protocol. When the DNS lookup completes,
+\fBlwresd\fR
+encodes the answers in the lightweight resolver format and returns them to the client that made the request.
.PP
-If \fI/etc/resolv.conf\fR contains any
-\fBnameserver\fR entries, \fBlwresd\fR
-sends recursive DNS queries to those servers. This is similar
-to the use of forwarders in a caching name server. If no
-\fBnameserver\fR entries are present, or if
-forwarding fails, \fBlwresd\fR resolves the
-queries autonomously starting at the root name servers, using
-a built-in list of root server hints.
+If
+\fI/etc/resolv.conf\fR
+contains any
+\fBnameserver\fR
+entries,
+\fBlwresd\fR
+sends recursive DNS queries to those servers. This is similar to the use of forwarders in a caching name server. If no
+\fBnameserver\fR
+entries are present, or if forwarding fails,
+\fBlwresd\fR
+resolves the queries autonomously starting at the root name servers, using a built\-in list of root server hints.
.SH "OPTIONS"
.TP
-\fB-C \fIconfig-file\fB\fR
-Use \fIconfig-file\fR as the
-configuration file instead of the default,
+\-C \fIconfig\-file\fR
+Use
+\fIconfig\-file\fR
+as the configuration file instead of the default,
\fI/etc/resolv.conf\fR.
.TP
-\fB-d \fIdebug-level\fB\fR
-Set the daemon's debug level to \fIdebug-level\fR.
-Debugging traces from \fBlwresd\fR become
-more verbose as the debug level increases.
+\-d \fIdebug\-level\fR
+Set the daemon's debug level to
+\fIdebug\-level\fR. Debugging traces from
+\fBlwresd\fR
+become more verbose as the debug level increases.
.TP
-\fB-f\fR
+\-f
Run the server in the foreground (i.e. do not daemonize).
.TP
-\fB-g\fR
-Run the server in the foreground and force all logging
-to \fIstderr\fR.
+\-g
+Run the server in the foreground and force all logging to
+\fIstderr\fR.
.TP
-\fB-n \fI#cpus\fB\fR
-Create \fI#cpus\fR worker threads
-to take advantage of multiple CPUs. If not specified,
-\fBlwresd\fR will try to determine the
-number of CPUs present and create one thread per CPU.
-If it is unable to determine the number of CPUs, a
-single worker thread will be created.
+\-n \fI#cpus\fR
+Create
+\fI#cpus\fR
+worker threads to take advantage of multiple CPUs. If not specified,
+\fBlwresd\fR
+will try to determine the number of CPUs present and create one thread per CPU. If it is unable to determine the number of CPUs, a single worker thread will be created.
.TP
-\fB-P \fIport\fB\fR
+\-P \fIport\fR
Listen for lightweight resolver queries on port
-\fIport\fR. If
-not specified, the default is port 921.
+\fIport\fR. If not specified, the default is port 921.
.TP
-\fB-p \fIport\fB\fR
-Send DNS lookups to port \fIport\fR. If not
-specified, the default is port 53. This provides a
-way of testing the lightweight resolver daemon with a
-name server that listens for queries on a non-standard
-port number.
+\-p \fIport\fR
+Send DNS lookups to port
+\fIport\fR. If not specified, the default is port 53. This provides a way of testing the lightweight resolver daemon with a name server that listens for queries on a non\-standard port number.
.TP
-\fB-s\fR
-Write memory usage statistics to \fIstdout\fR
+\-s
+Write memory usage statistics to
+\fIstdout\fR
on exit.
-.sp
.RS
.B "Note:"
-This option is mainly of interest to BIND 9 developers
-and may be removed or changed in a future release.
+This option is mainly of interest to BIND 9 developers and may be removed or changed in a future release.
.RE
-.sp
.TP
-\fB-t \fIdirectory\fB\fR
-\fBchroot()\fR to \fIdirectory\fR after
-processing the command line arguments, but before
-reading the configuration file.
-.sp
+\-t \fIdirectory\fR
+\fBchroot()\fR
+to
+\fIdirectory\fR
+after processing the command line arguments, but before reading the configuration file.
.RS
.B "Warning:"
This option should be used in conjunction with the
-\fB-u\fR option, as chrooting a process
-running as root doesn't enhance security on most
-systems; the way \fBchroot()\fR is
-defined allows a process with root privileges to
-escape a chroot jail.
+\fB\-u\fR
+option, as chrooting a process running as root doesn't enhance security on most systems; the way
+\fBchroot()\fR
+is defined allows a process with root privileges to escape a chroot jail.
.RE
-.sp
.TP
-\fB-u \fIuser\fB\fR
-\fBsetuid()\fR to \fIuser\fR after completing
-privileged operations, such as creating sockets that
-listen on privileged ports.
+\-u \fIuser\fR
+\fBsetuid()\fR
+to
+\fIuser\fR
+after completing privileged operations, such as creating sockets that listen on privileged ports.
.TP
-\fB-v\fR
+\-v
Report the version number and exit.
.SH "FILES"
.TP
-\fB\fI/etc/resolv.conf\fB\fR
+\fI/etc/resolv.conf\fR
The default configuration file.
.TP
-\fB\fI/var/run/lwresd.pid\fB\fR
-The default process-id file.
+\fI/var/run/lwresd.pid\fR
+The default process\-id file.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.PP
\fBnamed\fR(8),
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/named/lwresd.docbook b/contrib/bind9/bin/named/lwresd.docbook
index 46314c2614e..c1f500bb830 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/named/lwresd.docbook
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/named/lwresd.docbook
@@ -1,6 +1,8 @@
-
+]>
-
+
@@ -29,6 +31,19 @@
BIND9
+
+
+ 2004
+ 2005
+ Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+
+
+ 2000
+ 2001
+ Internet Software Consortium.
+
+
+
lwresdlightweight resolver daemon
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/named/lwresd.html b/contrib/bind9/bin/named/lwresd.html
index afe7af22f48..439153aa826 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/named/lwresd.html
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/named/lwresd.html
@@ -1,497 +1,189 @@
-
-
-
-
-lwresd
+ lwresd is the daemon providing name lookup
services to clients that use the BIND 9 lightweight resolver
library. It is essentially a stripped-down, caching-only name
server that answers queries using the BIND 9 lightweight
resolver protocol rather than the DNS protocol.
-
lwresd listens for resolver queries on a
+
+
+ lwresd listens for resolver queries on a
UDP port on the IPv4 loopback interface, 127.0.0.1. This
- means that lwresd can only be used by
+ means that lwresd can only be used by
processes running on the local machine. By default UDP port
number 921 is used for lightweight resolver requests and
responses.
-
Incoming lightweight resolver requests are decoded by the
+
+
+ Incoming lightweight resolver requests are decoded by the
server which then resolves them using the DNS protocol. When
- the DNS lookup completes, lwresd encodes
+ the DNS lookup completes, lwresd encodes
the answers in the lightweight resolver format and returns
them to the client that made the request.
-
If /etc/resolv.conf contains any
- nameserver entries, lwresd
+
+
+ If /etc/resolv.conf contains any
+ nameserver entries, lwresd
sends recursive DNS queries to those servers. This is similar
to the use of forwarders in a caching name server. If no
- nameserver entries are present, or if
- forwarding fails, lwresd resolves the
+ nameserver entries are present, or if
+ forwarding fails, lwresd resolves the
queries autonomously starting at the root name servers, using
a built-in list of root server hints.
-
OPTIONS
-C config-file
Use config-file as the
+
+
+
+
OPTIONS
+
+
-C config-file
+
+ Use config-file as the
configuration file instead of the default,
- /etc/resolv.conf.
-
-d debug-level
Set the daemon's debug level to debug-level.
- Debugging traces from lwresd become
+ /etc/resolv.conf.
+
+
-d debug-level
+
+ Set the daemon's debug level to debug-level.
+ Debugging traces from lwresd become
more verbose as the debug level increases.
-
-f
Run the server in the foreground (i.e. do not daemonize).
-
-g
Run the server in the foreground and force all logging
- to stderr.
-
-n #cpus
Create #cpus worker threads
+
+
-f
+
+ Run the server in the foreground (i.e. do not daemonize).
+
+
-g
+
+ Run the server in the foreground and force all logging
+ to stderr.
+
+
-n #cpus
+
+ Create #cpus worker threads
to take advantage of multiple CPUs. If not specified,
- lwresd will try to determine the
+ lwresd will try to determine the
number of CPUs present and create one thread per CPU.
If it is unable to determine the number of CPUs, a
single worker thread will be created.
-
-P port
Listen for lightweight resolver queries on port
- port. If
+
+
-P port
+
+ Listen for lightweight resolver queries on port
+ port. If
not specified, the default is port 921.
-
-p port
Send DNS lookups to port port. If not
+
+
-p port
+
+ Send DNS lookups to port port. If not
specified, the default is port 53. This provides a
way of testing the lightweight resolver daemon with a
name server that listens for queries on a non-standard
port number.
-
-s
Write memory usage statistics to stdout
+
+
-s
+
+
+ Write memory usage statistics to stdout
on exit.
-
Note: This option is mainly of interest to BIND 9 developers
+
+
+
Note
+
+ This option is mainly of interest to BIND 9 developers
and may be removed or changed in a future release.
-
-t directory
chroot() to directory after
+
+
+
+
-t directory
+
+
+ chroot() to directory after
processing the command line arguments, but before
reading the configuration file.
-
Warning
This option should be used in conjunction with the
- -u option, as chrooting a process
+
+
+
Warning
+
+ This option should be used in conjunction with the
+ -u option, as chrooting a process
running as root doesn't enhance security on most
- systems; the way chroot() is
+ systems; the way chroot() is
defined allows a process with root privileges to
escape a chroot jail.
-
-u user
setuid() to user after completing
+
+
+
+
-u user
+
+ setuid() to user after completing
privileged operations, such as creating sockets that
listen on privileged ports.
-
-v
Report the version number and exit.
-
FILES
/etc/resolv.conf
The default configuration file.
-
/var/run/lwresd.pid
The default process-id file.
-
SEE ALSO
named(8),
- lwres(3),
- resolver(5).
-
AUTHOR
Internet Systems Consortium
-
+
+
-v
+
+ Report the version number and exit.
+
+
+
+
+
FILES
+
+
/etc/resolv.conf
+
+ The default configuration file.
+
+
/var/run/lwresd.pid
+
+ The default process-id file.
+
+
+
+
+
SEE ALSO
+
+ named(8),
+ lwres(3),
+ resolver(5).
+
+
+
+
AUTHOR
+
+ Internet Systems Consortium
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/named/main.c b/contrib/bind9/bin/named/main.c
index f78ea247c8a..c155291d6ca 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/named/main.c
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/named/main.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
/*
- * Copyright (C) 2004 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+ * Copyright (C) 2004, 2005 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
* Copyright (C) 1999-2003 Internet Software Consortium.
*
* Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
* PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
*/
-/* $Id: main.c,v 1.119.2.3.2.17 2004/10/25 00:42:54 marka Exp $ */
+/* $Id: main.c,v 1.119.2.3.2.22 2005/04/29 01:04:47 marka Exp $ */
#include
@@ -47,10 +47,6 @@
#include
-#ifdef HAVE_LIBSCF
-#include
-#endif
-
/*
* Defining NS_MAIN provides storage declarations (rather than extern)
* for variables in named/globals.h.
@@ -66,6 +62,9 @@
#include
#include
#include
+#ifdef HAVE_LIBSCF
+#include
+#endif
/*
* Include header files for database drivers here.
@@ -540,6 +539,9 @@ destroy_managers(void) {
static void
setup(void) {
isc_result_t result;
+#ifdef HAVE_LIBSCF
+ char *instance = NULL;
+#endif
/*
* Get the user and group information before changing the root
@@ -555,6 +557,18 @@ setup(void) {
ns_os_opendevnull();
+#ifdef HAVE_LIBSCF
+ /* Check if named is under smf control, before chroot. */
+ result = ns_smf_get_instance(&instance, 0, ns_g_mctx);
+ /* We don't care about instance, just check if we got one. */
+ if (result == ISC_R_SUCCESS)
+ ns_smf_got_instance = 1;
+ else
+ ns_smf_got_instance = 0;
+ if (instance != NULL)
+ isc_mem_free(ns_g_mctx, instance);
+#endif /* HAVE_LIBSCF */
+
#ifdef PATH_RANDOMDEV
/*
* Initialize system's random device as fallback entropy source
@@ -699,92 +713,73 @@ ns_main_setmemstats(const char *filename) {
#ifdef HAVE_LIBSCF
/*
- * Get FMRI for the current named process
+ * Get FMRI for the named process.
*/
-static char *
-scf_get_ins_name(void) {
+isc_result_t
+ns_smf_get_instance(char **ins_name, int debug, isc_mem_t *mctx) {
scf_handle_t *h = NULL;
int namelen;
- char *ins_name;
+ char *instance;
+
+ REQUIRE(ins_name != NULL && *ins_name == NULL);
if ((h = scf_handle_create(SCF_VERSION)) == NULL) {
- UNEXPECTED_ERROR(__FILE__, __LINE__,
- "scf_handle_create() failed: %s",
- scf_strerror(scf_error()));
- return (NULL);
+ if (debug)
+ UNEXPECTED_ERROR(__FILE__, __LINE__,
+ "scf_handle_create() failed: %s",
+ scf_strerror(scf_error()));
+ return (ISC_R_FAILURE);
}
if (scf_handle_bind(h) == -1) {
- UNEXPECTED_ERROR(__FILE__, __LINE__,
- "scf_handle_bind() failed: %s",
- scf_strerror(scf_error()));
+ if (debug)
+ UNEXPECTED_ERROR(__FILE__, __LINE__,
+ "scf_handle_bind() failed: %s",
+ scf_strerror(scf_error()));
scf_handle_destroy(h);
- return (NULL);
+ return (ISC_R_FAILURE);
}
if ((namelen = scf_myname(h, NULL, 0)) == -1) {
- isc_log_write(ns_g_lctx, NS_LOGCATEGORY_GENERAL,
- NS_LOGMODULE_MAIN, ISC_LOG_INFO,
- "scf_myname() failed: %s",
- scf_strerror(scf_error()));
+ if (debug)
+ UNEXPECTED_ERROR(__FILE__, __LINE__,
+ "scf_myname() failed: %s",
+ scf_strerror(scf_error()));
scf_handle_destroy(h);
- return (NULL);
+ return (ISC_R_FAILURE);
}
- if ((ins_name = malloc(namelen + 1)) == NULL) {
+ if ((instance = isc_mem_allocate(mctx, namelen + 1)) == NULL) {
UNEXPECTED_ERROR(__FILE__, __LINE__,
- "scf_get_ins_named() memory "
+ "ns_smf_get_instance memory "
"allocation failed: %s",
isc_result_totext(ISC_R_NOMEMORY));
scf_handle_destroy(h);
- return (NULL);
+ return (ISC_R_FAILURE);
}
- if (scf_myname(h, ins_name, namelen + 1) == -1) {
- UNEXPECTED_ERROR(__FILE__, __LINE__,
- "scf_myname() failed: %s",
- scf_strerror(scf_error()));
+ if (scf_myname(h, instance, namelen + 1) == -1) {
+ if (debug)
+ UNEXPECTED_ERROR(__FILE__, __LINE__,
+ "scf_myname() failed: %s",
+ scf_strerror(scf_error()));
scf_handle_destroy(h);
- free(ins_name);
- return (NULL);
+ isc_mem_free(mctx, instance);
+ return (ISC_R_FAILURE);
}
scf_handle_destroy(h);
- isc_log_write(ns_g_lctx, NS_LOGCATEGORY_GENERAL, NS_LOGMODULE_MAIN,
- ISC_LOG_INFO, "instance name:%s", ins_name);
-
- return (ins_name);
+ *ins_name = instance;
+ return (ISC_R_SUCCESS);
}
-
-static void
-scf_cleanup(void) {
- char *s;
- char *ins_name;
-
- if ((ins_name = scf_get_ins_name()) != NULL) {
- if ((s = smf_get_state(ins_name)) != NULL) {
- if ((strcmp(SCF_STATE_STRING_ONLINE, s) == 0) ||
- (strcmp(SCF_STATE_STRING_DEGRADED, s) == 0)) {
- if (smf_disable_instance(ins_name, 0) != 0) {
- UNEXPECTED_ERROR(__FILE__, __LINE__,
- "smf_disable_instance() failed: %s",
- scf_strerror(scf_error()));
- }
- }
- free(s);
- } else {
- UNEXPECTED_ERROR(__FILE__, __LINE__,
- "smf_get_state() failed: %s",
- scf_strerror(scf_error()));
- }
- free(ins_name);
- }
-}
-#endif
+#endif /* HAVE_LIBSCF */
int
main(int argc, char *argv[]) {
isc_result_t result;
+#ifdef HAVE_LIBSCF
+ char *instance = NULL;
+#endif
/*
* Record version in core image.
@@ -856,8 +851,20 @@ main(int argc, char *argv[]) {
} while (result != ISC_R_SUCCESS);
#ifdef HAVE_LIBSCF
- scf_cleanup();
-#endif
+ if (ns_smf_want_disable == 1) {
+ result = ns_smf_get_instance(&instance, 1, ns_g_mctx);
+ if (result == ISC_R_SUCCESS && instance != NULL) {
+ if (smf_disable_instance(instance, 0) != 0)
+ UNEXPECTED_ERROR(__FILE__, __LINE__,
+ "smf_disable_instance() ",
+ "failed for %s : %s",
+ instance,
+ scf_strerror(scf_error()));
+ }
+ if (instance != NULL)
+ isc_mem_free(ns_g_mctx, instance);
+ }
+#endif /* HAVE_LIBSCF */
cleanup();
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/named/named.8 b/contrib/bind9/bin/named/named.8
index cd120ddc6f6..e072c169be3 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/named/named.8
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/named/named.8
@@ -1,177 +1,182 @@
-.\" Copyright (C) 2004 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
-.\" Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2003 Internet Software Consortium.
-.\"
+.\" Copyright (C) 2004, 2005 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+.\" Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2003 Internet Software Consortium.
+.\"
.\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
.\" purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
.\" copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
-.\"
+.\"
.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ISC DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH
.\" REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
-.\" AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL ISC BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT,
+.\" AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL ISC BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT,
.\" INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
.\" LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE
.\" OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
.\" PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
.\"
-.\" $Id: named.8,v 1.17.208.3 2004/06/03 05:35:47 marka Exp $
+.\" $Id: named.8,v 1.17.208.6 2005/10/13 02:33:46 marka Exp $
.\"
-.TH "NAMED" "8" "June 30, 2000" "BIND9" ""
-.SH NAME
+.hy 0
+.ad l
+.\" ** You probably do not want to edit this file directly **
+.\" It was generated using the DocBook XSL Stylesheets (version 1.69.1).
+.\" Instead of manually editing it, you probably should edit the DocBook XML
+.\" source for it and then use the DocBook XSL Stylesheets to regenerate it.
+.TH "NAMED" "8" "June 30, 2000" "BIND9" "BIND9"
+.\" disable hyphenation
+.nh
+.\" disable justification (adjust text to left margin only)
+.ad l
+.SH "NAME"
named \- Internet domain name server
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-\fBnamed\fR [ \fB-4\fR ] [ \fB-6\fR ] [ \fB-c \fIconfig-file\fB\fR ] [ \fB-d \fIdebug-level\fB\fR ] [ \fB-f\fR ] [ \fB-g\fR ] [ \fB-n \fI#cpus\fB\fR ] [ \fB-p \fIport\fB\fR ] [ \fB-s\fR ] [ \fB-t \fIdirectory\fB\fR ] [ \fB-u \fIuser\fB\fR ] [ \fB-v\fR ] [ \fB-x \fIcache-file\fB\fR ]
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.HP 6
+\fBnamed\fR [\fB\-4\fR] [\fB\-6\fR] [\fB\-c\ \fR\fB\fIconfig\-file\fR\fR] [\fB\-d\ \fR\fB\fIdebug\-level\fR\fR] [\fB\-f\fR] [\fB\-g\fR] [\fB\-n\ \fR\fB\fI#cpus\fR\fR] [\fB\-p\ \fR\fB\fIport\fR\fR] [\fB\-s\fR] [\fB\-t\ \fR\fB\fIdirectory\fR\fR] [\fB\-u\ \fR\fB\fIuser\fR\fR] [\fB\-v\fR] [\fB\-x\ \fR\fB\fIcache\-file\fR\fR]
.SH "DESCRIPTION"
.PP
-\fBnamed\fR is a Domain Name System (DNS) server,
-part of the BIND 9 distribution from ISC. For more
-information on the DNS, see RFCs 1033, 1034, and 1035.
+\fBnamed\fR
+is a Domain Name System (DNS) server, part of the BIND 9 distribution from ISC. For more information on the DNS, see RFCs 1033, 1034, and 1035.
.PP
-When invoked without arguments, \fBnamed\fR will
-read the default configuration file
-\fI/etc/named.conf\fR, read any initial
-data, and listen for queries.
+When invoked without arguments,
+\fBnamed\fR
+will read the default configuration file
+\fI/etc/named.conf\fR, read any initial data, and listen for queries.
.SH "OPTIONS"
.TP
-\fB-4\fR
+\-4
Use IPv4 only even if the host machine is capable of IPv6.
-\fB-4\fR and \fB-6\fR are mutually
-exclusive.
+\fB\-4\fR
+and
+\fB\-6\fR
+are mutually exclusive.
.TP
-\fB-6\fR
+\-6
Use IPv6 only even if the host machine is capable of IPv4.
-\fB-4\fR and \fB-6\fR are mutually
-exclusive.
+\fB\-4\fR
+and
+\fB\-6\fR
+are mutually exclusive.
.TP
-\fB-c \fIconfig-file\fB\fR
-Use \fIconfig-file\fR as the
-configuration file instead of the default,
-\fI/etc/named.conf\fR. To
-ensure that reloading the configuration file continues
-to work after the server has changed its working
-directory due to to a possible
-\fBdirectory\fR option in the configuration
-file, \fIconfig-file\fR should be
-an absolute pathname.
+\-c \fIconfig\-file\fR
+Use
+\fIconfig\-file\fR
+as the configuration file instead of the default,
+\fI/etc/named.conf\fR. To ensure that reloading the configuration file continues to work after the server has changed its working directory due to to a possible
+\fBdirectory\fR
+option in the configuration file,
+\fIconfig\-file\fR
+should be an absolute pathname.
.TP
-\fB-d \fIdebug-level\fB\fR
-Set the daemon's debug level to \fIdebug-level\fR.
-Debugging traces from \fBnamed\fR become
-more verbose as the debug level increases.
+\-d \fIdebug\-level\fR
+Set the daemon's debug level to
+\fIdebug\-level\fR. Debugging traces from
+\fBnamed\fR
+become more verbose as the debug level increases.
.TP
-\fB-f\fR
+\-f
Run the server in the foreground (i.e. do not daemonize).
.TP
-\fB-g\fR
-Run the server in the foreground and force all logging
-to \fIstderr\fR.
+\-g
+Run the server in the foreground and force all logging to
+\fIstderr\fR.
.TP
-\fB-n \fI#cpus\fB\fR
-Create \fI#cpus\fR worker threads
-to take advantage of multiple CPUs. If not specified,
-\fBnamed\fR will try to determine the
-number of CPUs present and create one thread per CPU.
-If it is unable to determine the number of CPUs, a
-single worker thread will be created.
+\-n \fI#cpus\fR
+Create
+\fI#cpus\fR
+worker threads to take advantage of multiple CPUs. If not specified,
+\fBnamed\fR
+will try to determine the number of CPUs present and create one thread per CPU. If it is unable to determine the number of CPUs, a single worker thread will be created.
.TP
-\fB-p \fIport\fB\fR
-Listen for queries on port \fIport\fR. If not
-specified, the default is port 53.
+\-p \fIport\fR
+Listen for queries on port
+\fIport\fR. If not specified, the default is port 53.
.TP
-\fB-s\fR
-Write memory usage statistics to \fIstdout\fR on exit.
-.sp
+\-s
+Write memory usage statistics to
+\fIstdout\fR
+on exit.
.RS
.B "Note:"
-This option is mainly of interest to BIND 9 developers
-and may be removed or changed in a future release.
+This option is mainly of interest to BIND 9 developers and may be removed or changed in a future release.
.RE
-.sp
.TP
-\fB-t \fIdirectory\fB\fR
-\fBchroot()\fR to \fIdirectory\fR after
-processing the command line arguments, but before
-reading the configuration file.
-.sp
+\-t \fIdirectory\fR
+\fBchroot()\fR
+to
+\fIdirectory\fR
+after processing the command line arguments, but before reading the configuration file.
.RS
.B "Warning:"
This option should be used in conjunction with the
-\fB-u\fR option, as chrooting a process
-running as root doesn't enhance security on most
-systems; the way \fBchroot()\fR is
-defined allows a process with root privileges to
-escape a chroot jail.
+\fB\-u\fR
+option, as chrooting a process running as root doesn't enhance security on most systems; the way
+\fBchroot()\fR
+is defined allows a process with root privileges to escape a chroot jail.
.RE
-.sp
.TP
-\fB-u \fIuser\fB\fR
-\fBsetuid()\fR to \fIuser\fR after completing
-privileged operations, such as creating sockets that
-listen on privileged ports.
-.sp
+\-u \fIuser\fR
+\fBsetuid()\fR
+to
+\fIuser\fR
+after completing privileged operations, such as creating sockets that listen on privileged ports.
.RS
.B "Note:"
-On Linux, \fBnamed\fR uses the kernel's
-capability mechanism to drop all root privileges
-except the ability to \fBbind()\fR to a
-privileged port and set process resource limits.
-Unfortunately, this means that the \fB-u\fR
-option only works when \fBnamed\fR is run
-on kernel 2.2.18 or later, or kernel 2.3.99-pre3 or
-later, since previous kernels did not allow privileges
-to be retained after \fBsetuid()\fR.
+On Linux,
+\fBnamed\fR
+uses the kernel's capability mechanism to drop all root privileges except the ability to
+\fBbind()\fR
+to a privileged port and set process resource limits. Unfortunately, this means that the
+\fB\-u\fR
+option only works when
+\fBnamed\fR
+is run on kernel 2.2.18 or later, or kernel 2.3.99\-pre3 or later, since previous kernels did not allow privileges to be retained after
+\fBsetuid()\fR.
.RE
-.sp
.TP
-\fB-v\fR
+\-v
Report the version number and exit.
.TP
-\fB-x \fIcache-file\fB\fR
-Load data from \fIcache-file\fR into the
-cache of the default view.
-.sp
+\-x \fIcache\-file\fR
+Load data from
+\fIcache\-file\fR
+into the cache of the default view.
.RS
.B "Warning:"
-This option must not be used. It is only of interest
-to BIND 9 developers and may be removed or changed in a
-future release.
+This option must not be used. It is only of interest to BIND 9 developers and may be removed or changed in a future release.
.RE
-.sp
.SH "SIGNALS"
.PP
-In routine operation, signals should not be used to control
-the nameserver; \fBrndc\fR should be used
-instead.
+In routine operation, signals should not be used to control the nameserver;
+\fBrndc\fR
+should be used instead.
.TP
-\fBSIGHUP\fR
+SIGHUP
Force a reload of the server.
.TP
-\fBSIGINT, SIGTERM\fR
+SIGINT, SIGTERM
Shut down the server.
.PP
The result of sending any other signals to the server is undefined.
-.PP
.SH "CONFIGURATION"
.PP
-The \fBnamed\fR configuration file is too complex
-to describe in detail here. A complete description is
-provided in the \fIBIND 9 Administrator Reference
-Manual\fR.
+The
+\fBnamed\fR
+configuration file is too complex to describe in detail here. A complete description is provided in the
+BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual.
.SH "FILES"
.TP
-\fB\fI/etc/named.conf\fB\fR
+\fI/etc/named.conf\fR
The default configuration file.
.TP
-\fB\fI/var/run/named.pid\fB\fR
-The default process-id file.
+\fI/var/run/named.pid\fR
+The default process\-id file.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.PP
-\fIRFC 1033\fR,
-\fIRFC 1034\fR,
-\fIRFC 1035\fR,
+RFC 1033,
+RFC 1034,
+RFC 1035,
\fBrndc\fR(8),
\fBlwresd\fR(8),
-\fIBIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual\fR.
+BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual.
.SH "AUTHOR"
.PP
Internet Systems Consortium
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/named/named.conf.5 b/contrib/bind9/bin/named/named.conf.5
index 2b7387b9555..d0b690b1b5a 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/named/named.conf.5
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/named/named.conf.5
@@ -1,32 +1,40 @@
-.\" Copyright (C) 2004 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
-.\"
+.\" Copyright (C) 2004, 2005 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+.\"
.\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
.\" purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
.\" copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
-.\"
+.\"
.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ISC DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH
.\" REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
-.\" AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL ISC BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT,
+.\" AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL ISC BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT,
.\" INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
.\" LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE
.\" OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
.\" PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
.\"
-.\" $Id: named.conf.5,v 1.1.4.3 2004/10/18 02:33:06 marka Exp $
+.\" $Id: named.conf.5,v 1.1.4.6 2005/10/13 02:33:47 marka Exp $
.\"
-.TH "NAMED.CONF" "5" "Aug 13, 2004" "BIND9" ""
-.SH NAME
+.hy 0
+.ad l
+.\" ** You probably do not want to edit this file directly **
+.\" It was generated using the DocBook XSL Stylesheets (version 1.69.1).
+.\" Instead of manually editing it, you probably should edit the DocBook XML
+.\" source for it and then use the DocBook XSL Stylesheets to regenerate it.
+.TH "\\FINAMED.CONF\\FR" "5" "Aug 13, 2004" "BIND9" "BIND9"
+.\" disable hyphenation
+.nh
+.\" disable justification (adjust text to left margin only)
+.ad l
+.SH "NAME"
named.conf \- configuration file for named
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.HP 11
\fBnamed.conf\fR
.SH "DESCRIPTION"
.PP
-\fInamed.conf\fR is the configuration file for
-\fBnamed\fR. Statements are enclosed
-in braces and terminated with a semi-colon. Clauses in
-the statements are also semi-colon terminated. The usual
-comment styles are supported:
+\fInamed.conf\fR
+is the configuration file for
+\fBnamed\fR. Statements are enclosed in braces and terminated with a semi\-colon. Clauses in the statements are also semi\-colon terminated. The usual comment styles are supported:
.PP
C style: /* */
.PP
@@ -37,7 +45,6 @@ Unix style: # to end of line
.sp
.nf
acl \fIstring\fR { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... };
-.sp
.fi
.SH "KEY"
.sp
@@ -46,7 +53,6 @@ key \fIdomain_name\fR {
algorithm \fIstring\fR;
secret \fIstring\fR;
};
-.sp
.fi
.SH "MASTERS"
.sp
@@ -55,7 +61,6 @@ masters \fIstring\fR [ port \fIinteger\fR ] {
( \fImasters\fR | \fIipv4_address\fR [port \fIinteger\fR] |
\fIipv6_address\fR [port \fIinteger\fR] ) [ key \fIstring\fR ]; ...
};
-.sp
.fi
.SH "SERVER"
.sp
@@ -63,27 +68,24 @@ masters \fIstring\fR [ port \fIinteger\fR ] {
server ( \fIipv4_address\fR | \fIipv6_address\fR ) {
bogus \fIboolean\fR;
edns \fIboolean\fR;
- provide-ixfr \fIboolean\fR;
- request-ixfr \fIboolean\fR;
+ provide\-ixfr \fIboolean\fR;
+ request\-ixfr \fIboolean\fR;
keys \fIserver_key\fR;
transfers \fIinteger\fR;
- transfer-format ( many-answers | one-answer );
- transfer-source ( \fIipv4_address\fR | * )
+ transfer\-format ( many\-answers | one\-answer );
+ transfer\-source ( \fIipv4_address\fR | * )
[ port ( \fIinteger\fR | * ) ];
- transfer-source-v6 ( \fIipv6_address\fR | * )
+ transfer\-source\-v6 ( \fIipv6_address\fR | * )
[ port ( \fIinteger\fR | * ) ];
-
- support-ixfr \fIboolean\fR; // obsolete
+ support\-ixfr \fIboolean\fR; // obsolete
};
-.sp
.fi
-.SH "TRUSTED-KEYS"
+.SH "TRUSTED\-KEYS"
.sp
.nf
-trusted-keys {
+trusted\-keys {
\fIdomain_name\fR \fIflags\fR \fIprotocol\fR \fIalgorithm\fR \fIkey\fR; ...
};
-.sp
.fi
.SH "CONTROLS"
.sp
@@ -95,7 +97,6 @@ controls {
[ keys { \fIstring\fR; ... } ];
unix \fIunsupported\fR; // not implemented
};
-.sp
.fi
.SH "LOGGING"
.sp
@@ -107,363 +108,325 @@ logging {
null;
stderr;
severity \fIlog_severity\fR;
- print-time \fIboolean\fR;
- print-severity \fIboolean\fR;
- print-category \fIboolean\fR;
+ print\-time \fIboolean\fR;
+ print\-severity \fIboolean\fR;
+ print\-category \fIboolean\fR;
};
category \fIstring\fR { \fIstring\fR; ... };
};
-.sp
.fi
.SH "LWRES"
.sp
.nf
lwres {
- listen-on [ port \fIinteger\fR ] {
+ listen\-on [ port \fIinteger\fR ] {
( \fIipv4_address\fR | \fIipv6_address\fR ) [ port \fIinteger\fR ]; ...
};
view \fIstring\fR \fIoptional_class\fR;
search { \fIstring\fR; ... };
ndots \fIinteger\fR;
};
-.sp
.fi
.SH "OPTIONS"
.sp
.nf
options {
- avoid-v4-udp-ports { \fIport\fR; ... };
- avoid-v6-udp-ports { \fIport\fR; ... };
+ avoid\-v4\-udp\-ports { \fIport\fR; ... };
+ avoid\-v6\-udp\-ports { \fIport\fR; ... };
blackhole { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... };
coresize \fIsize\fR;
datasize \fIsize\fR;
directory \fIquoted_string\fR;
- dump-file \fIquoted_string\fR;
+ dump\-file \fIquoted_string\fR;
files \fIsize\fR;
- heartbeat-interval \fIinteger\fR;
- host-statistics \fIboolean\fR; // not implemented
- host-statistics-max \fInumber\fR; // not implemented
+ heartbeat\-interval \fIinteger\fR;
+ host\-statistics \fIboolean\fR; // not implemented
+ host\-statistics\-max \fInumber\fR; // not implemented
hostname ( \fIquoted_string\fR | none );
- interface-interval \fIinteger\fR;
- listen-on [ port \fIinteger\fR ] { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... };
- listen-on-v6 [ port \fIinteger\fR ] { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... };
- match-mapped-addresses \fIboolean\fR;
- memstatistics-file \fIquoted_string\fR;
- pid-file ( \fIquoted_string\fR | none );
+ interface\-interval \fIinteger\fR;
+ listen\-on [ port \fIinteger\fR ] { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... };
+ listen\-on\-v6 [ port \fIinteger\fR ] { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... };
+ match\-mapped\-addresses \fIboolean\fR;
+ memstatistics\-file \fIquoted_string\fR;
+ pid\-file ( \fIquoted_string\fR | none );
port \fIinteger\fR;
querylog \fIboolean\fR;
- recursing-file \fIquoted_string\fR;
- random-device \fIquoted_string\fR;
- recursive-clients \fIinteger\fR;
- serial-query-rate \fIinteger\fR;
- server-id ( \fIquoted_string\fR | none |;
+ recursing\-file \fIquoted_string\fR;
+ random\-device \fIquoted_string\fR;
+ recursive\-clients \fIinteger\fR;
+ serial\-query\-rate \fIinteger\fR;
+ server\-id ( \fIquoted_string\fR | none |;
stacksize \fIsize\fR;
- statistics-file \fIquoted_string\fR;
- statistics-interval \fIinteger\fR; // not yet implemented
- tcp-clients \fIinteger\fR;
- tcp-listen-queue \fIinteger\fR;
- tkey-dhkey \fIquoted_string\fR \fIinteger\fR;
- tkey-gssapi-credential \fIquoted_string\fR;
- tkey-domain \fIquoted_string\fR;
- transfers-per-ns \fIinteger\fR;
- transfers-in \fIinteger\fR;
- transfers-out \fIinteger\fR;
- use-ixfr \fIboolean\fR;
+ statistics\-file \fIquoted_string\fR;
+ statistics\-interval \fIinteger\fR; // not yet implemented
+ tcp\-clients \fIinteger\fR;
+ tcp\-listen\-queue \fIinteger\fR;
+ tkey\-dhkey \fIquoted_string\fR \fIinteger\fR;
+ tkey\-gssapi\-credential \fIquoted_string\fR;
+ tkey\-domain \fIquoted_string\fR;
+ transfers\-per\-ns \fIinteger\fR;
+ transfers\-in \fIinteger\fR;
+ transfers\-out \fIinteger\fR;
+ use\-ixfr \fIboolean\fR;
version ( \fIquoted_string\fR | none );
- allow-recursion { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... };
+ allow\-recursion { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... };
sortlist { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... };
topology { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... }; // not implemented
- auth-nxdomain \fIboolean\fR; // default changed
- minimal-responses \fIboolean\fR;
+ auth\-nxdomain \fIboolean\fR; // default changed
+ minimal\-responses \fIboolean\fR;
recursion \fIboolean\fR;
- rrset-order {
+ rrset\-order {
[ class \fIstring\fR ] [ type \fIstring\fR ]
[ name \fIquoted_string\fR ] \fIstring\fR \fIstring\fR; ...
};
- provide-ixfr \fIboolean\fR;
- request-ixfr \fIboolean\fR;
- rfc2308-type1 \fIboolean\fR; // not yet implemented
- additional-from-auth \fIboolean\fR;
- additional-from-cache \fIboolean\fR;
- query-source \fIquerysource4\fR;
- query-source-v6 \fIquerysource6\fR;
- cleaning-interval \fIinteger\fR;
- min-roots \fIinteger\fR; // not implemented
- lame-ttl \fIinteger\fR;
- max-ncache-ttl \fIinteger\fR;
- max-cache-ttl \fIinteger\fR;
- transfer-format ( many-answers | one-answer );
- max-cache-size \fIsize_no_default\fR;
- check-names ( master | slave | response )
+ provide\-ixfr \fIboolean\fR;
+ request\-ixfr \fIboolean\fR;
+ rfc2308\-type1 \fIboolean\fR; // not yet implemented
+ additional\-from\-auth \fIboolean\fR;
+ additional\-from\-cache \fIboolean\fR;
+ query\-source \fIquerysource4\fR;
+ query\-source\-v6 \fIquerysource6\fR;
+ cleaning\-interval \fIinteger\fR;
+ min\-roots \fIinteger\fR; // not implemented
+ lame\-ttl \fIinteger\fR;
+ max\-ncache\-ttl \fIinteger\fR;
+ max\-cache\-ttl \fIinteger\fR;
+ transfer\-format ( many\-answers | one\-answer );
+ max\-cache\-size \fIsize_no_default\fR;
+ check\-names ( master | slave | response )
( fail | warn | ignore );
- cache-file \fIquoted_string\fR;
- suppress-initial-notify \fIboolean\fR; // not yet implemented
- preferred-glue \fIstring\fR;
- dual-stack-servers [ port \fIinteger\fR ] {
+ cache\-file \fIquoted_string\fR;
+ suppress\-initial\-notify \fIboolean\fR; // not yet implemented
+ preferred\-glue \fIstring\fR;
+ dual\-stack\-servers [ port \fIinteger\fR ] {
( \fIquoted_string\fR [port \fIinteger\fR] |
\fIipv4_address\fR [port \fIinteger\fR] |
\fIipv6_address\fR [port \fIinteger\fR] ); ...
}
- edns-udp-size \fIinteger\fR;
- root-delegation-only [ exclude { \fIquoted_string\fR; ... } ];
- disable-algorithms \fIstring\fR { \fIstring\fR; ... };
- dnssec-enable \fIboolean\fR;
- dnssec-lookaside \fIstring\fR trust-anchor \fIstring\fR;
- dnssec-must-be-secure \fIstring\fR \fIboolean\fR;
-
+ edns\-udp\-size \fIinteger\fR;
+ root\-delegation\-only [ exclude { \fIquoted_string\fR; ... } ];
+ disable\-algorithms \fIstring\fR { \fIstring\fR; ... };
+ dnssec\-enable \fIboolean\fR;
+ dnssec\-lookaside \fIstring\fR trust\-anchor \fIstring\fR;
+ dnssec\-must\-be\-secure \fIstring\fR \fIboolean\fR;
dialup \fIdialuptype\fR;
- ixfr-from-differences \fIixfrdiff\fR;
-
- allow-query { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... };
- allow-transfer { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... };
- allow-update-forwarding { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... };
-
+ ixfr\-from\-differences \fIixfrdiff\fR;
+ allow\-query { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... };
+ allow\-transfer { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... };
+ allow\-update\-forwarding { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... };
notify \fInotifytype\fR;
- notify-source ( \fIipv4_address\fR | * ) [ port ( \fIinteger\fR | * ) ];
- notify-source-v6 ( \fIipv6_address\fR | * ) [ port ( \fIinteger\fR | * ) ];
- also-notify [ port \fIinteger\fR ] { ( \fIipv4_address\fR | \fIipv6_address\fR )
+ notify\-source ( \fIipv4_address\fR | * ) [ port ( \fIinteger\fR | * ) ];
+ notify\-source\-v6 ( \fIipv6_address\fR | * ) [ port ( \fIinteger\fR | * ) ];
+ also\-notify [ port \fIinteger\fR ] { ( \fIipv4_address\fR | \fIipv6_address\fR )
[ port \fIinteger\fR ]; ... };
- allow-notify { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... };
-
+ allow\-notify { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... };
forward ( first | only );
forwarders [ port \fIinteger\fR ] {
( \fIipv4_address\fR | \fIipv6_address\fR ) [ port \fIinteger\fR ]; ...
};
-
- max-journal-size \fIsize_no_default\fR;
- max-transfer-time-in \fIinteger\fR;
- max-transfer-time-out \fIinteger\fR;
- max-transfer-idle-in \fIinteger\fR;
- max-transfer-idle-out \fIinteger\fR;
- max-retry-time \fIinteger\fR;
- min-retry-time \fIinteger\fR;
- max-refresh-time \fIinteger\fR;
- min-refresh-time \fIinteger\fR;
- multi-master \fIboolean\fR;
- sig-validity-interval \fIinteger\fR;
-
- transfer-source ( \fIipv4_address\fR | * )
+ max\-journal\-size \fIsize_no_default\fR;
+ max\-transfer\-time\-in \fIinteger\fR;
+ max\-transfer\-time\-out \fIinteger\fR;
+ max\-transfer\-idle\-in \fIinteger\fR;
+ max\-transfer\-idle\-out \fIinteger\fR;
+ max\-retry\-time \fIinteger\fR;
+ min\-retry\-time \fIinteger\fR;
+ max\-refresh\-time \fIinteger\fR;
+ min\-refresh\-time \fIinteger\fR;
+ multi\-master \fIboolean\fR;
+ sig\-validity\-interval \fIinteger\fR;
+ transfer\-source ( \fIipv4_address\fR | * )
[ port ( \fIinteger\fR | * ) ];
- transfer-source-v6 ( \fIipv6_address\fR | * )
+ transfer\-source\-v6 ( \fIipv6_address\fR | * )
[ port ( \fIinteger\fR | * ) ];
-
- alt-transfer-source ( \fIipv4_address\fR | * )
+ alt\-transfer\-source ( \fIipv4_address\fR | * )
[ port ( \fIinteger\fR | * ) ];
- alt-transfer-source-v6 ( \fIipv6_address\fR | * )
+ alt\-transfer\-source\-v6 ( \fIipv6_address\fR | * )
[ port ( \fIinteger\fR | * ) ];
- use-alt-transfer-source \fIboolean\fR;
-
- zone-statistics \fIboolean\fR;
- key-directory \fIquoted_string\fR;
-
- allow-v6-synthesis { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... }; // obsolete
- deallocate-on-exit \fIboolean\fR; // obsolete
- fake-iquery \fIboolean\fR; // obsolete
- fetch-glue \fIboolean\fR; // obsolete
- has-old-clients \fIboolean\fR; // obsolete
- maintain-ixfr-base \fIboolean\fR; // obsolete
- max-ixfr-log-size \fIsize\fR; // obsolete
- multiple-cnames \fIboolean\fR; // obsolete
- named-xfer \fIquoted_string\fR; // obsolete
- serial-queries \fIinteger\fR; // obsolete
- treat-cr-as-space \fIboolean\fR; // obsolete
- use-id-pool \fIboolean\fR; // obsolete
+ use\-alt\-transfer\-source \fIboolean\fR;
+ zone\-statistics \fIboolean\fR;
+ key\-directory \fIquoted_string\fR;
+ allow\-v6\-synthesis { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... }; // obsolete
+ deallocate\-on\-exit \fIboolean\fR; // obsolete
+ fake\-iquery \fIboolean\fR; // obsolete
+ fetch\-glue \fIboolean\fR; // obsolete
+ has\-old\-clients \fIboolean\fR; // obsolete
+ maintain\-ixfr\-base \fIboolean\fR; // obsolete
+ max\-ixfr\-log\-size \fIsize\fR; // obsolete
+ multiple\-cnames \fIboolean\fR; // obsolete
+ named\-xfer \fIquoted_string\fR; // obsolete
+ serial\-queries \fIinteger\fR; // obsolete
+ treat\-cr\-as\-space \fIboolean\fR; // obsolete
+ use\-id\-pool \fIboolean\fR; // obsolete
};
-.sp
.fi
.SH "VIEW"
.sp
.nf
view \fIstring\fR \fIoptional_class\fR {
- match-clients { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... };
- match-destinations { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... };
- match-recursive-only \fIboolean\fR;
-
+ match\-clients { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... };
+ match\-destinations { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... };
+ match\-recursive\-only \fIboolean\fR;
key \fIstring\fR {
algorithm \fIstring\fR;
secret \fIstring\fR;
};
-
zone \fIstring\fR \fIoptional_class\fR {
...
};
-
server ( \fIipv4_address\fR | \fIipv6_address\fR ) {
...
};
-
- trusted-keys {
+ trusted\-keys {
\fIstring\fR \fIinteger\fR \fIinteger\fR \fIinteger\fR \fIquoted_string\fR; ...
};
-
- allow-recursion { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... };
+ allow\-recursion { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... };
sortlist { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... };
topology { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... }; // not implemented
- auth-nxdomain \fIboolean\fR; // default changed
- minimal-responses \fIboolean\fR;
+ auth\-nxdomain \fIboolean\fR; // default changed
+ minimal\-responses \fIboolean\fR;
recursion \fIboolean\fR;
- rrset-order {
+ rrset\-order {
[ class \fIstring\fR ] [ type \fIstring\fR ]
[ name \fIquoted_string\fR ] \fIstring\fR \fIstring\fR; ...
};
- provide-ixfr \fIboolean\fR;
- request-ixfr \fIboolean\fR;
- rfc2308-type1 \fIboolean\fR; // not yet implemented
- additional-from-auth \fIboolean\fR;
- additional-from-cache \fIboolean\fR;
- query-source \fIquerysource4\fR;
- query-source-v6 \fIquerysource6\fR;
- cleaning-interval \fIinteger\fR;
- min-roots \fIinteger\fR; // not implemented
- lame-ttl \fIinteger\fR;
- max-ncache-ttl \fIinteger\fR;
- max-cache-ttl \fIinteger\fR;
- transfer-format ( many-answers | one-answer );
- max-cache-size \fIsize_no_default\fR;
- check-names ( master | slave | response )
+ provide\-ixfr \fIboolean\fR;
+ request\-ixfr \fIboolean\fR;
+ rfc2308\-type1 \fIboolean\fR; // not yet implemented
+ additional\-from\-auth \fIboolean\fR;
+ additional\-from\-cache \fIboolean\fR;
+ query\-source \fIquerysource4\fR;
+ query\-source\-v6 \fIquerysource6\fR;
+ cleaning\-interval \fIinteger\fR;
+ min\-roots \fIinteger\fR; // not implemented
+ lame\-ttl \fIinteger\fR;
+ max\-ncache\-ttl \fIinteger\fR;
+ max\-cache\-ttl \fIinteger\fR;
+ transfer\-format ( many\-answers | one\-answer );
+ max\-cache\-size \fIsize_no_default\fR;
+ check\-names ( master | slave | response )
( fail | warn | ignore );
- cache-file \fIquoted_string\fR;
- suppress-initial-notify \fIboolean\fR; // not yet implemented
- preferred-glue \fIstring\fR;
- dual-stack-servers [ port \fIinteger\fR ] {
+ cache\-file \fIquoted_string\fR;
+ suppress\-initial\-notify \fIboolean\fR; // not yet implemented
+ preferred\-glue \fIstring\fR;
+ dual\-stack\-servers [ port \fIinteger\fR ] {
( \fIquoted_string\fR [port \fIinteger\fR] |
\fIipv4_address\fR [port \fIinteger\fR] |
\fIipv6_address\fR [port \fIinteger\fR] ); ...
};
- edns-udp-size \fIinteger\fR;
- root-delegation-only [ exclude { \fIquoted_string\fR; ... } ];
- disable-algorithms \fIstring\fR { \fIstring\fR; ... };
- dnssec-enable \fIboolean\fR;
- dnssec-lookaside \fIstring\fR trust-anchor \fIstring\fR;
-
- dnssec-must-be-secure \fIstring\fR \fIboolean\fR;
+ edns\-udp\-size \fIinteger\fR;
+ root\-delegation\-only [ exclude { \fIquoted_string\fR; ... } ];
+ disable\-algorithms \fIstring\fR { \fIstring\fR; ... };
+ dnssec\-enable \fIboolean\fR;
+ dnssec\-lookaside \fIstring\fR trust\-anchor \fIstring\fR;
+ dnssec\-must\-be\-secure \fIstring\fR \fIboolean\fR;
dialup \fIdialuptype\fR;
- ixfr-from-differences \fIixfrdiff\fR;
-
- allow-query { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... };
- allow-transfer { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... };
- allow-update-forwarding { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... };
-
+ ixfr\-from\-differences \fIixfrdiff\fR;
+ allow\-query { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... };
+ allow\-transfer { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... };
+ allow\-update\-forwarding { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... };
notify \fInotifytype\fR;
- notify-source ( \fIipv4_address\fR | * ) [ port ( \fIinteger\fR | * ) ];
- notify-source-v6 ( \fIipv6_address\fR | * ) [ port ( \fIinteger\fR | * ) ];
- also-notify [ port \fIinteger\fR ] { ( \fIipv4_address\fR | \fIipv6_address\fR )
+ notify\-source ( \fIipv4_address\fR | * ) [ port ( \fIinteger\fR | * ) ];
+ notify\-source\-v6 ( \fIipv6_address\fR | * ) [ port ( \fIinteger\fR | * ) ];
+ also\-notify [ port \fIinteger\fR ] { ( \fIipv4_address\fR | \fIipv6_address\fR )
[ port \fIinteger\fR ]; ... };
- allow-notify { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... };
-
+ allow\-notify { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... };
forward ( first | only );
forwarders [ port \fIinteger\fR ] {
( \fIipv4_address\fR | \fIipv6_address\fR ) [ port \fIinteger\fR ]; ...
};
-
- max-journal-size \fIsize_no_default\fR;
- max-transfer-time-in \fIinteger\fR;
- max-transfer-time-out \fIinteger\fR;
- max-transfer-idle-in \fIinteger\fR;
- max-transfer-idle-out \fIinteger\fR;
- max-retry-time \fIinteger\fR;
- min-retry-time \fIinteger\fR;
- max-refresh-time \fIinteger\fR;
- min-refresh-time \fIinteger\fR;
- multi-master \fIboolean\fR;
- sig-validity-interval \fIinteger\fR;
-
- transfer-source ( \fIipv4_address\fR | * )
+ max\-journal\-size \fIsize_no_default\fR;
+ max\-transfer\-time\-in \fIinteger\fR;
+ max\-transfer\-time\-out \fIinteger\fR;
+ max\-transfer\-idle\-in \fIinteger\fR;
+ max\-transfer\-idle\-out \fIinteger\fR;
+ max\-retry\-time \fIinteger\fR;
+ min\-retry\-time \fIinteger\fR;
+ max\-refresh\-time \fIinteger\fR;
+ min\-refresh\-time \fIinteger\fR;
+ multi\-master \fIboolean\fR;
+ sig\-validity\-interval \fIinteger\fR;
+ transfer\-source ( \fIipv4_address\fR | * )
[ port ( \fIinteger\fR | * ) ];
- transfer-source-v6 ( \fIipv6_address\fR | * )
+ transfer\-source\-v6 ( \fIipv6_address\fR | * )
[ port ( \fIinteger\fR | * ) ];
-
- alt-transfer-source ( \fIipv4_address\fR | * )
+ alt\-transfer\-source ( \fIipv4_address\fR | * )
[ port ( \fIinteger\fR | * ) ];
- alt-transfer-source-v6 ( \fIipv6_address\fR | * )
+ alt\-transfer\-source\-v6 ( \fIipv6_address\fR | * )
[ port ( \fIinteger\fR | * ) ];
- use-alt-transfer-source \fIboolean\fR;
-
- zone-statistics \fIboolean\fR;
- key-directory \fIquoted_string\fR;
-
- allow-v6-synthesis { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... }; // obsolete
- fetch-glue \fIboolean\fR; // obsolete
- maintain-ixfr-base \fIboolean\fR; // obsolete
- max-ixfr-log-size \fIsize\fR; // obsolete
+ use\-alt\-transfer\-source \fIboolean\fR;
+ zone\-statistics \fIboolean\fR;
+ key\-directory \fIquoted_string\fR;
+ allow\-v6\-synthesis { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... }; // obsolete
+ fetch\-glue \fIboolean\fR; // obsolete
+ maintain\-ixfr\-base \fIboolean\fR; // obsolete
+ max\-ixfr\-log\-size \fIsize\fR; // obsolete
};
-.sp
.fi
.SH "ZONE"
.sp
.nf
zone \fIstring\fR \fIoptional_class\fR {
type ( master | slave | stub | hint |
- forward | delegation-only );
+ forward | delegation\-only );
file \fIquoted_string\fR;
-
masters [ port \fIinteger\fR ] {
( \fImasters\fR |
\fIipv4_address\fR [port \fIinteger\fR] |
\fIipv6_address\fR [ port \fIinteger\fR ] ) [ key \fIstring\fR ]; ...
};
-
database \fIstring\fR;
- delegation-only \fIboolean\fR;
- check-names ( fail | warn | ignore );
+ delegation\-only \fIboolean\fR;
+ check\-names ( fail | warn | ignore );
dialup \fIdialuptype\fR;
- ixfr-from-differences \fIboolean\fR;
-
- allow-query { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... };
- allow-transfer { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... };
- allow-update { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... };
- allow-update-forwarding { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... };
- update-policy {
+ ixfr\-from\-differences \fIboolean\fR;
+ allow\-query { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... };
+ allow\-transfer { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... };
+ allow\-update { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... };
+ allow\-update\-forwarding { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... };
+ update\-policy {
( grant | deny ) \fIstring\fR
( name | subdomain | wildcard | self ) \fIstring\fR
\fIrrtypelist\fR; ...
};
-
notify \fInotifytype\fR;
- notify-source ( \fIipv4_address\fR | * ) [ port ( \fIinteger\fR | * ) ];
- notify-source-v6 ( \fIipv6_address\fR | * ) [ port ( \fIinteger\fR | * ) ];
- also-notify [ port \fIinteger\fR ] { ( \fIipv4_address\fR | \fIipv6_address\fR )
+ notify\-source ( \fIipv4_address\fR | * ) [ port ( \fIinteger\fR | * ) ];
+ notify\-source\-v6 ( \fIipv6_address\fR | * ) [ port ( \fIinteger\fR | * ) ];
+ also\-notify [ port \fIinteger\fR ] { ( \fIipv4_address\fR | \fIipv6_address\fR )
[ port \fIinteger\fR ]; ... };
- allow-notify { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... };
-
+ allow\-notify { \fIaddress_match_element\fR; ... };
forward ( first | only );
forwarders [ port \fIinteger\fR ] {
( \fIipv4_address\fR | \fIipv6_address\fR ) [ port \fIinteger\fR ]; ...
};
-
- max-journal-size \fIsize_no_default\fR;
- max-transfer-time-in \fIinteger\fR;
- max-transfer-time-out \fIinteger\fR;
- max-transfer-idle-in \fIinteger\fR;
- max-transfer-idle-out \fIinteger\fR;
- max-retry-time \fIinteger\fR;
- min-retry-time \fIinteger\fR;
- max-refresh-time \fIinteger\fR;
- min-refresh-time \fIinteger\fR;
- multi-master \fIboolean\fR;
- sig-validity-interval \fIinteger\fR;
-
- transfer-source ( \fIipv4_address\fR | * )
+ max\-journal\-size \fIsize_no_default\fR;
+ max\-transfer\-time\-in \fIinteger\fR;
+ max\-transfer\-time\-out \fIinteger\fR;
+ max\-transfer\-idle\-in \fIinteger\fR;
+ max\-transfer\-idle\-out \fIinteger\fR;
+ max\-retry\-time \fIinteger\fR;
+ min\-retry\-time \fIinteger\fR;
+ max\-refresh\-time \fIinteger\fR;
+ min\-refresh\-time \fIinteger\fR;
+ multi\-master \fIboolean\fR;
+ sig\-validity\-interval \fIinteger\fR;
+ transfer\-source ( \fIipv4_address\fR | * )
[ port ( \fIinteger\fR | * ) ];
- transfer-source-v6 ( \fIipv6_address\fR | * )
+ transfer\-source\-v6 ( \fIipv6_address\fR | * )
[ port ( \fIinteger\fR | * ) ];
-
- alt-transfer-source ( \fIipv4_address\fR | * )
+ alt\-transfer\-source ( \fIipv4_address\fR | * )
[ port ( \fIinteger\fR | * ) ];
- alt-transfer-source-v6 ( \fIipv6_address\fR | * )
+ alt\-transfer\-source\-v6 ( \fIipv6_address\fR | * )
[ port ( \fIinteger\fR | * ) ];
- use-alt-transfer-source \fIboolean\fR;
-
- zone-statistics \fIboolean\fR;
- key-directory \fIquoted_string\fR;
-
- ixfr-base \fIquoted_string\fR; // obsolete
- ixfr-tmp-file \fIquoted_string\fR; // obsolete
- maintain-ixfr-base \fIboolean\fR; // obsolete
- max-ixfr-log-size \fIsize\fR; // obsolete
+ use\-alt\-transfer\-source \fIboolean\fR;
+ zone\-statistics \fIboolean\fR;
+ key\-directory \fIquoted_string\fR;
+ ixfr\-base \fIquoted_string\fR; // obsolete
+ ixfr\-tmp\-file \fIquoted_string\fR; // obsolete
+ maintain\-ixfr\-base \fIboolean\fR; // obsolete
+ max\-ixfr\-log\-size \fIsize\fR; // obsolete
pubkey \fIinteger\fR \fIinteger\fR \fIinteger\fR \fIquoted_string\fR; // obsolete
};
-.sp
.fi
.SH "FILES"
.PP
@@ -472,4 +435,4 @@ zone \fIstring\fR \fIoptional_class\fR {
.PP
\fBnamed\fR(8),
\fBrndc\fR(8),
-\fBBIND 9 Adminstrators Reference Manual\fR.
+\fBBIND 9 Adminstrators Reference Manual\fR().
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/named/named.conf.docbook b/contrib/bind9/bin/named/named.conf.docbook
index b5a71dcf1b3..4ba10844cc3 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/named/named.conf.docbook
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/named/named.conf.docbook
@@ -1,6 +1,8 @@
-
+]>
-
+
@@ -28,6 +30,14 @@
BIND9
+
+
+ 2004
+ 2005
+ Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+
+
+
named.confconfiguration file for named
@@ -61,35 +71,35 @@
ACL
-
+
acl string { address_match_element; ... };
-
+KEY
-
+
key domain_name {
algorithm string;
secret string;
};
-
+MASTERS
-
+
masters string port integer {
( masters | ipv4_addressport integer |
ipv6_addressport integer ) key string; ...
};
-
+SERVER
-
+
server ( ipv4_address | ipv6_address ) {
bogus boolean;
edns boolean;
@@ -105,21 +115,21 @@ server ( ipv4_address | ipv6_addressboolean; // obsolete
};
-
+TRUSTED-KEYS
-
+
trusted-keys {
domain_nameflagsprotocolalgorithmkey; ...
};
-
+CONTROLS
-
+
controls {
inet ( ipv4_address | ipv6_address | * )
port ( integer | * )
@@ -127,12 +137,12 @@ controls {
keys { string; ... } ;
unix unsupported; // not implemented
};
-
+LOGGING
-
+
logging {
channel string {
file log_file;
@@ -146,12 +156,12 @@ logging {
};
category string { string; ... };
};
-
+LWRES
-
+
lwres {
listen-on port integer {
( ipv4_address | ipv6_address ) port integer; ...
@@ -160,12 +170,12 @@ lwres {
search { string; ... };
ndots integer;
};
-
+OPTIONS
-
+
options {
avoid-v4-udp-ports { port; ... };
avoid-v6-udp-ports { port; ... };
@@ -304,12 +314,12 @@ options {
treat-cr-as-space boolean; // obsolete
use-id-pool boolean; // obsolete
};
-
+VIEW
-
+
view stringoptional_class {
match-clients { address_match_element; ... };
match-destinations { address_match_element; ... };
@@ -423,12 +433,12 @@ view stringoptional_class
maintain-ixfr-base boolean; // obsolete
max-ixfr-log-size size; // obsolete
};
-
+ZONE
-
+
zone stringoptional_class {
type ( master | slave | stub | hint |
forward | delegation-only );
@@ -500,7 +510,7 @@ zone stringoptional_class
max-ixfr-log-size size; // obsolete
pubkey integerintegerintegerquoted_string; // obsolete
};
-
+
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/named/named.conf.html b/contrib/bind9/bin/named/named.conf.html
index 7f8bb2ec61f..8b3b517d7d7 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/named/named.conf.html
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/named/named.conf.html
@@ -1,1897 +1,500 @@
-
-
-
-
-named.conf
named.conf
Name
named.conf -- configuration file for named
Synopsis
named.conf
DESCRIPTION
named.conf is the configuration file for
- named. Statements are enclosed
+
+
+
+
+named.conf
+
+
+
+
+
+
Name
+
named.conf — configuration file for named
+
+
+
Synopsis
+
named.conf
+
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
+ named.conf is the configuration file for
+ named. Statements are enclosed
in braces and terminated with a semi-colon. Clauses in
the statements are also semi-colon terminated. The usual
comment styles are supported:
-
+ named is a Domain Name System (DNS) server,
part of the BIND 9 distribution from ISC. For more
information on the DNS, see RFCs 1033, 1034, and 1035.
-
When invoked without arguments, named will
+
+
+ When invoked without arguments, named will
read the default configuration file
- /etc/named.conf, read any initial
+ /etc/named.conf, read any initial
data, and listen for queries.
-
OPTIONS
-4
Use IPv4 only even if the host machine is capable of IPv6.
- -4 and -6 are mutually
+
+
+
+
OPTIONS
+
+
-4
+
+ Use IPv4 only even if the host machine is capable of IPv6.
+ -4 and -6 are mutually
exclusive.
-
-6
Use IPv6 only even if the host machine is capable of IPv4.
- -4 and -6 are mutually
+
+
-6
+
+ Use IPv6 only even if the host machine is capable of IPv4.
+ -4 and -6 are mutually
exclusive.
-
-c config-file
Use config-file as the
+
+
-c config-file
+
+ Use config-file as the
configuration file instead of the default,
- /etc/named.conf. To
+ /etc/named.conf. To
ensure that reloading the configuration file continues
to work after the server has changed its working
directory due to to a possible
- directory option in the configuration
- file, config-file should be
+ directory option in the configuration
+ file, config-file should be
an absolute pathname.
-
-d debug-level
Set the daemon's debug level to debug-level.
- Debugging traces from named become
+
+
-d debug-level
+
+ Set the daemon's debug level to debug-level.
+ Debugging traces from named become
more verbose as the debug level increases.
-
-f
Run the server in the foreground (i.e. do not daemonize).
-
-g
Run the server in the foreground and force all logging
- to stderr.
-
-n #cpus
Create #cpus worker threads
+
+
-f
+
+ Run the server in the foreground (i.e. do not daemonize).
+
+
-g
+
+ Run the server in the foreground and force all logging
+ to stderr.
+
+
-n #cpus
+
+ Create #cpus worker threads
to take advantage of multiple CPUs. If not specified,
- named will try to determine the
+ named will try to determine the
number of CPUs present and create one thread per CPU.
If it is unable to determine the number of CPUs, a
single worker thread will be created.
-
-p port
Listen for queries on port port. If not
+
+
-p port
+
+ Listen for queries on port port. If not
specified, the default is port 53.
-
-s
Write memory usage statistics to stdout on exit.
-
Note: This option is mainly of interest to BIND 9 developers
+
+
-s
+
+
+ Write memory usage statistics to stdout on exit.
+
+
+
Note
+
+ This option is mainly of interest to BIND 9 developers
and may be removed or changed in a future release.
-
-t directory
chroot() to directory after
+
+
+
+
-t directory
+
+
+ chroot() to directory after
processing the command line arguments, but before
reading the configuration file.
-
Warning
This option should be used in conjunction with the
- -u option, as chrooting a process
+
+
+
Warning
+
+ This option should be used in conjunction with the
+ -u option, as chrooting a process
running as root doesn't enhance security on most
- systems; the way chroot() is
+ systems; the way chroot() is
defined allows a process with root privileges to
escape a chroot jail.
-
-u user
setuid() to user after completing
+
+
+
+
-u user
+
+
+ setuid() to user after completing
privileged operations, such as creating sockets that
listen on privileged ports.
-
Note: On Linux, named uses the kernel's
+
+
+
Note
+
+ On Linux, named uses the kernel's
capability mechanism to drop all root privileges
- except the ability to bind() to a
+ except the ability to bind() to a
privileged port and set process resource limits.
- Unfortunately, this means that the -u
- option only works when named is run
+ Unfortunately, this means that the -u
+ option only works when named is run
on kernel 2.2.18 or later, or kernel 2.3.99-pre3 or
later, since previous kernels did not allow privileges
- to be retained after setuid().
-
-v
Report the version number and exit.
-
-x cache-file
Load data from cache-file into the
+ to be retained after setuid().
+
+
+
+
-v
+
+ Report the version number and exit.
+
+
-x cache-file
+
+
+ Load data from cache-file into the
cache of the default view.
-
Warning
This option must not be used. It is only of interest
+
+
+
Warning
+
+ This option must not be used. It is only of interest
to BIND 9 developers and may be removed or changed in a
future release.
-
SIGNALS
In routine operation, signals should not be used to control
- the nameserver; rndc should be used
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
SIGNALS
+
+ In routine operation, signals should not be used to control
+ the nameserver; rndc should be used
instead.
-
SIGHUP
Force a reload of the server.
-
SIGINT, SIGTERM
Shut down the server.
-
The result of sending any other signals to the server is undefined.
-
CONFIGURATION
The named configuration file is too complex
+
+
+
SIGHUP
+
+ Force a reload of the server.
+
+
SIGINT, SIGTERM
+
+ Shut down the server.
+
+
+
+ The result of sending any other signals to the server is undefined.
+
+
+
+
CONFIGURATION
+
+ The named configuration file is too complex
to describe in detail here. A complete description is
- provided in the BIND 9 Administrator Reference
- Manual.
-
+
+
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/named/query.c b/contrib/bind9/bin/named/query.c
index a5411af3433..75102fd1369 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/named/query.c
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/named/query.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
/*
- * Copyright (C) 2004 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+ * Copyright (C) 2004, 2005 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
* Copyright (C) 1999-2003 Internet Software Consortium.
*
* Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
* PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
*/
-/* $Id: query.c,v 1.198.2.13.4.30 2004/06/30 14:13:05 marka Exp $ */
+/* $Id: query.c,v 1.198.2.13.4.36 2005/08/11 05:25:20 marka Exp $ */
#include
@@ -1198,17 +1198,7 @@ query_addadditional(void *arg, dns_name_t *name, dns_rdatatype_t qtype) {
* recursing to add address records, which in turn can cause
* recursion to add KEYs.
*/
- if (type == dns_rdatatype_a || type == dns_rdatatype_aaaa) {
- /*
- * RFC 2535 section 3.5 says that when A or AAAA records are
- * retrieved as additional data, any KEY RRs for the owner name
- * should be added to the additional data section.
- *
- * XXXRTH We should lower the priority here. Alternatively,
- * we could raise the priority of glue records.
- */
- eresult = query_addadditional(client, name, dns_rdatatype_dnskey);
- } else if (type == dns_rdatatype_srv && trdataset != NULL) {
+ if (type == dns_rdatatype_srv && trdataset != NULL) {
/*
* If we're adding SRV records to the additional data
* section, it's helpful if we add the SRV additional data
@@ -1241,8 +1231,6 @@ static inline void
query_addrdataset(ns_client_t *client, dns_name_t *fname,
dns_rdataset_t *rdataset)
{
- dns_rdatatype_t type = rdataset->type;
-
/*
* Add 'rdataset' and any pertinent additional data to
* 'fname', a name in the response message for 'client'.
@@ -1266,22 +1254,6 @@ query_addrdataset(ns_client_t *client, dns_name_t *fname,
*/
(void)dns_rdataset_additionaldata(rdataset,
query_addadditional, client);
- /*
- * RFC 2535 section 3.5 says that when NS, SOA, A, or AAAA records
- * are retrieved, any KEY RRs for the owner name should be added
- * to the additional data section. We treat A6 records the same way.
- *
- * We don't care if query_addadditional() fails.
- */
- if (type == dns_rdatatype_ns || type == dns_rdatatype_soa ||
- type == dns_rdatatype_a || type == dns_rdatatype_aaaa ||
- type == dns_rdatatype_a6) {
- /*
- * XXXRTH We should lower the priority here. Alternatively,
- * we could raise the priority of glue records.
- */
- (void)query_addadditional(client, fname, dns_rdatatype_dnskey);
- }
CTRACE("query_addrdataset: done");
}
@@ -2116,33 +2088,37 @@ query_recurse(ns_client_t *client, dns_rdatatype_t qtype, dns_name_t *qdomain,
* connection was accepted (if allowed by the TCP quota).
*/
if (client->recursionquota == NULL) {
- isc_boolean_t killoldest = ISC_FALSE;
result = isc_quota_attach(&ns_g_server->recursionquota,
&client->recursionquota);
- if (result == ISC_R_SOFTQUOTA) {
+ if (result == ISC_R_SOFTQUOTA) {
ns_client_log(client, NS_LOGCATEGORY_CLIENT,
NS_LOGMODULE_QUERY, ISC_LOG_WARNING,
- "recursive-clients limit exceeded, "
+ "recursive-clients soft limit exceeded, "
"aborting oldest query");
- killoldest = ISC_TRUE;
+ ns_client_killoldestquery(client);
result = ISC_R_SUCCESS;
- }
- if (dns_resolver_nrunning(client->view->resolver) >
- (unsigned int)ns_g_server->recursionquota.max)
- result = ISC_R_QUOTA;
- if (result == ISC_R_SUCCESS && !client->mortal &&
- (client->attributes & NS_CLIENTATTR_TCP) == 0)
- result = ns_client_replace(client);
- if (result != ISC_R_SUCCESS) {
+ } else if (result == ISC_R_QUOTA) {
ns_client_log(client, NS_LOGCATEGORY_CLIENT,
NS_LOGMODULE_QUERY, ISC_LOG_WARNING,
"no more recursive clients: %s",
isc_result_totext(result));
- if (client->recursionquota != NULL)
- isc_quota_detach(&client->recursionquota);
- return (result);
+ ns_client_killoldestquery(client);
}
- ns_client_recursing(client, killoldest);
+ if (result == ISC_R_SUCCESS && !client->mortal &&
+ (client->attributes & NS_CLIENTATTR_TCP) == 0) {
+ result = ns_client_replace(client);
+ if (result != ISC_R_SUCCESS) {
+ ns_client_log(client, NS_LOGCATEGORY_CLIENT,
+ NS_LOGMODULE_QUERY,
+ ISC_LOG_WARNING,
+ "ns_client_replace() failed: %s",
+ isc_result_totext(result));
+ isc_quota_detach(&client->recursionquota);
+ }
+ }
+ if (result != ISC_R_SUCCESS)
+ return (result);
+ ns_client_recursing(client);
}
/*
@@ -2319,6 +2295,34 @@ query_addnoqnameproof(ns_client_t *client, dns_rdataset_t *rdataset) {
query_releasename(client, &fname);
}
+static inline void
+answer_in_glue(ns_client_t *client, dns_rdatatype_t qtype) {
+ dns_name_t *name;
+ dns_message_t *msg;
+ dns_section_t section = DNS_SECTION_ADDITIONAL;
+ dns_rdataset_t *rdataset = NULL;
+
+ msg = client->message;
+ for (name = ISC_LIST_HEAD(msg->sections[section]);
+ name != NULL;
+ name = ISC_LIST_NEXT(name, link))
+ if (dns_name_equal(name, client->query.qname)) {
+ for (rdataset = ISC_LIST_HEAD(name->list);
+ rdataset != NULL;
+ rdataset = ISC_LIST_NEXT(rdataset, link))
+ if (rdataset->type == qtype)
+ break;
+ break;
+ }
+ if (rdataset != NULL) {
+ ISC_LIST_UNLINK(msg->sections[section], name, link);
+ ISC_LIST_PREPEND(msg->sections[section], name, link);
+ ISC_LIST_UNLINK(name->list, rdataset, link);
+ ISC_LIST_PREPEND(name->list, rdataset, link);
+ rdataset->attributes |= DNS_RDATASETATTR_REQUIREDGLUE;
+ }
+}
+
/*
* Do the bulk of query processing for the current query of 'client'.
* If 'event' is non-NULL, we are returning from recursion and 'qtype'
@@ -2875,7 +2879,7 @@ query_find(ns_client_t *client, dns_fetchevent_t *event, dns_rdatatype_t qtype)
/*
* Add SOA. If the query was for a SOA record force the
* ttl to zero so that it is possible for clients to find
- * the containing zone of a arbitary name with a stub
+ * the containing zone of an arbitrary name with a stub
* resolver and not have it cached.
*/
if (qtype == dns_rdatatype_soa)
@@ -3338,6 +3342,16 @@ query_find(ns_client_t *client, dns_fetchevent_t *event, dns_rdatatype_t qtype)
*/
setup_query_sortlist(client);
+ /*
+ * If this is a referral and the answer to the question
+ * is in the glue sort it to the start of the additional
+ * section.
+ */
+ if (client->message->counts[DNS_SECTION_ANSWER] == 0 &&
+ client->message->rcode == dns_rcode_noerror &&
+ (qtype == dns_rdatatype_a || qtype == dns_rdatatype_aaaa))
+ answer_in_glue(client, qtype);
+
if (client->message->rcode == dns_rcode_nxdomain &&
client->view->auth_nxdomain == ISC_TRUE)
client->message->flags |= DNS_MESSAGEFLAG_AA;
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/named/server.c b/contrib/bind9/bin/named/server.c
index d0b6afc0e59..b9d30d02f64 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/named/server.c
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/named/server.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
/*
- * Copyright (C) 2004 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+ * Copyright (C) 2004, 2005 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
* Copyright (C) 1999-2003 Internet Software Consortium.
*
* Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
* PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
*/
-/* $Id: server.c,v 1.339.2.15.2.59 2004/11/10 22:13:56 marka Exp $ */
+/* $Id: server.c,v 1.339.2.15.2.65 2005/07/27 02:53:15 marka Exp $ */
#include
@@ -81,6 +81,10 @@
#include
#include
#include
+#ifdef HAVE_LIBSCF
+#include
+#include
+#endif
/*
* Check an operation for failure. Assumes that the function
@@ -1798,7 +1802,7 @@ configure_server_quota(cfg_obj_t **maps, const char *name, isc_quota_t *quota)
result = ns_config_get(maps, name, &obj);
INSIST(result == ISC_R_SUCCESS);
- quota->max = cfg_obj_asuint32(obj);
+ isc_quota_max(quota, cfg_obj_asuint32(obj));
}
/*
@@ -1937,9 +1941,13 @@ adjust_interfaces(ns_server_t *server, isc_mem_t *mctx) {
* At this point the zone list may contain a stale zone
* just removed from the configuration. To see the validity,
* check if the corresponding view is in our current view list.
+ * There may also be old zones that are still in the process
+ * of shutting down and have detached from their old view
+ * (zoneview == NULL).
*/
zoneview = dns_zone_getview(zone);
- INSIST(zoneview != NULL);
+ if (zoneview == NULL)
+ continue;
for (view = ISC_LIST_HEAD(server->viewlist);
view != NULL && view != zoneview;
view = ISC_LIST_NEXT(view, link))
@@ -2221,6 +2229,11 @@ load_configuration(const char *filename, ns_server_t *server,
configure_server_quota(maps, "tcp-clients", &server->tcpquota);
configure_server_quota(maps, "recursive-clients",
&server->recursionquota);
+ if (server->recursionquota.max > 1000)
+ isc_quota_soft(&server->recursionquota,
+ server->recursionquota.max - 100);
+ else
+ isc_quota_soft(&server->recursionquota, 0);
CHECK(configure_view_acl(NULL, config, "blackhole", &aclconfctx,
ns_g_mctx, &server->blackholeacl));
@@ -2948,7 +2961,6 @@ ns_server_create(isc_mem_t *mctx, ns_server_t **serverp) {
RUNTIME_CHECK(result == ISC_R_SUCCESS);
result = isc_quota_init(&server->recursionquota, 100);
RUNTIME_CHECK(result == ISC_R_SUCCESS);
- isc_quota_soft(&server->recursionquota, ISC_FALSE);
result = dns_aclenv_init(mctx, &server->aclenv);
RUNTIME_CHECK(result == ISC_R_SUCCESS);
@@ -3637,6 +3649,15 @@ add_view_tolist(struct dumpcontext *dctx, dns_view_t *view) {
struct viewlistentry *vle;
isc_result_t result = ISC_R_SUCCESS;
+ /*
+ * Prevent duplicate views.
+ */
+ for (vle = ISC_LIST_HEAD(dctx->viewlist);
+ vle != NULL;
+ vle = ISC_LIST_NEXT(vle, link))
+ if (vle->view == view)
+ return (ISC_R_SUCCESS);
+
vle = isc_mem_get(dctx->mctx, sizeof *vle);
if (vle == NULL)
return (ISC_R_NOMEMORY);
@@ -3700,9 +3721,11 @@ dumpdone(void *arg, isc_result_t result) {
if (dctx->view == NULL)
goto done;
INSIST(dctx->zone == NULL);
- }
+ } else
+ goto resume;
nextview:
fprintf(dctx->fp, ";\n; Start view %s\n;\n", dctx->view->view->name);
+ resume:
if (dctx->zone == NULL && dctx->cache == NULL && dctx->dumpcache) {
style = &dns_master_style_cache;
/* start cache dump */
@@ -3763,9 +3786,12 @@ dumpdone(void *arg, isc_result_t result) {
&dctx->mdctx);
if (result == DNS_R_CONTINUE)
return;
- if (result == ISC_R_NOTIMPLEMENTED)
+ if (result == ISC_R_NOTIMPLEMENTED) {
fprintf(dctx->fp, "; %s\n",
dns_result_totext(result));
+ result = ISC_R_SUCCESS;
+ goto nextzone;
+ }
if (result != ISC_R_SUCCESS)
goto cleanup;
}
@@ -3789,7 +3815,6 @@ dumpdone(void *arg, isc_result_t result) {
dumpcontext_destroy(dctx);
}
-
isc_result_t
ns_server_dumpdb(ns_server_t *server, char *args) {
struct dumpcontext *dctx = NULL;
@@ -3845,6 +3870,7 @@ ns_server_dumpdb(ns_server_t *server, char *args) {
ptr = next_token(&args, " \t");
}
+ nextview:
for (view = ISC_LIST_HEAD(server->viewlist);
view != NULL;
view = ISC_LIST_NEXT(view, link))
@@ -3853,6 +3879,11 @@ ns_server_dumpdb(ns_server_t *server, char *args) {
continue;
CHECK(add_view_tolist(dctx, view));
}
+ if (ptr != NULL) {
+ ptr = next_token(&args, " \t");
+ if (ptr != NULL)
+ goto nextview;
+ }
dumpdone(dctx, ISC_R_SUCCESS);
return (ISC_R_SUCCESS);
@@ -4101,3 +4132,22 @@ ns_server_freeze(ns_server_t *server, isc_boolean_t freeze, char *args) {
dns_zone_detach(&zone);
return (result);
}
+
+#ifdef HAVE_LIBSCF
+/*
+ * This function adds a message for rndc to echo if named
+ * is managed by smf and is also running chroot.
+ */
+isc_result_t
+ns_smf_add_message(isc_buffer_t *text) {
+ unsigned int n;
+
+ n = snprintf((char *)isc_buffer_used(text),
+ isc_buffer_availablelength(text),
+ "use svcadm(1M) to manage named");
+ if (n >= isc_buffer_availablelength(text))
+ return (ISC_R_NOSPACE);
+ isc_buffer_add(text, n);
+ return (ISC_R_SUCCESS);
+}
+#endif /* HAVE_LIBSCF */
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/named/unix/os.c b/contrib/bind9/bin/named/unix/os.c
index 797754948de..f306f146225 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/named/unix/os.c
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/named/unix/os.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
/*
- * Copyright (C) 2004 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+ * Copyright (C) 2004, 2005 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
* Copyright (C) 1999-2002 Internet Software Consortium.
*
* Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
* PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
*/
-/* $Id: os.c,v 1.46.2.4.8.19 2004/10/07 02:34:20 marka Exp $ */
+/* $Id: os.c,v 1.46.2.4.8.22 2005/05/20 01:37:19 marka Exp $ */
#include
#include
@@ -46,6 +46,9 @@
#include
#include
+#ifdef HAVE_LIBSCF
+#include
+#endif
static char *pidfile = NULL;
static int devnullfd = -1;
@@ -159,7 +162,7 @@ linux_setcaps(unsigned int caps) {
memset(&cap, 0, sizeof(cap));
cap.effective = caps;
cap.permitted = caps;
- cap.inheritable = caps;
+ cap.inheritable = 0;
if (syscall(SYS_capset, &caphead, &cap) < 0) {
isc__strerror(errno, strbuf, sizeof(strbuf));
ns_main_earlyfatal("capset failed: %s:"
@@ -417,6 +420,9 @@ all_digits(const char *s) {
void
ns_os_chroot(const char *root) {
char strbuf[ISC_STRERRORSIZE];
+#ifdef HAVE_LIBSCF
+ ns_smf_chroot = 0;
+#endif
if (root != NULL) {
if (chroot(root) < 0) {
isc__strerror(errno, strbuf, sizeof(strbuf));
@@ -426,6 +432,10 @@ ns_os_chroot(const char *root) {
isc__strerror(errno, strbuf, sizeof(strbuf));
ns_main_earlyfatal("chdir(/): %s", strbuf);
}
+#ifdef HAVE_LIBSCF
+ /* Set ns_smf_chroot flag on successful chroot. */
+ ns_smf_chroot = 1;
+#endif
}
}
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/named/update.c b/contrib/bind9/bin/named/update.c
index 325381a85be..6c2d7597f79 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/named/update.c
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/named/update.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
/*
- * Copyright (C) 2004 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+ * Copyright (C) 2004, 2005 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
* Copyright (C) 1999-2003 Internet Software Consortium.
*
* Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
* PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
*/
-/* $Id: update.c,v 1.88.2.5.2.25 2004/10/21 01:40:22 marka Exp $ */
+/* $Id: update.c,v 1.88.2.5.2.27 2005/10/08 00:21:06 marka Exp $ */
#include
@@ -2723,8 +2723,8 @@ updatedone_action(isc_task_t *task, isc_event_t *event) {
INSIST(client->nupdates > 0);
client->nupdates--;
respond(client, uev->result);
- ns_client_detach(&client);
isc_event_free(&event);
+ ns_client_detach(&client);
}
/*
@@ -2740,8 +2740,8 @@ forward_fail(isc_task_t *task, isc_event_t *event) {
INSIST(client->nupdates > 0);
client->nupdates--;
respond(client, DNS_R_SERVFAIL);
- ns_client_detach(&client);
isc_event_free(&event);
+ ns_client_detach(&client);
}
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/named/xfrout.c b/contrib/bind9/bin/named/xfrout.c
index 9fb2697a45d..687c287f4bd 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/named/xfrout.c
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/named/xfrout.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
/*
- * Copyright (C) 2004 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+ * Copyright (C) 2004, 2005 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
* Copyright (C) 1999-2003 Internet Software Consortium.
*
* Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
* PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
*/
-/* $Id: xfrout.c,v 1.101.2.5.2.10 2004/04/02 06:08:17 marka Exp $ */
+/* $Id: xfrout.c,v 1.101.2.5.2.12 2005/10/14 02:13:05 marka Exp $ */
#include
@@ -868,7 +868,7 @@ xfrout_log1(ns_client_t *client, dns_name_t *zonename,
const char *fmt, ...) ISC_FORMAT_PRINTF(5, 6);
static void
-xfrout_log(xfrout_ctx_t *xfr, unsigned int level, const char *fmt, ...)
+xfrout_log(xfrout_ctx_t *xfr, int level, const char *fmt, ...)
ISC_FORMAT_PRINTF(3, 4);
/**************************************************************************/
@@ -1710,7 +1710,7 @@ xfrout_log1(ns_client_t *client, dns_name_t *zonename,
* Logging function for use when there is a xfrout_ctx_t.
*/
static void
-xfrout_log(xfrout_ctx_t *xfr, unsigned int level, const char *fmt, ...) {
+xfrout_log(xfrout_ctx_t *xfr, int level, const char *fmt, ...) {
va_list ap;
va_start(ap, fmt);
xfrout_logv(xfr->client, xfr->qname, xfr->qclass, level, fmt, ap);
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/named/zoneconf.c b/contrib/bind9/bin/named/zoneconf.c
index afafa534d2b..41ce69d6a62 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/named/zoneconf.c
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/named/zoneconf.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
/*
- * Copyright (C) 2004 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+ * Copyright (C) 2004, 2005 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
* Copyright (C) 1999-2003 Internet Software Consortium.
*
* Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
* PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
*/
-/* $Id: zoneconf.c,v 1.87.2.4.10.13 2004/04/20 14:12:09 marka Exp $ */
+/* $Id: zoneconf.c,v 1.87.2.4.10.15 2005/09/06 02:12:39 marka Exp $ */
#include
@@ -375,17 +375,30 @@ ns_zone_configure(cfg_obj_t *config, cfg_obj_t *vconfig, cfg_obj_t *zconfig,
obj = NULL;
result = cfg_map_get(zoptions, "database", &obj);
if (result == ISC_R_SUCCESS)
- cpval = cfg_obj_asstring(obj);
+ cpval = isc_mem_strdup(mctx, cfg_obj_asstring(obj));
else
cpval = default_dbtype;
- RETERR(strtoargv(mctx, cpval, &dbargc, &dbargv));
+
+ if (cpval == NULL)
+ return(ISC_R_NOMEMORY);
+
+ result = strtoargv(mctx, cpval, &dbargc, &dbargv);
+ if (result != ISC_R_SUCCESS && cpval != default_dbtype) {
+ isc_mem_free(mctx, cpval);
+ return (result);
+ }
+
/*
* ANSI C is strange here. There is no logical reason why (char **)
* cannot be promoted automatically to (const char * const *) by the
* compiler w/o generating a warning.
*/
- RETERR(dns_zone_setdbtype(zone, dbargc, (const char * const *)dbargv));
+ result = dns_zone_setdbtype(zone, dbargc, (const char * const *)dbargv);
isc_mem_put(mctx, dbargv, dbargc * sizeof(*dbargv));
+ if (cpval != default_dbtype)
+ isc_mem_free(mctx, cpval);
+ if (result != ISC_R_SUCCESS)
+ return (result);
obj = NULL;
result = cfg_map_get(zoptions, "file", &obj);
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/nsupdate/nsupdate.8 b/contrib/bind9/bin/nsupdate/nsupdate.8
index 7828db23a8b..602a55b1831 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/nsupdate/nsupdate.8
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/nsupdate/nsupdate.8
@@ -1,294 +1,239 @@
-.\" Copyright (C) 2004 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
-.\" Copyright (C) 2000-2003 Internet Software Consortium.
-.\"
+.\" Copyright (C) 2004, 2005 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+.\" Copyright (C) 2000-2003 Internet Software Consortium.
+.\"
.\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
.\" purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
.\" copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
-.\"
+.\"
.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ISC DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH
.\" REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
-.\" AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL ISC BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT,
+.\" AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL ISC BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT,
.\" INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
.\" LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE
.\" OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
.\" PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
.\"
-.\" $Id: nsupdate.8,v 1.24.2.2.2.5 2004/03/08 09:04:15 marka Exp $
+.\" $Id: nsupdate.8,v 1.24.2.2.2.8 2005/10/13 02:33:48 marka Exp $
.\"
-.TH "NSUPDATE" "8" "Jun 30, 2000" "BIND9" ""
-.SH NAME
+.hy 0
+.ad l
+.\" ** You probably do not want to edit this file directly **
+.\" It was generated using the DocBook XSL Stylesheets (version 1.69.1).
+.\" Instead of manually editing it, you probably should edit the DocBook XML
+.\" source for it and then use the DocBook XSL Stylesheets to regenerate it.
+.TH "NSUPDATE" "8" "Jun 30, 2000" "BIND9" "BIND9"
+.\" disable hyphenation
+.nh
+.\" disable justification (adjust text to left margin only)
+.ad l
+.SH "NAME"
nsupdate \- Dynamic DNS update utility
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-\fBnsupdate\fR [ \fB-d\fR ] [ \fB [ -y \fIkeyname:secret\fB ] [ -k \fIkeyfile\fB ] \fR ] [ \fB-t \fItimeout\fB\fR ] [ \fB-u \fIudptimeout\fB\fR ] [ \fB-r \fIudpretries\fB\fR ] [ \fB-v\fR ] [ \fBfilename\fR ]
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.HP 9
+\fBnsupdate\fR [\fB\-d\fR] [[\fB\-y\ \fR\fB\fIkeyname:secret\fR\fR] [\fB\-k\ \fR\fB\fIkeyfile\fR\fR]] [\fB\-t\ \fR\fB\fItimeout\fR\fR] [\fB\-u\ \fR\fB\fIudptimeout\fR\fR] [\fB\-r\ \fR\fB\fIudpretries\fR\fR] [\fB\-v\fR] [filename]
.SH "DESCRIPTION"
.PP
\fBnsupdate\fR
-is used to submit Dynamic DNS Update requests as defined in RFC2136
-to a name server.
-This allows resource records to be added or removed from a zone
-without manually editing the zone file.
-A single update request can contain requests to add or remove more than one
-resource record.
+is used to submit Dynamic DNS Update requests as defined in RFC2136 to a name server. This allows resource records to be added or removed from a zone without manually editing the zone file. A single update request can contain requests to add or remove more than one resource record.
.PP
Zones that are under dynamic control via
\fBnsupdate\fR
-or a DHCP server should not be edited by hand.
-Manual edits could
-conflict with dynamic updates and cause data to be lost.
+or a DHCP server should not be edited by hand. Manual edits could conflict with dynamic updates and cause data to be lost.
.PP
The resource records that are dynamically added or removed with
\fBnsupdate\fR
-have to be in the same zone.
-Requests are sent to the zone's master server.
-This is identified by the MNAME field of the zone's SOA record.
+have to be in the same zone. Requests are sent to the zone's master server. This is identified by the MNAME field of the zone's SOA record.
.PP
The
-\fB-d\fR
+\fB\-d\fR
option makes
\fBnsupdate\fR
-operate in debug mode.
-This provides tracing information about the update requests that are
-made and the replies received from the name server.
+operate in debug mode. This provides tracing information about the update requests that are made and the replies received from the name server.
.PP
-Transaction signatures can be used to authenticate the Dynamic DNS
-updates.
-These use the TSIG resource record type described in RFC2845 or the
-SIG(0) record described in RFC3535 and RFC2931.
-TSIG relies on a shared secret that should only be known to
-\fBnsupdate\fR and the name server.
-Currently, the only supported encryption algorithm for TSIG is
-HMAC-MD5, which is defined in RFC 2104.
-Once other algorithms are defined for TSIG, applications will need to
-ensure they select the appropriate algorithm as well as the key when
-authenticating each other.
-For instance suitable
+Transaction signatures can be used to authenticate the Dynamic DNS updates. These use the TSIG resource record type described in RFC2845 or the SIG(0) record described in RFC3535 and RFC2931. TSIG relies on a shared secret that should only be known to
+\fBnsupdate\fR
+and the name server. Currently, the only supported encryption algorithm for TSIG is HMAC\-MD5, which is defined in RFC 2104. Once other algorithms are defined for TSIG, applications will need to ensure they select the appropriate algorithm as well as the key when authenticating each other. For instance suitable
\fBkey\fR
and
\fBserver\fR
statements would be added to
\fI/etc/named.conf\fR
-so that the name server can associate the appropriate secret key
-and algorithm with the IP address of the
-client application that will be using TSIG authentication.
-SIG(0) uses public key cryptography. To use a SIG(0) key, the public
-key must be stored in a KEY record in a zone served by the name server.
+so that the name server can associate the appropriate secret key and algorithm with the IP address of the client application that will be using TSIG authentication. SIG(0) uses public key cryptography. To use a SIG(0) key, the public key must be stored in a KEY record in a zone served by the name server.
\fBnsupdate\fR
does not read
\fI/etc/named.conf\fR.
.PP
\fBnsupdate\fR
uses the
-\fB-y\fR
+\fB\-y\fR
or
-\fB-k\fR
-option (with an HMAC-MD5 key) to provide the shared secret needed to generate
-a TSIG record for authenticating Dynamic DNS update requests.
-These options are mutually exclusive.
-With the
-\fB-k\fR
+\fB\-k\fR
+option (with an HMAC\-MD5 key) to provide the shared secret needed to generate a TSIG record for authenticating Dynamic DNS update requests. These options are mutually exclusive. With the
+\fB\-k\fR
option,
\fBnsupdate\fR
reads the shared secret from the file
-\fIkeyfile\fR,
-whose name is of the form
-\fIK{name}.+157.+{random}.private\fR.
-For historical
-reasons, the file
+\fIkeyfile\fR, whose name is of the form
+\fIK{name}.+157.+{random}.private\fR. For historical reasons, the file
\fIK{name}.+157.+{random}.key\fR
must also be present. When the
-\fB-y\fR
+\fB\-y\fR
option is used, a signature is generated from
-\fIkeyname:secret.\fR
-\fIkeyname\fR
-is the name of the key,
-and
+\fIkeyname:secret.\fR\fIkeyname\fR
+is the name of the key, and
\fIsecret\fR
-is the base64 encoded shared secret.
-Use of the
-\fB-y\fR
-option is discouraged because the shared secret is supplied as a command
-line argument in clear text.
-This may be visible in the output from
-\fBps\fR(1)
+is the base64 encoded shared secret. Use of the
+\fB\-y\fR
+option is discouraged because the shared secret is supplied as a command line argument in clear text. This may be visible in the output from
+\fBps\fR(1 )
or in a history file maintained by the user's shell.
.PP
-The \fB-k\fR may also be used to specify a SIG(0) key used
-to authenticate Dynamic DNS update requests. In this case, the key
-specified is not an HMAC-MD5 key.
+The
+\fB\-k\fR
+may also be used to specify a SIG(0) key used to authenticate Dynamic DNS update requests. In this case, the key specified is not an HMAC\-MD5 key.
.PP
By default
\fBnsupdate\fR
-uses UDP to send update requests to the name server unless they are too
-large to fit in a UDP request in which case TCP will be used.
-The
-\fB-v\fR
+uses UDP to send update requests to the name server unless they are too large to fit in a UDP request in which case TCP will be used. The
+\fB\-v\fR
option makes
\fBnsupdate\fR
-use a TCP connection.
-This may be preferable when a batch of update requests is made.
+use a TCP connection. This may be preferable when a batch of update requests is made.
.PP
-The \fB-t\fR option sets the maximum time a update request can
-take before it is aborted. The default is 300 seconds. Zero can be used
-to disable the timeout.
+The
+\fB\-t\fR
+option sets the maximum time a update request can take before it is aborted. The default is 300 seconds. Zero can be used to disable the timeout.
.PP
-The \fB-u\fR option sets the UDP retry interval. The default is
-3 seconds. If zero the interval will be computed from the timeout interval
-and number of UDP retries.
+The
+\fB\-u\fR
+option sets the UDP retry interval. The default is 3 seconds. If zero the interval will be computed from the timeout interval and number of UDP retries.
.PP
-The \fB-r\fR option sets the number of UDP retries. The default is
-3. If zero only one update request will be made.
+The
+\fB\-r\fR
+option sets the number of UDP retries. The default is 3. If zero only one update request will be made.
.SH "INPUT FORMAT"
.PP
\fBnsupdate\fR
reads input from
\fIfilename\fR
-or standard input.
-Each command is supplied on exactly one line of input.
-Some commands are for administrative purposes.
-The others are either update instructions or prerequisite checks on the
-contents of the zone.
-These checks set conditions that some name or set of
-resource records (RRset) either exists or is absent from the zone.
-These conditions must be met if the entire update request is to succeed.
-Updates will be rejected if the tests for the prerequisite conditions fail.
+or standard input. Each command is supplied on exactly one line of input. Some commands are for administrative purposes. The others are either update instructions or prerequisite checks on the contents of the zone. These checks set conditions that some name or set of resource records (RRset) either exists or is absent from the zone. These conditions must be met if the entire update request is to succeed. Updates will be rejected if the tests for the prerequisite conditions fail.
.PP
-Every update request consists of zero or more prerequisites
-and zero or more updates.
-This allows a suitably authenticated update request to proceed if some
-specified resource records are present or missing from the zone.
-A blank input line (or the \fBsend\fR command) causes the
-accumulated commands to be sent as one Dynamic DNS update request to the
-name server.
+Every update request consists of zero or more prerequisites and zero or more updates. This allows a suitably authenticated update request to proceed if some specified resource records are present or missing from the zone. A blank input line (or the
+\fBsend\fR
+command) causes the accumulated commands to be sent as one Dynamic DNS update request to the name server.
.PP
The command formats and their meaning are as follows:
.TP
-\fBserver servername [ port ]\fR
+.HP 7 \fBserver\fR {servername} [port]
Sends all dynamic update requests to the name server
-\fIservername\fR.
-When no server statement is provided,
+\fIservername\fR. When no server statement is provided,
\fBnsupdate\fR
-will send updates to the master server of the correct zone.
-The MNAME field of that zone's SOA record will identify the master
-server for that zone.
+will send updates to the master server of the correct zone. The MNAME field of that zone's SOA record will identify the master server for that zone.
\fIport\fR
is the port number on
\fIservername\fR
-where the dynamic update requests get sent.
-If no port number is specified, the default DNS port number of 53 is
-used.
+where the dynamic update requests get sent. If no port number is specified, the default DNS port number of 53 is used.
.TP
-\fBlocal address [ port ]\fR
+.HP 6 \fBlocal\fR {address} [port]
Sends all dynamic update requests using the local
-\fIaddress\fR.
-When no local statement is provided,
+\fIaddress\fR. When no local statement is provided,
\fBnsupdate\fR
will send updates using an address and port chosen by the system.
\fIport\fR
-can additionally be used to make requests come from a specific port.
-If no port number is specified, the system will assign one.
+can additionally be used to make requests come from a specific port. If no port number is specified, the system will assign one.
.TP
-\fBzone zonename\fR
+.HP 5 \fBzone\fR {zonename}
Specifies that all updates are to be made to the zone
-\fIzonename\fR.
-If no
+\fIzonename\fR. If no
\fIzone\fR
statement is provided,
\fBnsupdate\fR
will attempt determine the correct zone to update based on the rest of the input.
.TP
-\fBclass classname\fR
-Specify the default class.
-If no \fIclass\fR is specified the default class is
+.HP 6 \fBclass\fR {classname}
+Specify the default class. If no
+\fIclass\fR
+is specified the default class is
\fIIN\fR.
.TP
-\fBkey name secret\fR
+.HP 4 \fBkey\fR {name} {secret}
Specifies that all updates are to be TSIG signed using the
-\fIkeyname\fR \fIkeysecret\fR pair.
-The \fBkey\fR command
-overrides any key specified on the command line via
-\fB-y\fR or \fB-k\fR.
+\fIkeyname\fR\fIkeysecret\fR
+pair. The
+\fBkey\fR
+command overrides any key specified on the command line via
+\fB\-y\fR
+or
+\fB\-k\fR.
.TP
-\fBprereq nxdomain domain-name\fR
+.HP 16 \fBprereq nxdomain\fR {domain\-name}
Requires that no resource record of any type exists with name
-\fIdomain-name\fR.
+\fIdomain\-name\fR.
.TP
-\fBprereq yxdomain domain-name\fR
+.HP 16 \fBprereq yxdomain\fR {domain\-name}
Requires that
-\fIdomain-name\fR
+\fIdomain\-name\fR
exists (has as at least one resource record, of any type).
.TP
-\fBprereq nxrrset domain-name [ class ] type\fR
+.HP 15 \fBprereq nxrrset\fR {domain\-name} [class] {type}
Requires that no resource record exists of the specified
\fItype\fR,
\fIclass\fR
and
-\fIdomain-name\fR.
-If
+\fIdomain\-name\fR. If
\fIclass\fR
is omitted, IN (internet) is assumed.
.TP
-\fBprereq yxrrset domain-name [ class ] type\fR
+.HP 15 \fBprereq yxrrset\fR {domain\-name} [class] {type}
This requires that a resource record of the specified
\fItype\fR,
\fIclass\fR
and
-\fIdomain-name\fR
-must exist.
-If
+\fIdomain\-name\fR
+must exist. If
\fIclass\fR
is omitted, IN (internet) is assumed.
.TP
-\fBprereq yxrrset domain-name [ class ] type data\fI...\fB\fR
+.HP 15 \fBprereq yxrrset\fR {domain\-name} [class] {type} {data...}
The
\fIdata\fR
-from each set of prerequisites of this form
-sharing a common
+from each set of prerequisites of this form sharing a common
\fItype\fR,
-\fIclass\fR,
-and
-\fIdomain-name\fR
-are combined to form a set of RRs. This set of RRs must
-exactly match the set of RRs existing in the zone at the
-given
+\fIclass\fR, and
+\fIdomain\-name\fR
+are combined to form a set of RRs. This set of RRs must exactly match the set of RRs existing in the zone at the given
\fItype\fR,
-\fIclass\fR,
-and
-\fIdomain-name\fR.
-The
+\fIclass\fR, and
+\fIdomain\-name\fR. The
\fIdata\fR
-are written in the standard text representation of the resource record's
-RDATA.
+are written in the standard text representation of the resource record's RDATA.
.TP
-\fBupdate delete domain-name [ ttl ] [ class ] [ type [ data\fI...\fB ] ]\fR
+.HP 14 \fBupdate delete\fR {domain\-name} [ttl] [class] [type\ [data...]]
Deletes any resource records named
-\fIdomain-name\fR.
-If
+\fIdomain\-name\fR. If
\fItype\fR
and
\fIdata\fR
-is provided, only matching resource records will be removed.
-The internet class is assumed if
+is provided, only matching resource records will be removed. The internet class is assumed if
\fIclass\fR
is not supplied. The
\fIttl\fR
is ignored, and is only allowed for compatibility.
.TP
-\fBupdate add domain-name ttl [ class ] type data\fI...\fB\fR
+.HP 11 \fBupdate add\fR {domain\-name} {ttl} [class] {type} {data...}
Adds a new resource record with the specified
\fIttl\fR,
\fIclass\fR
and
\fIdata\fR.
.TP
-\fBshow\fR
-Displays the current message, containing all of the prerequisites and
-updates specified since the last send.
+.HP 5 \fBshow\fR
+Displays the current message, containing all of the prerequisites and updates specified since the last send.
.TP
-\fBsend\fR
+.HP 5 \fBsend\fR
Sends the current message. This is equivalent to entering a blank line.
.TP
-\fBanswer\fR
+.HP 7 \fBanswer\fR
Displays the answer.
.PP
Lines beginning with a semicolon are comments and are ignored.
@@ -298,10 +243,7 @@ The examples below show how
\fBnsupdate\fR
could be used to insert and delete resource records from the
\fBexample.com\fR
-zone.
-Notice that the input in each example contains a trailing blank line so that
-a group of commands are sent as one dynamic update request to the
-master name server for
+zone. Notice that the input in each example contains a trailing blank line so that a group of commands are sent as one dynamic update request to the master name server for
\fBexample.com\fR.
.sp
.nf
@@ -309,61 +251,48 @@ master name server for
> update delete oldhost.example.com A
> update add newhost.example.com 86400 A 172.16.1.1
> send
-.sp
.fi
+.sp
.PP
Any A records for
\fBoldhost.example.com\fR
-are deleted.
-and an A record for
+are deleted. and an A record for
\fBnewhost.example.com\fR
-it IP address 172.16.1.1 is added.
-The newly-added record has a 1 day TTL (86400 seconds)
+it IP address 172.16.1.1 is added. The newly\-added record has a 1 day TTL (86400 seconds)
.sp
.nf
# nsupdate
> prereq nxdomain nickname.example.com
> update add nickname.example.com 86400 CNAME somehost.example.com
> send
-.sp
.fi
+.sp
.PP
-The prerequisite condition gets the name server to check that there
-are no resource records of any type for
-\fBnickname.example.com\fR.
-If there are, the update request fails.
-If this name does not exist, a CNAME for it is added.
-This ensures that when the CNAME is added, it cannot conflict with the
-long-standing rule in RFC1034 that a name must not exist as any other
-record type if it exists as a CNAME.
-(The rule has been updated for DNSSEC in RFC2535 to allow CNAMEs to have
-RRSIG, DNSKEY and NSEC records.)
+The prerequisite condition gets the name server to check that there are no resource records of any type for
+\fBnickname.example.com\fR. If there are, the update request fails. If this name does not exist, a CNAME for it is added. This ensures that when the CNAME is added, it cannot conflict with the long\-standing rule in RFC1034 that a name must not exist as any other record type if it exists as a CNAME. (The rule has been updated for DNSSEC in RFC2535 to allow CNAMEs to have RRSIG, DNSKEY and NSEC records.)
.SH "FILES"
.TP
\fB/etc/resolv.conf\fR
used to identify default name server
.TP
\fBK{name}.+157.+{random}.key\fR
-base-64 encoding of HMAC-MD5 key created by
-\fBdnssec-keygen\fR(8).
+base\-64 encoding of HMAC\-MD5 key created by
+\fBdnssec\-keygen\fR(8).
.TP
\fBK{name}.+157.+{random}.private\fR
-base-64 encoding of HMAC-MD5 key created by
-\fBdnssec-keygen\fR(8).
+base\-64 encoding of HMAC\-MD5 key created by
+\fBdnssec\-keygen\fR(8).
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.PP
-\fBRFC2136\fR,
-\fBRFC3007\fR,
-\fBRFC2104\fR,
-\fBRFC2845\fR,
-\fBRFC1034\fR,
-\fBRFC2535\fR,
-\fBRFC2931\fR,
+\fBRFC2136\fR(),
+\fBRFC3007\fR(),
+\fBRFC2104\fR(),
+\fBRFC2845\fR(),
+\fBRFC1034\fR(),
+\fBRFC2535\fR(),
+\fBRFC2931\fR(),
\fBnamed\fR(8),
-\fBdnssec-keygen\fR(8).
+\fBdnssec\-keygen\fR(8).
.SH "BUGS"
.PP
-The TSIG key is redundantly stored in two separate files.
-This is a consequence of nsupdate using the DST library
-for its cryptographic operations, and may change in future
-releases.
+The TSIG key is redundantly stored in two separate files. This is a consequence of nsupdate using the DST library for its cryptographic operations, and may change in future releases.
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/nsupdate/nsupdate.c b/contrib/bind9/bin/nsupdate/nsupdate.c
index 3304a3c0e64..7c728b6db95 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/nsupdate/nsupdate.c
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/nsupdate/nsupdate.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
/*
- * Copyright (C) 2004 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+ * Copyright (C) 2004, 2005 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
* Copyright (C) 2000-2003 Internet Software Consortium.
*
* Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
* PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
*/
-/* $Id: nsupdate.c,v 1.103.2.15.2.18 2004/09/16 02:12:18 marka Exp $ */
+/* $Id: nsupdate.c,v 1.103.2.15.2.20 2005/03/17 03:58:26 marka Exp $ */
#include
@@ -1634,6 +1634,7 @@ recvsoa(isc_task_t *task, isc_event_t *event) {
ddebug("Destroying request [%p]", request);
dns_request_destroy(&request);
dns_message_renderreset(soaquery);
+ dns_message_settsigkey(soaquery, NULL);
sendrequest(localaddr, &servers[ns_inuse], soaquery, &request);
isc_mem_put(mctx, reqinfo, sizeof(nsu_requestinfo_t));
isc_event_free(&event);
@@ -1813,6 +1814,7 @@ recvsoa(isc_task_t *task, isc_event_t *event) {
dns_name_clone(&tname, name);
dns_request_destroy(&request);
dns_message_renderreset(soaquery);
+ dns_message_settsigkey(soaquery, NULL);
if (userserver != NULL)
sendrequest(localaddr, userserver, soaquery, &request);
else
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/nsupdate/nsupdate.docbook b/contrib/bind9/bin/nsupdate/nsupdate.docbook
index 7d23333c864..7a2b4cfb7dd 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/nsupdate/nsupdate.docbook
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/nsupdate/nsupdate.docbook
@@ -1,7 +1,9 @@
-
+]>
-
+
@@ -27,6 +29,22 @@
8BIND9
+
+
+
+ 2004
+ 2005
+ Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+
+
+ 2000
+ 2001
+ 2002
+ 2003
+ Internet Software Consortium.
+
+
+
nsupdateDynamic DNS update utility
@@ -229,6 +247,8 @@ where the dynamic update requests get sent.
If no port number is specified, the default DNS port number of 53 is
used.
+
+
@@ -248,6 +268,9 @@ will send updates using an address and port chosen by the system.
port
can additionally be used to make requests come from a specific port.
If no port number is specified, the system will assign one.
+
+
+
@@ -482,6 +505,7 @@ updates specified since the last send.
Sends the current message. This is equivalent to entering a blank line.
+
@@ -493,8 +517,10 @@ Sends the current message. This is equivalent to entering a blank line.
Displays the answer.
+
+
Lines beginning with a semicolon are comments and are ignored.
@@ -562,6 +588,7 @@ RRSIG, DNSKEY and NSEC records.)
used to identify default name server
+
K{name}.+157.+{random}.key
@@ -572,6 +599,7 @@ base-64 encoding of HMAC-MD5 key created by
.
+K{name}.+157.+{random}.private
@@ -582,6 +610,7 @@ base-64 encoding of HMAC-MD5 key created by
.
+
@@ -615,7 +644,7 @@ base-64 encoding of HMAC-MD5 key created by
dnssec-keygen8.
-
+
BUGS
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/nsupdate/nsupdate.html b/contrib/bind9/bin/nsupdate/nsupdate.html
index f9cb98cc35f..74ba2fbe277 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/nsupdate/nsupdate.html
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/nsupdate/nsupdate.html
@@ -1,339 +1,170 @@
-
-
-
-
-nsupdate
+nsupdate
is used to submit Dynamic DNS Update requests as defined in RFC2136
to a name server.
This allows resource records to be added or removed from a zone
without manually editing the zone file.
A single update request can contain requests to add or remove more than one
-resource record.
Zones that are under dynamic control via
-nsupdate
+resource record.
+
+
+Zones that are under dynamic control via
+nsupdate
or a DHCP server should not be edited by hand.
Manual edits could
-conflict with dynamic updates and cause data to be lost.
The resource records that are dynamically added or removed with
-nsupdate
+conflict with dynamic updates and cause data to be lost.
+
+
+The resource records that are dynamically added or removed with
+nsupdate
have to be in the same zone.
Requests are sent to the zone's master server.
-This is identified by the MNAME field of the zone's SOA record.
The
--d
+This is identified by the MNAME field of the zone's SOA record.
+
+
+The
+-d
option makes
-nsupdate
+nsupdate
operate in debug mode.
This provides tracing information about the update requests that are
-made and the replies received from the name server.
Transaction signatures can be used to authenticate the Dynamic DNS
+made and the replies received from the name server.
+
+
+Transaction signatures can be used to authenticate the Dynamic DNS
updates.
These use the TSIG resource record type described in RFC2845 or the
SIG(0) record described in RFC3535 and RFC2931.
TSIG relies on a shared secret that should only be known to
-nsupdate and the name server.
+nsupdate and the name server.
Currently, the only supported encryption algorithm for TSIG is
HMAC-MD5, which is defined in RFC 2104.
Once other algorithms are defined for TSIG, applications will need to
ensure they select the appropriate algorithm as well as the key when
authenticating each other.
For instance suitable
-key
+key
and
-server
+server
statements would be added to
-/etc/named.conf
+/etc/named.conf
so that the name server can associate the appropriate secret key
and algorithm with the IP address of the
client application that will be using TSIG authentication.
SIG(0) uses public key cryptography. To use a SIG(0) key, the public
key must be stored in a KEY record in a zone served by the name server.
-nsupdate
+nsupdate
does not read
-/etc/named.conf.
nsupdate
+/etc/named.conf.
+
+
+nsupdate
uses the
--y
+-y
or
--k
+-k
option (with an HMAC-MD5 key) to provide the shared secret needed to generate
a TSIG record for authenticating Dynamic DNS update requests.
These options are mutually exclusive.
With the
--k
+-k
option,
-nsupdate
+nsupdate
reads the shared secret from the file
-keyfile,
+keyfile,
whose name is of the form
-K{name}.+157.+{random}.private.
+K{name}.+157.+{random}.private.
For historical
reasons, the file
-K{name}.+157.+{random}.key
+K{name}.+157.+{random}.key
must also be present. When the
--y
+-y
option is used, a signature is generated from
-keyname:secret.
-keyname
+keyname:secret.
+keyname
is the name of the key,
and
-secret
+secret
is the base64 encoded shared secret.
Use of the
--y
+-y
option is discouraged because the shared secret is supplied as a command
line argument in clear text.
This may be visible in the output from
-ps(1)
-or in a history file maintained by the user's shell.
The -k may also be used to specify a SIG(0) key used
+ps(1
+)
+or in a history file maintained by the user's shell.
+
+
+The -k may also be used to specify a SIG(0) key used
to authenticate Dynamic DNS update requests. In this case, the key
-specified is not an HMAC-MD5 key.
By default
-nsupdate
+specified is not an HMAC-MD5 key.
+
+
+By default
+nsupdate
uses UDP to send update requests to the name server unless they are too
large to fit in a UDP request in which case TCP will be used.
The
--v
+-v
option makes
-nsupdate
+nsupdate
use a TCP connection.
-This may be preferable when a batch of update requests is made.
The -t option sets the maximum time a update request can
+This may be preferable when a batch of update requests is made.
+
+
The -t option sets the maximum time a update request can
take before it is aborted. The default is 300 seconds. Zero can be used
-to disable the timeout.
The -u option sets the UDP retry interval. The default is
+to disable the timeout.
+
+
The -u option sets the UDP retry interval. The default is
3 seconds. If zero the interval will be computed from the timeout interval
-and number of UDP retries.
The -r option sets the number of UDP retries. The default is
-3. If zero only one update request will be made.
INPUT FORMAT
nsupdate
+and number of UDP retries.
+
+
The -r option sets the number of UDP retries. The default is
+3. If zero only one update request will be made.
+
+
+
+
INPUT FORMAT
+
+nsupdate
reads input from
-filename
+filename
or standard input.
Each command is supplied on exactly one line of input.
Some commands are for administrative purposes.
@@ -342,471 +173,245 @@ contents of the zone.
These checks set conditions that some name or set of
resource records (RRset) either exists or is absent from the zone.
These conditions must be met if the entire update request is to succeed.
-Updates will be rejected if the tests for the prerequisite conditions fail.
Every update request consists of zero or more prerequisites
+Updates will be rejected if the tests for the prerequisite conditions fail.
+
+
+Every update request consists of zero or more prerequisites
and zero or more updates.
This allows a suitably authenticated update request to proceed if some
specified resource records are present or missing from the zone.
-A blank input line (or the send command) causes the
+A blank input line (or the send command) causes the
accumulated commands to be sent as one Dynamic DNS update request to the
-name server.
The command formats and their meaning are as follows:
-
server {servername} [port]
Sends all dynamic update requests to the name server
-servername.
+name server.
+
+
+The command formats and their meaning are as follows:
+
+
+
+
server {servername} [port]
+
+
+Sends all dynamic update requests to the name server
+servername.
When no server statement is provided,
-nsupdate
+nsupdate
will send updates to the master server of the correct zone.
The MNAME field of that zone's SOA record will identify the master
server for that zone.
-port
+port
is the port number on
-servername
+servername
where the dynamic update requests get sent.
If no port number is specified, the default DNS port number of 53 is
-used.
local {address} [port]
Sends all dynamic update requests using the local
-address.
+used.
+
+
+
local {address} [port]
+
+
+Sends all dynamic update requests using the local
+address.
When no local statement is provided,
-nsupdate
+nsupdate
will send updates using an address and port chosen by the system.
-port
+port
can additionally be used to make requests come from a specific port.
-If no port number is specified, the system will assign one.
zone {zonename}
Specifies that all updates are to be made to the zone
-zonename.
+If no port number is specified, the system will assign one.
+
+
+
zone {zonename}
+
+
+Specifies that all updates are to be made to the zone
+zonename.
If no
-zone
+zone
statement is provided,
-nsupdate
-will attempt determine the correct zone to update based on the rest of the input.
class {classname}
Specify the default class.
-If no class is specified the default class is
-IN.
key {name} {secret}
Specifies that all updates are to be TSIG signed using the
-keynamekeysecret pair.
-The key command
+nsupdate
+will attempt determine the correct zone to update based on the rest of the input.
+
+
+
class {classname}
+
+
+Specify the default class.
+If no class is specified the default class is
+IN.
+
+
+
key {name} {secret}
+
+
+Specifies that all updates are to be TSIG signed using the
+keynamekeysecret pair.
+The key command
overrides any key specified on the command line via
--y or -k.
prereq nxdomain {domain-name}
Requires that no resource record of any type exists with name
-domain-name.
prereq yxdomain {domain-name}
Requires that
-domain-name
-exists (has as at least one resource record, of any type).
prereq nxrrset {domain-name} [class] {type}
Requires that no resource record exists of the specified
-type,
-class
+-y or -k.
+
+
+
prereq nxdomain {domain-name}
+
+
+Requires that no resource record of any type exists with name
+domain-name.
+
+
+
prereq yxdomain {domain-name}
+
+
+Requires that
+domain-name
+exists (has as at least one resource record, of any type).
+
+
+
prereq nxrrset {domain-name} [class] {type}
+
+
+Requires that no resource record exists of the specified
+type,
+class
and
-domain-name.
+domain-name.
If
-class
-is omitted, IN (internet) is assumed.
prereq yxrrset {domain-name} [class] {type}
This requires that a resource record of the specified
-type,
-class
+class
+is omitted, IN (internet) is assumed.
+
+
+
prereq yxrrset {domain-name} [class] {type}
+
+
+This requires that a resource record of the specified
+type,
+class
and
-domain-name
+domain-name
must exist.
If
-class
-is omitted, IN (internet) is assumed.
+The
+data
from each set of prerequisites of this form
sharing a common
-type,
-class,
+type,
+class,
and
-domain-name
+domain-name
are combined to form a set of RRs. This set of RRs must
exactly match the set of RRs existing in the zone at the
given
-type,
-class,
+type,
+class,
and
-domain-name.
+domain-name.
The
-data
+data
are written in the standard text representation of the resource record's
-RDATA.
+Deletes any resource records named
+domain-name.
If
-type
+type
and
-data
+data
is provided, only matching resource records will be removed.
The internet class is assumed if
-class
+class
is not supplied. The
-ttl
-is ignored, and is only allowed for compatibility.
+Adds a new resource record with the specified
+ttl,
+class
and
-data.
show
Displays the current message, containing all of the prerequisites and
-updates specified since the last send.
send
Sends the current message. This is equivalent to entering a blank line.
answer
Displays the answer.
Lines beginning with a semicolon are comments and are ignored.
EXAMPLES
The examples below show how
-nsupdate
+data.
+
+
+
show
+
+
+Displays the current message, containing all of the prerequisites and
+updates specified since the last send.
+
+
+
send
+
+
+Sends the current message. This is equivalent to entering a blank line.
+
+
+
answer
+
+
+Displays the answer.
+
+
+
+
+
+Lines beginning with a semicolon are comments and are ignored.
+
+
+
+
EXAMPLES
+
+The examples below show how
+nsupdate
could be used to insert and delete resource records from the
-example.com
+example.com
zone.
Notice that the input in each example contains a trailing blank line so that
a group of commands are sent as one dynamic update request to the
master name server for
-example.com.
+example.com.
-
# nsupdate
-> update delete oldhost.example.com A
-> update add newhost.example.com 86400 A 172.16.1.1
-> send
Any A records for
-oldhost.example.com
+
+
+# nsupdate
+> update delete oldhost.example.com A
+> update add newhost.example.com 86400 A 172.16.1.1
+> send
+
+
+
+
+Any A records for
+oldhost.example.com
are deleted.
and an A record for
-newhost.example.com
+newhost.example.com
it IP address 172.16.1.1 is added.
The newly-added record has a 1 day TTL (86400 seconds)
-
+The prerequisite condition gets the name server to check that there
are no resource records of any type for
-nickname.example.com.
+nickname.example.com.
If there are, the update request fails.
If this name does not exist, a CNAME for it is added.
@@ -814,149 +419,50 @@ This ensures that when the CNAME is added, it cannot conflict with the
long-standing rule in RFC1034 that a name must not exist as any other
record type if it exists as a CNAME.
(The rule has been updated for DNSSEC in RFC2535 to allow CNAMEs to have
-RRSIG, DNSKEY and NSEC records.)
FILES
/etc/resolv.conf
used to identify default name server
K{name}.+157.+{random}.key
base-64 encoding of HMAC-MD5 key created by
-dnssec-keygen(8).
K{name}.+157.+{random}.private
base-64 encoding of HMAC-MD5 key created by
-dnssec-keygen(8).
+The TSIG key is redundantly stored in two separate files.
This is a consequence of nsupdate using the DST library
for its cryptographic operations, and may change in future
-releases.
+releases.
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/rndc/rndc-confgen.8 b/contrib/bind9/bin/rndc/rndc-confgen.8
index b12e90cc569..b29f0095cc0 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/rndc/rndc-confgen.8
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/rndc/rndc-confgen.8
@@ -1,140 +1,183 @@
-.\" Copyright (C) 2004 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
-.\" Copyright (C) 2001-2003 Internet Software Consortium.
-.\"
+.\" Copyright (C) 2004, 2005 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+.\" Copyright (C) 2001, 2003 Internet Software Consortium.
+.\"
.\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
.\" purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
.\" copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
-.\"
+.\"
.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ISC DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH
.\" REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
-.\" AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL ISC BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT,
+.\" AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL ISC BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT,
.\" INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
.\" LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE
.\" OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
.\" PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
.\"
-.\" $Id: rndc-confgen.8,v 1.3.2.5.2.3 2004/06/03 05:35:48 marka Exp $
+.\" $Id: rndc-confgen.8,v 1.3.2.5.2.7 2005/10/13 02:33:50 marka Exp $
.\"
-.TH "RNDC-CONFGEN" "8" "Aug 27, 2001" "BIND9" ""
-.SH NAME
-rndc-confgen \- rndc key generation tool
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-\fBrndc-confgen\fR [ \fB-a\fR ] [ \fB-b \fIkeysize\fB\fR ] [ \fB-c \fIkeyfile\fB\fR ] [ \fB-h\fR ] [ \fB-k \fIkeyname\fB\fR ] [ \fB-p \fIport\fB\fR ] [ \fB-r \fIrandomfile\fB\fR ] [ \fB-s \fIaddress\fB\fR ] [ \fB-t \fIchrootdir\fB\fR ] [ \fB-u \fIuser\fB\fR ]
+.hy 0
+.ad l
+.\" ** You probably do not want to edit this file directly **
+.\" It was generated using the DocBook XSL Stylesheets (version 1.69.1).
+.\" Instead of manually editing it, you probably should edit the DocBook XML
+.\" source for it and then use the DocBook XSL Stylesheets to regenerate it.
+.TH "RNDC\-CONFGEN" "8" "Aug 27, 2001" "BIND9" "BIND9"
+.\" disable hyphenation
+.nh
+.\" disable justification (adjust text to left margin only)
+.ad l
+.SH "NAME"
+rndc\-confgen \- rndc key generation tool
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.HP 13
+\fBrndc\-confgen\fR [\fB\-a\fR] [\fB\-b\ \fR\fB\fIkeysize\fR\fR] [\fB\-c\ \fR\fB\fIkeyfile\fR\fR] [\fB\-h\fR] [\fB\-k\ \fR\fB\fIkeyname\fR\fR] [\fB\-p\ \fR\fB\fIport\fR\fR] [\fB\-r\ \fR\fB\fIrandomfile\fR\fR] [\fB\-s\ \fR\fB\fIaddress\fR\fR] [\fB\-t\ \fR\fB\fIchrootdir\fR\fR] [\fB\-u\ \fR\fB\fIuser\fR\fR]
.SH "DESCRIPTION"
.PP
-\fBrndc-confgen\fR generates configuration files
-for \fBrndc\fR. It can be used as a
-convenient alternative to writing the
-\fIrndc.conf\fR file
-and the corresponding \fBcontrols\fR
-and \fBkey\fR
-statements in \fInamed.conf\fR by hand.
-Alternatively, it can be run with the \fB-a\fR
-option to set up a \fIrndc.key\fR file and
-avoid the need for a \fIrndc.conf\fR file
-and a \fBcontrols\fR statement altogether.
+\fBrndc\-confgen\fR
+generates configuration files for
+\fBrndc\fR. It can be used as a convenient alternative to writing the
+\fIrndc.conf\fR
+file and the corresponding
+\fBcontrols\fR
+and
+\fBkey\fR
+statements in
+\fInamed.conf\fR
+by hand. Alternatively, it can be run with the
+\fB\-a\fR
+option to set up a
+\fIrndc.key\fR
+file and avoid the need for a
+\fIrndc.conf\fR
+file and a
+\fBcontrols\fR
+statement altogether.
.SH "OPTIONS"
.TP
-\fB-a\fR
-Do automatic \fBrndc\fR configuration.
-This creates a file \fIrndc.key\fR
-in \fI/etc\fR (or whatever
-sysconfdir
-was specified as when BIND was built)
-that is read by both \fBrndc\fR
-and \fBnamed\fR on startup. The
-\fIrndc.key\fR file defines a default
-command channel and authentication key allowing
-\fBrndc\fR to communicate with
-\fBnamed\fR on the local host
-with no further configuration.
-
-Running \fBrndc-confgen -a\fR allows
-BIND 9 and \fBrndc\fR to be used as drop-in
-replacements for BIND 8 and \fBndc\fR,
-with no changes to the existing BIND 8
-\fInamed.conf\fR file.
-
-If a more elaborate configuration than that
-generated by \fBrndc-confgen -a\fR
-is required, for example if rndc is to be used remotely,
-you should run \fBrndc-confgen\fR without the
-\fB-a\fR option and set up a
-\fIrndc.conf\fR and
+\-a
+Do automatic
+\fBrndc\fR
+configuration. This creates a file
+\fIrndc.key\fR
+in
+\fI/etc\fR
+(or whatever
+\fIsysconfdir\fR
+was specified as when
+BIND
+was built) that is read by both
+\fBrndc\fR
+and
+\fBnamed\fR
+on startup. The
+\fIrndc.key\fR
+file defines a default command channel and authentication key allowing
+\fBrndc\fR
+to communicate with
+\fBnamed\fR
+on the local host with no further configuration.
+.sp
+Running
+\fBrndc\-confgen \-a\fR
+allows BIND 9 and
+\fBrndc\fR
+to be used as drop\-in replacements for BIND 8 and
+\fBndc\fR, with no changes to the existing BIND 8
+\fInamed.conf\fR
+file.
+.sp
+If a more elaborate configuration than that generated by
+\fBrndc\-confgen \-a\fR
+is required, for example if rndc is to be used remotely, you should run
+\fBrndc\-confgen\fR
+without the
+\fB\-a\fR
+option and set up a
+\fIrndc.conf\fR
+and
\fInamed.conf\fR
as directed.
.TP
-\fB-b \fIkeysize\fB\fR
-Specifies the size of the authentication key in bits.
-Must be between 1 and 512 bits; the default is 128.
+\-b \fIkeysize\fR
+Specifies the size of the authentication key in bits. Must be between 1 and 512 bits; the default is 128.
.TP
-\fB-c \fIkeyfile\fB\fR
-Used with the \fB-a\fR option to specify
-an alternate location for \fIrndc.key\fR.
+\-c \fIkeyfile\fR
+Used with the
+\fB\-a\fR
+option to specify an alternate location for
+\fIrndc.key\fR.
.TP
-\fB-h\fR
+\-h
Prints a short summary of the options and arguments to
-\fBrndc-confgen\fR.
+\fBrndc\-confgen\fR.
.TP
-\fB-k \fIkeyname\fB\fR
-Specifies the key name of the rndc authentication key.
-This must be a valid domain name.
-The default is rndc-key.
+\-k \fIkeyname\fR
+Specifies the key name of the rndc authentication key. This must be a valid domain name. The default is
+\fBrndc\-key\fR.
.TP
-\fB-p \fIport\fB\fR
-Specifies the command channel port where \fBnamed\fR
-listens for connections from \fBrndc\fR.
-The default is 953.
+\-p \fIport\fR
+Specifies the command channel port where
+\fBnamed\fR
+listens for connections from
+\fBrndc\fR. The default is 953.
.TP
-\fB-r \fIrandomfile\fB\fR
-Specifies a source of random data for generating the
-authorization. If the operating
-system does not provide a \fI/dev/random\fR
-or equivalent device, the default source of randomness
-is keyboard input. \fIrandomdev\fR specifies
-the name of a character device or file containing random
-data to be used instead of the default. The special value
-\fIkeyboard\fR indicates that keyboard
-input should be used.
+\-r \fIrandomfile\fR
+Specifies a source of random data for generating the authorization. If the operating system does not provide a
+\fI/dev/random\fR
+or equivalent device, the default source of randomness is keyboard input.
+\fIrandomdev\fR
+specifies the name of a character device or file containing random data to be used instead of the default. The special value
+\fIkeyboard\fR
+indicates that keyboard input should be used.
.TP
-\fB-s \fIaddress\fB\fR
-Specifies the IP address where \fBnamed\fR
+\-s \fIaddress\fR
+Specifies the IP address where
+\fBnamed\fR
listens for command channel connections from
-\fBrndc\fR. The default is the loopback
-address 127.0.0.1.
+\fBrndc\fR. The default is the loopback address 127.0.0.1.
.TP
-\fB-t \fIchrootdir\fB\fR
-Used with the \fB-a\fR option to specify
-a directory where \fBnamed\fR will run
-chrooted. An additional copy of the \fIrndc.key\fR
-will be written relative to this directory so that
-it will be found by the chrooted \fBnamed\fR.
+\-t \fIchrootdir\fR
+Used with the
+\fB\-a\fR
+option to specify a directory where
+\fBnamed\fR
+will run chrooted. An additional copy of the
+\fIrndc.key\fR
+will be written relative to this directory so that it will be found by the chrooted
+\fBnamed\fR.
.TP
-\fB-u \fIuser\fB\fR
-Used with the \fB-a\fR option to set the owner
-of the \fIrndc.key\fR file generated. If
-\fB-t\fR is also specified only the file in
-the chroot area has its owner changed.
+\-u \fIuser\fR
+Used with the
+\fB\-a\fR
+option to set the owner of the
+\fIrndc.key\fR
+file generated. If
+\fB\-t\fR
+is also specified only the file in the chroot area has its owner changed.
.SH "EXAMPLES"
.PP
-To allow \fBrndc\fR to be used with
-no manual configuration, run
+To allow
+\fBrndc\fR
+to be used with no manual configuration, run
.PP
-\fBrndc-confgen -a\fR
+\fBrndc\-confgen \-a\fR
.PP
-To print a sample \fIrndc.conf\fR file and
-corresponding \fBcontrols\fR and \fBkey\fR
-statements to be manually inserted into \fInamed.conf\fR,
-run
+To print a sample
+\fIrndc.conf\fR
+file and corresponding
+\fBcontrols\fR
+and
+\fBkey\fR
+statements to be manually inserted into
+\fInamed.conf\fR, run
.PP
-\fBrndc-confgen\fR
+\fBrndc\-confgen\fR
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.PP
\fBrndc\fR(8),
\fBrndc.conf\fR(5),
\fBnamed\fR(8),
-\fIBIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual\fR.
+BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual.
.SH "AUTHOR"
.PP
Internet Systems Consortium
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/rndc/rndc-confgen.docbook b/contrib/bind9/bin/rndc/rndc-confgen.docbook
index 272de459c19..e0c5a68cf6f 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/rndc/rndc-confgen.docbook
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/rndc/rndc-confgen.docbook
@@ -1,6 +1,8 @@
-
+]>
-
+
@@ -29,6 +31,19 @@
BIND9
+
+
+ 2004
+ 2005
+ Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+
+
+ 2001
+ 2003
+ Internet Software Consortium.
+
+
+
rndc-confgenrndc key generation tool
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/rndc/rndc-confgen.html b/contrib/bind9/bin/rndc/rndc-confgen.html
index 7292be2f99d..ca754008419 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/rndc/rndc-confgen.html
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/rndc/rndc-confgen.html
@@ -1,538 +1,185 @@
-
-
-
-
-rndc-confgen
+ rndc-confgen generates configuration files
+ for rndc. It can be used as a
convenient alternative to writing the
- rndc.conf file
- and the corresponding controls
- and key
- statements in named.conf by hand.
- Alternatively, it can be run with the -a
- option to set up a rndc.key file and
- avoid the need for a rndc.conf file
- and a controls statement altogether.
-
OPTIONS
-a
Do automatic rndc configuration.
- This creates a file rndc.key
- in /etc (or whatever
- sysconfdir
- was specified as when BIND was built)
- that is read by both rndc
- and named on startup. The
- rndc.key file defines a default
+ rndc.conf file
+ and the corresponding controls
+ and key
+ statements in named.conf by hand.
+ Alternatively, it can be run with the -a
+ option to set up a rndc.key file and
+ avoid the need for a rndc.conf file
+ and a controls statement altogether.
+
+
+
+
OPTIONS
+
+
-a
+
+
+ Do automatic rndc configuration.
+ This creates a file rndc.key
+ in /etc (or whatever
+ sysconfdir
+ was specified as when BIND was built)
+ that is read by both rndc
+ and named on startup. The
+ rndc.key file defines a default
command channel and authentication key allowing
- rndc to communicate with
- named on the local host
+ rndc to communicate with
+ named on the local host
with no further configuration.
-
Running rndc-confgen -a allows
- BIND 9 and rndc to be used as drop-in
- replacements for BIND 8 and ndc,
+
+
+ Running rndc-confgen -a allows
+ BIND 9 and rndc to be used as drop-in
+ replacements for BIND 8 and ndc,
with no changes to the existing BIND 8
- named.conf file.
-
If a more elaborate configuration than that
- generated by rndc-confgen -a
+ named.conf file.
+
+
+ If a more elaborate configuration than that
+ generated by rndc-confgen -a
is required, for example if rndc is to be used remotely,
- you should run rndc-confgen without the
- -a option and set up a
- rndc.conf and
- named.conf
+ you should run rndc-confgen without the
+ -a option and set up a
+ rndc.conf and
+ named.conf
as directed.
-
-b keysize
Specifies the size of the authentication key in bits.
+
+
+
-b keysize
+
+ Specifies the size of the authentication key in bits.
Must be between 1 and 512 bits; the default is 128.
-
-c keyfile
Used with the -a option to specify
- an alternate location for rndc.key.
-
-h
Prints a short summary of the options and arguments to
- rndc-confgen.
-
-k keyname
Specifies the key name of the rndc authentication key.
+
+
-c keyfile
+
+ Used with the -a option to specify
+ an alternate location for rndc.key.
+
+
-h
+
+ Prints a short summary of the options and arguments to
+ rndc-confgen.
+
+
-k keyname
+
+ Specifies the key name of the rndc authentication key.
This must be a valid domain name.
- The default is rndc-key.
-
-p port
Specifies the command channel port where named
- listens for connections from rndc.
+ The default is rndc-key.
+
+
-p port
+
+ Specifies the command channel port where named
+ listens for connections from rndc.
The default is 953.
-
-r randomfile
Specifies a source of random data for generating the
+
+
-r randomfile
+
+ Specifies a source of random data for generating the
authorization. If the operating
- system does not provide a /dev/random
+ system does not provide a /dev/random
or equivalent device, the default source of randomness
- is keyboard input. randomdev specifies
+ is keyboard input. randomdev specifies
the name of a character device or file containing random
data to be used instead of the default. The special value
- keyboard indicates that keyboard
+ keyboard indicates that keyboard
input should be used.
-
-s address
Specifies the IP address where named
+
+
-s address
+
+ Specifies the IP address where named
listens for command channel connections from
- rndc. The default is the loopback
+ rndc. The default is the loopback
address 127.0.0.1.
-
-t chrootdir
Used with the -a option to specify
- a directory where named will run
- chrooted. An additional copy of the rndc.key
+
+
-t chrootdir
+
+ Used with the -a option to specify
+ a directory where named will run
+ chrooted. An additional copy of the rndc.key
will be written relative to this directory so that
- it will be found by the chrooted named.
-
-u user
Used with the -a option to set the owner
- of the rndc.key file generated. If
- -t is also specified only the file in
+ it will be found by the chrooted named.
+
+
-u user
+
+ Used with the -a option to set the owner
+ of the rndc.key file generated. If
+ -t is also specified only the file in
the chroot area has its owner changed.
-
EXAMPLES
To allow rndc to be used with
+
+
+
+
+
EXAMPLES
+
+ To allow rndc to be used with
no manual configuration, run
-
rndc-confgen -a
-
To print a sample rndc.conf file and
- corresponding controls and key
- statements to be manually inserted into named.conf,
+
+
+ rndc-confgen -a
+
+
+ To print a sample rndc.conf file and
+ corresponding controls and key
+ statements to be manually inserted into named.conf,
run
-
+
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/rndc/rndc.8 b/contrib/bind9/bin/rndc/rndc.8
index 356883bc414..fba5529e405 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/rndc/rndc.8
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/rndc/rndc.8
@@ -1,118 +1,118 @@
-.\" Copyright (C) 2004 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
-.\" Copyright (C) 2000, 2001 Internet Software Consortium.
-.\"
+.\" Copyright (C) 2004, 2005 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+.\" Copyright (C) 2000, 2001 Internet Software Consortium.
+.\"
.\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
.\" purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
.\" copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
-.\"
+.\"
.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ISC DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH
.\" REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
-.\" AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL ISC BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT,
+.\" AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL ISC BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT,
.\" INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
.\" LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE
.\" OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
.\" PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
.\"
-.\" $Id: rndc.8,v 1.24.206.2 2004/06/03 05:35:49 marka Exp $
+.\" $Id: rndc.8,v 1.24.206.5 2005/10/13 02:33:49 marka Exp $
.\"
-.TH "RNDC" "8" "June 30, 2000" "BIND9" ""
-.SH NAME
+.hy 0
+.ad l
+.\" ** You probably do not want to edit this file directly **
+.\" It was generated using the DocBook XSL Stylesheets (version 1.69.1).
+.\" Instead of manually editing it, you probably should edit the DocBook XML
+.\" source for it and then use the DocBook XSL Stylesheets to regenerate it.
+.TH "RNDC" "8" "June 30, 2000" "BIND9" "BIND9"
+.\" disable hyphenation
+.nh
+.\" disable justification (adjust text to left margin only)
+.ad l
+.SH "NAME"
rndc \- name server control utility
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-\fBrndc\fR [ \fB-c \fIconfig-file\fB\fR ] [ \fB-k \fIkey-file\fB\fR ] [ \fB-s \fIserver\fB\fR ] [ \fB-p \fIport\fB\fR ] [ \fB-V\fR ] [ \fB-y \fIkey_id\fB\fR ] \fBcommand\fR
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.HP 5
+\fBrndc\fR [\fB\-c\ \fR\fB\fIconfig\-file\fR\fR] [\fB\-k\ \fR\fB\fIkey\-file\fR\fR] [\fB\-s\ \fR\fB\fIserver\fR\fR] [\fB\-p\ \fR\fB\fIport\fR\fR] [\fB\-V\fR] [\fB\-y\ \fR\fB\fIkey_id\fR\fR] {command}
.SH "DESCRIPTION"
.PP
-\fBrndc\fR controls the operation of a name
-server. It supersedes the \fBndc\fR utility
-that was provided in old BIND releases. If
-\fBrndc\fR is invoked with no command line
-options or arguments, it prints a short summary of the
-supported commands and the available options and their
-arguments.
+\fBrndc\fR
+controls the operation of a name server. It supersedes the
+\fBndc\fR
+utility that was provided in old BIND releases. If
+\fBrndc\fR
+is invoked with no command line options or arguments, it prints a short summary of the supported commands and the available options and their arguments.
.PP
-\fBrndc\fR communicates with the name server
-over a TCP connection, sending commands authenticated with
-digital signatures. In the current versions of
-\fBrndc\fR and \fBnamed\fR named
-the only supported authentication algorithm is HMAC-MD5,
-which uses a shared secret on each end of the connection.
-This provides TSIG-style authentication for the command
-request and the name server's response. All commands sent
-over the channel must be signed by a key_id known to the
-server.
+\fBrndc\fR
+communicates with the name server over a TCP connection, sending commands authenticated with digital signatures. In the current versions of
+\fBrndc\fR
+and
+\fBnamed\fR
+named the only supported authentication algorithm is HMAC\-MD5, which uses a shared secret on each end of the connection. This provides TSIG\-style authentication for the command request and the name server's response. All commands sent over the channel must be signed by a key_id known to the server.
.PP
-\fBrndc\fR reads a configuration file to
-determine how to contact the name server and decide what
-algorithm and key it should use.
+\fBrndc\fR
+reads a configuration file to determine how to contact the name server and decide what algorithm and key it should use.
.SH "OPTIONS"
.TP
-\fB-c \fIconfig-file\fB\fR
-Use \fIconfig-file\fR
+\-c \fIconfig\-file\fR
+Use
+\fIconfig\-file\fR
as the configuration file instead of the default,
\fI/etc/rndc.conf\fR.
.TP
-\fB-k \fIkey-file\fB\fR
-Use \fIkey-file\fR
+\-k \fIkey\-file\fR
+Use
+\fIkey\-file\fR
as the key file instead of the default,
\fI/etc/rndc.key\fR. The key in
-\fI/etc/rndc.key\fR will be used to authenticate
-commands sent to the server if the \fIconfig-file\fR
+\fI/etc/rndc.key\fR
+will be used to authenticate commands sent to the server if the
+\fIconfig\-file\fR
does not exist.
.TP
-\fB-s \fIserver\fB\fR
-\fIserver\fR is
-the name or address of the server which matches a
-server statement in the configuration file for
-\fBrndc\fR. If no server is supplied on the
-command line, the host named by the default-server clause
-in the option statement of the configuration file will be
-used.
+\-s \fIserver\fR
+\fIserver\fR
+is the name or address of the server which matches a server statement in the configuration file for
+\fBrndc\fR. If no server is supplied on the command line, the host named by the default\-server clause in the option statement of the configuration file will be used.
.TP
-\fB-p \fIport\fB\fR
+\-p \fIport\fR
Send commands to TCP port
-\fIport\fR instead
-of BIND 9's default control channel port, 953.
+\fIport\fR
+instead of BIND 9's default control channel port, 953.
.TP
-\fB-V\fR
+\-V
Enable verbose logging.
.TP
-\fB-y \fIkeyid\fB\fR
-Use the key \fIkeyid\fR
+\-y \fIkeyid\fR
+Use the key
+\fIkeyid\fR
from the configuration file.
-\fIkeyid\fR must be
-known by named with the same algorithm and secret string
-in order for control message validation to succeed.
-If no \fIkeyid\fR
-is specified, \fBrndc\fR will first look
-for a key clause in the server statement of the server
-being used, or if no server statement is present for that
-host, then the default-key clause of the options statement.
-Note that the configuration file contains shared secrets
-which are used to send authenticated control commands
-to name servers. It should therefore not have general read
-or write access.
-.PP
-For the complete set of commands supported by \fBrndc\fR,
-see the BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual or run
-\fBrndc\fR without arguments to see its help message.
+\fIkeyid\fR
+must be known by named with the same algorithm and secret string in order for control message validation to succeed. If no
+\fIkeyid\fR
+is specified,
+\fBrndc\fR
+will first look for a key clause in the server statement of the server being used, or if no server statement is present for that host, then the default\-key clause of the options statement. Note that the configuration file contains shared secrets which are used to send authenticated control commands to name servers. It should therefore not have general read or write access.
.PP
+For the complete set of commands supported by
+\fBrndc\fR, see the BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual or run
+\fBrndc\fR
+without arguments to see its help message.
.SH "LIMITATIONS"
.PP
-\fBrndc\fR does not yet support all the commands of
-the BIND 8 \fBndc\fR utility.
+\fBrndc\fR
+does not yet support all the commands of the BIND 8
+\fBndc\fR
+utility.
.PP
There is currently no way to provide the shared secret for a
-\fBkey_id\fR without using the configuration file.
+\fBkey_id\fR
+without using the configuration file.
.PP
Several error messages could be clearer.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.PP
\fBrndc.conf\fR(5),
\fBnamed\fR(8),
-\fBnamed.conf\fR(5)
-\fBndc\fR(8),
-\fIBIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual\fR.
+\fBnamed.conf\fR(5)\fBndc\fR(8),
+BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual.
.SH "AUTHOR"
.PP
Internet Systems Consortium
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/rndc/rndc.c b/contrib/bind9/bin/rndc/rndc.c
index c74828ce7c8..63e8f23b9ff 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/rndc/rndc.c
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/rndc/rndc.c
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
/*
- * Copyright (C) 2004 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+ * Copyright (C) 2004, 2005 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
* Copyright (C) 2000-2003 Internet Software Consortium.
*
* Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
* PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
*/
-/* $Id: rndc.c,v 1.77.2.5.2.13 2004/09/03 03:43:32 marka Exp $ */
+/* $Id: rndc.c,v 1.77.2.5.2.15 2005/03/17 03:58:27 marka Exp $ */
/*
* Principal Author: DCL
@@ -104,7 +104,8 @@ command is one of the following:\n\
reconfig Reload configuration file and new zones only.\n\
stats Write server statistics to the statistics file.\n\
querylog Toggle query logging.\n\
- dumpdb Dump cache(s) to the dump file (named_dump.db).\n\
+ dumpdb [-all|-cache|-zones] [view ...]\n\
+ Dump cache(s) to the dump file (named_dump.db).\n\
stop Save pending updates to master files and stop the server.\n\
stop -p Save pending updates to master files and stop the server\n\
reporting process id.\n\
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/rndc/rndc.conf.5 b/contrib/bind9/bin/rndc/rndc.conf.5
index 5b61cfb00c1..1c21e363d61 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/rndc/rndc.conf.5
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/rndc/rndc.conf.5
@@ -1,35 +1,42 @@
-.\" Copyright (C) 2004 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
-.\" Copyright (C) 2000, 2001 Internet Software Consortium.
-.\"
+.\" Copyright (C) 2004, 2005 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+.\" Copyright (C) 2000, 2001 Internet Software Consortium.
+.\"
.\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
.\" purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
.\" copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
-.\"
+.\"
.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ISC DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH
.\" REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
-.\" AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL ISC BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT,
+.\" AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL ISC BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT,
.\" INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
.\" LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE
.\" OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
.\" PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
.\"
-.\" $Id: rndc.conf.5,v 1.21.206.2 2004/06/03 05:35:50 marka Exp $
+.\" $Id: rndc.conf.5,v 1.21.206.5 2005/10/13 02:33:50 marka Exp $
.\"
-.TH "RNDC.CONF" "5" "June 30, 2000" "BIND9" ""
-.SH NAME
+.hy 0
+.ad l
+.\" ** You probably do not want to edit this file directly **
+.\" It was generated using the DocBook XSL Stylesheets (version 1.69.1).
+.\" Instead of manually editing it, you probably should edit the DocBook XML
+.\" source for it and then use the DocBook XSL Stylesheets to regenerate it.
+.TH "\\FIRNDC.CONF\\FR" "5" "June 30, 2000" "BIND9" "BIND9"
+.\" disable hyphenation
+.nh
+.\" disable justification (adjust text to left margin only)
+.ad l
+.SH "NAME"
rndc.conf \- rndc configuration file
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+.HP 10
\fBrndc.conf\fR
.SH "DESCRIPTION"
.PP
-\fIrndc.conf\fR is the configuration file
-for \fBrndc\fR, the BIND 9 name server control
-utility. This file has a similar structure and syntax to
-\fInamed.conf\fR. Statements are enclosed
-in braces and terminated with a semi-colon. Clauses in
-the statements are also semi-colon terminated. The usual
-comment styles are supported:
+\fIrndc.conf\fR
+is the configuration file for
+\fBrndc\fR, the BIND 9 name server control utility. This file has a similar structure and syntax to
+\fInamed.conf\fR. Statements are enclosed in braces and terminated with a semi\-colon. Clauses in the statements are also semi\-colon terminated. The usual comment styles are supported:
.PP
C style: /* */
.PP
@@ -37,106 +44,111 @@ C++ style: // to end of line
.PP
Unix style: # to end of line
.PP
-\fIrndc.conf\fR is much simpler than
-\fInamed.conf\fR. The file uses three
-statements: an options statement, a server statement
-and a key statement.
+\fIrndc.conf\fR
+is much simpler than
+\fInamed.conf\fR. The file uses three statements: an options statement, a server statement and a key statement.
.PP
-The \fBoptions\fR statement contains three clauses.
-The \fBdefault-server\fR clause is followed by the
-name or address of a name server. This host will be used when
-no name server is given as an argument to
-\fBrndc\fR. The \fBdefault-key\fR
-clause is followed by the name of a key which is identified by
-a \fBkey\fR statement. If no
-\fBkeyid\fR is provided on the rndc command line,
-and no \fBkey\fR clause is found in a matching
-\fBserver\fR statement, this default key will be
-used to authenticate the server's commands and responses. The
-\fBdefault-port\fR clause is followed by the port
-to connect to on the remote name server. If no
-\fBport\fR option is provided on the rndc command
-line, and no \fBport\fR clause is found in a
-matching \fBserver\fR statement, this default port
-will be used to connect.
+The
+\fBoptions\fR
+statement contains three clauses. The
+\fBdefault\-server\fR
+clause is followed by the name or address of a name server. This host will be used when no name server is given as an argument to
+\fBrndc\fR. The
+\fBdefault\-key\fR
+clause is followed by the name of a key which is identified by a
+\fBkey\fR
+statement. If no
+\fBkeyid\fR
+is provided on the rndc command line, and no
+\fBkey\fR
+clause is found in a matching
+\fBserver\fR
+statement, this default key will be used to authenticate the server's commands and responses. The
+\fBdefault\-port\fR
+clause is followed by the port to connect to on the remote name server. If no
+\fBport\fR
+option is provided on the rndc command line, and no
+\fBport\fR
+clause is found in a matching
+\fBserver\fR
+statement, this default port will be used to connect.
.PP
-After the \fBserver\fR keyword, the server statement
-includes a string which is the hostname or address for a name
-server. The statement has two possible clauses:
-\fBkey\fR and \fBport\fR. The key name must
-match the name of a key statement in the file. The port number
-specifies the port to connect to.
+After the
+\fBserver\fR
+keyword, the server statement includes a string which is the hostname or address for a name server. The statement has two possible clauses:
+\fBkey\fR
+and
+\fBport\fR. The key name must match the name of a key statement in the file. The port number specifies the port to connect to.
.PP
-The \fBkey\fR statement begins with an identifying
-string, the name of the key. The statement has two clauses.
-\fBalgorithm\fR identifies the encryption algorithm
-for \fBrndc\fR to use; currently only HMAC-MD5 is
-supported. This is followed by a secret clause which contains
-the base-64 encoding of the algorithm's encryption key. The
-base-64 string is enclosed in double quotes.
+The
+\fBkey\fR
+statement begins with an identifying string, the name of the key. The statement has two clauses.
+\fBalgorithm\fR
+identifies the encryption algorithm for
+\fBrndc\fR
+to use; currently only HMAC\-MD5 is supported. This is followed by a secret clause which contains the base\-64 encoding of the algorithm's encryption key. The base\-64 string is enclosed in double quotes.
.PP
-There are two common ways to generate the base-64 string for the
-secret. The BIND 9 program \fBrndc-confgen\fR can
-be used to generate a random key, or the
-\fBmmencode\fR program, also known as
-\fBmimencode\fR, can be used to generate a base-64
-string from known input. \fBmmencode\fR does not
-ship with BIND 9 but is available on many systems. See the
-EXAMPLE section for sample command lines for each.
+There are two common ways to generate the base\-64 string for the secret. The BIND 9 program
+\fBrndc\-confgen\fR
+can be used to generate a random key, or the
+\fBmmencode\fR
+program, also known as
+\fBmimencode\fR, can be used to generate a base\-64 string from known input.
+\fBmmencode\fR
+does not ship with BIND 9 but is available on many systems. See the EXAMPLE section for sample command lines for each.
.SH "EXAMPLE"
.sp
.nf
options {
- default-server localhost;
- default-key samplekey;
+ default\-server localhost;
+ default\-key samplekey;
};
-
server localhost {
key samplekey;
};
-
key samplekey {
- algorithm hmac-md5;
+ algorithm hmac\-md5;
secret "c3Ryb25nIGVub3VnaCBmb3IgYSBtYW4gYnV0IG1hZGUgZm9yIGEgd29tYW4K";
};
-
-.sp
.fi
.PP
-In the above example, \fBrndc\fR will by default use
-the server at localhost (127.0.0.1) and the key called samplekey.
-Commands to the localhost server will use the samplekey key, which
-must also be defined in the server's configuration file with the
-same name and secret. The key statement indicates that samplekey
-uses the HMAC-MD5 algorithm and its secret clause contains the
-base-64 encoding of the HMAC-MD5 secret enclosed in double quotes.
+In the above example,
+\fBrndc\fR
+will by default use the server at localhost (127.0.0.1) and the key called samplekey. Commands to the localhost server will use the samplekey key, which must also be defined in the server's configuration file with the same name and secret. The key statement indicates that samplekey uses the HMAC\-MD5 algorithm and its secret clause contains the base\-64 encoding of the HMAC\-MD5 secret enclosed in double quotes.
.PP
-To generate a random secret with \fBrndc-confgen\fR:
+To generate a random secret with
+\fBrndc\-confgen\fR:
.PP
-\fBrndc-confgen\fR
+\fBrndc\-confgen\fR
.PP
-A complete \fIrndc.conf\fR file, including the
-randomly generated key, will be written to the standard
-output. Commented out \fBkey\fR and
-\fBcontrols\fR statements for
-\fInamed.conf\fR are also printed.
+A complete
+\fIrndc.conf\fR
+file, including the randomly generated key, will be written to the standard output. Commented out
+\fBkey\fR
+and
+\fBcontrols\fR
+statements for
+\fInamed.conf\fR
+are also printed.
.PP
-To generate a base-64 secret with \fBmmencode\fR:
+To generate a base\-64 secret with
+\fBmmencode\fR:
.PP
\fBecho "known plaintext for a secret" | mmencode\fR
.SH "NAME SERVER CONFIGURATION"
.PP
-The name server must be configured to accept rndc connections and
-to recognize the key specified in the \fIrndc.conf\fR
-file, using the controls statement in \fInamed.conf\fR.
-See the sections on the \fBcontrols\fR statement in the
-BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual for details.
+The name server must be configured to accept rndc connections and to recognize the key specified in the
+\fIrndc.conf\fR
+file, using the controls statement in
+\fInamed.conf\fR. See the sections on the
+\fBcontrols\fR
+statement in the BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual for details.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.PP
\fBrndc\fR(8),
-\fBrndc-confgen\fR(8),
+\fBrndc\-confgen\fR(8),
\fBmmencode\fR(1),
-\fIBIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual\fR.
+BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual.
.SH "AUTHOR"
.PP
Internet Systems Consortium
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/rndc/rndc.conf.docbook b/contrib/bind9/bin/rndc/rndc.conf.docbook
index 95f158b7602..16b9caf43cb 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/rndc/rndc.conf.docbook
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/rndc/rndc.conf.docbook
@@ -1,7 +1,9 @@
-
+]>
-
+
@@ -29,6 +31,19 @@
BIND9
+
+
+ 2004
+ 2005
+ Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+
+
+ 2000
+ 2001
+ Internet Software Consortium.
+
+
+
rndc.confrndc configuration file
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/bin/rndc/rndc.conf.html b/contrib/bind9/bin/rndc/rndc.conf.html
index ea087c8be60..05db0eca644 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/bin/rndc/rndc.conf.html
+++ b/contrib/bind9/bin/rndc/rndc.conf.html
@@ -1,238 +1,113 @@
-
-
-
-
-rndc.conf
rndc.conf
Name
rndc.conf -- rndc configuration file
Synopsis
rndc.conf
DESCRIPTION
rndc.conf is the configuration file
- for rndc, the BIND 9 name server control
+
+
+
+
+rndc.conf
+
+
+
+
+
+
Name
+
rndc.conf — rndc configuration file
+
+
+
Synopsis
+
rndc.conf
+
+
+
DESCRIPTION
+
+ rndc.conf is the configuration file
+ for rndc, the BIND 9 name server control
utility. This file has a similar structure and syntax to
- named.conf. Statements are enclosed
+ named.conf. Statements are enclosed
in braces and terminated with a semi-colon. Clauses in
the statements are also semi-colon terminated. The usual
comment styles are supported:
-
C style: /* */
-
C++ style: // to end of line
-
Unix style: # to end of line
-
rndc.conf is much simpler than
- named.conf. The file uses three
+
+
+ C style: /* */
+
+
+ C++ style: // to end of line
+
+
+ Unix style: # to end of line
+
+
+ rndc.conf is much simpler than
+ named.conf. The file uses three
statements: an options statement, a server statement
and a key statement.
-
The options statement contains three clauses.
- The default-server clause is followed by the
+
+
+ The options statement contains three clauses.
+ The default-server clause is followed by the
name or address of a name server. This host will be used when
no name server is given as an argument to
- rndc. The default-key
+ rndc. The default-key
clause is followed by the name of a key which is identified by
- a key statement. If no
- keyid is provided on the rndc command line,
- and no key clause is found in a matching
- server statement, this default key will be
+ a key statement. If no
+ keyid is provided on the rndc command line,
+ and no key clause is found in a matching
+ server statement, this default key will be
used to authenticate the server's commands and responses. The
- default-port clause is followed by the port
+ default-port clause is followed by the port
to connect to on the remote name server. If no
- port option is provided on the rndc command
- line, and no port clause is found in a
- matching server statement, this default port
+ port option is provided on the rndc command
+ line, and no port clause is found in a
+ matching server statement, this default port
will be used to connect.
-
After the server keyword, the server statement
+
+
+ After the server keyword, the server statement
includes a string which is the hostname or address for a name
server. The statement has two possible clauses:
- key and port. The key name must
+ key and port. The key name must
match the name of a key statement in the file. The port number
specifies the port to connect to.
-
The key statement begins with an identifying
+
+
+ The key statement begins with an identifying
string, the name of the key. The statement has two clauses.
- algorithm identifies the encryption algorithm
- for rndc to use; currently only HMAC-MD5 is
+ algorithm identifies the encryption algorithm
+ for rndc to use; currently only HMAC-MD5 is
supported. This is followed by a secret clause which contains
the base-64 encoding of the algorithm's encryption key. The
base-64 string is enclosed in double quotes.
-
There are two common ways to generate the base-64 string for the
- secret. The BIND 9 program rndc-confgen can
+
+
+ There are two common ways to generate the base-64 string for the
+ secret. The BIND 9 program rndc-confgen can
be used to generate a random key, or the
- mmencode program, also known as
- mimencode, can be used to generate a base-64
- string from known input. mmencode does not
+ mmencode program, also known as
+ mimencode, can be used to generate a base-64
+ string from known input. mmencode does not
ship with BIND 9 but is available on many systems. See the
EXAMPLE section for sample command lines for each.
-
In the above example, rndc will by default use
+
+
+ In the above example, rndc will by default use
the server at localhost (127.0.0.1) and the key called samplekey.
Commands to the localhost server will use the samplekey key, which
must also be defined in the server's configuration file with the
same name and secret. The key statement indicates that samplekey
uses the HMAC-MD5 algorithm and its secret clause contains the
base-64 encoding of the HMAC-MD5 secret enclosed in double quotes.
-
To generate a random secret with rndc-confgen:
-
rndc-confgen
-
A complete rndc.conf file, including the
+
+
+ To generate a random secret with rndc-confgen:
+
+
+ rndc-confgen
+
+
+ A complete rndc.conf file, including the
randomly generated key, will be written to the standard
- output. Commented out key and
- controls statements for
- named.conf are also printed.
-
To generate a base-64 secret with mmencode:
-
echo "known plaintext for a secret" | mmencode
-
NAME SERVER CONFIGURATION
The name server must be configured to accept rndc connections and
- to recognize the key specified in the rndc.conf
- file, using the controls statement in named.conf.
- See the sections on the controls statement in the
+ output. Commented out key and
+ controls statements for
+ named.conf are also printed.
+
+
+ To generate a base-64 secret with mmencode:
+
+
+ echo "known plaintext for a secret" | mmencode
+
+
+
+
NAME SERVER CONFIGURATION
+
+ The name server must be configured to accept rndc connections and
+ to recognize the key specified in the rndc.conf
+ file, using the controls statement in named.conf.
+ See the sections on the controls statement in the
BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual for details.
-
+ rndc controls the operation of a name
+ server. It supersedes the ndc utility
that was provided in old BIND releases. If
- rndc is invoked with no command line
+ rndc is invoked with no command line
options or arguments, it prints a short summary of the
supported commands and the available options and their
arguments.
-
rndc communicates with the name server
+
+
+ rndc communicates with the name server
over a TCP connection, sending commands authenticated with
digital signatures. In the current versions of
- rndc and named named
+ rndc and named named
the only supported authentication algorithm is HMAC-MD5,
which uses a shared secret on each end of the connection.
This provides TSIG-style authentication for the command
request and the name server's response. All commands sent
over the channel must be signed by a key_id known to the
server.
-
rndc reads a configuration file to
+
+
+ rndc reads a configuration file to
determine how to contact the name server and decide what
algorithm and key it should use.
-
OPTIONS
-c config-file
Use config-file
+
+
+
+
OPTIONS
+
+
-c config-file
+
+ Use config-file
as the configuration file instead of the default,
- /etc/rndc.conf.
-
-k key-file
Use key-file
+ /etc/rndc.conf.
+
+
-k key-file
+
+ Use key-file
as the key file instead of the default,
- /etc/rndc.key. The key in
- /etc/rndc.key will be used to authenticate
- commands sent to the server if the config-file
+ /etc/rndc.key. The key in
+ /etc/rndc.key will be used to authenticate
+ commands sent to the server if the config-file
does not exist.
-
-s server
server is
+
+
-s server
+
+ server is
the name or address of the server which matches a
server statement in the configuration file for
- rndc. If no server is supplied on the
+ rndc. If no server is supplied on the
command line, the host named by the default-server clause
in the option statement of the configuration file will be
used.
-
-p port
Send commands to TCP port
- port instead
+
+
-p port
+
+ Send commands to TCP port
+ port instead
of BIND 9's default control channel port, 953.
-
-V
Enable verbose logging.
-
-y keyid
Use the key keyid
+
+
-V
+
+ Enable verbose logging.
+
+
-y keyid
+
+ Use the key keyid
from the configuration file.
- keyid must be
+ keyid must be
known by named with the same algorithm and secret string
in order for control message validation to succeed.
- If no keyid
- is specified, rndc will first look
+ If no keyid
+ is specified, rndc will first look
for a key clause in the server statement of the server
being used, or if no server statement is present for that
host, then the default-key clause of the options statement.
@@ -286,103 +114,43 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
which are used to send authenticated control commands
to name servers. It should therefore not have general read
or write access.
-
For the complete set of commands supported by rndc,
+
+
+
+ For the complete set of commands supported by rndc,
see the BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual or run
- rndc without arguments to see its help message.
-
LIMITATIONS
rndc does not yet support all the commands of
- the BIND 8 ndc utility.
-
There is currently no way to provide the shared secret for a
- key_id without using the configuration file.
-
+
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/config.threads.in b/contrib/bind9/config.threads.in
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f2816c447fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/contrib/bind9/config.threads.in
@@ -0,0 +1,152 @@
+#
+# Begin pthreads checking.
+#
+# First, decide whether to use multithreading or not.
+#
+# Enable multithreading by default on systems where it is known
+# to work well, and where debugging of multithreaded programs
+# is supported.
+#
+
+AC_MSG_CHECKING(whether to build with thread support)
+
+case $host in
+*-dec-osf*)
+ use_threads=true ;;
+[*-solaris2.[0-6]])
+ # Thread signals are broken on Solaris 2.6; they are sometimes
+ # delivered to the wrong thread.
+ use_threads=false ;;
+*-solaris*)
+ use_threads=true ;;
+*-ibm-aix*)
+ use_threads=true ;;
+*-hp-hpux10*)
+ use_threads=false ;;
+*-hp-hpux11*)
+ use_threads=true ;;
+*-sgi-irix*)
+ use_threads=true ;;
+*-sco-sysv*uw*|*-*-sysv*UnixWare*)
+ # UnixWare
+ use_threads=false ;;
+*-*-sysv*OpenUNIX*)
+ # UnixWare
+ use_threads=true ;;
+*-netbsd*)
+ if test -r /usr/lib/libpthread.so ; then
+ use_threads=true
+ else
+ # Socket I/O optimizations introduced in 9.2 expose a
+ # bug in unproven-pthreads; see PR #12650
+ use_threads=false
+ fi
+ ;;
+*-openbsd*)
+ # OpenBSD users have reported that named dumps core on
+ # startup when built with threads.
+ use_threads=false ;;
+*-freebsd*)
+ use_threads=false ;;
+*-bsdi[234]*)
+ # Thread signals do not work reliably on some versions of BSD/OS.
+ use_threads=false ;;
+*-bsdi5*)
+ use_threads=true ;;
+*-linux*)
+ # Threads are disabled on Linux by default because most
+ # Linux kernels produce unusable core dumps from multithreaded
+ # programs, and because of limitations in setuid().
+ use_threads=false ;;
+*)
+ use_threads=false ;;
+esac
+
+AC_ARG_ENABLE(threads,
+ [ --enable-threads enable multithreading])
+case "$enable_threads" in
+ yes)
+ use_threads=true
+ ;;
+ no)
+ use_threads=false
+ ;;
+ '')
+ # Use system-dependent default
+ ;;
+ *)
+ AC_MSG_ERROR([--enable-threads takes yes or no])
+ ;;
+esac
+
+if $use_threads
+then
+ AC_MSG_RESULT(yes)
+else
+ AC_MSG_RESULT(no)
+fi
+
+if $use_threads
+then
+ #
+ # Search for / configure pthreads in a system-dependent fashion.
+ #
+ case "$host" in
+ *-netbsd*)
+ # NetBSD has multiple pthreads implementations. The
+ # recommended one to use is "unproven-pthreads". The
+ # older "mit-pthreads" may also work on some NetBSD
+ # versions. The PTL2 thread library does not
+ # currently work with bind9, but can be chosen with
+ # the --with-ptl2 option for those who wish to
+ # experiment with it.
+ CC="gcc"
+ AC_MSG_CHECKING(which NetBSD thread library to use)
+
+ AC_ARG_WITH(ptl2,
+[ --with-ptl2 on NetBSD, use the ptl2 thread library (experimental)],
+ use_ptl2="$withval", use_ptl2="no")
+
+ : ${LOCALBASE:=/usr/pkg}
+
+ if test "X$use_ptl2" = "Xyes"
+ then
+ AC_MSG_RESULT(PTL2)
+ AC_MSG_WARN(
+[linking with PTL2 is highly experimental and not expected to work])
+ CC=ptlgcc
+ else
+ if test -r /usr/lib/libpthread.so
+ then
+ AC_MSG_RESULT(native)
+ LIBS="-lpthread $LIBS"
+ else
+ if test ! -d $LOCALBASE/pthreads
+ then
+ AC_MSG_RESULT(none)
+ AC_MSG_ERROR("could not find thread libraries")
+ fi
+
+ if $use_threads
+ then
+ AC_MSG_RESULT(mit-pthreads/unproven-pthreads)
+ pkg="$LOCALBASE/pthreads"
+ lib1="-L$pkg/lib -Wl,-R$pkg/lib"
+ lib2="-lpthread -lm -lgcc -lpthread"
+ LIBS="$lib1 $lib2 $LIBS"
+ CPPFLAGS="$CPPFLAGS -I$pkg/include"
+ STD_CINCLUDES="$STD_CINCLUDES -I$pkg/include"
+ fi
+ fi
+ fi
+ ;;
+ *)
+ AC_CHECK_LIB(pthread, pthread_create,,
+ AC_CHECK_LIB(pthread, __pthread_create,,
+ AC_CHECK_LIB(pthread, __pthread_create_system,,
+ AC_CHECK_LIB(c_r, pthread_create,,
+ AC_CHECK_LIB(c, pthread_create,,
+ AC_MSG_ERROR("could not find thread libraries"))))))
+ ;;
+ esac
+fi
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/configure.in b/contrib/bind9/configure.in
index 9aff151668c..b14b489bb2b 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/configure.in
+++ b/contrib/bind9/configure.in
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-# Copyright (C) 2004 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+# Copyright (C) 2004, 2005 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
# Copyright (C) 1998-2003 Internet Software Consortium.
#
# Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ AC_DIVERT_PUSH(1)dnl
esyscmd([sed "s/^/# /" COPYRIGHT])dnl
AC_DIVERT_POP()dnl
-AC_REVISION($Revision: 1.294.2.23.2.39 $)
+AC_REVISION($Revision: 1.294.2.23.2.51 $)
AC_INIT(lib/dns/name.c)
AC_PREREQ(2.13)
@@ -261,6 +261,7 @@ AC_TRY_COMPILE(, [
AC_TYPE_SIZE_T
AC_CHECK_TYPE(ssize_t, int)
+AC_CHECK_TYPE(uintptr_t,unsigned long)
AC_CHECK_TYPE(socklen_t,
[AC_DEFINE(ISC_SOCKADDR_LEN_T, socklen_t)],
[
@@ -608,158 +609,7 @@ esac
#
AC_CHECK_FUNC(arc4random, AC_DEFINE(HAVE_ARC4RANDOM))
-#
-# Begin pthreads checking.
-#
-# First, decide whether to use multithreading or not.
-#
-# Enable multithreading by default on systems where it is known
-# to work well, and where debugging of multithreaded programs
-# is supported.
-#
-
-AC_MSG_CHECKING(whether to build with thread support)
-
-case $host in
-*-dec-osf*)
- use_threads=true ;;
-[*-solaris2.[0-6]])
- # Thread signals are broken on Solaris 2.6; they are sometimes
- # delivered to the wrong thread.
- use_threads=false ;;
-*-solaris*)
- use_threads=true ;;
-*-ibm-aix*)
- use_threads=true ;;
-*-hp-hpux10*)
- use_threads=false ;;
-*-hp-hpux11*)
- use_threads=true ;;
-*-sgi-irix*)
- use_threads=true ;;
-*-sco-sysv*uw*|*-*-sysv*UnixWare*)
- # UnixWare
- use_threads=false ;;
-*-*-sysv*OpenUNIX*)
- # UnixWare
- use_threads=true ;;
-*-netbsd*)
- if test -r /usr/lib/libpthread.so ; then
- use_threads=true
- else
- # Socket I/O optimizations introduced in 9.2 expose a
- # bug in unproven-pthreads; see PR #12650
- use_threads=false
- fi
- ;;
-*-openbsd*)
- # OpenBSD users have reported that named dumps core on
- # startup when built with threads.
- use_threads=false ;;
-*-freebsd*)
- use_threads=false ;;
-*-bsdi[234]*)
- # Thread signals do not work reliably on some versions of BSD/OS.
- use_threads=false ;;
-*-bsdi5*)
- use_threads=true ;;
-*-linux*)
- # Threads are disabled on Linux by default because most
- # Linux kernels produce unusable core dumps from multithreaded
- # programs, and because of limitations in setuid().
- use_threads=false ;;
-*)
- use_threads=false ;;
-esac
-
-AC_ARG_ENABLE(threads,
- [ --enable-threads enable multithreading])
-case "$enable_threads" in
- yes)
- use_threads=true
- ;;
- no)
- use_threads=false
- ;;
- '')
- # Use system-dependent default
- ;;
- *)
- AC_MSG_ERROR([--enable-threads takes yes or no])
- ;;
-esac
-
-if $use_threads
-then
- AC_MSG_RESULT(yes)
-else
- AC_MSG_RESULT(no)
-fi
-
-if $use_threads
-then
- #
- # Search for / configure pthreads in a system-dependent fashion.
- #
- case "$host" in
- *-netbsd*)
- # NetBSD has multiple pthreads implementations. The
- # recommended one to use is "unproven-pthreads". The
- # older "mit-pthreads" may also work on some NetBSD
- # versions. The PTL2 thread library does not
- # currently work with bind9, but can be chosen with
- # the --with-ptl2 option for those who wish to
- # experiment with it.
- CC="gcc"
- AC_MSG_CHECKING(which NetBSD thread library to use)
-
- AC_ARG_WITH(ptl2,
-[ --with-ptl2 on NetBSD, use the ptl2 thread library (experimental)],
- use_ptl2="$withval", use_ptl2="no")
-
- : ${LOCALBASE:=/usr/pkg}
-
- if test "X$use_ptl2" = "Xyes"
- then
- AC_MSG_RESULT(PTL2)
- AC_MSG_WARN(
-[linking with PTL2 is highly experimental and not expected to work])
- CC=ptlgcc
- else
- if test -r /usr/lib/libpthread.so
- then
- AC_MSG_RESULT(native)
- LIBS="-lpthread $LIBS"
- else
- if test ! -d $LOCALBASE/pthreads
- then
- AC_MSG_RESULT(none)
- AC_MSG_ERROR("could not find thread libraries")
- fi
-
- if $use_threads
- then
- AC_MSG_RESULT(mit-pthreads/unproven-pthreads)
- pkg="$LOCALBASE/pthreads"
- lib1="-L$pkg/lib -Wl,-R$pkg/lib"
- lib2="-lpthread -lm -lgcc -lpthread"
- LIBS="$lib1 $lib2 $LIBS"
- CPPFLAGS="$CPPFLAGS -I$pkg/include"
- STD_CINCLUDES="$STD_CINCLUDES -I$pkg/include"
- fi
- fi
- fi
- ;;
- *)
- AC_CHECK_LIB(pthread, pthread_create,,
- AC_CHECK_LIB(pthread, __pthread_create,,
- AC_CHECK_LIB(pthread, __pthread_create_system,,
- AC_CHECK_LIB(c_r, pthread_create,,
- AC_CHECK_LIB(c, pthread_create,,
- AC_MSG_ERROR("could not find thread libraries"))))))
- ;;
- esac
-fi
+sinclude(config.threads.in)dnl
if $use_threads
then
@@ -790,7 +640,11 @@ then
*-freebsd*)
AC_CHECK_LIB(c_r, sigwait, AC_DEFINE(HAVE_SIGWAIT),)
case $host in
- *-freebsd5.3|*-freebsd5.3.*)
+ *-freebsd5.[[012]]|*-freebsd5.[[012]].*);;
+ *-freebsd5.[[3456789]]|*-freebsd5.[[3456789]].*)
+ AC_DEFINE(NEED_PTHREAD_SCOPE_SYSTEM)
+ ;;
+ *-freebsd6.*)
AC_DEFINE(NEED_PTHREAD_SCOPE_SYSTEM)
;;
esac
@@ -884,7 +738,6 @@ fi
AC_SUBST(ALWAYS_DEFINES)
AC_SUBST(ISC_PLATFORM_USETHREADS)
-
ISC_THREAD_DIR=$thread_dir
AC_SUBST(ISC_THREAD_DIR)
@@ -939,7 +792,7 @@ if test "X$GCC" = "Xyes"; then
STD_CWARNINGS="$STD_CWARNINGS -W -Wall -Wmissing-prototypes -Wcast-qual -Wwrite-strings -Wformat"
case "$host" in
*-hp-hpux*)
- LDFLAGS="-Wl,+vnocompatwarnings $LDFALGS"
+ LDFLAGS="-Wl,+vnocompatwarnings $LDFLAGS"
;;
esac
else
@@ -961,11 +814,11 @@ else
;;
*)
# Turn off the pointlessly noisy warnings.
- STD_CWARNINGS="+w1 +W 474,530"
+ STD_CWARNINGS="+w1 +W 474,530,2193,2236"
;;
esac
CCOPT="$CCOPT -Ae -z"
- LDFLAGS="-Wl,+vnocompatwarnings $LDFALGS"
+ LDFLAGS="-Wl,+vnocompatwarnings $LDFLAGS"
MKDEPPROG='cc -Ae -E -Wp,-M >/dev/null 2>>$TMP'
;;
*-sgi-irix*)
@@ -1414,6 +1267,10 @@ char a[16],b[64]; return(inet_ntop(AF_INET6, a, b, sizeof(b)) == (char*)0);}],
[AC_MSG_RESULT(no)
ISC_EXTRA_OBJS="$ISC_EXTRA_OBJS inet_ntop.$O"
ISC_EXTRA_SRCS="$ISC_EXTRA_SRCS inet_ntop.c"
+ ISC_PLATFORM_NEEDNTOP="#define ISC_PLATFORM_NEEDNTOP 1"],
+ [AC_MSG_RESULT(assuming inet_ntop needed)
+ ISC_EXTRA_OBJS="$ISC_EXTRA_OBJS inet_ntop.$O"
+ ISC_EXTRA_SRCS="$ISC_EXTRA_SRCS inet_ntop.c"
ISC_PLATFORM_NEEDNTOP="#define ISC_PLATFORM_NEEDNTOP 1"])
@@ -1437,7 +1294,13 @@ main() { char a[16]; return (inet_pton(AF_INET, "1.2.3", a) == 1 ? 1 :
ISC_EXTRA_SRCS="$ISC_EXTRA_SRCS inet_pton.c"
ISC_PLATFORM_NEEDPTON="#define ISC_PLATFORM_NEEDPTON 1"],
[AC_MSG_RESULT(assuming target platform has working inet_pton)
- ISC_PLATFORM_NEEDPTON="#undef ISC_PLATFORM_NEEDPTON"])
+ ISC_PLATFORM_NEEDPTON="#undef ISC_PLATFORM_NEEDPTON"],
+ [AC_MSG_RESULT(assuming inet_pton needed)
+ ISC_EXTRA_OBJS="$ISC_EXTRA_OBJS inet_pton.$O"
+ ISC_EXTRA_SRCS="$ISC_EXTRA_SRCS inet_pton.c"
+ ISC_PLATFORM_NEEDPTON="#define ISC_PLATFORM_NEEDPTON 1"],
+ [AC_MSG_RESULT(assuming target platform has working inet_pton)
+ ISC_PLATFORM_NEEDPTON="#undef ISC_PLATFORM_NEEDPTON"])
AC_MSG_CHECKING([for inet_aton])
AC_TRY_LINK([
@@ -1703,9 +1566,15 @@ AC_CHECK_FUNC(memmove,
AC_SUBST(ISC_PLATFORM_NEEDMEMMOVE)
AC_CHECK_FUNC(strtoul,
- [ISC_PLATFORM_NEEDSTRTOUL="#undef ISC_PLATFORM_NEEDSTRTOUL"],
- [ISC_PLATFORM_NEEDSTRTOUL="#define ISC_PLATFORM_NEEDSTRTOUL 1"])
+ [ISC_PLATFORM_NEEDSTRTOUL="#undef ISC_PLATFORM_NEEDSTRTOUL"
+ LWRES_PLATFORM_NEEDSTRTOUL="#undef ISC_PLATFORM_NEEDSTRTOUL"
+ GENRANDOMLIB=""],
+ [ISC_PLATFORM_NEEDSTRTOUL="#define ISC_PLATFORM_NEEDSTRTOUL 1"
+ LWRES_PLATFORM_NEEDSTRTOUL="#define ISC_PLATFORM_NEEDSTRTOUL 1"
+ "GENRANDOMLIB=${ISCLIBS}"])
AC_SUBST(ISC_PLATFORM_NEEDSTRTOUL)
+AC_SUBST(LWRES_PLATFORM_NEEDSTRTOUL)
+AC_SUBST(GENRANDOMLIB)
AC_CHECK_FUNC(strlcpy,
[ISC_PLATFORM_NEEDSTRLCPY="#undef ISC_PLATFORM_NEEDSTRLCPY"],
@@ -1760,6 +1629,9 @@ AC_SUBST(ISC_EXTRA_SRCS)
# will produce a inconsistant result in the later case. If the compiler
# fails due to seeing "%lld" we fall back to "l".
#
+# Digital Unix 4.0 (gcc?) (long long) is 64 bits as is its long. It uses
+# %ld even for (long long)/
+#
# Win32 uses "%I64d", but that's defined elsewhere since we don't use
# configure on Win32.
#
@@ -1776,12 +1648,16 @@ main() {
}
],
[AC_MSG_RESULT(ll)
- ISC_PLATFORM_QUADFORMAT='#define ISC_PLATFORM_QUADFORMAT "ll"'],
+ ISC_PLATFORM_QUADFORMAT='#define ISC_PLATFORM_QUADFORMAT "ll"'
+ LWRES_PLATFORM_QUADFORMAT='#define LWRES_PLATFORM_QUADFORMAT "ll"'],
[AC_MSG_RESULT(l)
- ISC_PLATFORM_QUADFORMAT='#define ISC_PLATFORM_QUADFORMAT "l"'],
+ ISC_PLATFORM_QUADFORMAT='#define ISC_PLATFORM_QUADFORMAT "l"'
+ LWRES_PLATFORM_QUADFORMAT='#define LWRES_PLATFORM_QUADFORMAT "l"'],
[AC_MSG_RESULT(assuming target platform uses ll)
- ISC_PLATFORM_QUADFORMAT='#define ISC_PLATFORM_QUADFORMAT "ll"'])
+ ISC_PLATFORM_QUADFORMAT='#define ISC_PLATFORM_QUADFORMAT "ll"'
+ LWRES_PLATFORM_QUADFORMAT='#define LWRES_PLATFORM_QUADFORMAT "ll"'])
AC_SUBST(ISC_PLATFORM_QUADFORMAT)
+AC_SUBST(LWRES_PLATFORM_QUADFORMAT)
#
# Security Stuff
@@ -1803,6 +1679,15 @@ AC_CHECK_HEADERS(sys/prctl.h)
#
AC_CHECK_FUNC(tzset, AC_DEFINE(HAVE_TZSET))
+AC_MSG_CHECKING(for optarg decarartion)
+AC_TRY_COMPILE([
+#include
+],
+[optarg = 0;],
+[AC_MSG_RESULT(yes)],
+[AC_MSG_RESULT(no)
+AC_DEFINE(NEED_OPTARG, 1, [Defined if extern char *optarg is not declared.])])
+
#
# BSD/OS, and perhaps some others, don't define rlim_t.
#
@@ -1843,7 +1728,9 @@ ISC_PLATFORM_RLIMITTYPE="#define ISC_PLATFORM_RLIMITTYPE long long int"],
[AC_MSG_ERROR([unable to determine sizeof rlim_cur])
],[AC_MSG_ERROR(this cannot happen)])
],[AC_MSG_ERROR(this cannot happen)])
-],[AC_MSG_ERROR(cannot determine type of rlim_cur when cross compiling - define rlim_t)])
+],[
+ISC_PLATFORM_RLIMITTYPE="#define ISC_PLATFORM_RLIMITTYPE long long int"
+AC_MSG_RESULT(cannot determine type of rlim_cur when cross compiling - assuming long long int)])
])
AC_SUBST(ISC_PLATFORM_RLIMITTYPE)
@@ -1957,31 +1844,51 @@ yes)
esac
AC_SUBST(ISC_PLATFORM_HAVEIFNAMETOINDEX)
+#
+# The following sets up how non-blocking i/o is established.
+# Sunos, cygwin and solaris 2.x (x<5) require special handling.
+#
+case "$host" in
+*-sunos*) AC_DEFINE(PORT_NONBLOCK, O_NDELAY);;
+*-cygwin*) AC_DEFINE(PORT_NONBLOCK, O_NDELAY);;
+*-solaris2.[[01234]])
+ AC_DEFINE(PORT_NONBLOCK, O_NONBLOCK)
+ AC_DEFINE(USE_FIONBIO_IOCTL, 1,
+ [Defined if you need to use ioctl(FIONBIO) instead a fcntl call to make non-blocking.])
+ ;;
+*) AC_DEFINE(PORT_NONBLOCK, O_NONBLOCK,
+ [Sets which flag to pass to open/fcntl to make non-blocking (O_NDELAY/O_NONBLOCK).])
+ ;;
+esac
#
# The following sections deal with tools used for formatting
# the documentation. They are all optional, unless you are
# a developer editing the documentation source.
#
-# Directory trees where SGML files are commonly found.
-sgmltrees="/usr/pkg/share/sgml /usr/local/share/sgml /usr/share/sgml"
-
-#
-# Look for openjade. Plain jade is no longer supported.
-#
-
-AC_PATH_PROGS(OPENJADE, openjade, openjade)
-AC_SUBST(OPENJADE)
-
#
# Look for TeX.
#
-AC_PATH_PROGS(JADETEX, jadetex, jadetex)
-AC_SUBST(JADETEX)
+AC_PATH_PROGS(LATEX, latex, latex)
+AC_SUBST(LATEX)
-AC_PATH_PROGS(PDFJADETEX, pdfjadetex, pdfjadetex)
-AC_SUBST(PDFJADETEX)
+AC_PATH_PROGS(PDFLATEX, pdflatex, pdflatex)
+AC_SUBST(PDFLATEX)
+
+#
+# Look for xsltproc (libxslt)
+#
+
+AC_PATH_PROG(XSLTPROC, xsltproc, xsltproc)
+AC_SUBST(XSLTPROC)
+
+#
+# Look for xmllint (libxml2)
+#
+
+AC_PATH_PROG(XMLLINT, xmllint, xmllint)
+AC_SUBST(XMLLINT)
#
# Subroutine for searching for an ordinary file (e.g., a stylesheet)
@@ -2018,74 +1925,60 @@ AC_SUBST($1)
])
#
-# Look for the SGML catalog.
-# Its location varies, so far we have seen:
+# Look for Docbook-XSL stylesheets. Location probably varies by
+# system. Guessing where it might be found, based on where SGML stuff
+# lives on some systems. FreeBSD is the only one I'm sure of at the
+# moment.
#
-# NetBSD /usr/pkg/share/sgml/docbook/catalog
-# FreeBSD /usr/local/share/sgml/docbook/catalog
-# Linux /usr/local/share/dsssl/docbook/catalog
-# /usr/share/sgml/docbook/dsssl-stylesheets/catalog
+
+docbook_xsl_trees="/usr/pkg/share/xsl /usr/local/share/xsl /usr/share/xsl"
+
#
-catalogpath=""
-for d in $sgmltrees
+# Look for stylesheets we need.
+#
+
+NOM_PATH_FILE(XSLT_DOCBOOK_STYLE_HTML, docbook/html/docbook.xsl, $docbook_xsl_trees)
+NOM_PATH_FILE(XSLT_DOCBOOK_STYLE_XHTML, docbook/xhtml/docbook.xsl, $docbook_xsl_trees)
+NOM_PATH_FILE(XSLT_DOCBOOK_STYLE_MAN, docbook/manpages/docbook.xsl, $docbook_xsl_trees)
+NOM_PATH_FILE(XSLT_DOCBOOK_CHUNK_HTML, docbook/html/chunk.xsl, $docbook_xsl_trees)
+NOM_PATH_FILE(XSLT_DOCBOOK_CHUNK_XHTML, docbook/xhtml/chunk.xsl, $docbook_xsl_trees)
+
+#
+# Same dance for db2latex
+#
+# No idea where this lives except on FreeBSD.
+#
+
+db2latex_xsl_trees="/usr/local/share"
+
+#
+# Look for stylesheets we need.
+#
+
+NOM_PATH_FILE(XSLT_DB2LATEX_STYLE, db2latex/xsl/docbook.xsl, $db2latex_xsl_trees)
+
+#
+# Look for "admonition" image directory. Can't use NOM_PATH_FILE()
+# because it's a directory, so just do the same things, inline.
+#
+
+AC_MSG_CHECKING(for db2latex/xsl/figures)
+for d in $db2latex_xsl_trees
do
- catalogpath="$catalogpath $d"
- for s in docbook/dsssl-stylesheets
- do
- catalogpath="$catalogpath $d/$s"
- done
+ dd=$d/db2latex/xsl/figures
+ if test -d $dd
+ then
+ XSLT_DB2LATEX_ADMONITIONS=$dd
+ AC_MSG_RESULT($dd)
+ break
+ fi
done
-NOM_PATH_FILE(SGMLCATALOG, catalog, $catalogpath)
-
-#
-# Look for the HTML stylesheet html/docbook.dsl, used for
-# formatting man pages in HTML. Its location varies,
-# so far we have seen:
-#
-# NetBSD /usr/pkg/share/sgml/docbook/dsssl/modular/
-# FreeBSD /usr/local/share/sgml/docbook/dsssl/modular/
-# Linux /usr/local/share/dsssl/docbook/
-# /usr/share/sgml/docbook/dsssl-stylesheets/
-#
-# Ditto for the print stylesheet print/docbook.dsl.
-#
-
-stylepath=""
-for d in $sgmltrees
-do
- for s in docbook/dsssl/modular dsssl/docbook docbook/dsssl-stylesheets
- do
- stylepath="$stylepath $d/$s"
- done
-done
-NOM_PATH_FILE(HTMLSTYLE, html/docbook.dsl, $stylepath)
-NOM_PATH_FILE(PRINTSTYLE, print/docbook.dsl, $stylepath)
-
-#
-# Look for XML declarations.
-# Its location varies, so far we have seen:
-#
-# NetBSD /usr/pkg/share/sgml/docbook/dsssl/modular/dtds/decls/
-# FreeBSD /usr/local/share/sgml/docbook/dsssl/modular/dtds/decls/
-# Linux /usr/local/share/dsssl/docbook/dtds/decls/
-# /usr/share/sgml/docbook/dsssl-stylesheets/dtds/decls/
-#
-
-xmlpath=""
-for d in $sgmltrees
-do
- for s in docbook/dsssl/modular dsssl/docbook docbook/dsssl-stylesheets
- do
- xmlpath="$xmlpath $d/$s"
- done
-done
-NOM_PATH_FILE(XMLDCL, dtds/decls/xml.dcl, $xmlpath)
-
-#
-# Look for docbook2man-spec.pl
-#
-
-NOM_PATH_FILE(DOCBOOK2MANSPEC, docbook2X/docbook2man-spec.pl, $sgmltrees)
+if test "X$XSLT_DB2LATEX_ADMONITIONS" = "X"
+then
+ AC_MSG_RESULT(not found)
+ XSLT_DB2LATEX_ADMONITIONS=db2latex/xsl/figures
+fi
+AC_SUBST(XSLT_DB2LATEX_ADMONITIONS)
#
# Substitutions
@@ -2213,12 +2106,13 @@ AC_OUTPUT(
bin/dnssec/Makefile
doc/Makefile
doc/arm/Makefile
- doc/arm/nominum-docbook-html.dsl
- doc/arm/nominum-docbook-print.dsl
- doc/arm/validate.sh
doc/misc/Makefile
- docutil/docbook2man-wrapper.sh
+ doc/xsl/Makefile
isc-config.sh
+ doc/xsl/isc-docbook-chunk.xsl
+ doc/xsl/isc-docbook-html.xsl
+ doc/xsl/isc-docbook-latex.xsl
+ doc/xsl/isc-manpage.xsl
)
chmod a+x isc-config.sh
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/doc/Makefile.in b/contrib/bind9/doc/Makefile.in
index e7dd9ca35ef..1e69dabdbab 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/doc/Makefile.in
+++ b/contrib/bind9/doc/Makefile.in
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-# Copyright (C) 2004 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+# Copyright (C) 2004, 2005 Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
# Copyright (C) 2000, 2001 Internet Software Consortium.
#
# Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
# OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
# PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
-# $Id: Makefile.in,v 1.4.206.1 2004/03/06 13:16:14 marka Exp $
+# $Id: Makefile.in,v 1.4.206.3 2005/09/13 00:34:54 marka Exp $
# This Makefile is a placeholder. It exists merely to make
# sure that its directory gets created in the object directory
@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ srcdir = @srcdir@
VPATH = @srcdir@
top_srcdir = @top_srcdir@
-SUBDIRS = arm misc
+SUBDIRS = arm misc xsl
TARGETS =
@BIND9_MAKE_RULES@
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/doc/arm/Bv9ARM-book.xml b/contrib/bind9/doc/arm/Bv9ARM-book.xml
index 01cab15ce17..28ccb360afe 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/doc/arm/Bv9ARM-book.xml
+++ b/contrib/bind9/doc/arm/Bv9ARM-book.xml
@@ -1,24 +1,44 @@
-
+ "http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.0/docbookx.dtd"
+ []>
+
-
+
BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual
-
-
-2004
-Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
-
-
-2000-2003
-Internet Software Consortium
-
-
+
+
+ 2004
+ 2005
+ Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")
+
+
+ 2000
+ 2001
+ 2002
+ 2003
+ Internet Software Consortium.
+
+
-
+ Introduction The Internet Domain Name System (DNS) consists of the syntax
to specify the names of entities in the Internet in a hierarchical
@@ -368,7 +388,7 @@ be placed inside a firewall.
-BIND Resource Requirements
+BIND Resource RequirementsHardware requirements
@@ -419,7 +439,7 @@ of the BIND 9 source distribution.
-
+Name Server ConfigurationIn this section we provide some suggested configurations along
with guidelines for their use. We also address the topic of reasonable
@@ -667,6 +687,7 @@ of a server.
checks the syntax of a named.conf file.
named-checkconf
+ -jvz-t directoryfilename
@@ -734,25 +755,32 @@ of a server.
Retransfer the given zone from the master.
- freeze zone
+ freeze zoneclass
- view
- Suspend updates to a dynamic zone. This allows manual
+ view
+ Suspend updates to a dynamic zone. If no zone is specified
+ then all zones are suspended. This allows manual
edits to be made to a zone normally updated by dynamic update. It
also causes changes in the journal file to be synced into the master
and the journal file to be removed. All dynamic update attempts will
be refused while the zone is frozen.
- unfreeze zone
+ thaw zoneclass
- view
- Enable updates to a frozen dynamic zone. This causes
+ view
+ Enable updates to a frozen dynamic zone. If no zone is
+ specified then all frozen zones are enabled. This causes
the server to reload the zone from disk, and re-enables dynamic updates
- after the load has completed. After a zone is unfrozen, dynamic updates
+ after the load has completed. After a zone is thawed, dynamic updates
will no longer be refused.
+ notify zone
+ class
+ view
+ Resend NOTIFY messages for the zone
+
reconfigReload the configuration file and load new zones,
but do not reload existing zone files even if they have changed.
@@ -773,20 +801,21 @@ of a server.logging section of
named.conf.
- dumpdb
- Dump the server's caches to the dump file.
+ dumpdb -all|-cache|-zoneview ...
+ Dump the server's caches (default) and / or zones to the
+ dump file for the specified views. If no view is specified all
+ views are dumped.
- stop
- Stop the server,
- making sure any recent changes
+ stop -p
+ Stop the server, making sure any recent changes
made through dynamic update or IXFR are first saved to the master files
- of the updated zones.
+ of the updated zones. If -p is specified named's process id is returned.
- halt
+ halt -pStop the server immediately. Recent changes
made through dynamic update or IXFR are not saved to the master files,
but will be rolled forward from the journal files when the server
- is restarted.
+ is restarted. If -p is specified named's process id is returned.traceIncrement the servers debugging level by one.
@@ -801,12 +830,20 @@ of a server.
flushFlushes the server's cache.
+ flushnamename
+ Flushes the given name from the server's cache.
+
statusDisplay status of the server.
Note the number of zones includes the internal bind/CH zone
and the default ./IN hint zone if there is not a
explicit root zone configured.
+ recursing
+ Dump the list of queries named is currently recursing
+ on.
+
+
In BIND 9.2, rndc
@@ -957,7 +994,7 @@ reload the database.
-
+Advanced DNS Features
@@ -1004,7 +1041,7 @@ protocol is specified in RFC 1996.
All changes made to a zone using dynamic update are stored in the
zone's journal file. This file is automatically created by the
- server when when the first dynamic update takes place. The name of
+ server when the first dynamic update takes place. The name of
the journal file is formed by appending the
extension .jnl to the
name of the corresponding zone file. The journal file is in a
@@ -1123,7 +1160,7 @@ to those internal hosts. With the wildcard records, the mail will
be delivered to the bastion host, which can then forward it on to
internal hosts.Here's an example of a wildcard MX record:
-* IN MX 10 external1.example.com.
+* IN MX 10 external1.example.com.Now that they accept mail on behalf of anything in the internal
network, the bastion hosts will need to know how to deliver mail
to internal hosts. In order for this to work properly, the resolvers on
@@ -1620,7 +1657,7 @@ $ORIGIN 0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.8.b.d.0.1.0.0.2.ip6.arpa.
- The BIND 9 Lightweight Resolver
+ The BIND 9 Lightweight ResolverThe Lightweight Resolver LibraryTraditionally applications have been linked with a stub resolver
library that sends recursive DNS queries to a local caching name
@@ -1666,7 +1703,7 @@ be configured to act as a lightweight resolver daemon using the
-BIND 9 Configuration Reference
+BIND 9 Configuration ReferenceBIND 9 configuration is broadly similar
to BIND 8; however, there are a few new areas
@@ -1831,7 +1868,7 @@ which constitute an address match list can be any of the following:a key ID, as defined by the key statement
- the name of an address match list previously defined with
+ the name of an address match list defined with
the acl statementa nested address match list enclosed in braces
@@ -2181,7 +2218,7 @@ installed.
To disable the command channel, use an empty controls
-statement: controls { };.
+statement: controls { };.
@@ -2591,9 +2628,10 @@ The query log entry reports the client's IP address and port number. The
query name, class and type. It also reports whether the Recursion Desired
flag was set (+ if set, - if not set), EDNS was in use (E) or if the
query was signed (S).
-client 127.0.0.1#62536: query: www.example.com IN AAAA +SE
-client ::1#62537: query: www.example.net IN AAAA -SE
-
+client 127.0.0.1#62536: query: www.example.com IN AAAA +SE
+
+client ::1#62537: query: www.example.net IN AAAA -SE
+
@@ -2724,7 +2762,7 @@ statement in the named.conf file:
dnssec-lookaside domain trust-anchor domain; dnssec-must-be-secure domain yes_or_no; forward ( only | first );
- forwarders { ip_addrport ip_port ; ip_addrport ip_port ; ... };
+ forwarders { ip_addrport ip_port ; ... }; dual-stack-servers port ip_port { ( domain_nameport ip_port | ip_addrport ip_port ) ; ... }; check-names ( master | slave | response )( warn | fail | ignore ); allow-notify { address_match_list };
@@ -2958,7 +2996,7 @@ record does) the DNSKEY RRset is deemed to be trusted.
dnssec-must-be-secure
-Specify heirachies which must / may not be secure (signed and validated).
+Specify heirarchies which must / may not be secure (signed and validated).
If yes then named will only accept answers if they
are secure.
If no then normal dnssec validation applies
@@ -3714,11 +3752,25 @@ in the configuration file.
except zone transfers are performed using IPv6.
-alt-transfer-source
-An alternate transfer source if the one listed in
-transfer-source fails and
-use-alt-transfer-source is set.
-
+
+ alt-transfer-source
+
+
+ An alternate transfer source if the one listed in
+ transfer-source fails and
+ use-alt-transfer-source is
+ set.
+
+
+ If you do not wish the alternate transfer source
+ to be used you should set
+ use-alt-transfer-source
+ appropriately and you should not depend upon
+ getting a answer back to the first refresh
+ query.
+
+
+ alt-transfer-source-v6An alternate transfer source if the one listed in
@@ -4553,7 +4605,7 @@ Statement Grammar
delegation-only yes_or_no ; file string ; forward (only|first) ;
- forwarders { ip_addrport ip_port ; ip_addrport ip_port ; ... };
+ forwarders { ip_addrport ip_port ; ... }; ixfr-base string ; ixfr-tmp-file string ; maintain-ixfr-base yes_or_no ;
@@ -5539,10 +5591,10 @@ be appended to any unqualified records. When a zone is first read
in there is an implicit $ORIGIN <zone-name>. The
current $ORIGIN is appended to the domain specified
in the $ORIGIN argument if it is not absolute.
-$ORIGIN example.com.
-WWW CNAME MAIN-SERVER
+$ORIGIN example.com.
+WWW CNAME MAIN-SERVERis equivalent to
-WWW.EXAMPLE.COM. CNAME MAIN-SERVER.EXAMPLE.COM.
+WWW.EXAMPLE.COM. CNAME MAIN-SERVER.EXAMPLE.COM.The $INCLUDE DirectiveSyntax: $INCLUDEfilename
@@ -5576,17 +5628,17 @@ resource records that only differ from each other by an iterator. $GENE
be used to easily generate the sets of records required to support
sub /24 reverse delegations described in RFC 2317: Classless IN-ADDR.ARPA
delegation.
-$ORIGIN 0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA.
+$ORIGIN 0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA.
$GENERATE 1-2 0 NS SERVER$.EXAMPLE.
-$GENERATE 1-127 $ CNAME $.0
+$GENERATE 1-127 $ CNAME $.0
is equivalent to
-0.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA NS SERVER1.EXAMPLE.
+0.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA NS SERVER1.EXAMPLE.
0.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA. NS SERVER2.EXAMPLE.
1.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA. CNAME 1.0.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA.
2.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA. CNAME 2.0.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA.
...
127.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA. CNAME 127.0.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA.
-
+
@@ -5655,7 +5707,7 @@ and not part of the standard zone file format.
-BIND 9 Security Considerations
+BIND 9 Security ConsiderationsAccess Control ListsAccess Control Lists (ACLs), are address match lists that
you can set up and nickname for future use in allow-notify,
@@ -5778,7 +5830,7 @@ all.
-
+TroubleshootingCommon Problems
@@ -5837,7 +5889,7 @@ all.
to read more.
-
+AppendicesAcknowledgments
diff --git a/contrib/bind9/doc/arm/Bv9ARM.ch01.html b/contrib/bind9/doc/arm/Bv9ARM.ch01.html
index 5b3659e6101..37f1eec39ab 100644
--- a/contrib/bind9/doc/arm/Bv9ARM.ch01.html
+++ b/contrib/bind9/doc/arm/Bv9ARM.ch01.html
@@ -1,1131 +1,412 @@
-
-Introduction
The Internet Domain Name System (DNS) consists of the syntax
to specify the names of entities in the Internet in a hierarchical
manner, the rules used for delegating authority over names, and the
system implementation that actually maps names to Internet
- addresses. DNS data is maintained in a group of distributed
- hierarchical databases.
The Berkeley Internet Name Domain (BIND) implements an
+ addresses. DNS data is maintained in a group of distributed
+ hierarchical databases.
+
+
+Scope of Document
+
The Berkeley Internet Name Domain (BIND) implements an
domain name server for a number of operating systems. This
document provides basic information about the installation and
- care of the Internet Software Consortium (ISC)
- BIND version 9 software package for system
- administrators.
This version of the manual corresponds to BIND version 9.3.
In this document, Section 1 introduces
- the basic DNS and BIND concepts. Section 2
- describes resource requirements for running BIND in various
- environments. Information in Section 3 is
- task-oriented in its presentation and is
+ care of the Internet Software Consortium (ISC)
+ BIND version 9 software package for system
+ administrators.
+
This version of the manual corresponds to BIND version 9.3.
+
+
+
+Organization of This Document
+
In this document, Section 1 introduces
+ the basic DNS and BIND concepts. Section 2
+ describes resource requirements for running BIND in various
+ environments. Information in Section 3 is
+ task-oriented in its presentation and is
organized functionally, to aid in the process of installing the
- BIND 9 software. The task-oriented section is followed by
- Section 4, which contains more advanced
+ BIND 9 software. The task-oriented section is followed by
+ Section 4, which contains more advanced
concepts that the system administrator may need for implementing
- certain options. Section 5
- describes the BIND 9 lightweight
- resolver. The contents of Section 6 are
+ certain options. Section 5
+ describes the BIND 9 lightweight
+ resolver. The contents of Section 6 are
organized as in a reference manual to aid in the ongoing
- maintenance of the software. Section 7
- addresses security considerations, and
- Section 8 contains troubleshooting help. The
+ maintenance of the software. Section 7
+ addresses security considerations, and
+ Section 8 contains troubleshooting help. The
main body of the document is followed by several
- Appendices which contain useful reference
- information, such as a Bibliography and
- historic information related to BIND and the Domain Name
- System.
The purpose of this document is to explain the installation
-and upkeep of the BIND software package, and we
+ Appendices which contain useful reference
+ information, such as a Bibliography and
+ historic information related to BIND and the Domain Name
+ System.
+
+
+
+Conventions Used in This Document
+
In this document, we use the following general typographic
+ conventions:
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
To
+describe:
+
+
+
We use the style:
+
+
+
+
+
a pathname, filename, URL, hostname,
+mailing list name, or new term or concept
+
+
Fixed width
+
+
+
literal user
+input
+
Fixed Width Bold
+
+
+
program output
+
Fixed Width
+
+
+
+
The following conventions are used in descriptions of the
+BIND configuration file:
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
To
+describe:
+
We use the style:
+
+
+
keywords
+
Fixed Width
+
+
+
variables
+
Fixed Width
+
+
+
Optional input
+
[Text is enclosed in square brackets]
+
+
+
+
+
+
+The Domain Name System (DNS)
+
The purpose of this document is to explain the installation
+and upkeep of the BIND software package, and we
begin by reviewing the fundamentals of the Domain Name System
-(DNS) as they relate to BIND.
-
The Domain Name System (DNS) is the hierarchical, distributed
+(DNS) as they relate to BIND.
+
+
+
+DNS Fundamentals
+
The Domain Name System (DNS) is the hierarchical, distributed
database. It stores information for mapping Internet host names to IP
addresses and vice versa, mail routing information, and other data
-used by Internet applications.
Clients look up information in the DNS by calling a
-resolver library, which sends queries to one or
-more name servers and interprets the responses.
-The BIND 9 software distribution contains a
-name server, named, and two resolver
-libraries, liblwres and libbind.
-
The data stored in the DNS is identified by domain
-names that are organized as a tree according to
+used by Internet applications.
+
Clients look up information in the DNS by calling a
+resolver library, which sends queries to one or
+more name servers and interprets the responses.
+The BIND 9 software distribution contains a
+name server, named, and two resolver
+libraries, liblwres and libbind.
+
+
+
+
+Domains and Domain Names
+
The data stored in the DNS is identified by domain
+names that are organized as a tree according to
organizational or administrative boundaries. Each node of the tree,
-called a domain, is given a label. The domain name of the
+called a domain, is given a label. The domain name of the
node is the concatenation of all the labels on the path from the
-node to the root node. This is represented
+node to the root node. This is represented
in written form as a string of labels listed from right to left and
separated by dots. A label need only be unique within its parent
-domain.
For example, a domain name for a host at the
-company Example, Inc. could be
-mail.example.com,
-where com is the
+domain.
+
For example, a domain name for a host at the
+company Example, Inc. could be
+mail.example.com,
+where com is the
top level domain to which
-ourhost.example.com belongs,
-example is
-a subdomain of com, and
-ourhost is the
-name of the host.
For administrative purposes, the name space is partitioned into
-areas called zones, each starting at a node and
+ourhost.example.com belongs,
+example is
+a subdomain of com, and
+ourhost is the
+name of the host.
+
For administrative purposes, the name space is partitioned into
+areas called zones, each starting at a node and
extending down to the leaf nodes or to nodes where other zones start.
-The data for each zone is stored in a name
-server, which answers queries about the zone using the
-DNS protocol.
-
The data associated with each domain name is stored in the
-form of resource records (RRs).
+The data for each zone is stored in a name
+server, which answers queries about the zone using the
+DNS protocol.
+
+
The data associated with each domain name is stored in the
+form of resource records (RRs).
Some of the supported resource record types are described in
-Section 6.3.1.
To properly operate a name server, it is important to understand
+the difference between a zone
+and a domain.
+
As we stated previously, a zone is a point of delegation in
+the DNS tree. A zone consists of
those contiguous parts of the domain
tree for which a name server has complete information and over which
it has authority. It contains all domain names from a certain point
downward in the domain tree except those which are delegated to
other zones. A delegation point is marked by one or more
-NS records in the
+NS records in the
parent zone, which should be matched by equivalent NS records at
-the root of the delegated zone.
For instance, consider the example.com
+the root of the delegated zone.
+
For instance, consider the example.com
domain which includes names
-such as host.aaa.example.com and
-host.bbb.example.com even though
-the example.com zone includes
-only delegations for the aaa.example.com and
-bbb.example.com zones. A zone can map
+such as host.aaa.example.com and
+host.bbb.example.com even though
+the example.com zone includes
+only delegations for the aaa.example.com and
+bbb.example.com zones. A zone can map
exactly to a single domain, but could also include only part of a
domain, the rest of which could be delegated to other
-name servers. Every name in the DNS tree is a
-domain, even if it is
-terminal, that is, has no
-subdomains. Every subdomain is a domain and
+name servers. Every name in the DNS tree is a
+domain, even if it is
+terminal, that is, has no
+subdomains. Every subdomain is a domain and
every domain except the root is also a subdomain. The terminology is
not intuitive and we suggest that you read RFCs 1033, 1034 and 1035 to
gain a complete understanding of this difficult and subtle
-topic.
Though BIND is called a "domain name server",
+topic.
+
Though BIND is called a "domain name server",
it deals primarily in terms of zones. The master and slave
-declarations in the named.conf file specify
+declarations in the named.conf file specify
zones, not domains. When you ask some other site if it is willing to
-be a slave server for your domain, you are
-actually asking for slave service for some collection of zones.
Each zone is served by at least
-one authoritative name server,
+be a slave server for your domain, you are
+actually asking for slave service for some collection of zones.
+
+
+
+Authoritative Name Servers
+
Each zone is served by at least
+one authoritative name server,
which contains the complete data for the zone.
To make the DNS tolerant of server and network failures,
most zones have two or more authoritative servers.
-
Responses from authoritative servers have the "authoritative
+
+
Responses from authoritative servers have the "authoritative
answer" (AA) bit set in the response packets. This makes them
easy to identify when debugging DNS configurations using tools like
-dig (Section 3.3.1.1).
The authoritative server where the master copy of the zone data is maintained is
-called the primary master server, or simply the
-primary. It loads the zone contents from some
+dig (the section called “Diagnostic Tools”).
+
+
+The Primary Master
+
+The authoritative server where the master copy of the zone data is maintained is
+called the primary master server, or simply the
+primary. It loads the zone contents from some
local file edited by humans or perhaps generated mechanically from
some other local file which is edited by humans. This file is called
-the zone file or master file.
The other authoritative servers, the slave
-servers (also known as secondary servers) load
+the zone file or master file.
+
+
+
+Slave Servers
+
The other authoritative servers, the slave
+servers (also known as secondary servers) load
the zone contents from another server using a replication process
-known as a zone transfer. Typically the data are
+known as a zone transfer. Typically the data are
transferred directly from the primary master, but it is also possible
to transfer it from another slave. In other words, a slave server
-may itself act as a master to a subordinate slave server.
Usually all of the zone's authoritative servers are listed in
+may itself act as a master to a subordinate slave server.
+
+
+
+Stealth Servers
+
Usually all of the zone's authoritative servers are listed in
NS records in the parent zone. These NS records constitute
-a delegation of the zone from the parent.
+a delegation of the zone from the parent.
The authoritative servers are also listed in the zone file itself,
-at the top level or apex
+at the top level or apex
of the zone. You can list servers in the zone's top-level NS
records that are not in the parent's NS delegation, but you cannot
list servers in the parent's delegation that are not present at
-the zone's top level.
A stealth server is a server that is
+the zone's top level.
+
A stealth server is a server that is
authoritative for a zone but is not listed in that zone's NS
records. Stealth servers can be used for keeping a local copy of a
zone to speed up access to the zone's records or to make sure that the
zone is available even if all the "official" servers for the zone are
-inaccessible.
A configuration where the primary master server itself is a
+inaccessible.
+
A configuration where the primary master server itself is a
stealth server is often referred to as a "hidden primary"
configuration. One use for this configuration is when the primary master
is behind a firewall and therefore unable to communicate directly
-with the outside world.
The resolver libraries provided by most operating systems are
-stub resolvers, meaning that they are not capable of
+with the outside world.
+
+
+
+
+Caching Name Servers
+
The resolver libraries provided by most operating systems are
+stub resolvers, meaning that they are not capable of
performing the full DNS resolution process by themselves by talking
directly to the authoritative servers. Instead, they rely on a local
name server to perform the resolution on their behalf. Such a server
-is called a recursive name server; it performs
-recursive lookups for local clients.
To improve performance, recursive servers cache the results of
+is called a recursive name server; it performs
+recursive lookups for local clients.
+
To improve performance, recursive servers cache the results of
the lookups they perform. Since the processes of recursion and
caching are intimately connected, the terms
-recursive server and
-caching server are often used synonymously.
The length of time for which a record may be retained in
+recursive server and
+caching server are often used synonymously.
+
The length of time for which a record may be retained in
in the cache of a caching name server is controlled by the
Time To Live (TTL) field associated with each resource record.
-
Even a caching name server does not necessarily perform
+
+
+
+Forwarding
+
Even a caching name server does not necessarily perform
the complete recursive lookup itself. Instead, it can
-forward some or all of the queries
+forward some or all of the queries
that it cannot satisfy from its cache to another caching name server,
-commonly referred to as a forwarder.
-
There may be one or more forwarders,
+commonly referred to as a forwarder.
+
+
There may be one or more forwarders,
and they are queried in turn until the list is exhausted or an answer
is found. Forwarders are typically used when you do not
wish all the servers at a given site to interact directly with the rest of
the Internet servers. A typical scenario would involve a number
-of internal DNS servers and an Internet firewall. Servers unable
+of internal DNS servers and an Internet firewall. Servers unable
to pass packets through the firewall would forward to the server
-that can do it, and that server would query the Internet DNS servers
+that can do it, and that server would query the Internet DNS servers
on the internal server's behalf. An added benefit of using the forwarding
feature is that the central machine develops a much more complete
cache of information that all the clients can take advantage
-of.
The BIND name server can simultaneously act as
+of.
+
+
+
+
+Name Servers in Multiple Roles
+
The BIND name server can simultaneously act as
a master for some zones, a slave for other zones, and as a caching
-(recursive) server for a set of local clients.
However, since the functions of authoritative name service
+(recursive) server for a set of local clients.
+
However, since the functions of authoritative name service
and caching/recursive name service are logically separate, it is
often advantageous to run them on separate server machines.
A server that only provides authoritative name service
-(an authoritative-only server) can run with
+(an authoritative-only server) can run with
recursion disabled, improving reliability and security.
A server that is not authoritative for any zones and only provides
recursive service to local
-clients (a caching-only server)
+clients (a caching-only server)
does not need to be reachable from the Internet at large and can
-be placed inside a firewall.
DNS hardware requirements have traditionally been quite modest.
For many installations, servers that have been pensioned off from
-active duty have performed admirably as DNS servers.
The DNSSEC and IPv6 features of BIND 9 may prove to be quite
+active duty have performed admirably as DNS servers.
+
The DNSSEC and IPv6 features of BIND 9 may prove to be quite
CPU intensive however, so organizations that make heavy use of these
features may wish to consider larger systems for these applications.
-BIND 9 is fully multithreaded, allowing full utilization of
-multiprocessor systems for installations that need it.
CPU requirements for BIND 9 range from i486-class machines
+BIND 9 is fully multithreaded, allowing full utilization of
+multiprocessor systems for installations that need it.
+
+
+
+CPU Requirements
+
CPU requirements for BIND 9 range from i486-class machines
for serving of static zones without caching, to enterprise-class
machines if you intend to process many dynamic updates and DNSSEC
-signed zones, serving many thousands of queries per second.
The memory of the server has to be large enough to fit the
-cache and zones loaded off disk. The max-cache-size
+signed zones, serving many thousands of queries per second.
+
+
+
+Memory Requirements
+
The memory of the server has to be large enough to fit the
+cache and zones loaded off disk. The max-cache-size
option can be used to limit the amount of memory used by the cache,
-at the expense of reducing cache hit rates and causing more DNS
+at the expense of reducing cache hit rates and causing more DNS
traffic. It is still good practice to have enough memory to load
all zone and cache data into memory — unfortunately, the best way
to determine this for a given installation is to watch the name server
in operation. After a few weeks the server process should reach
a relatively stable size where entries are expiring from the cache as
-fast as they are being inserted.
For name server intensive environments, there are two alternative
+fast as they are being inserted.
+
+
+
+Name Server Intensive Environment Issues
+
For name server intensive environments, there are two alternative
configurations that may be used. The first is where clients and
any second-level internal name servers query a main name server, which
has enough memory to build a large cache. This approach minimizes
@@ -201,84 +98,33 @@ is to set up second-level internal name servers to make queries independently.
In this configuration, none of the individual machines needs to
have as much memory or CPU power as in the first alternative, but
this has the disadvantage of making many more external queries,
-as none of the name servers share their cached data.
ISC BIND 9 compiles and runs on a large number
+as none of the name servers share their cached data.
+
+
+
+Supported Operating Systems
+
ISC BIND 9 compiles and runs on a large number
of Unix-like operating system and on Windows NT / 2000. For an up-to-date
list of supported systems, see the README file in the top level directory
-of the BIND 9 source distribution.
The following sample configuration is appropriate for a caching-only
+option setting.
+
+
+Sample Configurations
+
+
+A Caching-only Name Server
+
The following sample configuration is appropriate for a caching-only
name server for use by clients internal to a corporation. All queries
-from outside clients are refused using the allow-query
+from outside clients are refused using the allow-query
option. Alternatively, the same effect could be achieved using suitable
-firewall rules.
// Two corporate subnets we wish to allow queries from.
+firewall rules.
+
+// Two corporate subnets we wish to allow queries from.
acl corpnets { 192.168.4.0/24; 192.168.7.0/24; };
options {
directory "/etc/namedb"; // Working directory
@@ -139,29 +85,16 @@ zone "0.0.127.in-addr.arpa" {
file "localhost.rev";
notify no;
};
-
This sample configuration is for an authoritative-only server
-that is the master server for "example.com"
-and a slave for the subdomain "eng.example.com".
options {
+
+
+
+
+An Authoritative-only Name Server
+
This sample configuration is for an authoritative-only server
+that is the master server for "example.com"
+and a slave for the subdomain "eng.example.com".
+
+options {
directory "/etc/namedb"; // Working directory
allow-query { any; }; // This is the default
recursion no; // Do not provide recursive service
@@ -190,1070 +123,321 @@ zone "eng.example.com" {
// IP address of eng.example.com master server
masters { 192.168.4.12; };
};
-
A primitive form of load balancing can be achieved in
-the DNS by using multiple A records for one name.
For example, if you have three WWW servers with network addresses
+
+
+
+
+
+Load Balancing
+
A primitive form of load balancing can be achieved in
+the DNS by using multiple A records for one name.
+
For example, if you have three WWW servers with network addresses
of 10.0.0.1, 10.0.0.2 and 10.0.0.3, a set of records such as the
following means that clients will connect to each machine one third
-of the time:
Name
TTL
CLASS
TYPE
Resource Record (RR) Data
www
600
IN
A
10.0.0.1
600
IN
A
10.0.0.2
600
IN
A
10.0.0.3
When a resolver queries for these records, BIND will rotate
+of the time:
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Name
+
TTL
+
CLASS
+
TYPE
+
Resource Record (RR) Data
+
+
+
www
+
600
+
IN
+
A
+
10.0.0.1
+
+
+
+
600
+
IN
+
A
+
10.0.0.2
+
+
+
+
600
+
IN
+
A
+
10.0.0.3
+
+
+
+
When a resolver queries for these records, BIND will rotate
them and respond to the query with the records in a different
order. In the example above, clients will randomly receive
records in the order 1, 2, 3; 2, 3, 1; and 3, 1, 2. Most clients
- will use the first record returned and discard the rest.
For more detail on ordering responses, check the
- rrset-order substatement in the
- options statement, see
- RRset Ordering.
+ will use the first record returned and discard the rest.
+
For more detail on ordering responses, check the
+ rrset-order substatement in the
+ options statement, see
+ RRset Ordering.
This substatement is not supported in
- BIND 9, and only the ordering scheme described above is
- available.
There are several indispensable diagnostic, administrative
+ BIND 9, and only the ordering scheme described above is
+ available.
+
+
+
+Name Server Operations
+
+
+Tools for Use With the Name Server Daemon
+
There are several indispensable diagnostic, administrative
and monitoring tools available to the system administrator for controlling
and debugging the name server daemon. We describe several in this
-section
The dig, host, and
-nslookup programs are all command line tools
+section
+
+
+Diagnostic Tools
+
The dig, host, and
+nslookup programs are all command line tools
for manually querying name servers. They differ in style and
output format.
-
dig
The domain information groper (dig)
+
+
+
dig
+
+
The domain information groper (dig)
is the most versatile and complete of these lookup tools.
It has two modes: simple interactive
mode for a single query, and batch mode which executes a query for
each in a list of several query lines. All query options are accessible
-from the command line.
For more information and a list of available commands and
+options, see the dig man page.
+
+
host
+
+
The host utility emphasizes simplicity
and ease of use. By default, it converts
between host names and Internet addresses, but its functionality
-can be extended with the use of options.
For more information and a list of available commands and
+options, see the host man page.
+
+
nslookup
+
+
nslookup has two modes: interactive
and non-interactive. Interactive mode allows the user to query name servers
for information about various hosts and domains or to print a list
of hosts in a domain. Non-interactive mode is used to print just
-the name and requested information for a host or domain.
nslookup [-option...] [host-to-find | - [server]]
Interactive mode is entered when no arguments are given (the
+the name and requested information for a host or domain.
Interactive mode is entered when no arguments are given (the
default name server will be used) or when the first argument is a
hyphen (`-') and the second argument is the host name or Internet address
-of a name server.
Non-interactive mode is used when the name or Internet address
+of a name server.
+
Non-interactive mode is used when the name or Internet address
of the host to be looked up is given as the first argument. The
-optional second argument specifies the host name or address of a name server.
Due to its arcane user interface and frequently inconsistent
-behavior, we do not recommend the use of nslookup.
-Use dig instead.
The remote name daemon control
+ (rndc) program allows the system
administrator to control the operation of a name server.
- If you run rndc without any options
- it will display a usage message as follows:
Suspend updates to a dynamic zone. If no zone is specified
+ then all zones are suspended. This allows manual
edits to be made to a zone normally updated by dynamic update. It
also causes changes in the journal file to be synced into the master
and the journal file to be removed. All dynamic update attempts will
- be refused while the zone is frozen.
unfreeze zone
- [class
- [view]]
Enable updates to a frozen dynamic zone. This causes
+ be refused while the zone is frozen.
+
thaw [zone
+ [class
+ [view]]]
+
Enable updates to a frozen dynamic zone. If no zone is
+ specified then all frozen zones are enabled. This causes
the server to reload the zone from disk, and re-enables dynamic updates
- after the load has completed. After a zone is unfrozen, dynamic updates
- will no longer be refused.
reconfig
Reload the configuration file and load new zones,
+ after the load has completed. After a zone is thawed, dynamic updates
+ will no longer be refused.
+
notify zone
+ [class
+ [view]]
+
Resend NOTIFY messages for the zone
+
reconfig
+
Reload the configuration file and load new zones,
but do not reload existing zone files even if they have changed.
- This is faster than a full reload when there
+ This is faster than a full reload when there
is a large number of zones because it avoids the need to examine the
modification times of the zones files.
-
stats
Write server statistics to the statistics file.
querylog
Toggle query logging. Query logging can also be enabled
- by explicitly directing the queries
- category to a channel in the
- logging section of
- named.conf.
dumpdb
Dump the server's caches to the dump file.
stop
Stop the server,
- making sure any recent changes
+
+
stats
+
Write server statistics to the statistics file.
+
querylog
+
Toggle query logging. Query logging can also be enabled
+ by explicitly directing the queries
+ category to a channel in the
+ logging section of
+ named.conf.
+
dumpdb [-all|-cache|-zone] [view ...]
+
Dump the server's caches (default) and / or zones to the
+ dump file for the specified views. If no view is specified all
+ views are dumped.
+
stop [-p]
+
Stop the server, making sure any recent changes
made through dynamic update or IXFR are first saved to the master files
- of the updated zones.
halt
Stop the server immediately. Recent changes
+ of the updated zones. If -p is specified named's process id is returned.
+
halt [-p]
+
Stop the server immediately. Recent changes
made through dynamic update or IXFR are not saved to the master files,
but will be rolled forward from the journal files when the server
- is restarted.
trace
Increment the servers debugging level by one.
trace level
Sets the server's debugging level to an explicit
- value.
notrace
Sets the server's debugging level to 0.
flush
Flushes the server's cache.
status
Display status of the server.
-Note the number of zones includes the internal bind/CH zone
-and the default ./IN hint zone if there is not a
-explicit root zone configured.
In BIND 9.2, rndc
-supports all the commands of the BIND 8 ndc
-utility except ndc start and
-ndc restart, which were also
-not supported in ndc's channel mode.
A configuration file is required, since all
+ is restarted. If -p is specified named's process id is returned.
+
trace
+
Increment the servers debugging level by one.
+
trace level
+
Sets the server's debugging level to an explicit
+ value.
+
notrace
+
Sets the server's debugging level to 0.
+
flush
+
Flushes the server's cache.
+
flushnamename
+
Flushes the given name from the server's cache.
+
status
+
Display status of the server.
+Note the number of zones includes the internal bind/CH zone
+and the default ./IN hint zone if there is not a
+explicit root zone configured.
+
recursing
+
Dump the list of queries named is currently recursing
+ on.
+
+
+
In BIND 9.2, rndc
+supports all the commands of the BIND 8 ndc
+utility except ndc start and
+ndc restart, which were also
+not supported in ndc's channel mode.
+
A configuration file is required, since all
communication with the server is authenticated with
digital signatures that rely on a shared secret, and
there is no way to provide that secret other than with a
configuration file. The default location for the
-rndc configuration file is
-/etc/rndc.conf, but an alternate
-location can be specified with the -c
+rndc configuration file is
+/etc/rndc.conf, but an alternate
+location can be specified with the -c
option. If the configuration file is not found,
-rndc will also look in
-/etc/rndc.key (or whatever
-sysconfdir was defined when
-the BIND build was configured).
-The rndc.key file is generated by
-running rndc-confgen -a as described in
-Section 6.2.4.
The format of the configuration file is similar to
-that of named.conf, but limited to
-only four statements, the options,
-key, server and
-include
+rndc will also look in
+/etc/rndc.key (or whatever
+sysconfdir was defined when
+the BIND build was configured).
+The rndc.key file is generated by
+running rndc-confgen -a as described in
+the section called “controls Statement Definition and Usage”.
+
The format of the configuration file is similar to
+that of named.conf, but limited to
+only four statements, the options,
+key, server and
+include
statements. These statements are what associate the
secret keys to the servers with which they are meant to
be shared. The order of statements is not
-significant.
The options statement has three clauses:
-default-server, default-key,
-and default-port.
-default-server takes a
+significant.
+
The options statement has three clauses:
+default-server, default-key,
+and default-port.
+default-server takes a
host name or address argument and represents the server that will
-be contacted if no -s
+be contacted if no -s
option is provided on the command line.
-default-key takes
-the name of a key as its argument, as defined by a key statement.
-default-port specifies the port to which
-rndc should connect if no
+default-key takes
+the name of a key as its argument, as defined by a key statement.
+default-port specifies the port to which
+rndc should connect if no
port is given on the command line or in a
-server statement.
The key statement defines an key to be used
-by rndc when authenticating with
-named. Its syntax is identical to the
-key statement in named.conf.
-The keyword key is
+server statement.
+
The key statement defines an key to be used
+by rndc when authenticating with
+named. Its syntax is identical to the
+key statement in named.conf.
+The keyword key is
followed by a key name, which must be a valid
domain name, though it need not actually be hierarchical; thus,
-a string like "rndc_key" is a valid name.
-The key statement has two clauses:
-algorithm and secret.
+a string like "rndc_key" is a valid name.
+The key statement has two clauses:
+algorithm and secret.
While the configuration parser will accept any string as the argument
-to algorithm, currently only the string "hmac-md5"
-has any meaning. The secret is a base-64 encoded string.
The server statement associates a key
-defined using the key statement with a server.
-The keyword server is followed by a
-host name or address. The server statement
-has two clauses: key and port.
-The key clause specifies the name of the key
+to algorithm, currently only the string "hmac-md5"
+has any meaning. The secret is a base-64 encoded string.
+
The server statement associates a key
+defined using the key statement with a server.
+The keyword server is followed by a
+host name or address. The server statement
+has two clauses: key and port.
+The key clause specifies the name of the key
to be used when communicating with this server, and the
-port clause can be used to
-specify the port rndc should connect
-to on the server.
A sample minimal configuration file is as follows:
key rndc_key {
+port clause can be used to
+specify the port rndc should connect
+to on the server.
+
A sample minimal configuration file is as follows:
This file, if installed as /etc/rndc.conf,
-would allow the command:
$ rndc reload
to connect to 127.0.0.1 port 953 and cause the name server
+
+
This file, if installed as /etc/rndc.conf,
+would allow the command:
+
$ rndc reload
+
to connect to 127.0.0.1 port 953 and cause the name server
to reload, if a name server on the local machine were running with
-following controls statements:
and it had an identical key statement for
-rndc_key.
Running the rndc-confgen program will
-conveniently create a rndc.conf
+
+
and it had an identical key statement for
+rndc_key.
+
Running the rndc-confgen program will
+conveniently create a rndc.conf
file for you, and also display the
-corresponding controls statement that you need to
-add to named.conf. Alternatively,
-you can run rndc-confgen -a to set up
-a rndc.key file and not modify
-named.conf at all.
-
Certain UNIX signals cause the name server to take specific
+corresponding controls statement that you need to
+add to named.conf. Alternatively,
+you can run rndc-confgen -a to set up
+a rndc.key file and not modify
+named.conf at all.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Signals
+
Certain UNIX signals cause the name server to take specific
actions, as described in the following table. These signals can
-be sent using the kill command.
SIGHUP
Causes the server to read named.conf and
-reload the database.
DNS NOTIFY is a mechanism that allows master
servers to notify their slave servers of changes to a zone's data. In
-response to a NOTIFY from a master server, the
+response to a NOTIFY from a master server, the
slave will check to see that its version of the zone is the
-current version and, if not, initiate a zone transfer.
DNS
+current version and, if not, initiate a zone transfer.
+
DNS
For more information about
-NOTIFY, see the description of the
-notify option in Section 6.2.16.1 and
-the description of the zone option also-notify in
-Section 6.2.16.7. The NOTIFY
+NOTIFY, see the description of the
+notify option in the section called “Boolean Options” and
+the description of the zone option also-notify in
+the section called “Zone Transfers”. The NOTIFY
protocol is specified in RFC 1996.
-
Dynamic Update is a method for adding, replacing or deleting
+
+
+
+
+Dynamic Update
+
Dynamic Update is a method for adding, replacing or deleting
records in a master server by sending it a special form of DNS
messages. The format and meaning of these messages is specified
- in RFC 2136.
Dynamic update is enabled on a zone-by-zone basis, by
- including an allow-update or
- update-policy clause in the
- zone statement.
Updating of secure zones (zones using DNSSEC) follows
+ in RFC 2136.
+
Dynamic update is enabled on a zone-by-zone basis, by
+ including an allow-update or
+ update-policy clause in the
+ zone statement.
+
Updating of secure zones (zones using DNSSEC) follows
RFC 3007: RRSIG and NSEC records affected by updates are automatically
regenerated by the server using an online zone key.
Update authorization is based
- on transaction signatures and an explicit server policy.
All changes made to a zone using dynamic update are stored in the
+ on transaction signatures and an explicit server policy.
+
+
+The journal file
+
All changes made to a zone using dynamic update are stored in the
zone's journal file. This file is automatically created by the
- server when when the first dynamic update takes place. The name of
+ server when the first dynamic update takes place. The name of
the journal file is formed by appending the
- extension .jnl to the
+ extension .jnl to the
name of the corresponding zone file. The journal file is in a
- binary format and should not be edited manually.
The server will also occasionally write ("dump")
+ binary format and should not be edited manually.
+
The server will also occasionally write ("dump")
the complete contents of the updated zone to its zone file.
This is not done immediately after
each dynamic update, because that would be too slow when a large
zone is updated frequently. Instead, the dump is delayed by
- up to 15 minutes, allowing additional updates to take place.
When a server is restarted after a shutdown or crash, it will replay
+ up to 15 minutes, allowing additional updates to take place.
+
When a server is restarted after a shutdown or crash, it will replay
the journal file to incorporate into the zone any updates that took
- place after the last zone dump.
Changes that result from incoming incremental zone transfers are also
- journalled in a similar way.
The zone files of dynamic zones cannot normally be edited by
+ place after the last zone dump.
+
Changes that result from incoming incremental zone transfers are also
+ journalled in a similar way.
+
The zone files of dynamic zones cannot normally be edited by
hand because they are not guaranteed to contain the most recent
dynamic changes - those are only in the journal file.
The only way to ensure that the zone file of a dynamic zone
- is up to date is to run rndc stop.
If you have to make changes to a dynamic zone
+ is up to date is to run rndc stop.
+
If you have to make changes to a dynamic zone
manually, the following procedure will work: Disable dynamic updates
to the zone using
- rndc freeze zone.
- This will also remove the zone's .jnl file
+ rndc freeze zone.
+ This will also remove the zone's .jnl file
and update the master file. Edit the zone file. Run
- rndc unfreeze zone
- to reload the changed zone and re-enable dynamic updates.
The incremental zone transfer (IXFR) protocol is a way for
+ rndc unfreeze zone
+ to reload the changed zone and re-enable dynamic updates.
+
+
+
+
+Incremental Zone Transfers (IXFR)
+
The incremental zone transfer (IXFR) protocol is a way for
slave servers to transfer only changed data, instead of having to
transfer the entire zone. The IXFR protocol is specified in RFC
-1995. See Proposed Standards.
When acting as a master, BIND 9
supports IXFR for those zones
where the necessary change history information is available. These
include master zones maintained by dynamic update and slave zones
whose data was obtained by IXFR. For manually maintained master
zones, and for slave zones obtained by performing a full zone
transfer (AXFR), IXFR is supported only if the option
-ixfr-from-differences is set
-to yes.
-
When acting as a slave, BIND 9 will
+ixfr-from-differences is set
+to yes.
+
+
When acting as a slave, BIND 9 will
attempt to use IXFR unless
it is explicitly disabled. For more information about disabling
-IXFR, see the description of the request-ixfr clause
-of the server statement.
Setting up different views, or visibility, of the DNS space to
-internal and external resolvers is usually referred to as a Split
-DNS setup. There are several reasons an organization
-would want to set up its DNS this way.
One common reason for setting up a DNS system this way is
+IXFR, see the description of the request-ixfr clause
+of the server statement.
+
+
+
+Split DNS
+
Setting up different views, or visibility, of the DNS space to
+internal and external resolvers is usually referred to as a Split
+DNS setup. There are several reasons an organization
+would want to set up its DNS this way.
+
One common reason for setting up a DNS system this way is
to hide "internal" DNS information from "external" clients on the
Internet. There is some debate as to whether or not this is actually useful.
Internal DNS information leaks out in many ways (via email headers,
for example) and most savvy "attackers" can find the information
-they need using other means.
Another common reason for setting up a Split DNS system is
+they need using other means.
+
Another common reason for setting up a Split DNS system is
to allow internal networks that are behind filters or in RFC 1918
space (reserved IP space, as documented in RFC 1918) to resolve DNS
on the Internet. Split DNS can also be used to allow mail from outside
-back in to the internal network.
Here is an example of a split DNS setup:
Let's say a company named Example, Inc.
-(example.com)
+back in to the internal network.
+
Here is an example of a split DNS setup:
+
Let's say a company named Example, Inc.
+(example.com)
has several corporate sites that have an internal network with reserved
Internet Protocol (IP) space and an external demilitarized zone (DMZ),
-or "outside" section of a network, that is available to the public.
Example, Inc. wants its internal clients
+or "outside" section of a network, that is available to the public.
+
Example, Inc. wants its internal clients
to be able to resolve external hostnames and to exchange mail with
people on the outside. The company also wants its internal resolvers
to have access to certain internal-only zones that are not available
-at all outside of the internal network.
In order to accomplish this, the company will set up two sets
+at all outside of the internal network.
+
In order to accomplish this, the company will set up two sets
of name servers. One set will be on the inside network (in the reserved
IP space) and the other set will be on bastion hosts, which are "proxy"
-hosts that can talk to both sides of its network, in the DMZ.
The internal servers will be configured to forward all queries,
-except queries for site1.internal, site2.internal, site1.example.com,
-and site2.example.com, to the servers in the
+hosts that can talk to both sides of its network, in the DMZ.
+
The internal servers will be configured to forward all queries,
+except queries for site1.internal, site2.internal, site1.example.com,
+and site2.example.com, to the servers in the
DMZ. These internal servers will have complete sets of information
-for site1.example.com, site2.example.com,site1.internal,
-and site2.internal.
To protect the site1.internal and site2.internal domains,
+for site1.example.com, site2.example.com,site1.internal,
+and site2.internal.
+
To protect the site1.internal and site2.internal domains,
the internal name servers must be configured to disallow all queries
to these domains from any external hosts, including the bastion
-hosts.
The external servers, which are on the bastion hosts, will
-be configured to serve the "public" version of the site1 and site2.example.com zones.
+hosts.
+
The external servers, which are on the bastion hosts, will
+be configured to serve the "public" version of the site1 and site2.example.com zones.
This could include things such as the host records for public servers
-(www.example.com and ftp.example.com),
-and mail exchange (MX) records (a.mx.example.com and b.mx.example.com).
In addition, the public site1 and site2.example.com zones
+(www.example.com and ftp.example.com),
+and mail exchange (MX) records (a.mx.example.com and b.mx.example.com).
+
In addition, the public site1 and site2.example.com zones
should have special MX records that contain wildcard (`*') records
pointing to the bastion hosts. This is needed because external mail
servers do not have any other way of looking up how to deliver mail
to those internal hosts. With the wildcard records, the mail will
be delivered to the bastion host, which can then forward it on to
-internal hosts.
Here's an example of a wildcard MX record:
* IN MX 10 external1.example.com.
Now that they accept mail on behalf of anything in the internal
+internal hosts.
+
Here's an example of a wildcard MX record:
+
* IN MX 10 external1.example.com.
+
Now that they accept mail on behalf of anything in the internal
network, the bastion hosts will need to know how to deliver mail
to internal hosts. In order for this to work properly, the resolvers on
the bastion hosts will need to be configured to point to the internal
-name servers for DNS resolution.
Queries for internal hostnames will be answered by the internal
+name servers for DNS resolution.
+
Queries for internal hostnames will be answered by the internal
servers, and queries for external hostnames will be forwarded back
-out to the DNS servers on the bastion hosts.
In order for all this to work properly, internal clients will
-need to be configured to query only the internal
+out to the DNS servers on the bastion hosts.
+
In order for all this to work properly, internal clients will
+need to be configured to query only the internal
name servers for DNS queries. This could also be enforced via selective
-filtering on the network.
If everything has been set properly, Example, Inc.'s
-internal clients will now be able to:
Look up any hostnames in the site1 and
-site2.example.com zones.
Look up any hostnames in the site1.internal and
-site2.internal domains.
Look up any hostnames on the Internet.
Exchange mail with internal AND external people.
Hosts on the Internet will be able to:
Look up any hostnames in the site1 and
-site2.example.com zones.
Exchange mail with anyone in the site1 and
-site2.example.com zones.
Here is an example configuration for the setup we just
+filtering on the network.
+
If everything has been set properly, Example, Inc.'s
+internal clients will now be able to:
+
+
Look up any hostnames in the site1 and
+site2.example.com zones.
+
Look up any hostnames in the site1.internal and
+site2.internal domains.
+
Look up any hostnames on the Internet.
+
Exchange mail with internal AND external people.
+
+
Hosts on the Internet will be able to:
+
+
Look up any hostnames in the site1 and
+site2.example.com zones.
+
Exchange mail with anyone in the site1 and
+site2.example.com zones.
+
+
Here is an example configuration for the setup we just
described above. Note that this is only configuration information;
- for information on how to configure your zone files, see Section 3.1
This is a short guide to setting up Transaction SIGnatures
-(TSIG) based transaction security in BIND. It describes changes
+
+
+
+
+TSIG
+
This is a short guide to setting up Transaction SIGnatures
+(TSIG) based transaction security in BIND. It describes changes
to the configuration file as well as what changes are required for
different features, including the process of creating transaction
-keys and using transaction signatures with BIND.
BIND primarily supports TSIG for server to server communication.
+keys and using transaction signatures with BIND.
+
BIND primarily supports TSIG for server to server communication.
This includes zone transfer, notify, and recursive query messages.
-Resolvers based on newer versions of BIND 8 have limited support
-for TSIG.
TSIG might be most useful for dynamic update. A primary
+Resolvers based on newer versions of BIND 8 have limited support
+for TSIG.
+
TSIG might be most useful for dynamic update. A primary
server for a dynamic zone should use access control to control
updates, but IP-based access control is insufficient.
The cryptographic access control provided by TSIG
- is far superior. The nsupdate
- program supports TSIG via the -k and
- -y command line options.
A shared secret is generated to be shared between host1 and host2.
+ is far superior. The nsupdate
+ program supports TSIG via the -k and
+ -y command line options.
+
+
+Generate Shared Keys for Each Pair of Hosts
+
A shared secret is generated to be shared between host1 and host2.
An arbitrary key name is chosen: "host1-host2.". The key name must
-be the same on both hosts.
The following command will generate a 128 bit (16 byte) HMAC-MD5
+be the same on both hosts.
+
+
+Automatic Generation
+
The following command will generate a 128 bit (16 byte) HMAC-MD5
key as described above. Longer keys are better, but shorter keys
are easier to read. Note that the maximum key length is 512 bits;
keys longer than that will be digested with MD5 to produce a 128
-bit key.
dnssec-keygen -a hmac-md5 -b 128 -n HOST host1-host2.
The key is in the file Khost1-host2.+157+00000.private.
+bit key.
+
dnssec-keygen -a hmac-md5 -b 128 -n HOST host1-host2.
+
The key is in the file Khost1-host2.+157+00000.private.
Nothing directly uses this file, but the base-64 encoded string
-following "Key:"
-can be extracted from the file and used as a shared secret:
Key: La/E5CjG9O+os1jq0a2jdA==
The string "La/E5CjG9O+os1jq0a2jdA==" can
-be used as the shared secret.
The shared secret is simply a random sequence of bits, encoded
+following "Key:"
+can be extracted from the file and used as a shared secret:
+
Key: La/E5CjG9O+os1jq0a2jdA==
+
The string "La/E5CjG9O+os1jq0a2jdA==" can
+be used as the shared secret.
+
+
+
+Manual Generation
+
The shared secret is simply a random sequence of bits, encoded
in base-64. Most ASCII strings are valid base-64 strings (assuming
the length is a multiple of 4 and only valid characters are used),
-so the shared secret can be manually generated.
Also, a known string can be run through mmencode or
-a similar program to generate base-64 encoded data.
The algorithm, hmac-md5, is the only one supported by BIND.
+
+
The algorithm, hmac-md5, is the only one supported by BIND.
The secret is the one generated above. Since this is a secret, it
-is recommended that either named.conf be non-world
+is recommended that either named.conf be non-world
readable, or the key directive be added to a non-world readable
-file that is included by named.conf.
At this point, the key is recognized. This means that if the
+file that is included by named.conf.
+
At this point, the key is recognized. This means that if the
server receives a message signed by this key, it can verify the
signature. If the signature is successfully verified, the
-response is signed by the same key.
Since keys are shared between two hosts only, the server must
-be told when keys are to be used. The following is added to the named.conf file
-for host1, if the IP address of host2 is
-10.1.2.3:
server 10.1.2.3 {
+response is signed by the same key.
+
+
+
+Instructing the Server to Use the Key
+
Since keys are shared between two hosts only, the server must
+be told when keys are to be used. The following is added to the named.conf file
+for host1, if the IP address of host2 is
+10.1.2.3:
+
+server 10.1.2.3 {
keys { host1-host2. ;};
};
-
Multiple keys may be present, but only the first is used.
+
+
Multiple keys may be present, but only the first is used.
This directive does not contain any secrets, so it may be in a world-readable
-file.
If host1 sends a message that is a request
-to that address, the message will be signed with the specified key. host1 will
+file.
+
If host1 sends a message that is a request
+to that address, the message will be signed with the specified key. host1 will
expect any responses to signed messages to be signed with the same
-key.
A similar statement must be present in host2's
-configuration file (with host1's address) for host2 to
-sign request messages to host1.
BIND allows IP addresses and ranges to be specified in ACL
+key.
+
A similar statement must be present in host2's
+configuration file (with host1's address) for host2 to
+sign request messages to host1.
+
+
+
+TSIG Key Based Access Control
+
BIND allows IP addresses and ranges to be specified in ACL
definitions and
-allow-{ query | transfer | update } directives.
+allow-{ query | transfer | update } directives.
This has been extended to allow TSIG keys also. The above key would
-be denoted key host1-host2.
An example of an allow-update directive would be:
allow-update { key host1-host2. ;};
-
This allows dynamic updates to succeed only if the request
+be denoted key host1-host2.
+
An example of an allow-update directive would be:
+
+allow-update { key host1-host2. ;};
+
+
This allows dynamic updates to succeed only if the request
was signed by a key named
- "host1-host2.".
You may want to read about the more
- powerful update-policy statement in Section 6.2.24.4.
The processing of TSIG signed messages can result in
several errors. If a signed message is sent to a non-TSIG aware
server, a FORMERR will be returned, since the server will not
understand the record. This is a result of misconfiguration,
since the server must be explicitly configured to send a TSIG
- signed message to a specific server.
If a TSIG aware server receives a message signed by an
+ signed message to a specific server.
+
If a TSIG aware server receives a message signed by an
unknown key, the response will be unsigned with the TSIG
extended error code set to BADKEY. If a TSIG aware server
receives a message with a signature that does not validate, the
@@ -1058,545 +491,226 @@ NAME="AEN923"
the TSIG extended error code set to BADTIME, and the time values
will be adjusted so that the response can be successfully
verified. In any of these cases, the message's rcode is set to
- NOTAUTH.
TKEY is a mechanism for automatically
generating a shared secret between two hosts. There are several
- "modes" of TKEY that specify how the key is
- generated or assigned. BIND 9
+ "modes" of TKEY that specify how the key is
+ generated or assigned. BIND 9
implements only one of these modes,
the Diffie-Hellman key exchange. Both hosts are required to have
a Diffie-Hellman KEY record (although this record is not required
- to be present in a zone). The TKEY process
+ to be present in a zone). The TKEY process
must use signed messages, signed either by TSIG or SIG(0). The
- result of TKEY is a shared secret that can be
- used to sign messages with TSIG. TKEY can also
+ result of TKEY is a shared secret that can be
+ used to sign messages with TSIG. TKEY can also
be used to delete shared secrets that it had previously
- generated.
The TKEY process is initiated by a client
- or server by sending a signed TKEY query
+ generated.
+
The TKEY process is initiated by a client
+ or server by sending a signed TKEY query
(including any appropriate KEYs) to a TKEY-aware server. The
server response, if it indicates success, will contain a
- TKEY record and any appropriate keys. After
+ TKEY record and any appropriate keys. After
this exchange, both participants have enough information to
determine the shared secret; the exact process depends on the
- TKEY mode. When using the Diffie-Hellman
- TKEY mode, Diffie-Hellman keys are exchanged,
- and the shared secret is derived by both participants.
BIND 9 partially supports DNSSEC SIG(0)
+ TKEY mode. When using the Diffie-Hellman
+ TKEY mode, Diffie-Hellman keys are exchanged,
+ and the shared secret is derived by both participants.
+
+
+
+SIG(0)
+
BIND 9 partially supports DNSSEC SIG(0)
transaction signatures as specified in RFC 2535 and RFC2931. SIG(0)
uses public/private keys to authenticate messages. Access control
is performed in the same manner as TSIG keys; privileges can be
- granted or denied based on the key name.
When a SIG(0) signed message is received, it will only be
+ granted or denied based on the key name.
+
When a SIG(0) signed message is received, it will only be
verified if the key is known and trusted by the server; the server
- will not attempt to locate and/or validate the key.
SIG(0) signing of multiple-message TCP streams is not
- supported.
The only tool shipped with BIND 9 that
- generates SIG(0) signed messages is nsupdate.
Cryptographic authentication of DNS information is possible
- through the DNS Security (DNSSEC-bis) extensions,
- defined in RFC <TBA>. This section describes the creation and use
- of DNSSEC signed zones.
In order to set up a DNSSEC secure zone, there are a series
- of steps which must be followed. BIND 9 ships
+ will not attempt to locate and/or validate the key.
+
SIG(0) signing of multiple-message TCP streams is not
+ supported.
+
The only tool shipped with BIND 9 that
+ generates SIG(0) signed messages is nsupdate.
+
+
+
+DNSSEC
+
Cryptographic authentication of DNS information is possible
+ through the DNS Security (DNSSEC-bis) extensions,
+ defined in RFC <TBA>. This section describes the creation and use
+ of DNSSEC signed zones.
+
In order to set up a DNSSEC secure zone, there are a series
+ of steps which must be followed. BIND 9 ships
with several tools
that are used in this process, which are explained in more detail
- below. In all cases, the -h option prints a
+ below. In all cases, the -h option prints a
full list of parameters. Note that the DNSSEC tools require the
keyset files to be in the working directory or the
- directory specified by the -h option, and
+ directory specified by the -h option, and
that the tools shipped with BIND 9.2.x and earlier are not compatible
- with the current ones.
There must also be communication with the administrators of
+ with the current ones.
+
There must also be communication with the administrators of
the parent and/or child zone to transmit keys. A zone's security
status must be indicated by the parent zone for a DNSSEC capable
resolver to trust its data. This is done through the presense
- or absence of a DS record at the delegation
- point.
For other servers to trust data in this zone, they must
+ or absence of a DS record at the delegation
+ point.
+
For other servers to trust data in this zone, they must
either be statically configured with this zone's zone key or the
- zone key of another zone above this one in the DNS tree.
The dnssec-keygen program is used to
- generate keys.
A secure zone must contain one or more zone keys. The
+ zone key of another zone above this one in the DNS tree.
+
+
+Generating Keys
+
The dnssec-keygen program is used to
+ generate keys.
+
A secure zone must contain one or more zone keys. The
zone keys will sign all other records in the zone, as well as
the zone keys of any secure delegated zones. Zone keys must
have the same name as the zone, a name type of
- ZONE, and must be usable for authentication.
+ ZONE, and must be usable for authentication.
It is recommended that zone keys use a cryptographic algorithm
designated as "mandatory to implement" by the IETF; currently
- the only one is RSASHA1.
The following command will generate a 768 bit RSASHA1 key for
- the child.example zone:
dnssec-keygen -a RSASHA1 -b 768 -n ZONE child.example.
Two output files will be produced:
- Kchild.example.+005+12345.key and
- Kchild.example.+005+12345.private (where
+ the only one is RSASHA1.
+
The following command will generate a 768 bit RSASHA1 key for
+ the child.example zone:
+
dnssec-keygen -a RSASHA1 -b 768 -n ZONE child.example.
+
Two output files will be produced:
+ Kchild.example.+005+12345.key and
+ Kchild.example.+005+12345.private (where
12345 is an example of a key tag). The key file names contain
- the key name (child.example.), algorithm (3
+ the key name (child.example.), algorithm (3
is DSA, 1 is RSAMD5, 5 is RSASHA1, etc.), and the key tag (12345 in this case).
- The private key (in the .private file) is
+ The private key (in the .private file) is
used to generate signatures, and the public key (in the
- .key file) is used for signature
- verification.
To generate another key with the same properties (but with
- a different key tag), repeat the above command.
The public keys should be inserted into the zone file by
- including the .key files using
- $INCLUDE statements.
-
The dnssec-signzone program is used to
- sign a zone.
Any keyset files corresponding
+ .key file) is used for signature
+ verification.
+
To generate another key with the same properties (but with
+ a different key tag), repeat the above command.
+
The public keys should be inserted into the zone file by
+ including the .key files using
+ $INCLUDE statements.
+
+
+
+
+Signing the Zone
+
The dnssec-signzone program is used to
+ sign a zone.
+
Any keyset files corresponding
to secure subzones should be present. The zone signer will
- generate NSEC and RRSIG
- records for the zone, as well as DS for
- the child zones if '-d' is specified.
- If '-d' is not specified then DS RRsets for
- the secure child zones need to be added manually.
The following command signs the zone, assuming it is in a
- file called zone.child.example. By
+ generate NSEC and RRSIG
+ records for the zone, as well as DS for
+ the child zones if '-d' is specified.
+ If '-d' is not specified then DS RRsets for
+ the secure child zones need to be added manually.
+
The following command signs the zone, assuming it is in a
+ file called zone.child.example. By
default, all zone keys which have an available private key are
- used to generate signatures.
One output file is produced:
+ zone.child.example.signed. This file
+ should be referenced by named.conf as the
+ input file for the zone.
+
dnssec-signzone will also produce a
keyset and dsset files and optionally a dlvset file. These
are used to provide the parent zone administators with the
- DNSKEYs (or their corresponding DS
- records) that are the secure entry point to the zone.
Unlike BIND 8,
-BIND 9 does not verify signatures on load,
+ DNSKEYs (or their corresponding DS
+ records) that are the secure entry point to the zone.
+
+
+
+Configuring Servers
+
Unlike BIND 8,
+BIND 9 does not verify signatures on load,
so zone keys for authoritative zones do not need to be specified
-in the configuration file.
The public key for any security root must be present in
-the configuration file's trusted-keys
-statement, as described later in this document.
BIND 9 fully supports all currently defined forms of IPv6
+in the configuration file.
+
The public key for any security root must be present in
+the configuration file's trusted-keys
+statement, as described later in this document.
+
+
+
+
+IPv6 Support in BIND 9
+
BIND 9 fully supports all currently defined forms of IPv6
name to address and address to name lookups. It will also use
IPv6 addresses to make queries when running on an IPv6 capable
- system.
For forward lookups, BIND 9 supports only AAAA
+ system.
+
For forward lookups, BIND 9 supports only AAAA
records. The use of A6 records is deprecated by RFC 3363, and the
- support for forward lookups in BIND 9 is
+ support for forward lookups in BIND 9 is
removed accordingly.
- However, authoritative BIND 9 name servers still
+ However, authoritative BIND 9 name servers still
load zone files containing A6 records correctly, answer queries
for A6 records, and accept zone transfer for a zone containing A6
- records.
For IPv6 reverse lookups, BIND 9 supports
+ records.
+
For IPv6 reverse lookups, BIND 9 supports
the traditional "nibble" format used in the
- ip6.arpa domain, as well as the older, deprecated
- ip6.int domain.
- BIND 9 formerly
+ ip6.arpa domain, as well as the older, deprecated
+ ip6.int domain.
+ BIND 9 formerly
supported the "binary label" (also known as "bitstring") format.
The support of binary labels, however, is now completely removed
according to the changes in RFC 3363.
- Any applications in BIND 9 do not understand
+ Any applications in BIND 9 do not understand
the format any more, and will return an error if given.
- In particular, an authoritative BIND 9 name
- server rejects to load a zone file containing binary labels.
For an overview of the format and structure of IPv6 addresses,
- see Section A.2.1.
The AAAA record is a parallel to the IPv4 A record. It
+ In particular, an authoritative BIND 9 name
+ server rejects to load a zone file containing binary labels.
The AAAA record is a parallel to the IPv4 A record. It
specifies the entire address in a single record. For
- example,
$ORIGIN example.com.
+ example,
+
+$ORIGIN example.com.
host 3600 IN AAAA 2001:db8::1
-
It is recommended that IPv4-in-IPv6 mapped addresses not
+
+
It is recommended that IPv4-in-IPv6 mapped addresses not
be used. If a host has an IPv4 address, use an A record, not
- a AAAA, with ::ffff:192.168.42.1 as the
- address.
When looking up an address in nibble format, the address
+ a AAAA, with ::ffff:192.168.42.1 as the
+ address.
+
+
+
+Address to Name Lookups Using Nibble Format
+
When looking up an address in nibble format, the address
components are simply reversed, just as in IPv4, and
- ip6.arpa. is appended to the resulting name.
+ ip6.arpa. is appended to the resulting name.
For example, the following would provide reverse name lookup for
a host with address
- 2001:db8::1.
Traditionally applications have been linked with a stub resolver
library that sends recursive DNS queries to a local caching name
-server.
IPv6 once introduced new complexity into the resolution process,
+server.
+
IPv6 once introduced new complexity into the resolution process,
such as following A6 chains and DNAME records, and simultaneous
lookup of IPv4 and IPv6 addresses. Though most of the complexity was
then removed, these are hard or impossible
-to implement in a traditional stub resolver.
Instead, BIND 9 provides resolution services to local clients
+to implement in a traditional stub resolver.
+
Instead, BIND 9 provides resolution services to local clients
using a combination of a lightweight resolver library and a resolver
daemon process running on the local host. These communicate using
a simple UDP-based protocol, the "lightweight resolver protocol"
-that is distinct from and simpler than the full DNS protocol.
To use the lightweight resolver interface, the system must
-run the resolver daemon lwresd or a local
-name server configured with a lwres statement.
By default, applications using the lightweight resolver library will make
+that is distinct from and simpler than the full DNS protocol.
+
+
+
+Running a Resolver Daemon
+
To use the lightweight resolver interface, the system must
+run the resolver daemon lwresd or a local
+name server configured with a lwres statement.
+
By default, applications using the lightweight resolver library will make
UDP requests to the IPv4 loopback address (127.0.0.1) on port 921. The
-address can be overridden by lwserver lines in
-/etc/resolv.conf.
The daemon currently only looks in the DNS, but in the future
-it may use other sources such as /etc/hosts,
-NIS, etc.
The lwresd daemon is essentially a
+address can be overridden by lwserver lines in
+/etc/resolv.conf.
+
The daemon currently only looks in the DNS, but in the future
+it may use other sources such as /etc/hosts,
+NIS, etc.
+
The lwresd daemon is essentially a
caching-only name server that responds to requests using the lightweight
resolver protocol rather than the DNS protocol. Because it needs
to run on each host, it is designed to require no or minimal configuration.
Unless configured otherwise, it uses the name servers listed on
-nameserver lines in /etc/resolv.conf
+nameserver lines in /etc/resolv.conf
as forwarders, but is also capable of doing the resolution autonomously if
-none are specified.
The lwresd daemon may also be configured with a
-named.conf style configuration file, in
-/etc/lwresd.conf by default. A name server may also
+none are specified.
+
The lwresd daemon may also be configured with a
+named.conf style configuration file, in
+/etc/lwresd.conf by default. A name server may also
be configured to act as a lightweight resolver daemon using the
-lwres statement in named.conf.
BIND 9 configuration is broadly similar
-to BIND 8; however, there are a few new areas
-of configuration, such as views. BIND
-8 configuration files should work with few alterations in BIND
+
+
+
+
BIND 9 configuration is broadly similar
+to BIND 8; however, there are a few new areas
+of configuration, such as views. BIND
+8 configuration files should work with few alterations in BIND
9, although more complex configurations should be reviewed to check
if they can be more efficiently implemented using the new features
-found in BIND 9.
BIND 4 configuration files can be converted to the new format
+found in BIND 9.
+
BIND 4 configuration files can be converted to the new format
using the shell script
-contrib/named-bootconf/named-bootconf.sh.
A quoted string which will be used as
+a DNS name, for example "my.test.domain".
+
+
+
dotted_decimal
+
One to four integers valued 0 through
+255 separated by dots (`.'), such as 123,
+45.67 or 89.123.45.67.
+
+
+
ip4_addr
+
An IPv4 address with exactly four elements
+in dotted_decimal notation.
+
+
+
ip6_addr
+
An IPv6 address, such as 2001:db8::1234.
IPv6 scoped addresses that have ambiguity on their scope zones must be
disambiguated by an appropriate zone ID with the percent character
(`%') as delimiter.
@@ -290,2043 +152,677 @@ configuration changes.
However, since there is no standard mapping for such names and
identifier values, currently only interface names as link identifiers
are supported, assuming one-to-one mapping between interfaces and links.
-For example, a link-local address fe80::1 on the
-link attached to the interface ne0
-can be specified as fe80::1%ne0.
+For example, a link-local address fe80::1 on the
+link attached to the interface ne0
+can be specified as fe80::1%ne0.
Note that on most systems link-local addresses always have the
-ambiguity, and need to be disambiguated.
ip_addr
An ip4_addr or ip6_addr.
ip_port
An IP port number.
-number is limited to 0 through 65535, with values
+ambiguity, and need to be disambiguated.
+
+
+
ip_addr
+
An ip4_addr or ip6_addr.
+
+
+
ip_port
+
An IP port number.
+number is limited to 0 through 65535, with values
below 1024 typically restricted to use by processes running as root.
In some cases an asterisk (`*') character can be used as a placeholder to
-select a random high-numbered port.
ip_prefix
An IP network specified as an ip_addr,
+select a random high-numbered port.
+
+
+
ip_prefix
+
An IP network specified as an ip_addr,
followed by a slash (`/') and then the number of bits in the netmask.
-Trailing zeros in a ip_addr may omitted.
-For example, 127/8 is the network 127.0.0.0 with
-netmask 255.0.0.0 and 1.2.3.0/28 is
-network 1.2.3.0 with netmask 255.255.255.240.
key_id
A domain_name representing
-the name of a shared key, to be used for transaction security.
key_list
A list of one or more key_ids,
-separated by semicolons and ending with a semicolon.
number
A non-negative 32 bit integer
+Trailing zeros in a ip_addr may omitted.
+For example, 127/8 is the network 127.0.0.0 with
+netmask 255.0.0.0 and 1.2.3.0/28 is
+network 1.2.3.0 with netmask 255.255.255.240.
+
+
+
key_id
+
A domain_name representing
+the name of a shared key, to be used for transaction security.
+
+
+
key_list
+
A list of one or more key_ids,
+separated by semicolons and ending with a semicolon.
+
+
+
number
+
A non-negative 32 bit integer
(i.e., a number between 0 and 4294967295, inclusive).
Its acceptable value might further
-be limited by the context in which it is used.
path_name
A quoted string which will be used as
-a pathname, such as zones/master/my.test.domain.
size_spec
A number, the word unlimited,
-or the word default.
An unlimitedsize_spec requests unlimited
-use, or the maximum available amount. A default size_spec uses
-the limit that was in force when the server was started.
A number can
-optionally be followed by a scaling factor: K or k for
-kilobytes, M or m for
-megabytes, and G or g for gigabytes,
-which scale by 1024, 1024*1024, and 1024*1024*1024 respectively.
-
The value must be representable as a 64-bit unsigned integer
+be limited by the context in which it is used.
+
+
+
path_name
+
A quoted string which will be used as
+a pathname, such as zones/master/my.test.domain.
+
+
+
size_spec
+
+
A number, the word unlimited,
+or the word default.
+
+An unlimitedsize_spec requests unlimited
+use, or the maximum available amount. A default size_spec uses
+the limit that was in force when the server was started.
+
A number can
+optionally be followed by a scaling factor: K or k for
+kilobytes, M or m for
+megabytes, and G or g for gigabytes,
+which scale by 1024, 1024*1024, and 1024*1024*1024 respectively.
+
The value must be representable as a 64-bit unsigned integer
(0 to 18446744073709551615, inclusive).
-Using unlimited is the best way
-to safely set a really large number.
yes_or_no
Either yes or no.
-The words true and false are
-also accepted, as are the numbers 1 and 0.
dialup_option
One of yes,
-no, notify,
-notify-passive, refresh or
-passive.
-When used in a zone, notify-passive,
-refresh, and passive
-are restricted to slave and stub zones.
address_match_list = address_match_list_element ;
- [ address_match_list_element; ... ]
-address_match_list_element = [ ! ] (ip_address [/length] |
+Using unlimited is the best way
+to safely set a really large number.
+
+
+
+
yes_or_no
+
Either yes or no.
+The words true and false are
+also accepted, as are the numbers 1 and 0.
+
+
+
dialup_option
+
One of yes,
+no, notify,
+notify-passive, refresh or
+passive.
+When used in a zone, notify-passive,
+refresh, and passive
+are restricted to slave and stub zones.
Address match lists are primarily used to determine access
+
+
+
+
+Definition and Usage
+
Address match lists are primarily used to determine access
control for various server operations. They are also used in
-the listen-on and sortlist
+the listen-on and sortlist
statements. The elements
-which constitute an address match list can be any of the following:
an IP address (IPv4 or IPv6)
an IP prefix (in `/' notation)
a key ID, as defined by the key statement
the name of an address match list previously defined with
-the acl statement
a nested address match list enclosed in braces
Elements can be negated with a leading exclamation mark (`!'),
+which constitute an address match list can be any of the following:
+
+
an IP address (IPv4 or IPv6)
+
an IP prefix (in `/' notation)
+
a key ID, as defined by the key statement
+
the name of an address match list defined with
+the acl statement
+
a nested address match list enclosed in braces
+
+
Elements can be negated with a leading exclamation mark (`!'),
and the match list names "any", "none", "localhost", and "localnets"
are predefined. More information on those names can be found in
-the description of the acl statement.
The addition of the key clause made the name of this syntactic
+the description of the acl statement.
+
The addition of the key clause made the name of this syntactic
element something of a misnomer, since security keys can be used
to validate access without regard to a host or network address. Nonetheless,
-the term "address match list" is still used throughout the documentation.
When a given IP address or prefix is compared to an address
+the term "address match list" is still used throughout the documentation.
+
When a given IP address or prefix is compared to an address
match list, the list is traversed in order until an element matches.
The interpretation of a match depends on whether the list is being used
for access control, defining listen-on ports, or in a sortlist,
-and whether the element was negated.
When used as an access control list, a non-negated match allows
+and whether the element was negated.
+
When used as an access control list, a non-negated match allows
access and a negated match denies access. If there is no match,
-access is denied. The clauses allow-notify,
-allow-query, allow-transfer,
-allow-update, allow-update-forwarding,
-and blackhole all
+access is denied. The clauses allow-notify,
+allow-query, allow-transfer,
+allow-update, allow-update-forwarding,
+and blackhole all
use address match lists this. Similarly, the listen-on option will cause
the server to not accept queries on any of the machine's addresses
-which do not match the list.
Because of the first-match aspect of the algorithm, an element
+which do not match the list.
+
Because of the first-match aspect of the algorithm, an element
that defines a subset of another element in the list should come
before the broader element, regardless of whether either is negated. For
example, in
-1.2.3/24; ! 1.2.3.13; the 1.2.3.13 element is
+1.2.3/24; ! 1.2.3.13; the 1.2.3.13 element is
completely useless because the algorithm will match any lookup for
1.2.3.13 to the 1.2.3/24 element.
-Using ! 1.2.3.13; 1.2.3/24 fixes
+Using ! 1.2.3.13; 1.2.3/24 fixes
that problem by having 1.2.3.13 blocked by the negation but all
-other 1.2.3.* hosts fall through.
The BIND 9 comment syntax allows for comments to appear
-anywhere that white space may appear in a BIND configuration
+other 1.2.3.* hosts fall through.
+
+
+
+
+Comment Syntax
+
The BIND 9 comment syntax allows for comments to appear
+anywhere that white space may appear in a BIND configuration
file. To appeal to programmers of all kinds, they can be written
-in the C, C++, or shell/perl style.
Comments may appear anywhere that whitespace may appear in
-a BIND configuration file.
C-style comments start with the two characters /* (slash,
+in the C, C++, or shell/perl style.
+
+
+Syntax
+
/* This is a BIND comment as in C */
+
+
+
// This is a BIND comment as in C++
+
+
+
# This is a BIND comment as in common UNIX shells and perl
+
+
+
+
+
+Definition and Usage
+
Comments may appear anywhere that whitespace may appear in
+a BIND configuration file.
+
C-style comments start with the two characters /* (slash,
star) and end with */ (star, slash). Because they are completely
delimited with these characters, they can be used to comment only
-a portion of a line or to span multiple lines.
C-style comments cannot be nested. For example, the following
-is not valid because the entire comment ends with the first */:
/* This is the start of a comment.
+a portion of a line or to span multiple lines.
+
C-style comments cannot be nested. For example, the following
+is not valid because the entire comment ends with the first */:
+
/* This is the start of a comment.
This is still part of the comment.
/* This is an incorrect attempt at nesting a comment. */
This is no longer in any comment. */
-
C++-style comments start with the two characters // (slash,
+
+
C++-style comments start with the two characters // (slash,
slash) and continue to the end of the physical line. They cannot
be continued across multiple physical lines; to have one logical
-comment span multiple lines, each line must use the // pair.
For example:
// This is the start of a comment. The next line
+comment span multiple lines, each line must use the // pair.
+
For example:
+
// This is the start of a comment. The next line
// is a new comment, even though it is logically
// part of the previous comment.
-
Shell-style (or perl-style, if you prefer) comments start
-with the character # (number sign) and continue to the end of the
-physical line, as in C++ comments.
For example:
# This is the start of a comment. The next line
+
+
Shell-style (or perl-style, if you prefer) comments start
+with the character # (number sign) and continue to the end of the
+physical line, as in C++ comments.
+
For example:
+
# This is the start of a comment. The next line
# is a new comment, even though it is logically
# part of the previous comment.
-
-
Warning
You cannot use the semicolon (`;') character
+
+
+
+
+
Warning
+
You cannot use the semicolon (`;') character
to start a comment such as you would in a zone file. The
semicolon indicates the end of a configuration
- statement.
A BIND 9 configuration consists of statements and comments.
+ statement.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Configuration File Grammar
+
A BIND 9 configuration consists of statements and comments.
Statements end with a semicolon. Statements and comments are the
only elements that can appear without enclosing braces. Many
statements contain a block of sub-statements, which are also
- terminated with a semicolon.
The following statements are supported:
acl
defines a named IP address
-matching list, for access control and other uses.
controls
declares control channels to be used
-by the rndc utility.
include
includes a file.
key
specifies key information for use in
-authentication and authorization using TSIG.
logging
specifies what the server logs, and where
-the log messages are sent.
lwres
configures named to
-also act as a light weight resolver daemon (lwresd).
masters
defines a named masters list for
-inclusion in stub and slave zone masters clauses.
options
controls global server configuration
-options and sets defaults for other statements.
server
sets certain configuration options on
-a per-server basis.
trusted-keys
defines trusted DNSSEC keys.
view
defines a view.
zone
defines a zone.
The logging and
- options statements may only occur once per
- configuration.
The acl statement assigns a symbolic
name to an address match list. It gets its name from a primary
- use of address match lists: Access Control Lists (ACLs).
Note that an address match list's name must be defined
- with acl before it can be used elsewhere; no
- forward references are allowed.
The following ACLs are built-in:
any
Matches all hosts.
none
Matches no hosts.
localhost
Matches the IPv4 and IPv6 addresses of all network
-interfaces on the system.
localnets
Matches any host on an IPv4 or IPv6 network
+ use of address match lists: Access Control Lists (ACLs).
+
Note that an address match list's name must be defined
+ with acl before it can be used elsewhere; no
+ forward references are allowed.
+
The following ACLs are built-in:
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
any
+
Matches all hosts.
+
+
+
none
+
Matches no hosts.
+
+
+
localhost
+
Matches the IPv4 and IPv6 addresses of all network
+interfaces on the system.
+
+
+
localnets
+
Matches any host on an IPv4 or IPv6 network
for which the system has an interface.
Some systems do not provide a way to determine the prefix lengths of
local IPv6 addresses.
-In such a case, localnets only matches the local
-IPv6 addresses, just like localhost.
-
The controls statement declares control
channels to be used by system administrators to control the
operation of the name server. These control channels are
- used by the rndc utility to send commands to
- and retrieve non-DNS results from a name server.
An inet control channel is a TCP
+ used by the rndc utility to send commands to
+ and retrieve non-DNS results from a name server.
+
An inet control channel is a TCP
socket listening at the specified
- ip_port on the specified
- ip_addr, which can be an IPv4 or IPv6
- address. An ip_addr
- of * is interpreted as the IPv4 wildcard
+ ip_port on the specified
+ ip_addr, which can be an IPv4 or IPv6
+ address. An ip_addr
+ of * is interpreted as the IPv4 wildcard
address; connections will be accepted on any of the system's
IPv4 addresses. To listen on the IPv6 wildcard address,
- use an ip_addr of ::.
- If you will only use rndc on the local host,
- using the loopback address (127.0.0.1
- or ::1) is recommended for maximum
+ use an ip_addr of ::.
+ If you will only use rndc on the local host,
+ using the loopback address (127.0.0.1
+ or ::1) is recommended for maximum
security.
-
If no port is specified, port 953
- is used. "*" cannot be used for
- ip_port.
The ability to issue commands over the control channel is
- restricted by the allow and
- keys clauses. Connections to the control
+
+
+ If no port is specified, port 953
+ is used. "*" cannot be used for
+ ip_port.
+
The ability to issue commands over the control channel is
+ restricted by the allow and
+ keys clauses. Connections to the control
channel are permitted based on the
- address_match_list. This is for simple
- IP address based filtering only; any key_id
- elements of the address_match_list are
+ address_match_list. This is for simple
+ IP address based filtering only; any key_id
+ elements of the address_match_list are
ignored.
-
The primary authorization mechanism of the command
- channel is the key_list, which contains
- a list of key_ids.
- Each key_id in
- the key_list is authorized to execute
+
+
The primary authorization mechanism of the command
+ channel is the key_list, which contains
+ a list of key_ids.
+ Each key_id in
+ the key_list is authorized to execute
commands over the control channel.
- See Remote Name Daemon Control application in
- Section 3.3.1.2) for information about
- configuring keys in rndc.
+If no controls statement is present,
+named will set up a default
control channel listening on the loopback address 127.0.0.1
and its IPv6 counterpart ::1.
-In this case, and also when the controls statement
-is present but does not have a keys clause,
-named will attempt to load the command channel key
-from the file rndc.key in
-/etc (or whatever sysconfdir
-was specified as when BIND was built).
-To create a rndc.key file, run
-rndc-confgen -a.
-
The rndc.key feature was created to
- ease the transition of systems from BIND 8,
+In this case, and also when the controls statement
+is present but does not have a keys clause,
+named will attempt to load the command channel key
+from the file rndc.key in
+/etc (or whatever sysconfdir
+was specified as when BIND was built).
+To create a rndc.key file, run
+rndc-confgen -a.
+
+
The rndc.key feature was created to
+ ease the transition of systems from BIND 8,
which did not have digital signatures on its command channel messages
- and thus did not have a keys clause.
+ and thus did not have a keys clause.
-It makes it possible to use an existing BIND 8
-configuration file in BIND 9 unchanged,
-and still have rndc work the same way
-ndc worked in BIND 8, simply by executing the
-command rndc-confgen -a after BIND 9 is
+It makes it possible to use an existing BIND 8
+configuration file in BIND 9 unchanged,
+and still have rndc work the same way
+ndc worked in BIND 8, simply by executing the
+command rndc-confgen -a after BIND 9 is
installed.
-
Since the rndc.key feature
+
+
+ Since the rndc.key feature
is only intended to allow the backward-compatible usage of
- BIND 8 configuration files, this feature does not
+ BIND 8 configuration files, this feature does not
have a high degree of configurability. You cannot easily change
the key name or the size of the secret, so you should make a
- rndc.conf with your own key if you wish to change
- those things. The rndc.key file also has its
+ rndc.conf with your own key if you wish to change
+ those things. The rndc.key file also has its
permissions set such that only the owner of the file (the user that
- named is running as) can access it. If you
+ named is running as) can access it. If you
desire greater flexibility in allowing other users to access
- rndc commands then you need to create an
- rndc.conf and make it group readable by a group
- that contains the users who should have access.
The UNIX control channel type of BIND 8 is not supported
- in BIND 9, and is not expected to be added in future
+ rndc commands then you need to create an
+ rndc.conf and make it group readable by a group
+ that contains the users who should have access.
+
The UNIX control channel type of BIND 8 is not supported
+ in BIND 9, and is not expected to be added in future
releases. If it is present in the controls statement from a
- BIND 8 configuration file, it is ignored
- and a warning is logged.
To disable the command channel, use an empty controls
-statement: controls { };.
-
The include statement inserts the
- specified file at the point where the include
- statement is encountered. The include
+ BIND 8 configuration file, it is ignored
+ and a warning is logged.
+
+To disable the command channel, use an empty controls
+statement: controls { };.
+
+
+
+
+include Statement Grammar
+
include filename;
+
+
+
+include Statement Definition and Usage
+
The include statement inserts the
+ specified file at the point where the include
+ statement is encountered. The include
statement facilitates the administration of configuration files
by permitting the reading or writing of some things but not
others. For example, the statement could include private keys
- that are readable only by the name server.
+The key statement can occur at the top level
+of the configuration file or inside a view
+statement. Keys defined in top-level key
statements can be used in all views. Keys intended for use in
-a controls statement
-(see Section 6.2.4)
+a controls statement
+(see the section called “controls Statement Definition and Usage”)
must be defined at the top level.
-
The key_id, also known as the
+
+
The key_id, also known as the
key name, is a domain name uniquely identifying the key. It can
-be used in a server
+be used in a server
statement to cause requests sent to that
server to be signed with this key, or in address match lists to
verify that incoming requests have been signed with a key
-matching this name, algorithm, and secret.
The algorithm_id is a string
+matching this name, algorithm, and secret.
+
The algorithm_id is a string
that specifies a security/authentication algorithm. The only
algorithm currently supported with TSIG authentication is
-hmac-md5. The
-secret_string is the secret to be
+hmac-md5. The
+secret_string is the secret to be
used by the algorithm, and is treated as a base-64 encoded
-string.
The logging statement configures a wide
-variety of logging options for the name server. Its channel phrase
+
+
+
+
+logging Statement Definition and Usage
+
The logging statement configures a wide
+variety of logging options for the name server. Its channel phrase
associates output methods, format options and severity levels with
-a name that can then be used with the category phrase
-to select how various classes of messages are logged.
Only one logging statement is used to define
-as many channels and categories as are wanted. If there is no logging statement,
-the logging configuration will be:
logging {
+a name that can then be used with the category phrase
+to select how various classes of messages are logged.
+
Only one logging statement is used to define
+as many channels and categories as are wanted. If there is no logging statement,
+the logging configuration will be:
In BIND 9, the logging configuration is only established when
-the entire configuration file has been parsed. In BIND 8, it was
-established as soon as the logging statement
+
+
In BIND 9, the logging configuration is only established when
+the entire configuration file has been parsed. In BIND 8, it was
+established as soon as the logging statement
was parsed. When the server is starting up, all logging messages
regarding syntax errors in the configuration file go to the default
-channels, or to standard error if the "-g" option
-was specified.
All log output goes to one or more channels;
-you can make as many of them as you want.
Every channel definition must include a destination clause that
+channels, or to standard error if the "-g" option
+was specified.
+
+
+The channel Phrase
+
All log output goes to one or more channels;
+you can make as many of them as you want.
+
Every channel definition must include a destination clause that
says whether messages selected for the channel go to a file, to a
particular syslog facility, to the standard error stream, or are
discarded. It can optionally also limit the message severity level
that will be accepted by the channel (the default is
-info), and whether to include a
-named-generated time stamp, the category name
-and/or severity level (the default is not to include any).
The null destination clause
+info), and whether to include a
+named-generated time stamp, the category name
+and/or severity level (the default is not to include any).
+
The null destination clause
causes all messages sent to the channel to be discarded;
-in that case, other options for the channel are meaningless.
The file destination clause directs the channel
+in that case, other options for the channel are meaningless.
+
The file destination clause directs the channel
to a disk file. It can include limitations
both on how large the file is allowed to become, and how many versions
-of the file will be saved each time the file is opened.
If you use the versions log file option, then
-named will retain that many backup versions of the file by
+of the file will be saved each time the file is opened.
+
If you use the versions log file option, then
+named will retain that many backup versions of the file by
renaming them when opening. For example, if you choose to keep 3 old versions
-of the file lamers.log then just before it is opened
-lamers.log.1 is renamed to
-lamers.log.2, lamers.log.0 is renamed
-to lamers.log.1, and lamers.log is
-renamed to lamers.log.0.
-You can say versions unlimited to not limit
+of the file lamers.log then just before it is opened
+lamers.log.1 is renamed to
+lamers.log.2, lamers.log.0 is renamed
+to lamers.log.1, and lamers.log is
+renamed to lamers.log.0.
+You can say versions unlimited to not limit
the number of versions.
-If a size option is associated with the log file,
+If a size option is associated with the log file,
then renaming is only done when the file being opened exceeds the
indicated size. No backup versions are kept by default; any existing
-log file is simply appended.
The size option for files is used to limit log
-growth. If the file ever exceeds the size, then named will
-stop writing to the file unless it has a versions option
+log file is simply appended.
+
The size option for files is used to limit log
+growth. If the file ever exceeds the size, then named will
+stop writing to the file unless it has a versions option
associated with it. If backup versions are kept, the files are rolled as
described above and a new one begun. If there is no
-versions option, no more data will be written to the log
+versions option, no more data will be written to the log
until some out-of-band mechanism removes or truncates the log to less than the
maximum size. The default behavior is not to limit the size of the
-file.
The syslog destination clause directs the
channel to the system log. Its argument is a
-syslog facility as described in the syslog man
-page. Known facilities are kern, user,
-mail, daemon, auth,
-syslog, lpr, news,
-uucp, cron, authpriv,
-ftp, local0, local1,
-local2, local3, local4,
-local5, local6 and
-local7, however not all facilities are supported on
+syslog facility as described in the syslog man
+page. Known facilities are kern, user,
+mail, daemon, auth,
+syslog, lpr, news,
+uucp, cron, authpriv,
+ftp, local0, local1,
+local2, local3, local4,
+local5, local6 and
+local7, however not all facilities are supported on
all operating systems.
-How syslog will handle messages sent to
-this facility is described in the syslog.conf man
-page. If you have a system which uses a very old version of syslog that
-only uses two arguments to the openlog() function,
-then this clause is silently ignored.
The severity clause works like syslog's
+How syslog will handle messages sent to
+this facility is described in the syslog.conf man
+page. If you have a system which uses a very old version of syslog that
+only uses two arguments to the openlog() function,
+then this clause is silently ignored.
+
The severity clause works like syslog's
"priorities", except that they can also be used if you are writing
-straight to a file rather than using syslog.
+straight to a file rather than using syslog.
Messages which are not at least of the severity level given will
not be selected for the channel; messages of higher severity levels
-will be accepted.
If you are using syslog, then the syslog.conf priorities
+will be accepted.
+
If you are using syslog, then the syslog.conf priorities
will also determine what eventually passes through. For example,
-defining a channel facility and severity as daemon and debug but
-only logging daemon.warning via syslog.conf will
-cause messages of severity info and notice to
-be dropped. If the situation were reversed, with named writing
-messages of only warning or higher, then syslogd would
-print all messages it received from the channel.
The stderr destination clause directs the
+defining a channel facility and severity as daemon and debug but
+only logging daemon.warning via syslog.conf will
+cause messages of severity info and notice to
+be dropped. If the situation were reversed, with named writing
+messages of only warning or higher, then syslogd would
+print all messages it received from the channel.
+
The stderr destination clause directs the
channel to the server's standard error stream. This is intended for
use when the server is running as a foreground process, for example
-when debugging a configuration.
The server can supply extensive debugging information when
+when debugging a configuration.
+
The server can supply extensive debugging information when
it is in debugging mode. If the server's global debug level is greater
than zero, then debugging mode will be active. The global debug
-level is set either by starting the named server
-with the -d flag followed by a positive integer,
-or by running rndc trace.
+level is set either by starting the named server
+with the -d flag followed by a positive integer,
+or by running rndc trace.
The global debug level
-can be set to zero, and debugging mode turned off, by running ndc
-notrace. All debugging messages in the server have a debug
+can be set to zero, and debugging mode turned off, by running ndc
+notrace. All debugging messages in the server have a debug
level, and higher debug levels give more detailed output. Channels
-that specify a specific debug severity, for example:
channel specific_debug_level {
+that specify a specific debug severity, for example:
+
will get debugging output of level 3 or less any time the
+
+
will get debugging output of level 3 or less any time the
server is in debugging mode, regardless of the global debugging
-level. Channels with dynamic severity use the
-server's global debug level to determine what messages to print.
If print-time has been turned on, then
-the date and time will be logged. print-time may
-be specified for a syslog channel, but is usually
-pointless since syslog also prints the date and
-time. If print-category is requested, then the
-category of the message will be logged as well. Finally, if print-severity is
-on, then the severity level of the message will be logged. The print- options may
+level. Channels with dynamic severity use the
+server's global debug level to determine what messages to print.
+
If print-time has been turned on, then
+the date and time will be logged. print-time may
+be specified for a syslog channel, but is usually
+pointless since syslog also prints the date and
+time. If print-category is requested, then the
+category of the message will be logged as well. Finally, if print-severity is
+on, then the severity level of the message will be logged. The print- options may
be used in any combination, and will always be printed in the following
-order: time, category, severity. Here is an example where all three print- options
-are on:
28-Feb-2000 15:05:32.863 general: notice: running
There are four predefined channels that are used for
-named's default logging as follows. How they are
-used is described in Section 6.2.10.2.
-
channel default_syslog {
+order: time, category, severity. Here is an example where all three print- options
+are on:
+
28-Feb-2000 15:05:32.863 general: notice: running
+
There are four predefined channels that are used for
+named's default logging as follows. How they are
+used is described in the section called “The category Phrase”.
+
+
channel default_syslog {
syslog daemon; // send to syslog's daemon
// facility
severity info; // only send priority info
@@ -2354,78 +850,37 @@ channel null {
null; // toss anything sent to
// this channel
};
-
The default_debug channel has the special
+
+
The default_debug channel has the special
property that it only produces output when the server's debug level is
-nonzero. It normally writes to a file named.run
-in the server's working directory.
For security reasons, when the "-u"
-command line option is used, the named.run file
-is created only after named has changed to the
-new UID, and any debug output generated while named is
+nonzero. It normally writes to a file named.run
+in the server's working directory.
+
For security reasons, when the "-u"
+command line option is used, the named.run file
+is created only after named has changed to the
+new UID, and any debug output generated while named is
starting up and still running as root is discarded. If you need
-to capture this output, you must run the server with the "-g"
-option and redirect standard error to a file.
Once a channel is defined, it cannot be redefined. Thus you
+to capture this output, you must run the server with the "-g"
+option and redirect standard error to a file.
+
Once a channel is defined, it cannot be redefined. Thus you
cannot alter the built-in channels directly, but you can modify
-the default logging by pointing categories at channels you have defined.
There are many categories, so you can send the logs you want
+the default logging by pointing categories at channels you have defined.
+
+
+
+The category Phrase
+
There are many categories, so you can send the logs you want
to see wherever you want, without seeing logs you don't want. If
you don't specify a list of channels for a category, then log messages
-in that category will be sent to the default category
+in that category will be sent to the default category
instead. If you don't specify a default category, the following
-"default default" is used:
Following are the available categories and brief descriptions
+
+
Following are the available categories and brief descriptions
of the types of log information they contain. More
-categories may be added in future BIND releases.
default
The default category defines the logging
+categories may be added in future BIND releases.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
default
+
The default category defines the logging
options for those categories where no specific configuration has been
-defined.
general
The catch-all. Many things still aren't
-classified into categories, and they all end up here.
database
Messages relating to the databases used
-internally by the name server to store zone and cache data.
security
Approval and denial of requests.
config
Configuration file parsing and processing.
resolver
DNS resolution, such as the recursive
-lookups performed on behalf of clients by a caching name server.
xfer-in
Zone transfers the server is receiving.
xfer-out
Zone transfers the server is sending.
notify
The NOTIFY protocol.
client
Processing of client requests.
unmatched
Messages that named was unable to determine the
-class of or for which there was no matching view.
-A one line summary is also logged to the client category.
+defined.
+
+
+
general
+
The catch-all. Many things still aren't
+classified into categories, and they all end up here.
+
+
+
database
+
Messages relating to the databases used
+internally by the name server to store zone and cache data.
+
+
+
security
+
Approval and denial of requests.
+
+
+
config
+
Configuration file parsing and processing.
+
+
+
resolver
+
DNS resolution, such as the recursive
+lookups performed on behalf of clients by a caching name server.
+
+
+
xfer-in
+
Zone transfers the server is receiving.
+
+
+
xfer-out
+
Zone transfers the server is sending.
+
+
+
notify
+
The NOTIFY protocol.
+
+
+
client
+
Processing of client requests.
+
+
+
unmatched
+
Messages that named was unable to determine the
+class of or for which there was no matching view.
+A one line summary is also logged to the client category.
This category is best sent to a file or stderr, by default it is sent to
-the null channel.
network
Network operations.
update
Dynamic updates.
update-security
Approval and denial of update requests.
queries
Specify where queries should be logged to.
-
At startup, specifing the category queries will also
-enable query logging unless querylog option has been
+the null channel.
+
+
+
network
+
Network operations.
+
+
+
update
+
Dynamic updates.
+
+
+
update-security
+
Approval and denial of update requests.
+
+
+
queries
+
+
Specify where queries should be logged to.
+
+At startup, specifing the category queries will also
+enable query logging unless querylog option has been
specified.
-
-
The query log entry reports the client's IP address and port number. The
+
+
+The query log entry reports the client's IP address and port number. The
query name, class and type. It also reports whether the Recursion Desired
flag was set (+ if set, - if not set), EDNS was in use (E) or if the
-query was signed (S).
-
client 127.0.0.1#62536: query: www.example.com IN AAAA +SE
-client ::1#62537: query: www.example.net IN AAAA -SE
-
-
dispatch
Dispatching of incoming packets to the
+query was signed (S).
+
client 127.0.0.1#62536: query: www.example.com IN AAAA +SE
+
+
client ::1#62537: query: www.example.net IN AAAA -SE
+
+
+
+
+
dispatch
+
Dispatching of incoming packets to the
server modules where they are to be processed.
-
dnssec
DNSSEC and TSIG protocol processing.
-
lame-servers
Lame servers. These are misconfigurations
+
+
+
+
dnssec
+
DNSSEC and TSIG protocol processing.
+
+
+
+
lame-servers
+
Lame servers. These are misconfigurations
in remote servers, discovered by BIND 9 when trying to query
those servers during resolution.
-
delegation-only
Delegation only. Logs queries that have have
+
+
+
+
delegation-only
+
Delegation only. Logs queries that have have
been forced to NXDOMAIN as the result of a delegation-only zone or
-a delegation-only in a hint or stub zone declaration.
-
The lwres statement configures the name
server to also act as a lightweight resolver server, see
-Section 5.2. There may be be multiple
-lwres statements configuring
-lightweight resolver servers with different properties.
The listen-on statement specifies a list of
+the section called “Running a Resolver Daemon”. There may be be multiple
+lwres statements configuring
+lightweight resolver servers with different properties.
+
The listen-on statement specifies a list of
addresses (and ports) that this instance of a lightweight resolver daemon
should accept requests on. If no port is specified, port 921 is used.
If this statement is omitted, requests will be accepted on 127.0.0.1,
-port 921.
The view statement binds this instance of a
+port 921.
+
The view statement binds this instance of a
lightweight resolver daemon to a view in the DNS namespace, so that the
response will be constructed in the same manner as a normal DNS query
matching this view. If this statement is omitted, the default view is
-used, and if there is no default view, an error is triggered.
The search statement is equivalent to the
-search statement in
-/etc/resolv.conf. It provides a list of domains
-which are appended to relative names in queries.
The ndots statement is equivalent to the
-ndots statement in
-/etc/resolv.conf. It indicates the minimum
+used, and if there is no default view, an error is triggered.
+
The search statement is equivalent to the
+search statement in
+/etc/resolv.conf. It provides a list of domains
+which are appended to relative names in queries.
+
The ndots statement is equivalent to the
+ndots statement in
+/etc/resolv.conf. It indicates the minimum
number of dots in a relative domain name that should result in an
-exact match lookup before search path elements are appended.
The options statement sets up global options
-to be used by BIND. This statement may appear only
-once in a configuration file. If there is no options
+
+
+
+
+options Statement Definition and Usage
+
The options statement sets up global options
+to be used by BIND. This statement may appear only
+once in a configuration file. If there is no options
statement, an options block with each option set to its default will
-be used.
directory
The working directory of the server.
+be used.
+
+
directory
+
The working directory of the server.
Any non-absolute pathnames in the configuration file will be taken
as relative to this directory. The default location for most server
-output files (e.g. named.run) is this directory.
+output files (e.g. named.run) is this directory.
If a directory is not specified, the working directory defaults
-to `.', the directory from which the server
-was started. The directory specified should be an absolute path.
key-directory
When performing dynamic update of secure zones, the
+to `.', the directory from which the server
+was started. The directory specified should be an absolute path.
+
key-directory
+
When performing dynamic update of secure zones, the
directory where the public and private key files should be found,
if different than the current working directory. The directory specified
-must be an absolute path.
named-xfer
This option is obsolete.
-It was used in BIND 8 to
-specify the pathname to the named-xfer program.
-In BIND 9, no separate named-xfer program is
-needed; its functionality is built into the name server.
tkey-domain
The domain appended to the names of all
-shared keys generated with TKEY. When a client
-requests a TKEY exchange, it may or may not specify
+must be an absolute path.
+
named-xfer
+
This option is obsolete.
+It was used in BIND 8 to
+specify the pathname to the named-xfer program.
+In BIND 9, no separate named-xfer program is
+needed; its functionality is built into the name server.
+
tkey-domain
+
The domain appended to the names of all
+shared keys generated with TKEY. When a client
+requests a TKEY exchange, it may or may not specify
the desired name for the key. If present, the name of the shared
-key will be "client specified part" +
-"tkey-domain".
-Otherwise, the name of the shared key will be "random hex
-digits" + "tkey-domain". In most cases,
-the domainname should be the server's domain
-name.
tkey-dhkey
The Diffie-Hellman key used by the server
+key will be "client specified part" +
+"tkey-domain".
+Otherwise, the name of the shared key will be "random hex
+digits" + "tkey-domain". In most cases,
+the domainname should be the server's domain
+name.
+
tkey-dhkey
+
The Diffie-Hellman key used by the server
to generate shared keys with clients using the Diffie-Hellman mode
-of TKEY. The server must be able to load the
+of TKEY. The server must be able to load the
public and private keys from files in the working directory. In
-most cases, the keyname should be the server's host name.
dump-file
The pathname of the file the server dumps
+most cases, the keyname should be the server's host name.
+
dump-file
+
The pathname of the file the server dumps
the database to when instructed to do so with
-rndc dumpdb.
-If not specified, the default is named_dump.db.
memstatistics-file
The pathname of the file the server writes memory
+rndc dumpdb.
+If not specified, the default is named_dump.db.
+
memstatistics-file
+
The pathname of the file the server writes memory
usage statistics to on exit. If not specified,
-the default is named.memstats.
pid-file
The pathname of the file the server writes its process ID
-in. If not specified, the default is /var/run/named.pid.
+the default is named.memstats.
+
pid-file
+
The pathname of the file the server writes its process ID
+in. If not specified, the default is /var/run/named.pid.
The pid-file is used by programs that want to send signals to the running
-name server. Specifying pid-file none disables the
+name server. Specifying pid-file none disables the
use of a PID file — no file will be written and any
-existing one will be removed. Note that none
+existing one will be removed. Note that none
is a keyword, not a file name, and therefore is not enclosed in
-double quotes.
statistics-file
The pathname of the file the server appends statistics
-to when instructed to do so using rndc stats.
-If not specified, the default is named.stats in the
+double quotes.
+
statistics-file
+
The pathname of the file the server appends statistics
+to when instructed to do so using rndc stats.
+If not specified, the default is named.stats in the
server's current directory. The format of the file is described
-in Section 6.2.16.17
+The UDP/TCP port number the server uses for
receiving and sending DNS protocol traffic.
The default is 53. This option is mainly intended for server testing;
a server using a port other than 53 will not be able to communicate with
the global DNS.
-
random-device
The source of entropy to be used by the server. Entropy is primarily needed
+
+
random-device
+
+The source of entropy to be used by the server. Entropy is primarily needed
for DNSSEC operations, such as TKEY transactions and dynamic update of signed
zones. This options specifies the device (or file) from which to read
entropy. If this is a file, operations requiring entropy will fail when the
file has been exhausted. If not specified, the default value is
-/dev/random
+/dev/random
(or equivalent) when present, and none otherwise. The
-random-device option takes effect during
+random-device option takes effect during
the initial configuration load at server startup time and
-is ignored on subsequent reloads.
preferred-glue
If specified the listed type (A or AAAA) will be emitted before other glue
+is ignored on subsequent reloads.
+
preferred-glue
+
+If specified the listed type (A or AAAA) will be emitted before other glue
in the additional section of a query response.
The default is not to preference any type (NONE).
-
root-delegation-only
Turn on enforcement of delegation-only in TLDs and root zones with an optional
+
+
root-delegation-only
+
+
+Turn on enforcement of delegation-only in TLDs and root zones with an optional
exclude list.
-
Note some TLDs are NOT delegation only (e.g. "DE", "LV", "US" and "MUSEUM").
-
options {
+
+
+Note some TLDs are NOT delegation only (e.g. "DE", "LV", "US" and "MUSEUM").
+
Disable the specified DNSSEC algorithms at and below the specified name.
-Multiple disable-algorithms statements are allowed.
+
+
+
disable-algorithms
+
+Disable the specified DNSSEC algorithms at and below the specified name.
+Multiple disable-algorithms statements are allowed.
Only the most specific will be applied.
-
dnssec-lookaside
When set dnssec-lookaside provides the
+
+
dnssec-lookaside
+
+When set dnssec-lookaside provides the
validator with an alternate method to validate DNSKEY records at the
top of a zone. When a DNSKEY is at or below a domain specified by the
-deepest dnssec-lookaside, and the normal dnssec validation
+deepest dnssec-lookaside, and the normal dnssec validation
has left the key untrusted, the trust-anchor will be append to the key
name and a DLV record will be looked up to see if it can validate the
key. If the DLV record validates a DNSKEY (similarly to the way a DS
record does) the DNSKEY RRset is deemed to be trusted.
-
dnssec-must-be-secure
Specify heirachies which must / may not be secure (signed and validated).
-If yes then named will only accept answers if they
+
+
dnssec-must-be-secure
+
+Specify heirarchies which must / may not be secure (signed and validated).
+If yes then named will only accept answers if they
are secure.
-If no then normal dnssec validation applies
+If no then normal dnssec validation applies
allowing for insecure answers to be accepted.
-The specified domain must be under a trusted-key or
-dnssec-lookaside must be active.
-
If yes, then the AA bit
+The specified domain must be under a trusted-key or
+dnssec-lookaside must be active.
+
+
+
+
+Boolean Options
+
+
auth-nxdomain
+
If yes, then the AA bit
is always set on NXDOMAIN responses, even if the server is not actually
-authoritative. The default is no; this is
-a change from BIND 8. If you are using very old DNS software, you
-may need to set it to yes.
deallocate-on-exit
This option was used in BIND 8 to enable checking
-for memory leaks on exit. BIND 9 ignores the option and always performs
-the checks.
dialup
If yes, then the
+authoritative. The default is no; this is
+a change from BIND 8. If you are using very old DNS software, you
+may need to set it to yes.
+
deallocate-on-exit
+
This option was used in BIND 8 to enable checking
+for memory leaks on exit. BIND 9 ignores the option and always performs
+the checks.
+
dialup
+
+
If yes, then the
server treats all zones as if they are doing zone transfers across
a dial on demand dialup link, which can be brought up by traffic
originating from this server. This has different effects according
to zone type and concentrates the zone maintenance so that it all
-happens in a short interval, once every heartbeat-interval and
+happens in a short interval, once every heartbeat-interval and
hopefully during the one call. It also suppresses some of the normal
-zone maintenance traffic. The default is no.
The dialup option
-may also be specified in the view and
-zone statements,
-in which case it overrides the global dialup
-option.
If the zone is a master zone then the server will send out a NOTIFY
+zone maintenance traffic. The default is no.
+
The dialup option
+may also be specified in the view and
+zone statements,
+in which case it overrides the global dialup
+option.
+
If the zone is a master zone then the server will send out a NOTIFY
request to all the slaves (default). This should trigger the zone serial
number check in the slave (providing it supports NOTIFY) allowing the slave
to verify the zone while the connection is active.
The set of servers to which NOTIFY is sent can be controlled by
-notify and also-notify.
If the
+notify and also-notify.
+
If the
zone is a slave or stub zone, then the server will suppress the regular
"zone up to date" (refresh) queries and only perform them when the
-heartbeat-interval expires in addition to sending
-NOTIFY requests.
Finer control can be achieved by using
-notify which only sends NOTIFY messages,
-notify-passive which sends NOTIFY messages and
-suppresses the normal refresh queries, refresh
+heartbeat-interval expires in addition to sending
+NOTIFY requests.
+
Finer control can be achieved by using
+notify which only sends NOTIFY messages,
+notify-passive which sends NOTIFY messages and
+suppresses the normal refresh queries, refresh
which suppresses normal refresh processing and sends refresh queries
-when the heartbeat-interval expires, and
-passive which just disables normal refresh
-processing.
dialup mode
normal refresh
heart-beat refresh
heart-beat notify
no (default)
yes
no
no
yes
no
yes
yes
notify
yes
no
yes
refresh
no
yes
no
passive
no
no
no
notify-passive
no
no
yes
Note that normal NOTIFY processing is not affected by
-dialup.
fake-iquery
In BIND 8, this option
+when the heartbeat-interval expires, and
+passive which just disables normal refresh
+processing.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
dialup mode
+
normal refresh
+
heart-beat refresh
+
heart-beat notify
+
+
+
no (default)
+
yes
+
no
+
no
+
+
+
yes
+
no
+
yes
+
yes
+
+
+
notify
+
yes
+
no
+
yes
+
+
+
refresh
+
no
+
yes
+
no
+
+
+
passive
+
no
+
no
+
no
+
+
+
notify-passive
+
no
+
no
+
yes
+
+
+
+
Note that normal NOTIFY processing is not affected by
+dialup.
+
+
fake-iquery
+
In BIND 8, this option
enabled simulating the obsolete DNS query type
-IQUERY. BIND 9 never does IQUERY simulation.
-
fetch-glue
This option is obsolete.
-In BIND 8, fetch-glue yes
+IQUERY. BIND 9 never does IQUERY simulation.
+
+
fetch-glue
+
This option is obsolete.
+In BIND 8, fetch-glue yes
caused the server to attempt to fetch glue resource records it
didn't have when constructing the additional
data section of a response. This is now considered a bad idea
-and BIND 9 never does it.
flush-zones-on-shutdown
When the nameserver exits due receiving SIGTERM,
+and BIND 9 never does it.
+
flush-zones-on-shutdown
+
When the nameserver exits due receiving SIGTERM,
flush / do not flush any pending zone writes. The default is
-flush-zones-on-shutdownno.
-
has-old-clients
This option was incorrectly implemented
-in BIND 8, and is ignored by BIND 9.
+flush-zones-on-shutdownno.
+
+
has-old-clients
+
This option was incorrectly implemented
+in BIND 8, and is ignored by BIND 9.
To achieve the intended effect
of
-has-old-clientsyes, specify
-the two separate options auth-nxdomainyes
-and rfc2308-type1no instead.
-
host-statistics
In BIND 8, this enables keeping of
+has-old-clientsyes, specify
+the two separate options auth-nxdomainyes
+and rfc2308-type1no instead.
+
+
host-statistics
+
In BIND 8, this enables keeping of
statistics for every host that the name server interacts with.
Not implemented in BIND 9.
-
maintain-ixfr-base
This option is obsolete.
- It was used in BIND 8 to determine whether a transaction log was
-kept for Incremental Zone Transfer. BIND 9 maintains a transaction
+
+
maintain-ixfr-base
+
This option is obsolete.
+ It was used in BIND 8 to determine whether a transaction log was
+kept for Incremental Zone Transfer. BIND 9 maintains a transaction
log whenever possible. If you need to disable outgoing incremental zone
-transfers, use provide-ixfrno.
-
minimal-responses
If yes, then when generating
+transfers, use provide-ixfrno.
+
+
minimal-responses
+
If yes, then when generating
responses the server will only add records to the authority and
additional data sections when they are required (e.g. delegations,
negative responses). This may improve the performance of the server.
-The default is no.
-
multiple-cnames
This option was used in BIND 8 to allow
+The default is no.
+
+
multiple-cnames
+
This option was used in BIND 8 to allow
a domain name to have multiple CNAME records in violation of the
-DNS standards. BIND 9.2 always strictly
+DNS standards. BIND 9.2 always strictly
enforces the CNAME rules both in master files and dynamic updates.
-
notify
If yes (the default),
+
+
notify
+
+
If yes (the default),
DNS NOTIFY messages are sent when a zone the server is authoritative for
-changes, see Section 4.1. The messages are sent to the
+changes, see the section called “Notify”. The messages are sent to the
servers listed in the zone's NS records (except the master server identified
in the SOA MNAME field), and to any servers listed in the
-also-notify option.
-
If explicit, notifies are sent only to
-servers explicitly listed using also-notify.
-If no, no notifies are sent.
-
The notify option may also be
-specified in the zone statement,
-in which case it overrides the options notify statement.
+also-notify option.
+
+
+If explicit, notifies are sent only to
+servers explicitly listed using also-notify.
+If no, no notifies are sent.
+
+
+The notify option may also be
+specified in the zone statement,
+in which case it overrides the options notify statement.
It would only be necessary to turn off this option if it caused slaves
-to crash.
recursion
If yes, and a
+to crash.
+
+
recursion
+
If yes, and a
DNS query requests recursion, then the server will attempt to do
all the work required to answer the query. If recursion is off
and the server does not already know the answer, it will return a
-referral response. The default is yes.
-Note that setting recursion no does not prevent
+referral response. The default is yes.
+Note that setting recursion no does not prevent
clients from getting data from the server's cache; it only
prevents new data from being cached as an effect of client queries.
Caching may still occur as an effect the server's internal
operation, such as NOTIFY address lookups.
-See also fetch-glue above.
-
rfc2308-type1
Setting this to yes will
+See also fetch-glue above.
+
+
rfc2308-type1
+
+
Setting this to yes will
cause the server to send NS records along with the SOA record for negative
-answers. The default is no.
Note: Not yet implemented in BIND 9.
use-id-pool
This option is obsolete.
-BIND 9 always allocates query IDs from a pool.
-
zone-statistics
If yes, the server will collect
+answers. The default is no.
+
+
Note
+
Not yet implemented in BIND 9.
+
+
+
use-id-pool
+
This option is obsolete.
+BIND 9 always allocates query IDs from a pool.
+
+
zone-statistics
+
If yes, the server will collect
statistical data on all zones (unless specifically turned off
-on a per-zone basis by specifying zone-statistics no
-in the zone statement). These statistics may be accessed
-using rndc stats, which will dump them to the file listed
-in the statistics-file. See also Section 6.2.16.17.
-
use-ixfr
This option is obsolete.
+on a per-zone basis by specifying zone-statistics no
+in the zone statement). These statistics may be accessed
+using rndc stats, which will dump them to the file listed
+in the statistics-file. See also the section called “The Statistics File”.
+
+
use-ixfr
+
This option is obsolete.
If you need to disable IXFR to a particular server or servers see
-the information on the provide-ixfr option
-in Section 6.2.18. See also
-Section 4.3.
-
provide-ixfr
See the description of
-provide-ixfr in
-Section 6.2.18
-
request-ixfr
See the description of
-request-ixfr in
-Section 6.2.18
-
This option was used in BIND 8 to make
+the server treat carriage return ("\r") characters the same way
as a space or tab character,
to facilitate loading of zone files on a UNIX system that were generated
-on an NT or DOS machine. In BIND 9, both UNIX "\n"
-and NT/DOS "\r\n" newlines are always accepted,
-and the option is ignored.
additional-from-auth, additional-from-cache
These options control the behavior of an authoritative server when
+on an NT or DOS machine. In BIND 9, both UNIX "\n"
+and NT/DOS "\r\n" newlines are always accepted,
+and the option is ignored.
+
+additional-from-auth, additional-from-cache
+
+
+
+These options control the behavior of an authoritative server when
answering queries which have additional data, or when following CNAME
and DNAME chains.
-
When both of these options are set to yes
+
+
+When both of these options are set to yes
(the default) and a
query is being answered from authoritative data (a zone
configured into the server), the additional data section of the
@@ -5129,76 +1583,43 @@ untrusted third parties. Also, avoiding
the search for this additional data will speed up server operations
at the possible expense of additional queries to resolve what would
otherwise be provided in the additional section.
-
For example, if a query asks for an MX record for host foo.example.com,
-and the record found is "MX 10 mail.example.net", normally the address
-records (A and AAAA) for mail.example.net will be provided as well,
+
+
+For example, if a query asks for an MX record for host foo.example.com,
+and the record found is "MX 10 mail.example.net", normally the address
+records (A and AAAA) for mail.example.net will be provided as well,
if known, even though they are not in the example.com zone.
-Setting these options to no disables this behavior and makes
+Setting these options to no disables this behavior and makes
the server only search for additional data in the zone it answers from.
-
These options are intended for use in authoritative-only
+
+
+These options are intended for use in authoritative-only
servers, or in authoritative-only views. Attempts to set
-them to no without also specifying
-recursion no will cause the server to
+them to no without also specifying
+recursion no will cause the server to
ignore the options and log a warning message.
-
Specifying additional-from-cache no actually
+
+
+Specifying additional-from-cache no actually
disables the use of the cache not only for additional data lookups
but also when looking up the answer. This is usually the desired
behavior in an authoritative-only server where the correctness of
the cached data is an issue.
-
When a name server is non-recursively queried for a name that is not
+
+
+When a name server is non-recursively queried for a name that is not
below the apex of any served zone, it normally answers with an
"upwards referral" to the root servers or the servers of some other
known parent of the query name. Since the data in an upwards referral
comes from the cache, the server will not be able to provide upwards
-referrals when additional-from-cache no
+referrals when additional-from-cache no
has been specified. Instead, it will respond to such queries
with REFUSED. This should not cause any problems since
upwards referrals are not required for the resolution process.
-
match-mapped-addresses
If yes, then an
+
+
+
match-mapped-addresses
+
If yes, then an
IPv4-mapped IPv6 address will match any address match
list entries that match the corresponding IPv4 address.
Enabling this option is sometimes useful on IPv6-enabled Linux
@@ -5207,25 +1628,20 @@ TCP connections such as zone transfers to be accepted
on an IPv6 socket using mapped addresses, causing
address match lists designed for IPv4 to fail to match.
The use of this option for any other purpose is discouraged.
-
ixfr-from-differences
When 'yes' and the server loads a new version of a master
+
+
ixfr-from-differences
+
+
+When 'yes' and the server loads a new version of a master
zone from its zone file or receives a new version of a slave
file by a non-incremental zone transfer, it will compare
the new version to the previous one and calculate a set
of differences. The differences are then logged in the
zone's journal file such that the changes can be transmitted
to downstream slaves as an incremental zone transfer.
-
By allowing incremental zone transfers to be used for
+
+
+By allowing incremental zone transfers to be used for
non-dynamic zones, this option saves bandwidth at the
expense of increased CPU and memory consumption at the master.
In particular, if the new version of a zone is completely
@@ -5234,1096 +1650,422 @@ will be of a size comparable to the combined size of the
old and new zone version, and the server will need to
temporarily allocate memory to hold this complete
difference set.
-
multi-master
This should be set when you have multiple masters for a zone and the
+
+
+
multi-master
+
+This should be set when you have multiple masters for a zone and the
addresses refer to different machines. If 'yes' named will not log
when the serial number on the master is less than what named currently
-has. The default is no.
-
dnssec-enable
Enable DNSSEC support in named. Unless set to yes
+has. The default is no.
+
+
dnssec-enable
+
+Enable DNSSEC support in named. Unless set to yes
named behaves as if it does not support DNSSEC.
-The default is no.
-
querylog
Specify whether query logging should be started when named start.
-If querylog is not specified then the query logging
-is determined by the presence of the logging category queries.
-
check-names
This option is used to restrict the character set and syntax of
+The default is no.
+
+
querylog
+
+Specify whether query logging should be started when named start.
+If querylog is not specified then the query logging
+is determined by the presence of the logging category queries.
+
+
check-names
+
+
+This option is used to restrict the character set and syntax of
certain domain names in master files and/or DNS responses received
from the network. The default varies according to usage area. For
-master zones the default is fail.
-For slave zones the default is warn.
-For answer received from the network (response)
-the default is ignore.
-
The rules for legal hostnames / mail domains are derived from RFC 952
+master zones the default is fail.
+For slave zones the default is warn.
+For answer received from the network (response)
+the default is ignore.
+
+
The rules for legal hostnames / mail domains are derived from RFC 952
and RFC 821 as modified by RFC 1123.
-
check-names applies to the owner names of A, AAA and
+
+
check-names applies to the owner names of A, AAA and
MX records. It also applies to the domain names in the RDATA of NS, SOA and MX
records. It also applies to the RDATA of PTR records where the owner name
indicated that it is a reverse lookup of a hostname (the owner name ends in
IN-ADDR.ARPA, IP6.ARPA, IP6.INT).
-
The forwarding facility can be used to create a large site-wide
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Forwarding
+
The forwarding facility can be used to create a large site-wide
cache on a few servers, reducing traffic over links to external
name servers. It can also be used to allow queries by servers that
do not have direct access to the Internet, but wish to look up exterior
names anyway. Forwarding occurs only on those queries for which
the server is not authoritative and does not have the answer in
-its cache.
forward
This option is only meaningful if the
-forwarders list is not empty. A value of first,
+its cache.
+
+
forward
+
This option is only meaningful if the
+forwarders list is not empty. A value of first,
the default, causes the server to query the forwarders first, and
if that doesn't answer the question the server will then look for
-the answer itself. If only is specified, the
+the answer itself. If only is specified, the
server will only query the forwarders.
-
forwarders
Specifies the IP addresses to be used
+
+
forwarders
+
Specifies the IP addresses to be used
for forwarding. The default is the empty list (no forwarding).
-
Forwarding can also be configured on a per-domain basis, allowing
+
+
+
Forwarding can also be configured on a per-domain basis, allowing
for the global forwarding options to be overridden in a variety
of ways. You can set particular domains to use different forwarders,
-or have a different forward only/first behavior,
-or not forward at all, see Section 6.2.23.
Dual-stack servers are used as servers of last resort to work around
+or have a different forward only/first behavior,
+or not forward at all, see the section called “zone
+Statement Grammar”.
+
+
+
+Dual-stack Servers
+
Dual-stack servers are used as servers of last resort to work around
problems in reachability due the lack of support for either IPv4 or IPv6
-on the host machine.
dual-stack-servers
Specifies host names / addresses of machines with access to
+on the host machine.
+
+
dual-stack-servers
+
Specifies host names / addresses of machines with access to
both IPv4 and IPv6 transports. If a hostname is used the server must be able
to resolve the name using only the transport it has. If the machine is dual
-stacked then the dual-stack-servers have no effect unless
+stacked then the dual-stack-servers have no effect unless
access to a transport has been disabled on the command line
-(e.g. named -4).
Access to the server can be restricted based on the IP address
-of the requesting system. See Section 6.1.1 for
-details on how to specify IP address lists.
allow-notify
Specifies which hosts are allowed to
+(e.g. named -4).
+
+
+
+
+Access Control
+
Access to the server can be restricted based on the IP address
+of the requesting system. See the section called “Address Match Lists” for
+details on how to specify IP address lists.
+
+
allow-notify
+
Specifies which hosts are allowed to
notify this server, a slave, of zone changes in addition
to the zone masters.
-allow-notify may also be specified in the
-zone statement, in which case it overrides the
-options allow-notify statement. It is only meaningful
+allow-notify may also be specified in the
+zone statement, in which case it overrides the
+options allow-notify statement. It is only meaningful
for a slave zone. If not specified, the default is to process notify messages
-only from a zone's master.
allow-query
Specifies which hosts are allowed to
-ask ordinary DNS questions. allow-query may also
-be specified in the zone statement, in which
-case it overrides the options allow-query statement. If
-not specified, the default is to allow queries from all hosts.
allow-recursion
Specifies which hosts are allowed to
+only from a zone's master.
+
allow-query
+
Specifies which hosts are allowed to
+ask ordinary DNS questions. allow-query may also
+be specified in the zone statement, in which
+case it overrides the options allow-query statement. If
+not specified, the default is to allow queries from all hosts.
+
allow-recursion
+
Specifies which hosts are allowed to
make recursive queries through this server. If not specified, the
default is to allow recursive queries from all hosts.
Note that disallowing recursive queries for a host does not prevent the
host from retrieving data that is already in the server's cache.
-
allow-update-forwarding
Specifies which hosts are allowed to
+
+
allow-update-forwarding
+
+
Specifies which hosts are allowed to
submit Dynamic DNS updates to slave zones to be forwarded to the
-master. The default is { none; }, which
+master. The default is { none; }, which
means that no update forwarding will be performed. To enable
update forwarding, specify
-allow-update-forwarding { any; };.
-Specifying values other than { none; } or
-{ any; } is usually counterproductive, since
+allow-update-forwarding { any; };.
+Specifying values other than { none; } or
+{ any; } is usually counterproductive, since
the responsibility for update access control should rest with the
-master server, not the slaves.
Note that enabling the update forwarding feature on a slave server
+master server, not the slaves.
+
Note that enabling the update forwarding feature on a slave server
may expose master servers relying on insecure IP address based
-access control to attacks; see Section 7.3
-for more details.
This option was introduced for the smooth transition from AAAA
to A6 and from "nibble labels" to binary labels.
However, since both A6 and binary labels were then deprecated,
this option was also deprecated.
It is now ignored with some warning messages.
-
allow-transfer
Specifies which hosts are allowed to
-receive zone transfers from the server. allow-transfer may
-also be specified in the zone statement, in which
-case it overrides the options allow-transfer statement.
-If not specified, the default is to allow transfers to all hosts.
blackhole
Specifies a list of addresses that the
+
+
allow-transfer
+
Specifies which hosts are allowed to
+receive zone transfers from the server. allow-transfer may
+also be specified in the zone statement, in which
+case it overrides the options allow-transfer statement.
+If not specified, the default is to allow transfers to all hosts.
+
blackhole
+
Specifies a list of addresses that the
server will not accept queries from or use to resolve a query. Queries
-from these addresses will not be responded to. The default is none.
The interfaces and ports that the server will answer queries
-from may be specified using the listen-on option. listen-on takes
-an optional port, and an address_match_list.
+from these addresses will not be responded to. The default is none.
+
+
+
+
+Interfaces
+
The interfaces and ports that the server will answer queries
+from may be specified using the listen-on option. listen-on takes
+an optional port, and an address_match_list.
The server will listen on all interfaces allowed by the address
-match list. If a port is not specified, port 53 will be used.
Multiple listen-on statements are allowed.
-For example,
listen-on { 5.6.7.8; };
+match list. If a port is not specified, port 53 will be used.
+
Multiple listen-on statements are allowed.
+For example,
will enable the name server on port 53 for the IP address
+
+
will enable the name server on port 53 for the IP address
5.6.7.8, and on port 1234 of an address on the machine in net
-1.2 that is not 1.2.3.4.
If no listen-on is specified, the
-server will listen on port 53 on all interfaces.
The listen-on-v6 option is used to
+1.2 that is not 1.2.3.4.
+
If no listen-on is specified, the
+server will listen on port 53 on all interfaces.
+
The listen-on-v6 option is used to
specify the interfaces and the ports on which the server will listen
-for incoming queries sent using IPv6.
When
{ any; }
is specified
-as the address_match_list for the
-listen-on-v6 option,
+for incoming queries sent using IPv6.
+
When
+
{ any; }
+
is specified
+as the address_match_list for the
+listen-on-v6 option,
the server does not bind a separate socket to each IPv6 interface
address as it does for IPv4 if the operating system has enough API
support for IPv6 (specifically if it conforms to RFC 3493 and RFC 3542).
Instead, it listens on the IPv6 wildcard address.
If the system only has incomplete API support for IPv6, however,
-the behavior is the same as that for IPv4.
A list of particular IPv6 addresses can also be specified, in which case
+the behavior is the same as that for IPv4.
+
A list of particular IPv6 addresses can also be specified, in which case
the server listens on a separate socket for each specified address,
-regardless of whether the desired API is supported by the system.
Multiple listen-on-v6 options can be used.
-For example,
listen-on-v6 { any; };
+regardless of whether the desired API is supported by the system.
+
Multiple listen-on-v6 options can be used.
+For example,
will enable the name server on port 53 for any IPv6 addresses
+
+
will enable the name server on port 53 for any IPv6 addresses
(with a single wildcard socket),
and on port 1234 of IPv6 addresses that is not in the prefix
-2001:db8::/32 (with separate sockets for each matched address.)
To make the server not listen on any IPv6 address, use
listen-on-v6 { none; };
-
If no listen-on-v6 option is specified,
-the server will not listen on any IPv6 address.
If the server doesn't know the answer to a question, it will
-query other name servers. query-source specifies
+2001:db8::/32 (with separate sockets for each matched address.)
+
To make the server not listen on any IPv6 address, use
+
listen-on-v6 { none; };
+
+
If no listen-on-v6 option is specified,
+the server will not listen on any IPv6 address.
+
+
+
+Query Address
+
If the server doesn't know the answer to a question, it will
+query other name servers. query-source specifies
the address and port used for such queries. For queries sent over
-IPv6, there is a separate query-source-v6 option.
-If address is * or is omitted,
-a wildcard IP address (INADDR_ANY) will be used.
-If port is * or is omitted,
-a random unprivileged port will be used, avoid-v4-udp-ports
-and avoid-v6-udp-ports can be used to prevent named
-from selecting certain ports. The defaults are
query-source address * port *;
+IPv6, there is a separate query-source-v6 option.
+If address is * or is omitted,
+a wildcard IP address (INADDR_ANY) will be used.
+If port is * or is omitted,
+a random unprivileged port will be used, avoid-v4-udp-ports
+and avoid-v6-udp-ports can be used to prevent named
+from selecting certain ports. The defaults are
+
query-source address * port *;
query-source-v6 address * port *;
-
Note: The address specified in the query-source option
+
+
+
Note
+
The address specified in the query-source option
is used for both UDP and TCP queries, but the port applies only to
UDP queries. TCP queries always use a random
-unprivileged port.
Note: See also transfer-source and
-notify-source.
BIND has mechanisms in place to facilitate zone transfers
+unprivileged port.
+
+
+
Note
+
See also transfer-source and
+notify-source.
+
+
+
+
+Zone Transfers
+
BIND has mechanisms in place to facilitate zone transfers
and set limits on the amount of load that transfers place on the
-system. The following options apply to zone transfers.
also-notify
Defines a global list of IP addresses of name servers
+system. The following options apply to zone transfers.
+
+
also-notify
+
Defines a global list of IP addresses of name servers
that are also sent NOTIFY messages whenever a fresh copy of the
zone is loaded, in addition to the servers listed in the zone's NS records.
This helps to ensure that copies of the zones will
-quickly converge on stealth servers. If an also-notify list
-is given in a zone statement, it will override
-the options also-notify statement. When a zone notify statement
-is set to no, the IP addresses in the global also-notify list will
+quickly converge on stealth servers. If an also-notify list
+is given in a zone statement, it will override
+the options also-notify statement. When a zone notify statement
+is set to no, the IP addresses in the global also-notify list will
not be sent NOTIFY messages for that zone. The default is the empty
-list (no global notification list).
max-transfer-time-in
Inbound zone transfers running longer than
+list (no global notification list).
+
max-transfer-time-in
+
Inbound zone transfers running longer than
this many minutes will be terminated. The default is 120 minutes
-(2 hours). The maximum value is 28 days (40320 minutes).
max-transfer-idle-in
Inbound zone transfers making no progress
+(2 hours). The maximum value is 28 days (40320 minutes).
+
max-transfer-idle-in
+
Inbound zone transfers making no progress
in this many minutes will be terminated. The default is 60 minutes
-(1 hour). The maximum value is 28 days (40320 minutes).
max-transfer-time-out
Outbound zone transfers running longer than
+(1 hour). The maximum value is 28 days (40320 minutes).
+
max-transfer-time-out
+
Outbound zone transfers running longer than
this many minutes will be terminated. The default is 120 minutes
-(2 hours). The maximum value is 28 days (40320 minutes).
max-transfer-idle-out
Outbound zone transfers making no progress
+(2 hours). The maximum value is 28 days (40320 minutes).
+
max-transfer-idle-out
+
Outbound zone transfers making no progress
in this many minutes will be terminated. The default is 60 minutes (1
-hour). The maximum value is 28 days (40320 minutes).
serial-query-rate
Slave servers will periodically query master servers
+hour). The maximum value is 28 days (40320 minutes).
+
serial-query-rate
+
Slave servers will periodically query master servers
to find out if zone serial numbers have changed. Each such query uses
a minute amount of the slave server's network bandwidth. To limit the
amount of bandwidth used, BIND 9 limits the rate at which queries are
-sent. The value of the serial-query-rate option,
+sent. The value of the serial-query-rate option,
an integer, is the maximum number of queries sent per second.
The default is 20.
-
serial-queries
In BIND 8, the serial-queries option
+
+
serial-queries
+
In BIND 8, the serial-queries option
set the maximum number of concurrent serial number queries
allowed to be outstanding at any given time.
BIND 9 does not limit the number of outstanding
-serial queries and ignores the serial-queries option.
+serial queries and ignores the serial-queries option.
Instead, it limits the rate at which the queries are sent
-as defined using the serial-query-rate option.
-
transfer-format
Zone transfers can be sent using two different formats,
-one-answer and many-answers.
-The transfer-format option is used
+as defined using the serial-query-rate option.
+
+
transfer-format
+
+Zone transfers can be sent using two different formats,
+one-answer and many-answers.
+The transfer-format option is used
on the master server to determine which format it sends.
-one-answer uses one DNS message per
+one-answer uses one DNS message per
resource record transferred.
-many-answers packs as many resource records as
-possible into a message. many-answers is more
+many-answers packs as many resource records as
+possible into a message. many-answers is more
efficient, but is only supported by relatively new slave servers,
-such as BIND 9, BIND 8.x and patched
-versions of BIND 4.9.5. The default is
-many-answers. transfer-format
+such as BIND 9, BIND 8.x and patched
+versions of BIND 4.9.5. The default is
+many-answers. transfer-format
may be overridden on a per-server basis by using the
-server statement.
-
transfers-in
The maximum number of inbound zone transfers
-that can be running concurrently. The default value is 10.
-Increasing transfers-in may speed up the convergence
-of slave zones, but it also may increase the load on the local system.
transfers-out
The maximum number of outbound zone transfers
+server statement.
+
+
transfers-in
+
The maximum number of inbound zone transfers
+that can be running concurrently. The default value is 10.
+Increasing transfers-in may speed up the convergence
+of slave zones, but it also may increase the load on the local system.
+
transfers-out
+
The maximum number of outbound zone transfers
that can be running concurrently. Zone transfer requests in excess
-of the limit will be refused. The default value is 10.
transfers-per-ns
The maximum number of inbound zone transfers
+of the limit will be refused. The default value is 10.
+
transfers-per-ns
+
The maximum number of inbound zone transfers
that can be concurrently transferring from a given remote name server.
-The default value is 2. Increasing transfers-per-ns may
+The default value is 2. Increasing transfers-per-ns may
speed up the convergence of slave zones, but it also may increase
-the load on the remote name server. transfers-per-ns may
-be overridden on a per-server basis by using the transfers phrase
-of the server statement.
transfer-source
transfer-source determines
+the load on the remote name server. transfers-per-ns may
+be overridden on a per-server basis by using the transfers phrase
+of the server statement.
+
transfer-source
+
transfer-source determines
which local address will be bound to IPv4 TCP connections used to
fetch zones transferred inbound by the server. It also determines
the source IPv4 address, and optionally the UDP port, used for the
refresh queries and forwarded dynamic updates. If not set, it defaults
to a system controlled value which will usually be the address of
the interface "closest to" the remote end. This address must appear
-in the remote end's allow-transfer option for
+in the remote end's allow-transfer option for
the zone being transferred, if one is specified. This statement
-sets the transfer-source for all zones, but can
+sets the transfer-source for all zones, but can
be overridden on a per-view or per-zone basis by including a
-transfer-source statement within the
-view or zone block
-in the configuration file.
transfer-source-v6
The same as transfer-source,
-except zone transfers are performed using IPv6.
alt-transfer-source
An alternate transfer source if the one listed in
-transfer-source fails and
-use-alt-transfer-source is set.
alt-transfer-source-v6
An alternate transfer source if the one listed in
-transfer-source-v6 fails and
-use-alt-transfer-source is set.
use-alt-transfer-source
Use the alternate transfer sources or not. If views are
-specified this defaults to no otherwise it defaults to
-yes (for BIND 8 compatibility).
notify-source
notify-source determines
+transfer-source statement within the
+view or zone block
+in the configuration file.
+
transfer-source-v6
+
The same as transfer-source,
+except zone transfers are performed using IPv6.
+
alt-transfer-source
+
+
+ An alternate transfer source if the one listed in
+ transfer-source fails and
+ use-alt-transfer-source is
+ set.
+
+
+
Note
+ If you do not wish the alternate transfer source
+ to be used you should set
+ use-alt-transfer-source
+ appropriately and you should not depend upon
+ getting a answer back to the first refresh
+ query.
+
+
+
alt-transfer-source-v6
+
An alternate transfer source if the one listed in
+transfer-source-v6 fails and
+use-alt-transfer-source is set.
+
use-alt-transfer-source
+
Use the alternate transfer sources or not. If views are
+specified this defaults to no otherwise it defaults to
+yes (for BIND 8 compatibility).
+
notify-source
+
notify-source determines
which local source address, and optionally UDP port, will be used to
send NOTIFY messages.
-This address must appear in the slave server's masters
-zone clause or in an allow-notify clause.
-This statement sets the notify-source for all zones,
+This address must appear in the slave server's masters
+zone clause or in an allow-notify clause.
+This statement sets the notify-source for all zones,
but can be overridden on a per-zone / per-view basis by including a
-notify-source statement within the zone
-or view block in the configuration file.
notify-source-v6
Like notify-source,
-but applies to notify messages sent to IPv6 addresses.
avoid-v4-udp-ports and avoid-v6-udp-ports
+notify-source statement within the zone
+or view block in the configuration file.
+
notify-source-v6
+
Like notify-source,
+but applies to notify messages sent to IPv6 addresses.
+
+
+
+
+Bad UDP Port Lists
+
+avoid-v4-udp-ports and avoid-v6-udp-ports
specify a list of IPv4 and IPv6 UDP ports that will not be used as system
assigned source ports for UDP sockets. These lists prevent named
from choosing as its random source port a port that is blocked by
your firewall. If a query went out with such a source port, the
answer would not get by the firewall and the name server would have
to query again.
-
The server's usage of many system resources can be limited.
+
+
+
+
+Operating System Resource Limits
+
The server's usage of many system resources can be limited.
Scaled values are allowed when specifying resource limits. For
-example, 1G can be used instead of
-1073741824 to specify a limit of one
-gigabyte. unlimited requests unlimited use, or the
-maximum available amount. default uses the limit
+example, 1G can be used instead of
+1073741824 to specify a limit of one
+gigabyte. unlimited requests unlimited use, or the
+maximum available amount. default uses the limit
that was in force when the server was started. See the description of
-size_spec in Section 6.1.
The following options set operating system resource limits for
the name server process. Some operating systems don't support some or
any of the limits. On such systems, a warning will be issued if the
-unsupported limit is used.
coresize
The maximum size of a core dump. The default
-is default.
datasize
The maximum amount of data memory the server
-may use. The default is default.
+unsupported limit is used.
+
+
coresize
+
The maximum size of a core dump. The default
+is default.
+
datasize
+
The maximum amount of data memory the server
+may use. The default is default.
This is a hard limit on server memory usage.
If the server attempts to allocate memory in excess of this
limit, the allocation will fail, which may in turn leave
@@ -6333,299 +2075,118 @@ amount of memory used by the server, but it can be used
to raise an operating system data size limit that is
too small by default. If you wish to limit the amount
of memory used by the server, use the
-max-cache-size and
-recursive-clients
+max-cache-size and
+recursive-clients
options instead.
-
files
The maximum number of files the server
-may have open concurrently. The default is unlimited.
-
stacksize
The maximum amount of stack memory the server
-may use. The default is default.
The following options set limits on the server's
+
+
files
+
The maximum number of files the server
+may have open concurrently. The default is unlimited.
+
+
stacksize
+
The maximum amount of stack memory the server
+may use. The default is default.
+
+
+
+
+Server Resource Limits
+
The following options set limits on the server's
resource consumption that are enforced internally by the
-server rather than the operating system.
max-ixfr-log-size
This option is obsolete; it is accepted
+server rather than the operating system.
+
+
max-ixfr-log-size
+
This option is obsolete; it is accepted
and ignored for BIND 8 compatibility. The option
-max-journal-size performs a similar
+max-journal-size performs a similar
function in BIND 8.
-
max-journal-size
Sets a maximum size for each journal file
-(Section 4.2.1). When the journal file approaches
+
+
max-journal-size
+
Sets a maximum size for each journal file
+(the section called “The journal file”). When the journal file approaches
the specified size, some of the oldest transactions in the journal
will be automatically removed. The default is
-unlimited.
host-statistics-max
In BIND 8, specifies the maximum number of host statistic
+unlimited.
+
host-statistics-max
+
In BIND 8, specifies the maximum number of host statistic
entries to be kept.
Not implemented in BIND 9.
-
recursive-clients
The maximum number of simultaneous recursive lookups
+
+
recursive-clients
+
The maximum number of simultaneous recursive lookups
the server will perform on behalf of clients. The default is
-1000. Because each recursing client uses a fair
+1000. Because each recursing client uses a fair
bit of memory, on the order of 20 kilobytes, the value of the
-recursive-clients option may have to be decreased
+recursive-clients option may have to be decreased
on hosts with limited memory.
-
tcp-clients
The maximum number of simultaneous client TCP
+
+
tcp-clients
+
The maximum number of simultaneous client TCP
connections that the server will accept.
-The default is 100.
max-cache-size
The maximum amount of memory to use for the
+The default is 100.
+
max-cache-size
+
The maximum amount of memory to use for the
server's cache, in bytes. When the amount of data in the cache
reaches this limit, the server will cause records to expire
prematurely so that the limit is not exceeded. In a server with
multiple views, the limit applies separately to the cache of each
-view. The default is unlimited, meaning that
+view. The default is unlimited, meaning that
records are purged from the cache only when their TTLs expire.
-
tcp-listen-queue
The listen queue depth. The default and minimum is 3.
+
+
tcp-listen-queue
+
The listen queue depth. The default and minimum is 3.
If the kernel supports the accept filter "dataready" this also controls how
many TCP connections that will be queued in kernel space waiting for
some data before being passed to accept. Values less than 3 will be
silently raised.
-
The server will remove expired resource records
-from the cache every cleaning-interval minutes.
+
+
+
+
+
+Periodic Task Intervals
+
+
cleaning-interval
+
The server will remove expired resource records
+from the cache every cleaning-interval minutes.
The default is 60 minutes. The maximum value is 28 days (40320 minutes).
-If set to 0, no periodic cleaning will occur.
heartbeat-interval
The server will perform zone maintenance tasks
-for all zones marked as dialup whenever this
+If set to 0, no periodic cleaning will occur.
+
heartbeat-interval
+
The server will perform zone maintenance tasks
+for all zones marked as dialup whenever this
interval expires. The default is 60 minutes. Reasonable values are up
to 1 day (1440 minutes). The maximum value is 28 days (40320 minutes).
-If set to 0, no zone maintenance for these zones will occur.
interface-interval
The server will scan the network interface list
-every interface-interval minutes. The default
+If set to 0, no zone maintenance for these zones will occur.
+
interface-interval
+
The server will scan the network interface list
+every interface-interval minutes. The default
is 60 minutes. The maximum value is 28 days (40320 minutes).
If set to 0, interface scanning will only occur when
the configuration file is loaded. After the scan, the server will
begin listening for queries on any newly discovered
interfaces (provided they are allowed by the
-listen-on configuration), and will
-stop listening on interfaces that have gone away.
statistics-interval
Name server statistics will be logged
-every statistics-interval minutes. The default is
+listen-on configuration), and will
+stop listening on interfaces that have gone away.
+
statistics-interval
+
+
Name server statistics will be logged
+every statistics-interval minutes. The default is
60. The maximum value is 28 days (40320 minutes).
-If set to 0, no statistics will be logged.
All other things being equal, when the server chooses a name server
+If set to 0, no statistics will be logged.
+
+
Note
+
Not yet implemented in BIND9.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Topology
+
All other things being equal, when the server chooses a name server
to query from a list of name servers, it prefers the one that is
-topologically closest to itself. The topology statement
-takes an address_match_list and interprets it
+topologically closest to itself. The topology statement
+takes an address_match_list and interprets it
in a special way. Each top-level list element is assigned a distance.
Non-negated elements get a distance based on their position in the
list, where the closer the match is to the start of the list, the
@@ -6633,124 +2194,61 @@ shorter the distance is between it and the server. A negated match
will be assigned the maximum distance from the server. If there
is no match, the address will get a distance which is further than
any non-negated list element, and closer than any negated element.
-For example,
topology {
+For example,
+
topology {
10/8;
!1.2.3/24;
{ 1.2/16; 3/8; };
-};
will prefer servers on network 10 the most, followed by hosts
+};
+
will prefer servers on network 10 the most, followed by hosts
on network 1.2.0.0 (netmask 255.255.0.0) and network 3, with the
exception of hosts on network 1.2.3 (netmask 255.255.255.0), which
-is preferred least of all.
The default topology is
topology { localhost; localnets; };
-
Note: The topology option
-is not implemented in BIND 9.
-
The response to a DNS query may consist of multiple resource
+is preferred least of all.
+
The default topology is
+
topology { localhost; localnets; };
+
+
+
Note
+
The topology option
+is not implemented in BIND 9.
+
+
+
+
+
+The sortlist Statement
+
The response to a DNS query may consist of multiple resource
records (RRs) forming a resource records set (RRset).
The name server will normally return the
RRs within the RRset in an indeterminate order
-(but see the rrset-order
-statement in Section 6.2.16.14).
+(but see the rrset-order
+statement in the section called “RRset Ordering”).
The client resolver code should rearrange the RRs as appropriate,
that is, using any addresses on the local net in preference to other addresses.
However, not all resolvers can do this or are correctly configured.
When a client is using a local server the sorting can be performed
in the server, based on the client's address. This only requires
-configuring the name servers, not all the clients.
The sortlist statement (see below) takes
-an address_match_list and interprets it even
-more specifically than the topology statement
-does (Section 6.2.16.12).
-Each top level statement in the sortlist must
-itself be an explicit address_match_list with
+configuring the name servers, not all the clients.
+
The sortlist statement (see below) takes
+an address_match_list and interprets it even
+more specifically than the topology statement
+does (the section called “Topology”).
+Each top level statement in the sortlist must
+itself be an explicit address_match_list with
one or two elements. The first element (which may be an IP address,
-an IP prefix, an ACL name or a nested address_match_list)
+an IP prefix, an ACL name or a nested address_match_list)
of each top level list is checked against the source address of
-the query until a match is found.
Once the source address of the query has been matched, if
+the query until a match is found.
+
Once the source address of the query has been matched, if
the top level statement contains only one element, the actual primitive
element that matched the source address is used to select the address
in the response to move to the beginning of the response. If the
statement is a list of two elements, then the second element is
-treated the same as the address_match_list in
-a topology statement. Each top level element
+treated the same as the address_match_list in
+a topology statement. Each top level element
is assigned a distance and the address in the response with the minimum
-distance is moved to the beginning of the response.
In the following example, any queries received from any of
+distance is moved to the beginning of the response.
+
In the following example, any queries received from any of
the addresses of the host itself will get responses preferring addresses
on any of the locally connected networks. Next most preferred are addresses
on the 192.168.1/24 network, and after that either the 192.168.2/24
@@ -6761,10 +2259,8 @@ will prefer other addresses on that network to the 192.168.2/24
and
192.168.3/24 networks. Queries received from a host on the 192.168.4/24
or the 192.168.5/24 network will only prefer other addresses on
-their directly connected networks.
sortlist {
+their directly connected networks.
+
sortlist {
{ localhost; // IF the local host
{ localnets; // THEN first fit on the
192.168.1/24; // following nets
@@ -6780,1331 +2276,446 @@ CLASS="programlisting"
{ 192.168.1/24; 192.168.2/24; }; }; };
{ { 192.168.4/24; 192.168.5/24; }; // if .4 or .5, prefer that net
};
-};
The following example will give reasonable behavior for the
+};
+
The following example will give reasonable behavior for the
local host and hosts on directly connected networks. It is similar
-to the behavior of the address sort in BIND 4.9.x. Responses sent
+to the behavior of the address sort in BIND 4.9.x. Responses sent
to queries from the local host will favor any of the directly connected
networks. Responses sent to queries from any other hosts on a directly
connected network will prefer addresses on that same network. Responses
-to other queries will not be sorted.
sortlist {
+to other queries will not be sorted.
+
When multiple records are returned in an answer it may be
+
+
+
+
+RRset Ordering
+
When multiple records are returned in an answer it may be
useful to configure the order of the records placed into the response.
-The rrset-order statement permits configuration
+The rrset-order statement permits configuration
of the ordering of the records in a multiple record response.
-See also the sortlist statement,
-Section 6.2.16.13.
-
An order_spec is defined as follows:
[ class class_name][ type type_name][ name "domain_name"]
- order ordering
-
If no class is specified, the default is ANY.
-If no type is specified, the default is ANY.
-If no name is specified, the default is "*".
The legal values for ordering are:
fixed
Records are returned in the order they
-are defined in the zone file.
[ class class_name][ type type_name][ name "domain_name"]
+ order ordering
+
+
If no class is specified, the default is ANY.
+If no type is specified, the default is ANY.
+If no name is specified, the default is "*".
+
The legal values for ordering are:
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
fixed
+
Records are returned in the order they
+are defined in the zone file.
+
+
+
random
+
Records are returned in some random order.
+
+
+
cyclic
+
Records are returned in a round-robin
+order.
+
+
+
+
For example:
+
rrset-order {
class IN type A name "host.example.com" order random;
order cyclic;
};
-
will cause any responses for type A records in class IN that
-have "host.example.com" as a suffix, to always be returned
-in random order. All other records are returned in cyclic order.
If multiple rrset-order statements appear,
-they are not combined — the last one applies.
Note: The rrset-order statement
-is not yet fully implemented in BIND 9.
+
+
will cause any responses for type A records in class IN that
+have "host.example.com" as a suffix, to always be returned
+in random order. All other records are returned in cyclic order.
+
If multiple rrset-order statements appear,
+they are not combined — the last one applies.
+
+
Note
+
The rrset-order statement
+is not yet fully implemented in BIND 9.
BIND 9 currently does not support "fixed" ordering.
-
Sets the number of seconds to cache a
lame server indication. 0 disables caching. (This is
-NOT recommended.)
-Default is 600 (10 minutes). Maximum value is
-1800 (30 minutes).
max-ncache-ttl
To reduce network traffic and increase performance
-the server stores negative answers. max-ncache-ttl is
+NOT recommended.)
+Default is 600 (10 minutes). Maximum value is
+1800 (30 minutes).
+
max-ncache-ttl
+
To reduce network traffic and increase performance
+the server stores negative answers. max-ncache-ttl is
used to set a maximum retention time for these answers in the server
in seconds. The default
-max-ncache-ttl is 10800 seconds (3 hours).
-max-ncache-ttl cannot exceed 7 days and will
-be silently truncated to 7 days if set to a greater value.
max-cache-ttl
max-cache-ttl sets
+max-ncache-ttl is 10800 seconds (3 hours).
+max-ncache-ttl cannot exceed 7 days and will
+be silently truncated to 7 days if set to a greater value.
+
max-cache-ttl
+
max-cache-ttl sets
the maximum time for which the server will cache ordinary (positive)
-answers. The default is one week (7 days).
min-roots
The minimum number of root servers that
+answers. The default is one week (7 days).
+
min-roots
+
+
The minimum number of root servers that
is required for a request for the root servers to be accepted. Default
-is 2.
Note: Not implemented in BIND9.
sig-validity-interval
Specifies the number of days into the
+is 2.
+
+
Note
+
Not implemented in BIND9.
+
+
+
sig-validity-interval
+
Specifies the number of days into the
future when DNSSEC signatures automatically generated as a result
-of dynamic updates (Section 4.2)
-will expire. The default is 30 days.
+of dynamic updates (the section called “Dynamic Update”)
+will expire. The default is 30 days.
The maximum value is 10 years (3660 days). The signature
inception time is unconditionally set to one hour before the current time
-to allow for a limited amount of clock skew.
+These options control the server's behavior on refreshing a zone
(querying for SOA changes) or retrying failed transfers.
Usually the SOA values for the zone are used, but these values
are set by the master, giving slave server administrators little
control over their contents.
-
These options allow the administrator to set a minimum and maximum
+
+
+These options allow the administrator to set a minimum and maximum
refresh and retry time either per-zone, per-view, or globally.
These options are valid for slave and stub zones,
and clamp the SOA refresh and retry times to the specified values.
-
edns-udp-size
edns-udp-size sets the advertised EDNS UDP buffer
+
+
+
edns-udp-size
+
+edns-udp-size sets the advertised EDNS UDP buffer
size. Valid values are 512 to 4096 (values outside this range will be
silently adjusted). The default value is 4096. The usual reason for
setting edns-udp-size to a non default value it to get UDP answers to
pass through broken firewalls that block fragmented packets and/or
block UDP packets that are greater than 512 bytes.
-
The server provides some helpful diagnostic information
+
+
+
+
+
+Built-in server information zones
+
The server provides some helpful diagnostic information
through a number of built-in zones under the
-pseudo-top-level-domain bind in the
-CHAOS class. These zones are part of a
-built-in view (see Section 6.2.21) of class
-CHAOS which is separate from the default view of
-class IN; therefore, any global server options
-such as allow-query do not apply the these zones.
+pseudo-top-level-domain bind in the
+CHAOS class. These zones are part of a
+built-in view (see the section called “view Statement Grammar”) of class
+CHAOS which is separate from the default view of
+class IN; therefore, any global server options
+such as allow-query do not apply the these zones.
If you feel the need to disable these zones, use the options
-below, or hide the built-in CHAOS view by
-defining an explicit view of class CHAOS
-that matches all clients.
version
The version the server should report
-via a query of the name version.bind
-with type TXT, class CHAOS.
+below, or hide the built-in CHAOS view by
+defining an explicit view of class CHAOS
+that matches all clients.
+
+
version
+
The version the server should report
+via a query of the name version.bind
+with type TXT, class CHAOS.
The default is the real version number of this server.
-Specifying version none
-disables processing of the queries.
hostname
The hostname the server should report via a query of
-the name hostname.bind
-with type TXT, class CHAOS.
+Specifying version none
+disables processing of the queries.
+
hostname
+
The hostname the server should report via a query of
+the name hostname.bind
+with type TXT, class CHAOS.
This defaults to the hostname of the machine hosting the name server as
found by gethostname(). The primary purpose of such queries is to
identify which of a group of anycast servers is actually
-answering your queries. Specifying hostname none;
-disables processing of the queries.
server-id
The ID of the server should report via a query of
-the name ID.SERVER
-with type TXT, class CHAOS.
+answering your queries. Specifying hostname none;
+disables processing of the queries.
+
server-id
+
The ID of the server should report via a query of
+the name ID.SERVER
+with type TXT, class CHAOS.
The primary purpose of such queries is to
identify which of a group of anycast servers is actually
-answering your queries. Specifying server-id none;
+answering your queries. Specifying server-id none;
disables processing of the queries.
-Specifying server-id hostname; will cause named to
+Specifying server-id hostname; will cause named to
use the hostname as found by gethostname().
-The default server-id is none.
-
The statistics file generated by BIND 9
+The default server-id is none.
+
+
+
+
+
+The Statistics File
+
The statistics file generated by BIND 9
is similar, but not identical, to that
-generated by BIND 8.
-
The statistics dump begins with the line +++ Statistics Dump
-+++ (973798949), where the number in parentheses is a standard
+generated by BIND 8.
+
+
The statistics dump begins with the line +++ Statistics Dump
++++ (973798949), where the number in parentheses is a standard
Unix-style timestamp, measured as seconds since January 1, 1970. Following
that line are a series of lines containing a counter type, the value of the
counter, optionally a zone name, and optionally a view name.
The lines without view and zone listed are global statistics for the entire server.
Lines with a zone and view name for the given view and zone (the view name is
omitted for the default view). The statistics dump ends
-with the line --- Statistics Dump --- (973798949), where the
-number is identical to the number in the beginning line.
The following statistics counters are maintained:
success
The number of
+with the line --- Statistics Dump --- (973798949), where the
+number is identical to the number in the beginning line.
+
The following statistics counters are maintained:
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
success
+
The number of
successful queries made to the server or zone. A successful query
is defined as query which returns a NOERROR response with at least
-one answer RR.
referral
The number of queries which resulted
-in referral responses.
nxrrset
The number of queries which resulted in
-NOERROR responses with no data.
nxdomain
The number
-of queries which resulted in NXDOMAIN responses.
failure
The number of queries which resulted in a
-failure response other than those above.
recursion
The number of queries which caused the server
-to perform recursion in order to find the final answer.
Each query received by the server will cause exactly one of
-success,
-referral,
-nxrrset,
-nxdomain, or
-failure
+one answer RR.
+
+
+
referral
+
The number of queries which resulted
+in referral responses.
+
+
+
nxrrset
+
The number of queries which resulted in
+NOERROR responses with no data.
+
+
+
nxdomain
+
The number
+of queries which resulted in NXDOMAIN responses.
+
+
+
failure
+
The number of queries which resulted in a
+failure response other than those above.
+
+
+
recursion
+
The number of queries which caused the server
+to perform recursion in order to find the final answer.
+
+
+
+
+Each query received by the server will cause exactly one of
+success,
+referral,
+nxrrset,
+nxdomain, or
+failure
to be incremented, and may additionally cause the
-recursion counter to be incremented.
-
The server statement defines characteristics
-to be associated with a remote name server.
The server statement can occur at the top level of the
-configuration file or inside a view statement.
-If a view statement contains
-one or more server statements, only those
+
+
+
+
+server Statement Definition and Usage
+
The server statement defines characteristics
+to be associated with a remote name server.
+
+The server statement can occur at the top level of the
+configuration file or inside a view statement.
+If a view statement contains
+one or more server statements, only those
apply to the view and any top-level ones are ignored.
-If a view contains no server statements,
-any top-level server statements are used as
+If a view contains no server statements,
+any top-level server statements are used as
defaults.
-
If you discover that a remote server is giving out bad data,
+
+
If you discover that a remote server is giving out bad data,
marking it as bogus will prevent further queries to it. The default
-value of bogus is no.
The provide-ixfr clause determines whether
+value of bogus is no.
+
The provide-ixfr clause determines whether
the local server, acting as master, will respond with an incremental
zone transfer when the given remote server, a slave, requests it.
-If set to yes, incremental transfer will be provided
-whenever possible. If set to no, all transfers
+If set to yes, incremental transfer will be provided
+whenever possible. If set to no, all transfers
to the remote server will be non-incremental. If not set, the value
-of the provide-ixfr option in the view or
-global options block is used as a default.
The request-ixfr clause determines whether
+of the provide-ixfr option in the view or
+global options block is used as a default.
+
The request-ixfr clause determines whether
the local server, acting as a slave, will request incremental zone
transfers from the given remote server, a master. If not set, the
-value of the request-ixfr option in the view or
-global options block is used as a default.
IXFR requests to servers that do not support IXFR will automatically
+value of the request-ixfr option in the view or
+global options block is used as a default.
+
IXFR requests to servers that do not support IXFR will automatically
fall back to AXFR. Therefore, there is no need to manually list
which servers support IXFR and which ones do not; the global default
-of yes should always work.
-The purpose of the provide-ixfr and
-request-ixfr clauses is
+of yes should always work.
+The purpose of the provide-ixfr and
+request-ixfr clauses is
to make it possible to disable the use of IXFR even when both master
and slave claim to support it, for example if one of the servers
-is buggy and crashes or corrupts data when IXFR is used.
The edns clause determines whether the local server
+is buggy and crashes or corrupts data when IXFR is used.
+
The edns clause determines whether the local server
will attempt to use EDNS when communicating with the remote server. The
-default is yes.
The server supports two zone transfer methods. The first, one-answer,
-uses one DNS message per resource record transferred. many-answers packs
-as many resource records as possible into a message. many-answers is
-more efficient, but is only known to be understood by BIND 9, BIND
-8.x, and patched versions of BIND 4.9.5. You can specify which method
-to use for a server with the transfer-format option.
-If transfer-format is not specified, the transfer-format specified
-by the options statement will be used.
transfers is used to limit the number of
+default is yes.
+
The server supports two zone transfer methods. The first, one-answer,
+uses one DNS message per resource record transferred. many-answers packs
+as many resource records as possible into a message. many-answers is
+more efficient, but is only known to be understood by BIND 9, BIND
+8.x, and patched versions of BIND 4.9.5. You can specify which method
+to use for a server with the transfer-format option.
+If transfer-format is not specified, the transfer-format specified
+by the options statement will be used.
+
transfers is used to limit the number of
concurrent inbound zone transfers from the specified server. If
-no transfers clause is specified, the limit is
-set according to the transfers-per-ns option.
The keys clause identifies a
-key_id defined by the key statement,
-to be used for transaction security (TSIG, Section 4.5)
+no transfers clause is specified, the limit is
+set according to the transfers-per-ns option.
+
The keys clause identifies a
+key_id defined by the key statement,
+to be used for transaction security (TSIG, the section called “TSIG”)
when talking to the remote server.
When a request is sent to the remote server, a request signature
will be generated using the key specified here and appended to the
message. A request originating from the remote server is not required
-to be signed by this key.
Although the grammar of the keys clause
+to be signed by this key.
+
Although the grammar of the keys clause
allows for multiple keys, only a single key per server is currently
-supported.
The transfer-source and
-transfer-source-v6 clauses specify the IPv4 and IPv6 source
+supported.
+
The transfer-source and
+transfer-source-v6 clauses specify the IPv4 and IPv6 source
address to be used for zone transfer with the remote server, respectively.
-For an IPv4 remote server, only transfer-source can
+For an IPv4 remote server, only transfer-source can
be specified.
Similarly, for an IPv6 remote server, only
-transfer-source-v6 can be specified.
+transfer-source-v6 can be specified.
Form more details, see the description of
-transfer-source and
-transfer-source-v6 in
-Section 6.2.16.7.
The trusted-keys statement defines DNSSEC
-security roots. DNSSEC is described in Section 4.8. A security root is defined when the public key for a non-authoritative
+
+
+
+
+trusted-keys Statement Definition
+and Usage
+
The trusted-keys statement defines DNSSEC
+security roots. DNSSEC is described in the section called “DNSSEC”. A security root is defined when the public key for a non-authoritative
zone is known, but cannot be securely obtained through DNS, either
because it is the DNS root zone or because its parent zone is unsigned.
Once a key has been configured as a trusted key, it is treated as
if it had been validated and proven secure. The resolver attempts
-DNSSEC validation on all DNS data in subdomains of a security root.
The trusted-keys statement can contain
+DNSSEC validation on all DNS data in subdomains of a security root.
+
The trusted-keys statement can contain
multiple key entries, each consisting of the key's domain name,
flags, protocol, algorithm, and the base-64 representation of the
-key data.
The view statement is a powerful new feature
-of BIND 9 that lets a name server answer a DNS query differently
+
+
+
+
+view Statement Definition and Usage
+
The view statement is a powerful new feature
+of BIND 9 that lets a name server answer a DNS query differently
depending on who is asking. It is particularly useful for implementing
-split DNS setups without having to run multiple servers.
Each view statement defines a view of the
+split DNS setups without having to run multiple servers.
+
Each view statement defines a view of the
DNS namespace that will be seen by a subset of clients. A client matches
a view if its source IP address matches the
-address_match_list of the view's
-match-clients clause and its destination IP address matches
-the address_match_list of the view's
-match-destinations clause. If not specified, both
-match-clients and match-destinations
+address_match_list of the view's
+match-clients clause and its destination IP address matches
+the address_match_list of the view's
+match-destinations clause. If not specified, both
+match-clients and match-destinations
default to matching all addresses. In addition to checking IP addresses
-match-clients and match-destinations
-can also take keys which provide an mechanism for the
+match-clients and match-destinations
+can also take keys which provide an mechanism for the
client to select the view. A view can also be specified
-as match-recursive-only, which means that only recursive
+as match-recursive-only, which means that only recursive
requests from matching clients will match that view.
-The order of the view statements is significant —
+The order of the view statements is significant —
a client request will be resolved in the context of the first
-view that it matches.
Zones defined within a view statement will
-be only be accessible to clients that match the view.
+view that it matches.
+
Zones defined within a view statement will
+be only be accessible to clients that match the view.
By defining a zone of the same name in multiple views, different
zone data can be given to different clients, for example, "internal"
-and "external" clients in a split DNS setup.
Many of the options given in the options statement
-can also be used within a view statement, and then
+and "external" clients in a split DNS setup.
+
Many of the options given in the options statement
+can also be used within a view statement, and then
apply only when resolving queries with that view. When no view-specific
-value is given, the value in the options statement
+value is given, the value in the options statement
is used as a default. Also, zone options can have default values specified
-in the view statement; these view-specific defaults
-take precedence over those in the options statement.
Views are class specific. If no class is given, class IN
+in the view statement; these view-specific defaults
+take precedence over those in the options statement.
+
Views are class specific. If no class is given, class IN
is assumed. Note that all non-IN views must contain a hint zone,
-since only the IN class has compiled-in default hints.
If there are no view statements in the config
+since only the IN class has compiled-in default hints.
+
If there are no view statements in the config
file, a default view that matches any client is automatically created
-in class IN. Any zone statements specified on
+in class IN. Any zone statements specified on
the top level of the configuration file are considered to be part of
-this default view, and the options statement will
-apply to the default view. If any explicit view
-statements are present, all zone statements must
-occur inside view statements.
Here is an example of a typical split DNS setup implemented
-using view statements.
view "internal" {
+this default view, and the options statement will
+apply to the default view. If any explicit view
+statements are present, all zone statements must
+occur inside view statements.
+
Here is an example of a typical split DNS setup implemented
+using view statements.
+
view "internal" {
// This should match our internal networks.
match-clients { 10.0.0.0/8; };
@@ -8133,519 +2744,80 @@ view "external" {
file "example-external.db";
};
};
-
The server has a master copy of the data
+}];
+
+
+
+
+zone Statement Definition and Usage
+
+
+Zone Types
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
master
+
The server has a master copy of the data
for the zone and will be able to provide authoritative answers for
-it.
slave
A slave zone is a replica of a master
-zone. The masters list specifies one or more IP addresses
+it.
+
+
+
slave
+
A slave zone is a replica of a master
+zone. The masters list specifies one or more IP addresses
of master servers that the slave contacts to update its copy of the zone.
Masters list elements can also be names of other masters lists.
By default, transfers are made from port 53 on the servers; this can
@@ -8659,1640 +2831,605 @@ recommended, since it often speeds server start-up and eliminates
a needless waste of bandwidth. Note that for large numbers (in the
tens or hundreds of thousands) of zones per server, it is best to
use a two level naming scheme for zone file names. For example,
-a slave server for the zone example.com might place
+a slave server for the zone example.com might place
the zone contents into a file called
-ex/example.com where ex/ is
+ex/example.com where ex/ is
just the first two letters of the zone name. (Most operating systems
behave very slowly if you put 100 000 files into
-a single directory.)
stub
A stub zone is similar to a slave zone,
+a single directory.)
+
+
+
stub
+
+
A stub zone is similar to a slave zone,
except that it replicates only the NS records of a master zone instead
of the entire zone. Stub zones are not a standard part of the DNS;
-they are a feature specific to the BIND implementation.
-
+they are a feature specific to the BIND implementation.
+
-
Stub zones can be used to eliminate the need for glue NS record
+
Stub zones can be used to eliminate the need for glue NS record
in a parent zone at the expense of maintaining a stub zone entry and
-a set of name server addresses in named.conf.
+a set of name server addresses in named.conf.
This usage is not recommended for new configurations, and BIND 9
supports it only in a limited way.
-In BIND 4/8, zone transfers of a parent zone
+In BIND 4/8, zone transfers of a parent zone
included the NS records from stub children of that zone. This meant
that, in some cases, users could get away with configuring child stubs
-only in the master server for the parent zone. BIND
+only in the master server for the parent zone. BIND
9 never mixes together zone data from different zones in this
-way. Therefore, if a BIND 9 master serving a parent
+way. Therefore, if a BIND 9 master serving a parent
zone has child stub zones configured, all the slave servers for the
parent zone also need to have the same child stub zones
-configured.
+configured.
-
Stub zones can also be used as a way of forcing the resolution
+
Stub zones can also be used as a way of forcing the resolution
of a given domain to use a particular set of authoritative servers.
For example, the caching name servers on a private network using
RFC1981 addressing may be configured with stub zones for
-10.in-addr.arpa
+10.in-addr.arpa
to use a set of internal name servers as the authoritative
-servers for that domain.
-
forward
A "forward zone" is a way to configure
-forwarding on a per-domain basis. A zone statement
-of type forward can contain a forward and/or forwarders statement,
+servers for that domain.
+
+
+
+
forward
+
+
A "forward zone" is a way to configure
+forwarding on a per-domain basis. A zone statement
+of type forward can contain a forward and/or forwarders statement,
which will apply to queries within the domain given by the zone
-name. If no forwarders statement is present or
-an empty list for forwarders is given, then no
+name. If no forwarders statement is present or
+an empty list for forwarders is given, then no
forwarding will be done for the domain, canceling the effects of
-any forwarders in the options statement. Thus
+any forwarders in the options statement. Thus
if you want to use this type of zone to change the behavior of the
-global forward option (that is, "forward first
+global forward option (that is, "forward first
to", then "forward only", or vice versa, but want to use the same
-servers as set globally) you need to re-specify the global forwarders.
-
hint
The initial set of root name servers is
+servers as set globally) you need to re-specify the global forwarders.
+
+
+
+
hint
+
The initial set of root name servers is
specified using a "hint zone". When the server starts up, it uses
the root hints to find a root name server and get the most recent
list of root name servers. If no hint zone is specified for class
IN, the server uses a compiled-in default set of root servers hints.
-Classes other than IN have no built-in defaults hints.
delegation-only
This is used to enforce the delegation only
+Classes other than IN have no built-in defaults hints.
+
+
+
delegation-only
+
+
This is used to enforce the delegation only
status of infrastructure zones (e.g. COM, NET, ORG). Any answer that
is received without a explicit or implicit delegation in the authority
section will be treated as NXDOMAIN. This does not apply to the zone
-apex. This SHOULD NOT be applied to leaf zones.
-
delegation-only has no effect on answers received
-from forwarders.
The zone's name may optionally be followed by a class. If
-a class is not specified, class IN (for Internet),
-is assumed. This is correct for the vast majority of cases.
The hesiod class is
+apex. This SHOULD NOT be applied to leaf zones.
+
delegation-only has no effect on answers received
+from forwarders.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Class
+
The zone's name may optionally be followed by a class. If
+a class is not specified, class IN (for Internet),
+is assumed. This is correct for the vast majority of cases.
+
The hesiod class is
named for an information service from MIT's Project Athena. It is
used to share information about various systems databases, such
as users, groups, printers and so on. The keyword
-HS is
-a synonym for hesiod.
Another MIT development is CHAOSnet, a LAN protocol created
-in the mid-1970s. Zone data for it can be specified with the CHAOS class.
Specifies which hosts are allowed to
submit Dynamic DNS updates for master zones. The default is to deny
updates from all hosts. Note that allowing updates based
on the requestor's IP address is insecure; see
-Section 7.3 for details.
-
update-policy
Specifies a "Simple Secure Update" policy. See
-Section 6.2.24.4.
allow-update-forwarding
See the description of allow-update-forwarding
-in Section 6.2.16.4.
Only meaningful if notify is
active for this zone. The set of machines that will receive a
-DNS NOTIFY message
+DNS NOTIFY message
for this zone is made up of all the listed name servers (other than
the primary master) for the zone plus any IP addresses specified
-with also-notify. A port may be specified
-with each also-notify address to send the notify
+with also-notify. A port may be specified
+with each also-notify address to send the notify
messages to a port other than the default of 53.
-also-notify is not meaningful for stub zones.
-The default is the empty list.
check-names
This option is used to restrict the character set and syntax of
+also-notify is not meaningful for stub zones.
+The default is the empty list.
+
check-names
+
+This option is used to restrict the character set and syntax of
certain domain names in master files and/or DNS responses received from the
-network. The default varies according to zone type. For master zones the default is fail. For slave
-zones the default is warn.
-
database
Specify the type of database to be used for storing the
-zone data. The string following the database keyword
+network. The default varies according to zone type. For master zones the default is fail. For slave
+zones the default is warn.
+
+
database
+
+
Specify the type of database to be used for storing the
+zone data. The string following the database keyword
is interpreted as a list of whitespace-delimited words. The first word
identifies the database type, and any subsequent words are passed
as arguments to the database to be interpreted in a way specific
-to the database type.
The default is "rbt", BIND 9's native in-memory
-red-black-tree database. This database does not take arguments.
Other values are possible if additional database drivers
+to the database type.
+
The default is "rbt", BIND 9's native in-memory
+red-black-tree database. This database does not take arguments.
+
Other values are possible if additional database drivers
have been linked into the server. Some sample drivers are included
-with the distribution but none are linked in by default.
The flag only applies to hint and stub zones. If set
-to yes then the zone will also be treated as if it
+with the distribution but none are linked in by default.
The flag only applies to hint and stub zones. If set
+to yes then the zone will also be treated as if it
is also a delegation-only type zone.
-
forward
Only meaningful if the zone has a forwarders
-list. The only value causes the lookup to fail
-after trying the forwarders and getting no answer, while first would
-allow a normal lookup to be tried.
forwarders
Used to override the list of global forwarders.
-If it is not specified in a zone of type forward,
-no forwarding is done for the zone; the global options are not used.
ixfr-base
Was used in BIND 8 to specify the name
+
+
forward
+
Only meaningful if the zone has a forwarders
+list. The only value causes the lookup to fail
+after trying the forwarders and getting no answer, while first would
+allow a normal lookup to be tried.
+
forwarders
+
Used to override the list of global forwarders.
+If it is not specified in a zone of type forward,
+no forwarding is done for the zone; the global options are not used.
+
ixfr-base
+
Was used in BIND 8 to specify the name
of the transaction log (journal) file for dynamic update and IXFR.
-BIND 9 ignores the option and constructs the name of the journal
-file by appending ".jnl" to the name of the
-zone file.
ixfr-tmp-file
Was an undocumented option in BIND 8.
-Ignored in BIND 9.
max-transfer-time-in
See the description of
-max-transfer-time-in in Section 6.2.16.7.
max-transfer-idle-in
See the description of
-max-transfer-idle-in in Section 6.2.16.7.
max-transfer-time-out
See the description of
-max-transfer-time-out in Section 6.2.16.7.
max-transfer-idle-out
See the description of
-max-transfer-idle-out in Section 6.2.16.7.
In BIND 8, this option was intended for specifying
+BIND 9 ignores the option and constructs the name of the journal
+file by appending ".jnl" to the name of the
+zone file.
+
ixfr-tmp-file
+
Was an undocumented option in BIND 8.
+Ignored in BIND 9.
In BIND 8, this option was intended for specifying
a public zone key for verification of signatures in DNSSEC signed
-zones when they are loaded from disk. BIND 9 does not verify signatures
-on load and ignores the option.
zone-statistics
If yes, the server will keep statistical
+zones when they are loaded from disk. BIND 9 does not verify signatures
+on load and ignores the option.
+
zone-statistics
+
If yes, the server will keep statistical
information for this zone, which can be dumped to the
-statistics-file defined in the server options.
BIND 9 supports two alternative methods of granting clients
the right to perform dynamic updates to a zone,
-configured by the allow-update and
-update-policy option, respectively.
The allow-update clause works the same
-way as in previous versions of BIND. It grants given clients the
-permission to update any record of any name in the zone.
The update-policy clause is new in BIND
+configured by the allow-update and
+update-policy option, respectively.
+
The allow-update clause works the same
+way as in previous versions of BIND. It grants given clients the
+permission to update any record of any name in the zone.
+
The update-policy clause is new in BIND
9 and allows more fine-grained control over what updates are allowed.
A set of rules is specified, where each rule either grants or denies
permissions for one or more names to be updated by one or more identities.
If the dynamic update request message is signed (that is, it includes
either a TSIG or SIG(0) record), the identity of the signer can
-be determined.
Rules are specified in the update-policy zone
-option, and are only meaningful for master zones. When the update-policy statement
-is present, it is a configuration error for the allow-update statement
-to be present. The update-policy statement only
-examines the signer of a message; the source address is not relevant.
This is how a rule definition looks:
( grant | deny ) identitynametypename [types]
-
Each rule grants or denies privileges. Once a message has
+be determined.
+
Rules are specified in the update-policy zone
+option, and are only meaningful for master zones. When the update-policy statement
+is present, it is a configuration error for the allow-update statement
+to be present. The update-policy statement only
+examines the signer of a message; the source address is not relevant.
+
This is how a rule definition looks:
+
+( grant | deny ) identitynametypename [types]
+
+
Each rule grants or denies privileges. Once a message has
successfully matched a rule, the operation is immediately granted
or denied and no further rules are examined. A rule is matched
when the signer matches the identity field, the name matches the
name field in accordance with the nametype field, and the type matches
-the types specified in the type field.
The identity field specifies a name or a wildcard name. Normally, this
+the types specified in the type field.
+
The identity field specifies a name or a wildcard name. Normally, this
is the name of the TSIG or SIG(0) key used to sign the update request. When a
TKEY exchange has been used to create a shared secret, the identity of the
shared secret is the same as the identity of the key used to authenticate the
-TKEY exchange. When the identity field specifies a
+TKEY exchange. When the identity field specifies a
wildcard name, it is subject to DNS wildcard expansion, so the rule will apply
-to multiple identities. The identity field must
-contain a fully qualified domain name.
The nametype field has 4 values:
-name, subdomain,
-wildcard, and self.
-
name
Exact-match semantics. This rule matches when the
+to multiple identities. The identity field must
+contain a fully qualified domain name.
+
The nametype field has 4 values:
+name, subdomain,
+wildcard, and self.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
name
+
Exact-match semantics. This rule matches when the
name being updated is identical to the contents of the
-name field.
subdomain
This rule matches when the name being updated
+name field.
+
+
+
subdomain
+
This rule matches when the name being updated
is a subdomain of, or identical to, the contents of the
-name field.
wildcard
The name field is
+name field.
+
+
+
wildcard
+
The name field is
subject to DNS wildcard expansion, and this rule matches when the name
-being updated name is a valid expansion of the wildcard.
self
This rule matches when the name being updated
-matches the contents of the identity field.
-The name field is ignored, but should be
-the same as the identity field. The
-self nametype is most useful when allowing using
+being updated name is a valid expansion of the wildcard.
+
+
+
self
+
This rule matches when the name being updated
+matches the contents of the identity field.
+The name field is ignored, but should be
+the same as the identity field. The
+self nametype is most useful when allowing using
one key per name to update, where the key has the same name as the name
-to be updated. The identity would be
-specified as * in this case.
In all cases, the name field must
-specify a fully qualified domain name.
If no types are explicitly specified, this rule matches all types except
+to be updated. The identity would be
+specified as * in this case.
+
+
+
+
In all cases, the name field must
+specify a fully qualified domain name.
+
If no types are explicitly specified, this rule matches all types except
SIG, NS, SOA, and NXT. Types may be specified by name, including
"ANY" (ANY matches all types except NXT, which can never be updated).
Note that when an attempt is made to delete all records associated with a
name, the rules are checked for each existing record type.
-
This section, largely borrowed from RFC 1034, describes the
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Zone File
+
+
+Types of Resource Records and When to Use Them
+
This section, largely borrowed from RFC 1034, describes the
concept of a Resource Record (RR) and explains when each is used.
Since the publication of RFC 1034, several new RRs have been identified
-and implemented in the DNS. These are also included.
A domain name identifies a node. Each node has a set of
+and implemented in the DNS. These are also included.
+
+
+Resource Records
+
A domain name identifies a node. Each node has a set of
resource information, which may be empty. The set of resource
information associated with a particular name is composed of
separate RRs. The order of RRs in a set is not significant and
need not be preserved by name servers, resolvers, or other
parts of the DNS. However, sorting of multiple RRs is
permitted for optimization purposes, for example, to specify
- that a particular nearby server be tried first. See Section 6.2.16.13 and Section 6.2.16.14.
The components of a Resource Record are:
owner name
the domain name where the RR is found.
type
an encoded 16 bit value that specifies
-the type of the resource record.
an encoded 16 bit value that specifies
+the type of the resource record.
+
+
+
TTL
+
the time to live of the RR. This field
is a 32 bit integer in units of seconds, and is primarily used by
resolvers when they cache RRs. The TTL describes how long a RR can
-be cached before it should be discarded.
class
an encoded 16 bit value that identifies
-a protocol family or instance of a protocol.
RDATA
the resource data. The format of the
-data is type (and sometimes class) specific.
The following are types of valid RRs:
A
a host address. In the IN class, this is a
-32-bit IP address. Described in RFC 1035.
AAAA
IPv6 address. Described in RFC 1886.
A6
IPv6 address. This can be a partial
+be cached before it should be discarded.
+
+
+
class
+
an encoded 16 bit value that identifies
+a protocol family or instance of a protocol.
+
+
+
RDATA
+
the resource data. The format of the
+data is type (and sometimes class) specific.
+
+
+
+
The following are types of valid RRs:
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
A
+
a host address. In the IN class, this is a
+32-bit IP address. Described in RFC 1035.
+
+
+
AAAA
+
IPv6 address. Described in RFC 1886.
+
+
+
A6
+
IPv6 address. This can be a partial
address (a suffix) and an indirection to the name where the rest of the
-address (the prefix) can be found. Experimental. Described in RFC 2874.
AFSDB
location of AFS database servers.
-Experimental. Described in RFC 1183.
APL
address prefix list. Experimental.
-Described in RFC 3123.
CERT
holds a digital certificate.
-Described in RFC 2538.
CNAME
identifies the canonical name of an alias.
-Described in RFC 1035.
DNAME
Replaces the domain name specified with
+address (the prefix) can be found. Experimental. Described in RFC 2874.
+
+
+
AFSDB
+
location of AFS database servers.
+Experimental. Described in RFC 1183.
+
+
+
APL
+
address prefix list. Experimental.
+Described in RFC 3123.
+
+
+
CERT
+
holds a digital certificate.
+Described in RFC 2538.
+
+
+
CNAME
+
identifies the canonical name of an alias.
+Described in RFC 1035.
+
+
+
DNAME
+
Replaces the domain name specified with
another name to be looked up, effectively aliasing an entire
subtree of the domain name space rather than a single record
as in the case of the CNAME RR.
-Described in RFC 2672.
GPOS
Specifies the global position. Superseded by LOC.
HINFO
identifies the CPU and OS used by a host.
-Described in RFC 1035.
ISDN
representation of ISDN addresses.
-Experimental. Described in RFC 1183.
KEY
stores a public key associated with a
-DNS name. Described in RFC 2535.
KX
identifies a key exchanger for this
-DNS name. Described in RFC 2230.
LOC
for storing GPS info. Described in RFC 1876.
-Experimental.
MX
identifies a mail exchange for the domain.
+Described in RFC 2672.
+
+
+
GPOS
+
Specifies the global position. Superseded by LOC.
+
+
+
HINFO
+
identifies the CPU and OS used by a host.
+Described in RFC 1035.
+
+
+
ISDN
+
representation of ISDN addresses.
+Experimental. Described in RFC 1183.
+
+
+
KEY
+
stores a public key associated with a
+DNS name. Described in RFC 2535.
+
+
+
KX
+
identifies a key exchanger for this
+DNS name. Described in RFC 2230.
+
+
+
LOC
+
for storing GPS info. Described in RFC 1876.
+Experimental.
+
+
+
MX
+
identifies a mail exchange for the domain.
a 16 bit preference value (lower is better)
followed by the host name of the mail exchange.
-Described in RFC 974, RFC 1035.
NAPTR
name authority pointer. Described in RFC 2915.
NSAP
a network service access point.
-Described in RFC 1706.
NS
the authoritative name server for the
-domain. Described in RFC 1035.
NXT
used in DNSSEC to securely indicate that
+Described in RFC 974, RFC 1035.
+
+
+
NAPTR
+
name authority pointer. Described in RFC 2915.
+
+
+
NSAP
+
a network service access point.
+Described in RFC 1706.
+
+
+
NS
+
the authoritative name server for the
+domain. Described in RFC 1035.
+
+
+
NXT
+
used in DNSSEC to securely indicate that
RRs with an owner name in a certain name interval do not exist in
a zone and indicate what RR types are present for an existing name.
-Described in RFC 2535.
PTR
a pointer to another part of the domain
-name space. Described in RFC 1035.
PX
provides mappings between RFC 822 and X.400
-addresses. Described in RFC 2163.
RP
information on persons responsible
-for the domain. Experimental. Described in RFC 1183.
RT
route-through binding for hosts that
+Described in RFC 2535.
+
+
+
PTR
+
a pointer to another part of the domain
+name space. Described in RFC 1035.
+
+
+
PX
+
provides mappings between RFC 822 and X.400
+addresses. Described in RFC 2163.
+
+
+
RP
+
information on persons responsible
+for the domain. Experimental. Described in RFC 1183.
+
+
+
RT
+
route-through binding for hosts that
do not have their own direct wide area network addresses.
-Experimental. Described in RFC 1183.
SIG
("signature") contains data authenticated
-in the secure DNS. Described in RFC 2535.
SOA
identifies the start of a zone of authority.
-Described in RFC 1035.
SRV
information about well known network
-services (replaces WKS). Described in RFC 2782.
TXT
text records. Described in RFC 1035.
WKS
information about which well known
+Experimental. Described in RFC 1183.
+
+
+
SIG
+
("signature") contains data authenticated
+in the secure DNS. Described in RFC 2535.
+
+
+
SOA
+
identifies the start of a zone of authority.
+Described in RFC 1035.
+
+
+
SRV
+
information about well known network
+services (replaces WKS). Described in RFC 2782.
+
+
+
TXT
+
text records. Described in RFC 1035.
+
+
+
WKS
+
information about which well known
network services, such as SMTP, that a domain supports. Historical.
-
X25
representation of X.25 network addresses.
-Experimental. Described in RFC 1183.
The following classes of resource records
-are currently valid in the DNS:
IN
The Internet.
CH
CHAOSnet, a LAN protocol created at MIT in the mid-1970s.
+
+
+
+
X25
+
representation of X.25 network addresses.
+Experimental. Described in RFC 1183.
+
+
+
+
The following classes of resource records
+are currently valid in the DNS:
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
IN
+
The Internet.
+
+
+
CH
+
+CHAOSnet, a LAN protocol created at MIT in the mid-1970s.
Rarely used for its historical purpose, but reused for BIND's
built-in server information zones, e.g.,
-version.bind.
-
HS
Hesiod, an information service
+version.bind.
+
+
+
+
HS
+
+Hesiod, an information service
developed by MIT's Project Athena. It is used to share information
about various systems databases, such as users, groups, printers
and so on.
-
The owner name is often implicit, rather than forming an integral
+
+
+
+
+
The owner name is often implicit, rather than forming an integral
part of the RR. For example, many name servers internally form tree
or hash structures for the name space, and chain RRs off nodes.
The remaining RR parts are the fixed header (type, class, TTL)
which is consistent for all RRs, and a variable part (RDATA) that
-fits the needs of the resource being described.
The meaning of the TTL field is a time limit on how long an
+fits the needs of the resource being described.
+
The meaning of the TTL field is a time limit on how long an
RR can be kept in a cache. This limit does not apply to authoritative
data in zones; it is also timed out, but by the refreshing policies
for the zone. The TTL is assigned by the administrator for the
@@ -10302,288 +3439,112 @@ of Internet performance suggest that these times should be on the
order of days for the typical host. If a change can be anticipated,
the TTL can be reduced prior to the change to minimize inconsistency
during the change, and then increased back to its former value following
-the change.
The data in the RDATA section of RRs is carried as a combination
+the change.
+
The data in the RDATA section of RRs is carried as a combination
of binary strings and domain names. The domain names are frequently
-used as "pointers" to other data in the DNS.
RRs are represented in binary form in the packets of the DNS
+used as "pointers" to other data in the DNS.
+
+
+
+Textual expression of RRs
+
RRs are represented in binary form in the packets of the DNS
protocol, and are usually represented in highly encoded form when
stored in a name server or resolver. In the examples provided in
RFC 1034, a style similar to that used in master files was employed
in order to show the contents of RRs. In this format, most RRs
are shown on a single line, although continuation lines are possible
-using parentheses.
The start of the line gives the owner of the RR. If a line
+using parentheses.
+
The start of the line gives the owner of the RR. If a line
begins with a blank, then the owner is assumed to be the same as
-that of the previous RR. Blank lines are often included for readability.
Following the owner, we list the TTL, type, and class of the
+that of the previous RR. Blank lines are often included for readability.
+
Following the owner, we list the TTL, type, and class of the
RR. Class and type use the mnemonics defined above, and TTL is
an integer before the type field. In order to avoid ambiguity in
parsing, type and class mnemonics are disjoint, TTLs are integers,
and the type mnemonic is always last. The IN class and TTL values
-are often omitted from examples in the interests of clarity.
The resource data or RDATA section of the RR are given using
-knowledge of the typical representation for the data.
For example, we might show the RRs carried in a message as:
ISI.EDU.
MX
10 VENERA.ISI.EDU.
MX
10 VAXA.ISI.EDU
VENERA.ISI.EDU
A
128.9.0.32
A
10.1.0.52
VAXA.ISI.EDU
A
10.2.0.27
A
128.9.0.33
The MX RRs have an RDATA section which consists of a 16 bit
+are often omitted from examples in the interests of clarity.
+
The resource data or RDATA section of the RR are given using
+knowledge of the typical representation for the data.
+
For example, we might show the RRs carried in a message as:
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
ISI.EDU.
+
MX
+
10 VENERA.ISI.EDU.
+
+
+
+
MX
+
10 VAXA.ISI.EDU
+
+
+
VENERA.ISI.EDU
+
A
+
128.9.0.32
+
+
+
+
A
+
10.1.0.52
+
+
+
VAXA.ISI.EDU
+
A
+
10.2.0.27
+
+
+
+
A
+
128.9.0.33
+
+
+
+
The MX RRs have an RDATA section which consists of a 16 bit
number followed by a domain name. The address RRs use a standard
-IP address format to contain a 32 bit internet address.
This example shows six RRs, with two RRs at each of three
-domain names.
Similarly we might see:
XX.LCS.MIT.EDU. IN
A
10.0.0.44
CH
A
MIT.EDU. 2420
This example shows two addresses for XX.LCS.MIT.EDU,
-each of a different class.
As described above, domain servers store information as a
+IP address format to contain a 32 bit internet address.
+
This example shows six RRs, with two RRs at each of three
+domain names.
+
Similarly we might see:
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
XX.LCS.MIT.EDU. IN
+
A
+
10.0.0.44
+
+
+
CH
+
A
+
MIT.EDU. 2420
+
+
+
+
This example shows two addresses for XX.LCS.MIT.EDU,
+each of a different class.
+
+
+
+
+Discussion of MX Records
+
As described above, domain servers store information as a
series of resource records, each of which contains a particular
piece of information about a given domain name (which is usually,
but not always, a host). The simplest way to think of a RR is as
a typed pair of data, a domain name matched with a relevant datum,
and stored with some additional type information to help systems
-determine when the RR is relevant.
MX records are used to control delivery of email. The data
+determine when the RR is relevant.
+
MX records are used to control delivery of email. The data
specified in the record is a priority and a domain name. The priority
controls the order in which email delivery is attempted, with the
lowest number first. If two priorities are the same, a server is
@@ -10591,320 +3552,110 @@ chosen randomly. If no servers at a given priority are responding,
the mail transport agent will fall back to the next largest priority.
Priority numbers do not have any absolute meaning — they are relevant
only respective to other MX records for that domain name. The domain
-name given is the machine to which the mail will be delivered. It must have
-an associated A record — CNAME is not sufficient.
For a given domain, if there is both a CNAME record and an
+name given is the machine to which the mail will be delivered. It must have
+an associated A record — CNAME is not sufficient.
+
For a given domain, if there is both a CNAME record and an
MX record, the MX record is in error, and will be ignored. Instead,
the mail will be delivered to the server specified in the MX record
-pointed to by the CNAME.
example.com.
IN
MX
10
mail.example.com.
IN
MX
10
mail2.example.com.
IN
MX
20
mail.backup.org.
mail.example.com.
IN
A
10.0.0.1
mail2.example.com.
IN
A
10.0.0.2
For example:
Mail delivery will be attempted to mail.example.com and
-mail2.example.com (in
-any order), and if neither of those succeed, delivery to mail.backup.org will
-be attempted.
The time to live of the RR field is a 32 bit integer represented
+pointed to by the CNAME.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
example.com.
+
IN
+
MX
+
10
+
mail.example.com.
+
+
+
+
IN
+
MX
+
10
+
mail2.example.com.
+
+
+
+
IN
+
MX
+
20
+
mail.backup.org.
+
+
+
mail.example.com.
+
IN
+
A
+
10.0.0.1
+
+
+
+
mail2.example.com.
+
IN
+
A
+
10.0.0.2
+
+
+
+
+
For example:
+
Mail delivery will be attempted to mail.example.com and
+mail2.example.com (in
+any order), and if neither of those succeed, delivery to mail.backup.org will
+be attempted.
+
+
+
+Setting TTLs
+
The time to live of the RR field is a 32 bit integer represented
in units of seconds, and is primarily used by resolvers when they
cache RRs. The TTL describes how long a RR can be cached before it
should be discarded. The following three types of TTL are currently
-used in a zone file.
SOA
The last field in the SOA is the negative
+used in a zone file.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
SOA
+
+
The last field in the SOA is the negative
caching TTL. This controls how long other servers will cache no-such-domain
-(NXDOMAIN) responses from you.
The maximum time for
-negative caching is 3 hours (3h).
$TTL
The $TTL directive at the top of the
+(NXDOMAIN) responses from you.
+
The maximum time for
+negative caching is 3 hours (3h).
+
+
+
+
$TTL
+
The $TTL directive at the top of the
zone file (before the SOA) gives a default TTL for every RR without
-a specific TTL set.
RR TTLs
Each RR can have a TTL as the second
+a specific TTL set.
+
+
+
RR TTLs
+
Each RR can have a TTL as the second
field in the RR, which will control how long other servers can cache
-the it.
All of these TTLs default to units of seconds, though units
-can be explicitly specified, for example, 1h30m.
Reverse name resolution (that is, translation from IP address
-to name) is achieved by means of the in-addr.arpa domain
+the it.
+
+
+
+
All of these TTLs default to units of seconds, though units
+can be explicitly specified, for example, 1h30m.
+
+
+
+Inverse Mapping in IPv4
+
Reverse name resolution (that is, translation from IP address
+to name) is achieved by means of the in-addr.arpa domain
and PTR records. Entries in the in-addr.arpa domain are made in
least-to-most significant order, read left to right. This is the
opposite order to the way IP addresses are usually written. Thus,
@@ -10913,647 +3664,201 @@ in-addr.arpa name of
3.2.1.10.in-addr.arpa. This name should have a PTR resource record
whose data field is the name of the machine or, optionally, multiple
PTR records if the machine has more than one name. For example,
-in the [example.com] domain:
$ORIGIN
2.1.10.in-addr.arpa
3
IN PTR foo.example.com.
Note: The $ORIGIN lines in the examples
+in the [example.com] domain:
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
$ORIGIN
+
2.1.10.in-addr.arpa
+
+
+
3
+
IN PTR foo.example.com.
+
+
+
+
+
Note
+
The $ORIGIN lines in the examples
are for providing context to the examples only-they do not necessarily
appear in the actual usage. They are only used here to indicate
-that the example is relative to the listed origin.
The Master File Format was initially defined in RFC 1035 and
+that the example is relative to the listed origin.
+
+
+
+
+Other Zone File Directives
+
The Master File Format was initially defined in RFC 1035 and
has subsequently been extended. While the Master File Format itself
is class independent all records in a Master File must be of the same
-class.
Master File Directives include $ORIGIN, $INCLUDE,
-and $TTL.
Master File Directives include $ORIGIN, $INCLUDE,
+and $TTL.
+
+
+The $ORIGIN Directive
+
Syntax: $ORIGIN
+domain-name [comment]
+
$ORIGIN sets the domain name that will
be appended to any unqualified records. When a zone is first read
-in there is an implicit $ORIGIN <zone-name>. The
-current $ORIGIN is appended to the domain specified
-in the $ORIGIN argument if it is not absolute.
Read and process the file filename as
-if it were included into the file at this point. If origin is
-specified the file is processed with $ORIGIN set
-to that value, otherwise the current $ORIGIN is
-used.
The origin and the current domain name
-revert to the values they had prior to the $INCLUDE once
-the file has been read.
Note:
+in there is an implicit $ORIGIN <zone-name>. The
+current $ORIGIN is appended to the domain specified
+in the $ORIGIN argument if it is not absolute.
+
$ORIGIN example.com.
+WWW CNAME MAIN-SERVER
+
is equivalent to
+
WWW.EXAMPLE.COM. CNAME MAIN-SERVER.EXAMPLE.COM.
+
+
+
+The $INCLUDE Directive
+
Syntax: $INCLUDE
+filename [
+origin] [comment]
+
Read and process the file filename as
+if it were included into the file at this point. If origin is
+specified the file is processed with $ORIGIN set
+to that value, otherwise the current $ORIGIN is
+used.
+
The origin and the current domain name
+revert to the values they had prior to the $INCLUDE once
+the file has been read.
+
+
Note
+
RFC 1035 specifies that the current origin should be restored after
-an $INCLUDE, but it is silent on whether the current
+an $INCLUDE, but it is silent on whether the current
domain name should also be restored. BIND 9 restores both of them.
This could be construed as a deviation from RFC 1035, a feature, or both.
-
$GENERATE is used to create a series of
+resource records that only differ from each other by an iterator. $GENERATE can
be used to easily generate the sets of records required to support
sub /24 reverse delegations described in RFC 2317: Classless IN-ADDR.ARPA
-delegation.
This can be one of two forms: start-stop
or start-stop/step. If the first form is used then step is set to
- 1. All of start, stop and step must be positive.
lhs
lhs describes the
-owner name of the resource records to be created. Any single $ symbols
-within the lhs side are replaced by the iterator
+ 1. All of start, stop and step must be positive.
+
+
+
lhs
+
+
lhs describes the
+owner name of the resource records to be created. Any single $ symbols
+within the lhs side are replaced by the iterator
value.
-To get a $ in the output you need to escape the $
-using a backslash \,
-e.g. \$. The $ may optionally be followed
+To get a $ in the output you need to escape the $
+using a backslash \,
+e.g. \$. The $ may optionally be followed
by modifiers which change the offset from the iterator, field width and base.
-Modifiers are introduced by a { immediately following the
-$ as ${offset[,width[,base]]}.
-e.g. ${-20,3,d} which subtracts 20 from the current value,
+Modifiers are introduced by a { immediately following the
+$ as ${offset[,width[,base]]}.
+e.g. ${-20,3,d} which subtracts 20 from the current value,
prints the result as a decimal in a zero padded field of with 3. Available
-output forms are decimal (d), octal (o)
-and hexadecimal (x or X for uppercase).
-The default modifier is ${0,0,d}.
-If the lhs is not
-absolute, the current $ORIGIN is appended to
-the name.
-
For compatibility with earlier versions $$ is still
-recognized a indicating a literal $ in the output.
ttl
ttl specifies the
+output forms are decimal (d), octal (o)
+and hexadecimal (x or X for uppercase).
+The default modifier is ${0,0,d}.
+If the lhs is not
+absolute, the current $ORIGIN is appended to
+the name.
+
For compatibility with earlier versions $$ is still
+recognized a indicating a literal $ in the output.
+
+
+
+
ttl
+
+
ttl specifies the
ttl of the generated records. If not specified this will be
- inherited using the normal ttl inheritance rules.
-
class and ttl can be
- entered in either order.
class
class specifies the
+ inherited using the normal ttl inheritance rules.
+
class and ttl can be
+ entered in either order.
+
+
+
+
class
+
+
class specifies the
class of the generated records. This must match the zone class if
- it is specified.
-
class and ttl can be
- entered in either order.
type
At present the only supported types are
-PTR, CNAME, DNAME, A, AAAA and NS.
rhs
rhs is a domain name. It is processed
-similarly to lhs.
The $GENERATE directive is a BIND extension
-and not part of the standard zone file format.
BIND 8 does not support the optional TTL and CLASS fields.
Access Control Lists (ACLs), are address match lists that
-you can set up and nickname for future use in allow-notify,
-allow-query, allow-recursion,
-blackhole, allow-transfer,
-etc.
Using ACLs allows you to have finer control over who can access
+
+
+
+
Access Control Lists (ACLs), are address match lists that
+you can set up and nickname for future use in allow-notify,
+allow-query, allow-recursion,
+blackhole, allow-transfer,
+etc.
+
Using ACLs allows you to have finer control over who can access
your name server, without cluttering up your config files with huge
-lists of IP addresses.
It is a good idea to use ACLs, and to
+lists of IP addresses.
+
It is a good idea to use ACLs, and to
control access to your server. Limiting access to your server by
outside parties can help prevent spoofing and DoS attacks against
-your server.
Here is an example of how to properly apply ACLs:
// Set up an ACL named "bogusnets" that will block RFC1918 space,
+your server.
+
Here is an example of how to properly apply ACLs:
+
+// Set up an ACL named "bogusnets" that will block RFC1918 space,
// which is commonly used in spoofing attacks.
acl bogusnets { 0.0.0.0/8; 1.0.0.0/8; 2.0.0.0/8; 192.0.2.0/24; 224.0.0.0/3; 10.0.0.0/8; 172.16.0.0/12; 192.168.0.0/16; };
// Set up an ACL called our-nets. Replace this with the real IP numbers.
@@ -173,328 +91,110 @@ zone "example.com" {
file "m/example.com";
allow-query { any; };
};
-
This allows recursive queries of the server from the outside
-unless recursion has been previously disabled.
On UNIX servers, it is possible to run BIND in a chrooted environment
-(chroot()) by specifying the "-t"
-option. This can help improve system security by placing BIND in
-a "sandbox", which will limit the damage done if a server is compromised.
Another useful feature in the UNIX version of BIND is the
-ability to run the daemon as an unprivileged user ( -uuser ).
-We suggest running as an unprivileged user when using the chroot feature.
Here is an example command line to load BIND in a chroot() sandbox,
-/var/named, and to run namedsetuid to
-user 202:
On UNIX servers, it is possible to run BIND in a chrooted environment
+(chroot()) by specifying the "-t"
+option. This can help improve system security by placing BIND in
+a "sandbox", which will limit the damage done if a server is compromised.
+
Another useful feature in the UNIX version of BIND is the
+ability to run the daemon as an unprivileged user ( -uuser ).
+We suggest running as an unprivileged user when using the chroot feature.
+
Here is an example command line to load BIND in a chroot() sandbox,
+/var/named, and to run namedsetuid to
+user 202:
+
/usr/local/bin/named -u 202 -t /var/named
+
+
+The chroot Environment
+
In order for a chroot() environment to
work properly in a particular directory
-(for example, /var/named),
+(for example, /var/named),
you will need to set up an environment that includes everything
-BIND needs to run.
-From BIND's point of view, /var/named is
+BIND needs to run.
+From BIND's point of view, /var/named is
the root of the filesystem. You will need to adjust the values of options like
-like directory and pid-file to account
+like directory and pid-file to account
for this.
-
Unlike with earlier versions of BIND, you will typically
-not need to compile named
+
+
+Unlike with earlier versions of BIND, you will typically
+not need to compile named
statically nor install shared libraries under the new root.
However, depending on your operating system, you may need
to set up things like
-/dev/zero,
-/dev/random,
-/dev/log, and/or
-/etc/localtime.
-
Prior to running the named daemon, use
-the touch utility (to change file access and
-modification times) or the chown utility (to
+/dev/zero,
+/dev/random,
+/dev/log, and/or
+/etc/localtime.
+
+
+
+
+Using the setuid Function
+
Prior to running the named daemon, use
+the touch utility (to change file access and
+modification times) or the chown utility (to
set the user id and/or group id) on files
-to which you want BIND
-to write. Note that if the named daemon is running as an
+to which you want BIND
+to write. Note that if the named daemon is running as an
unprivileged user, it will not be able to bind to new restricted ports if the
-server is reloaded.
Access to the dynamic
update facility should be strictly limited. In earlier versions of
-BIND the only way to do this was based on the IP
+BIND the only way to do this was based on the IP
address of the host requesting the update, by listing an IP address or
-network prefix in the allow-update zone option.
+network prefix in the allow-update zone option.
This method is insecure since the source address of the update UDP packet
is easily forged. Also note that if the IP addresses allowed by the
-allow-update option include the address of a slave
+allow-update option include the address of a slave
server which performs forwarding of dynamic updates, the master can be
trivially attacked by sending the update to the slave, which will
forward it to the master with its own source IP address causing the
-master to approve it without question.
For these reasons, we strongly recommend that updates be
+master to approve it without question.
+
For these reasons, we strongly recommend that updates be
cryptographically authenticated by means of transaction signatures
-(TSIG). That is, the allow-update option should
+(TSIG). That is, the allow-update option should
list only TSIG key names, not IP addresses or network
-prefixes. Alternatively, the new update-policy
-option can be used.
Some sites choose to keep all dynamically updated DNS data
+prefixes. Alternatively, the new update-policy
+option can be used.
+
Some sites choose to keep all dynamically updated DNS data
in a subdomain and delegate that subdomain to a separate zone. This
way, the top-level zone containing critical data such as the IP addresses
of public web and mail servers need not allow dynamic update at
-all.
+It's not working; how can I figure out what's wrong?
+
The best solution to solving installation and
configuration issues is to take preventative measures by setting
up logging files beforehand. The log files provide a
source of hints and information that can be used to figure out
- what went wrong and how to fix the problem.
Zone serial numbers are just numbers-they aren't date
+ what went wrong and how to fix the problem.
+
+
+
+
+Incrementing and Changing the Serial Number
+
Zone serial numbers are just numbers-they aren't date
related. A lot of people set them to a number that represents a
date, usually of the form YYYYMMDDRR. A number of people have been
testing these numbers for Y2K compliance and have set the number
@@ -138,135 +76,49 @@ NAME="AEN4760"
numbers are used to indicate that a zone has been updated. If the
serial number on the slave server is lower than the serial number
on the master, the slave server will attempt to update its copy of
- the zone.
Setting the serial number to a lower number on the master
+ the zone.
+
Setting the serial number to a lower number on the master
server than the slave server means that the slave will not perform
- updates to its copy of the zone.
The solution to this is to add 2147483647 (2^31-1) to the
+ updates to its copy of the zone.
+
The solution to this is to add 2147483647 (2^31-1) to the
number, reload the zone and make sure all slaves have updated to
the new zone serial number, then reset the number to what you want
- it to be, and reload the zone again.
The Internet Software Consortium (ISC) offers a wide range
- of support and service agreements for BIND and DHCP servers. Four
+ it to be, and reload the zone again.
+
+
+
+Where Can I Get Help?
+
The Internet Software Consortium (ISC) offers a wide range
+ of support and service agreements for BIND and DHCP servers. Four
levels of premium support are available and each level includes
- support for all ISC programs, significant discounts on products
+ support for all ISC programs, significant discounts on products
and training, and a recognized priority on bug fixes and
- non-funded feature requests. In addition, ISC offers a standard
+ non-funded feature requests. In addition, ISC offers a standard
support agreement package which includes services ranging from bug
fix announcements to remote support. It also includes training in
- BIND and DHCP.
Although the "official" beginning of the Domain Name
System occurred in 1984 with the publication of RFC 920, the
core of the new system was described in 1983 in RFCs 882 and
883. From 1984 to 1987, the ARPAnet (the precursor to today's
@@ -126,1462 +72,317 @@ CLASS="acronym"
incorporate improvements based on the working model. RFC 1034,
"Domain Names-Concepts and Facilities", and RFC 1035, "Domain
Names-Implementation and Specification" were published and
- became the standards upon which all DNS implementations are
+ became the standards upon which all DNS implementations are
built.
-
The first working domain name server, called "Jeeves", was
+
+
The first working domain name server, called "Jeeves", was
written in 1983-84 by Paul Mockapetris for operation on DEC Tops-20
machines located at the University of Southern California's Information
Sciences Institute (USC-ISI) and SRI International's Network Information
-Center (SRI-NIC). A DNS server for Unix machines, the Berkeley Internet
-Name Domain (BIND) package, was written soon after by a group of
+Center (SRI-NIC). A DNS server for Unix machines, the Berkeley Internet
+Name Domain (BIND) package, was written soon after by a group of
graduate students at the University of California at Berkeley under
a grant from the US Defense Advanced Research Projects Administration
-(DARPA). Versions of BIND through 4.8.3 were maintained by the Computer
+(DARPA). Versions of BIND through 4.8.3 were maintained by the Computer
Systems Research Group (CSRG) at UC Berkeley. Douglas Terry, Mark
-Painter, David Riggle and Songnian Zhou made up the initial BIND
+Painter, David Riggle and Songnian Zhou made up the initial BIND
project team. After that, additional work on the software package
was done by Ralph Campbell. Kevin Dunlap, a Digital Equipment Corporation
-employee on loan to the CSRG, worked on BIND for 2 years, from 1985
-to 1987. Many other people also contributed to BIND development
+employee on loan to the CSRG, worked on BIND for 2 years, from 1985
+to 1987. Many other people also contributed to BIND development
during that time: Doug Kingston, Craig Partridge, Smoot Carl-Mitchell,
-Mike Muuss, Jim Bloom and Mike Schwartz. BIND maintenance was subsequently
-handled by Mike Karels and O. Kure.
BIND versions 4.9 and 4.9.1 were released by Digital Equipment
+Mike Muuss, Jim Bloom and Mike Schwartz. BIND maintenance was subsequently
+handled by Mike Karels and O. Kure.
+
BIND versions 4.9 and 4.9.1 were released by Digital Equipment
Corporation (now Compaq Computer Corporation). Paul Vixie, then
-a DEC employee, became BIND's primary caretaker. Paul was assisted
+a DEC employee, became BIND's primary caretaker. Paul was assisted
by Phil Almquist, Robert Elz, Alan Barrett, Paul Albitz, Bryan Beecher, Andrew
Partan, Andy Cherenson, Tom Limoncelli, Berthold Paffrath, Fuat
Baran, Anant Kumar, Art Harkin, Win Treese, Don Lewis, Christophe
-Wolfhugel, and others.
BIND Version 4.9.2 was sponsored by Vixie Enterprises. Paul
-Vixie became BIND's principal architect/programmer.
BIND versions from 4.9.3 onward have been developed and maintained
+Wolfhugel, and others.
+
BIND Version 4.9.2 was sponsored by Vixie Enterprises. Paul
+Vixie became BIND's principal architect/programmer.
+
BIND versions from 4.9.3 onward have been developed and maintained
by the Internet Software Consortium with support being provided
by ISC's sponsors. As co-architects/programmers, Bob Halley and
-Paul Vixie released the first production-ready version of BIND version
-8 in May 1997.
BIND development work is made possible today by the sponsorship
+Paul Vixie released the first production-ready version of BIND version
+8 in May 1997.
+
BIND development work is made possible today by the sponsorship
of several corporations, and by the tireless work efforts of numerous
-individuals.
IPv6 addresses are 128-bit identifiers for interfaces and
-sets of interfaces which were introduced in the DNS to facilitate
-scalable Internet routing. There are three types of addresses: Unicast,
-an identifier for a single interface; Anycast,
-an identifier for a set of interfaces; and Multicast,
+individuals.
+
+
+
+
+General DNS Reference Information
+
+
+IPv6 addresses (AAAA)
+
IPv6 addresses are 128-bit identifiers for interfaces and
+sets of interfaces which were introduced in the DNS to facilitate
+scalable Internet routing. There are three types of addresses: Unicast,
+an identifier for a single interface; Anycast,
+an identifier for a set of interfaces; and Multicast,
an identifier for a set of interfaces. Here we describe the global
-Unicast address scheme. For more information, see RFC 2374.
The aggregatable global Unicast address format is as follows:
3
13
8
24
16
64 bits
FP
TLA ID
RES
NLA ID
SLA ID
Interface ID
<------ Public Topology
------->
<-Site Topology->
<------ Interface Identifier ------>
Where
-
FP
=
Format Prefix (001)
TLA ID
=
Top-Level Aggregation Identifier
RES
=
Reserved for future use
NLA ID
=
Next-Level Aggregation Identifier
SLA ID
=
Site-Level Aggregation Identifier
INTERFACE ID
=
Interface Identifier
The Public Topology is provided by the
-upstream provider or ISP, and (roughly) corresponds to the IPv4 network section
-of the address range. The Site Topology is
+Unicast address scheme. For more information, see RFC 2374.
+
The aggregatable global Unicast address format is as follows:
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
3
+
13
+
8
+
24
+
16
+
64 bits
+
+
+
FP
+
TLA ID
+
RES
+
NLA ID
+
SLA ID
+
Interface ID
+
+
+
<------ Public Topology
+------>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
<-Site Topology->
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
<------ Interface Identifier ------>
+
+
+
+
Where
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
FP
+
=
+
Format Prefix (001)
+
+
+
TLA ID
+
=
+
Top-Level Aggregation Identifier
+
+
+
RES
+
=
+
Reserved for future use
+
+
+
NLA ID
+
=
+
Next-Level Aggregation Identifier
+
+
+
SLA ID
+
=
+
Site-Level Aggregation Identifier
+
+
+
INTERFACE ID
+
=
+
Interface Identifier
+
+
+
+
The Public Topology is provided by the
+upstream provider or ISP, and (roughly) corresponds to the IPv4 network section
+of the address range. The Site Topology is
where you can subnet this space, much the same as subnetting an
-IPv4 /16 network into /24 subnets. The Interface Identifier is
+IPv4 /16 network into /24 subnets. The Interface Identifier is
the address of an individual interface on a given network. (With
-IPv6, addresses belong to interfaces rather than machines.)
The subnetting capability of IPv6 is much more flexible than
+IPv6, addresses belong to interfaces rather than machines.)
+
The subnetting capability of IPv6 is much more flexible than
that of IPv4: subnetting can now be carried out on bit boundaries,
-in much the same way as Classless InterDomain Routing (CIDR).
The Interface Identifier must be unique on that network. On
+in much the same way as Classless InterDomain Routing (CIDR).
+
The Interface Identifier must be unique on that network. On
ethernet networks, one way to ensure this is to set the address
to the first three bytes of the hardware address, "FFFE", then the
last three bytes of the hardware address. The lowest significant
bit of the first byte should then be complemented. Addresses are
written as 32-bit blocks separated with a colon, and leading zeros
-of a block may be omitted, for example:
2001:db8:201:9:a00:20ff:fe81:2b32
IPv6 address specifications are likely to contain long strings
+of a block may be omitted, for example:
+
2001:db8:201:9:a00:20ff:fe81:2b32
+
IPv6 address specifications are likely to contain long strings
of zeros, so the architects have included a shorthand for specifying
them. The double colon (`::') indicates the longest possible string
-of zeros that can fit, and can be used only once in an address.
Specification documents for the Internet protocol suite, including
-the DNS, are published as part of the Request for Comments (RFCs)
+of zeros that can fit, and can be used only once in an address.
+
+
+
+
+Bibliography (and Suggested Reading)
+
+
+Request for Comments (RFCs)
+
Specification documents for the Internet protocol suite, including
+the DNS, are published as part of the Request for Comments (RFCs)
series of technical notes. The standards themselves are defined
by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) and the Internet Engineering
Steering Group (IESG). RFCs can be obtained online via FTP at
-ftp://www.isi.edu/in-notes/RFCxxx.txt (where xxx is
+ftp://www.isi.edu/in-notes/RFCxxx.txt (where xxx is
the number of the RFC). RFCs are also available via the Web at
-http://www.ietf.org/rfc/.
-
[RFC974] C.Partridge. Mail Routing and the Domain System. January 1986.
+
[RFC1034] P.V.Mockapetris. Domain Names — Concepts and Facilities. November 1987.
+
[RFC1035] P. V.Mockapetris. Domain Names — Implementation and
+Specification. November 1987.
+
+
+
+Proposed Standards
+
[RFC2181] R., R. BushElz. Clarifications to the DNS Specification. July 1997.
+
[RFC2308] M.Andrews. Negative Caching of DNS Queries. March 1998.
+
[RFC1995] M.Ohta. Incremental Zone Transfer in DNS. August 1996.
+
[RFC1996] P.Vixie. A Mechanism for Prompt Notification of Zone Changes. August 1996.
+
[RFC2136] P.Vixie, S.Thomson, Y.Rekhter, and J.Bound. Dynamic Updates in the Domain Name System. April 1997.
+
[RFC2845] P.Vixie, O.Gudmundsson, D.Eastlake, 3rd, and B.Wellington. Secret Key Transaction Authentication for DNS (TSIG). May 2000.
+
+
+
Proposed Standards Still Under Development
+
+
Note
+
Note: the following list of
+RFCs are undergoing major revision by the IETF.
+
+
[RFC1886] S.Thomson and C.Huitema. DNS Extensions to support IP version 6. December 1995.
+
[RFC2065] D.Eastlake, 3rd and C.Kaufman. Domain Name System Security Extensions. January 1997.
+
[RFC2137] D.Eastlake, 3rd. Secure Domain Name System Dynamic Update. April 1997.
+
+
+
Other Important RFCs About DNS Implementation
+
[RFC1535] E.Gavron. A Security Problem and Proposed Correction With Widely Deployed DNS Software.. October 1993.
+
[RFC1536] A.Kumar, J.Postel, C.Neuman, P.Danzig, and S.Miller. Common DNS Implementation Errors and Suggested Fixes. October 1993.
+
[RFC1982] R.Elz and R.Bush. Serial Number Arithmetic. August 1996.
+
+
+
Resource Record Types
+
[RFC1183] C.F.Everhart, L. A.Mamakos, R.Ullmann, and P.Mockapetris. New DNS RR Definitions. October 1990.
+
[RFC1706] B.Manning and R.Colella. DNS NSAP Resource Records. October 1994.
+
[RFC2168] R.Daniel and M.Mealling. Resolution of Uniform Resource Identifiers using
+the Domain Name System. June 1997.
+
[RFC1876] C.Davis, P.Vixie, T., and I.Dickinson. A Means for Expressing Location Information in the Domain
+Name System. January 1996.
+
[RFC2052] A.Gulbrandsen and P.Vixie. A DNS RR for Specifying the Location of
+Services.. October 1996.
+
[RFC2163] A.Allocchio. Using the Internet DNS to Distribute MIXER
+Conformant Global Address Mapping. January 1998.
+
[RFC2230] R.Atkinson. Key Exchange Delegation Record for the DNS. October 1997.
+
+
+
+DNS and the Internet
+
[RFC1101] P. V.Mockapetris. DNS Encoding of Network Names and Other Types. April 1989.
+
[RFC1123] Braden. Requirements for Internet Hosts - Application and Support. October 1989.
+
[RFC1591] J.Postel. Domain Name System Structure and Delegation. March 1994.
+
[RFC2317] H.Eidnes, G.de Groot, and P.Vixie. Classless IN-ADDR.ARPA Delegation. March 1998.
+
+
+
+DNS Operations
+
[RFC1537] P.Beertema. Common DNS Data File Configuration Errors. October 1993.
+
[RFC1912] D.Barr. Common DNS Operational and Configuration Errors. February 1996.
+
[RFC2010] B.Manning and P.Vixie. Operational Criteria for Root Name Servers.. October 1996.
+
[RFC2219] M.Hamilton and R.Wright. Use of DNS Aliases for Network Services.. October 1997.
+
+
+
Other DNS-related RFCs
+
+
Note
+
Note: the following list of RFCs, although
+DNS-related, are not concerned with implementing software.
+
+
[RFC1464] R.Rosenbaum. Using the Domain Name System To Store Arbitrary String Attributes. May 1993.
+
[RFC1713] A.Romao. Tools for DNS Debugging. November 1994.
+
[RFC1794] T.Brisco. DNS Support for Load Balancing. April 1995.
+
[RFC2240] O.Vaughan. A Legal Basis for Domain Name Allocation. November 1997.
+
[RFC2345] J.Klensin, T.Wolf, and G.Oglesby. Domain Names and Company Name Retrieval. May 1998.
+
[RFC2352] O.Vaughan. A Convention For Using Legal Names as Domain Names. May 1998.
+
+
+
Obsolete and Unimplemented Experimental RRs
+
[RFC1712] C.Farrell, M.Schulze, S.Pleitner, and D.Baldoni. DNS Encoding of Geographical
+Location. November 1994.
+
+
+
+
+
+Internet Drafts
+
Internet Drafts (IDs) are rough-draft working documents of
the Internet Engineering Task Force. They are, in essence, RFCs
in the preliminary stages of development. Implementors are cautioned not
to regard IDs as archival, and they should not be quoted or cited
in any formal documents unless accompanied by the disclaimer that
they are "works in progress." IDs have a lifespan of six months
after which they are deleted unless updated by their authors.
-